Passport XG Service Manual

Service Manual
Datascope
Passport®
5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG
0070-01-0420.indd 1 4/11/11 4:45 PM

Service Manual
Datascope
Passport®
5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG
0070-02-0420.indd 1 4/11/11 4:45 PM

Table of Contents
Foreword ......................................................................................................................................v
Warnings, Precautions and Notes ....................................................................................................v
Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG) .................................................................................... 1 - 1
Introduction (5-Lead, 5L, LT) .......................................................................................................... 1 - 1
Controls, Indicators and Connectors (5-Lead, 5L, LT) ........................................................................ 1 - 3
Front Panel........................................................................................................................... 1 - 4
Left Side Panel...................................................................................................................... 1 - 9
Right Side Panel ................................................................................................................... 1 - 11
Remote Color Display............................................................................................................ 1 - 12
Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT) ............................................................................................................ 1 - 13
Setting-up / Turning Power On ............................................................................................... 1 - 14
Factory - Default Control Settings ............................................................................................ 1 - 15
Display................................................................................................................................ 1 - 16
Use of Menus ....................................................................................................................... 1 - 23
Initiation of NIBP Measurements ............................................................................................. 1 - 25
ECG Acquisition ................................................................................................................... 1 - 29
Invasive Pressure Acquisition .................................................................................................. 1 - 34
Sequence for Establishing SpO2 ............................................................................................. 1 - 34
Sequence for Establishing SpO2 with Nellcor® Pulse Oximetry ................................................. 1 - 39
Respiration Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 1 - 42
Gas Monitoring .................................................................................................................... 1 - 43
Alarms ................................................................................................................................ 1 - 49
How to Set the Clock............................................................................................................. 1 - 53
User Configuration Mode ...................................................................................................... 1 - 53
Recorder (optional) ............................................................................................................... 1 - 54
Status Messages ................................................................................................................... 1 - 57
Monitor Problem Solving........................................................................................................ 1 - 62
Connection to External Devices............................................................................................... 1 - 64
Menus ................................................................................................................................. 1 - 64
Introduction (XG) ......................................................................................................................... 1 - 77
Controls, Indicators and Connectors (XG) ....................................................................................... 1 - 77
Front Panel........................................................................................................................... 1 - 79
Left Side Panel...................................................................................................................... 1 - 87
Right Side Panel ................................................................................................................... 1 - 90
Rear Panel ........................................................................................................................... 1 - 91
Remote Color Display (optional) ............................................................................................. 1 - 92
Gas Module (Optional)- Front Panel ........................................................................................ 1 - 93
Gas Module (Optional)- Rear Panel......................................................................................... 1 - 95
Operation (XG) ........................................................................................................................... 1 - 97
Setting-up / Turning Power On ............................................................................................... 1 - 99
Factory - Default Control Settings ............................................................................................ 1 - 99
Display................................................................................................................................ 1 - 102
Use of Menus ....................................................................................................................... 1 - 109
Initiation of NIBP Measurements ............................................................................................. 1 - 110
ECG Acquisition ................................................................................................................... 1 - 115
Invasive Pressure Acquisition .................................................................................................. 1 - 118
Sequence for Establishing SpO2 ............................................................................................. 1 - 119
Sequence for Establishing SpO2 with Masimo® Pulse Oximetry ................................................ 1 - 124
Sequence for Establishing SpO2 with Nellcor® Pulse Oximetry .................................................. 1 - 127
Respiration Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 1 - 132
Mainstream CO2 Gas Monitoring........................................................................................... 1 - 134
Sidestream CO2 Gas Monitoring............................................................................................ 1 - 139
Gas Module Option .............................................................................................................. 1 - 146
Alarms ................................................................................................................................ 1 - 149
How to Set the Clock............................................................................................................. 1 - 153
User Configuration Mode ...................................................................................................... 1 - 153
Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 i

Table of Contents
Recorder (optional) ............................................................................................................... 1 - 155

Status Messages ................................................................................................................... 1 - 158
Monitor Problem Solving........................................................................................................ 1 - 168
Connection to External Devices (optional) ................................................................................ 1 - 172
Using the Passport XG with the Visa Central Station (optional).................................................... 1 - 172
Menus ................................................................................................................................. 1 - 175
Theory of Operation ......................................................................................................... 2 - 1
Block Diagrams........................................................................................................................... 2 - 1
Detailed Circuit Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 2 - 7
Interconnect Board ................................................................................................................ 2 - 8
Frontend Board/Daughter Board ............................................................................................ 2 - 10
SpO2 Board......................................................................................................................... 2 - 26
CPU Board........................................................................................................................... 2 - 40
Line Battery Board................................................................................................................. 2 - 49
+12 / -23.5 Volt Converter Board .......................................................................................... 2 - 54
Planar EL Panel Board ........................................................................................................... 2 - 55
CO2 Interface Module .......................................................................................................... 2 - 57
NIBP Module: NIBP Pneumatic Board ...................................................................................... 2 - 59
Panel Board / Display Interface.............................................................................................. 2 - 63
Termination Board ................................................................................................................ 2 - 66
Specifications.................................................................................................................... 3 - 1
Performance Specifications ........................................................................................................... 3 - 1
Power Pack Electrical Ratings........................................................................................................ 3 - 8
Environmental Conditions ............................................................................................................. 3 - 8
Physical Characteristics ................................................................................................................ 3 - 8
Agency Compliance .................................................................................................................... 3 - 8
Repair Information ........................................................................................................... 4 - 1
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 4 - 1
Safety Precautions ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 1
Troubleshooting Guidelines .......................................................................................................... 4 - 2
Equipment and Special Tools Required........................................................................................... 4 - 3
Disassembly Instructions ............................................................................................................... 4 - 3
Mounting Instructions ................................................................................................................... 4 - 11
Rolling Stand Assembly Instructions ......................................................................................... 4 - 11
Bedrail Hook Mount .............................................................................................................. 4 - 11
Bed Mount ........................................................................................................................... 4 - 11
Passport Mounting - Rolling Stand/Wall Mount ........................................................................ 4 - 11
Power Supply Mounting......................................................................................................... 4 - 11
How to Use the Remote Color Display Mounting Kit......................................................................... 4 - 15
Cable Assembly Details................................................................................................................ 4 - 16
Assembly and Schematic Diagrams................................................................................... 5 - 1
Replacement Parts ............................................................................................................ 6 - 1
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 6 - 1
Available Replacement Parts and Sub-Assemblies ............................................................................ 6 - 1
Product Variations and Options..................................................................................................... 6 - 1
Exchange Program ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
Replacement Parts Pricing Information ............................................................................................ 6 - 2
Ordering Information ................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
Abbreviations ............................................................................................................................. 6 - 4
Calibration ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 1
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 7 - 4
Warnings and Guidelines ............................................................................................................ 7 - 4
Test Equipment and Special Tools Required .................................................................................... 7 - 4
Inputs......................................................................................................................................... 7 - 4
Diagnostics and Calibration Procedure .......................................................................................... 7 - 5
NIBP Diagnostics .................................................................................................................. 7 - 5
ii 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

Table of Contents
Error Journal ........................................................................................................................ 7 - 11

Exception Stack Frame .......................................................................................................... 7 - 11
Communication Test .............................................................................................................. 7 - 11
Recorder.............................................................................................................................. 7 - 14
Voltage Test ......................................................................................................................... 7 - 14
Display Test ......................................................................................................................... 7 - 14
Keyboard Test ...................................................................................................................... 7 - 17
SpO2 Diagnostics (Datascope SpO2 Installed).......................................................................... 7 - 18
SpO2 Diagnostics (Nellcor SpO2 Installed) .............................................................................. 7 - 20
SpO2 Diagnostics (Masimo SpO2 Installed) ............................................................................. 7 - 20
Power-Up Verification .................................................................................................................. 7 - 20
Initial Set-Up ............................................................................................................................... 7 - 21
ECG Tests .................................................................................................................................. 7 - 21
IBP1 and IBP2 Verification............................................................................................................ 7 - 23
Temperature Verification .............................................................................................................. 7 - 23
SpO2 Verification........................................................................................................................ 7 - 24
NIBP Verification......................................................................................................................... 7 - 24
Mainstream CO2 Adapter Calibration ........................................................................................... 7 - 24
Mainstream CO2 Sensor Calibration Verification...................................................................... 7 - 25
Mainstream CO2 Sensor Calibration....................................................................................... 7 - 25
Sidestream Pump Calibration........................................................................................................ 7 - 26
Sidestream CO2 Pump Verification / Calibration Procedure....................................................... 7 - 27
Sidestream Adapter Calibration.............................................................................................. 7 - 28
Sidestream CO2 Sensor Calibration Verification ....................................................................... 7 - 29
Sidestream CO2 Sensor Calibration ........................................................................................ 7 - 29
Battery Operation Verification....................................................................................................... 7 - 30
Leakage Current Test ................................................................................................................... 7 - 30
Cosmetic Checks ......................................................................................................................... 7 - 32
Special Options Menu ................................................................................................................. 7 - 32
Preventive Maintenance.................................................................................................... 8 - 1
Preventive Maintenance Schedule.................................................................................................. 8 - 1
Mechanical / Physical / Visual Inspection...................................................................................... 8 - 1
Preventive Maintenance Kit - Install Kit Annually .............................................................................. 8 - 1
Perform Verification and NIBP Calibration - Annually ....................................................................... 8 - 2
Perform Verification and CO2 Pump Calibration - Annually .......................................................... 8 - 2
User Preventive Maintenance Introduction....................................................................................... 8 - 2
Care and Cleaning of Monitor ............................................................................................... 8 - 2
Care and Cleaning of Datascope Flexisensors and Datasensors ................................................. 8 - 2
Cleaning CO2 Sensors and Adapters...................................................................................... 8 - 3
Cleaning External CO2 Sampling Components......................................................................... 8 - 3
Cleaning Internal CO2 Sampling Components.......................................................................... 8 - 3
Sterilization and Cleaning of Reusable Cuffs ............................................................................ 8 - 4
Battery Replacement and Maintenance .................................................................................... 8 - 5
Recorder Paper Replacement.................................................................................................. 8 - 5
Care and Storage of Thermal Chart Paper ............................................................................... 8 - 5
Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 iii

Table of Contents
This page intentionally left blank.
Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 iv

Foreword Introduction
Foreword
This Service Manual is intended as a guide for technically qualified personnel during repair
and calibration procedures for the Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG monitors. The information
has been divided into the eight main sections as listed in the table of contents. A detailed
table of contents of each section is also provided on the first page of each section.
This publication may have been updated to reflect product design changes and/or manual
improvements. Any such changes to this manual would be accomplished by supply
replacement pages and instructions for inserting them into the manual.
For Passport external communication protocols (Datasette revision T or greater) see Service
Manual Supplements: P/N 0070-00-0302, Bedside-to-VISA Communication Protocol; P/N
0070-00-0304, Accutorr Communication Protocol; P/N 0070-00-0306, Passport
Communication Protocol (EzEm) and P/N 00700-00-0307, Datascope Improved ASCII
Protocol (DIAP).
NOTE: In order to ensure the proper performance of your

monitoring equipment and to prevent the voiding of the
warranty, it is recommended that only parts and accessories
provided by Datascope be used with you monitor.
Warnings, Precautions and Notes

A WARNING is provided to alert the user to potential serious outcomes (death, injury, or
serious adverse events) to the patient or the user.
A CAUTION is provided to alert the user to use special care necessary for the safe and
effective use of the device. They may include actions to be taken to avoid effects on patients
or users that may not be potentially life threatening or result in serious injury, but about which
the user should be aware. Cautions are also provided to alert the user to adverse effects on
this device of use or misuse and the care necessary to avoid such effects.
A NOTE is provided when additional general information is applicable.
NOTE: Unauthorized servicing may void the remainder of the

warranty. Check with the factory or with a local authorized
Datascope representative to determine the warranty status
of a particular instrument.
Warnings
WARNING: The use of remote displays will enlarge all waveforms and
may alter aspect ratios depending on the remote device and
its set-up.
WARNING: Ensure that the conductive parts of ECG electrodes do not

contact other conductive parts including earth ground.
WARNING: Thoracic respiration measurement may interfere with some

pacemakers. Refer to the pacemaker’s manual.
Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 v

Introduction Warnings, Precautions and Notes
WARNING: Do not use the following 3-Lead ECG cables with Passport 5L
(P/N, 0998-00-0126-xx) and 5L-CE (P/N, 0998-00-0131-
xx): 0012-00-0620-05, -06, -07, -08; 0012-00-0722-05, -
06, -07, -08; 0012-00-0723-05, -06, -07, -08; 0012-00-
0724-05, -06, -07, -08. The above 3-Lead cables contain a
jumper wire which connects RL (right leg) to LL (left leg). As a
result, when you view aVR, aVL and aVF you will see the
appropriate ECG waveforms (even though you are using a
3-lead cable). However, there may be excessive noise on
these waveforms which can corrupt the heart rate
calculation. See Section 5 in the Operating Instructions for a
list of the proper ECG cables.
WARNING: When equipped with Nellcor® SpO2, use only Nellcor®

oxygen transducers including Nellcor® OXISENSOR™
patient dedicated adhesive sensors. Use of other oxygen
transducers may cause improper oximeter performance.
WARNING: Tissue damage or inaccurate measurements may be caused

by incorrect sensor application or use, such as wrapping it
too tightly, applying supplemental tape, failing to inspect
the sensor site periodically, or failing to position it
appropriately. Carefully read the sensor directions for use,
the Passport operating instructions, and all precautionary
information before use.
WARNING: Excessive ambient light may cause inaccurate

measurements. Cover the sensor site with opaque material.
WARNING: Inaccurate measurements may be caused by incorrect

sensor application or use; significant levels of dysfunctional
hemoglobins, (e.g., carboxyhemoglobin or methemoglobin);
or intra-vascular dyes such as indocyanine green methylene
blue; exposure to excessive illumination, such as surgical
lamps (especially ones with a xenon light source), bilirubin
lamps, fluorescent lights, infrared heating lamps, or direct
sunlight; excessive patient movement; venous pulsations;
electro-surgical interference; and placement of a sensor on
an extremity that has a blood pressure cuff, arterial
catheter, or intra-vascular line.
WARNING: In certain situations in which perfusion and signal strength

are low, such as in patients with thick or pigmented skin,
inaccurately low SpO2 readings will result. Verification of
oxygenation should be made, especially in preterm infants
and patients with chronic lung disease, before instituting
any therapy or intervention.
WARNING: Insure that the conductive parts of ECG electrodes do not

WARNING: Many patients suffer from poor peripheral perfusion due to

hypothermia, hypovolemia, severe vasoconstriction,
reduced cardiac output, etc. These symptoms may cause a
loss in vital sign readings.
vi 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

WARNING: The site should be checked at least every eight (8) hours
(every four (4) hours with the Adult re-usable finger sensor).
Ensure proper adhesion, skin integrity, and proper
alignment. Nail polish and fungus may effect readings.
Exercise extreme caution with poorly perfused patients.
Skin erosion and pressure necrosis can be caused when
sensors are not frequently monitored. Assess the site every
two (2) hours with poorly perfused patients.
WARNING: Do not use the following 3-Lead ECG cables with Passport
XG (P/N’s 0998-00-0133-xx, 0998-00-0134-xx and 0998-
00-0137-xx): 0012-00-0620-05, -06, -07, -08; 0012-00-
0722-05, -06, -07, 08; 0012-00-0723-05, -06, -07, -08;
0012-00-0724-05, -06, -07, -08. The above 3-Lead cables
contain a jumper wire which connects RL (right leg) to LL (left
leg). As a result, when you view aVR, aVL and aVF you will
see the appropriate ECG waveforms (even though you are
using a 3-lead cable). However, there may be excessive
noise on these waveforms which can corrupt the heart rate
calculation. See Section 5 in the Datascope P/N’s 0070-00-
397, 0070-00-0440, 0070-00-0503 of the Passport
Operating Instructions for a list of the proper ECG cables.
WARNING: If the sensor or patient cable is damaged in any way,

discontinue use immediately. To prevent damage do not
soak or immerse the sensor in any liquid solution. Do not
attempt to sterilize.
WARNING: The maximum sampling rate at the nasal cannula is 200 ml/
min. This device should not be used on patients whose
breathing could be impaired by this vacuum flow rate.
WARNING: Connection of the Passport’s exhaust port to the hospital’s

waste gas scavenge system is recommended to prevent
exposure of hospital personnel to the patient’s respiratory
sample.
WARNING: In an intubated configuration, ensure all tubing connections

are tight. If tubing disconnects on the monitor side of the
airway adapter, ventilator pressures cause inaccurate CO2
waveforms and readouts to be displayed.
WARNING: Connection of the Gas Module exhaust port (50) to the

hospital’s waste gas scavenge system is strongly
recommended to prevent exposure of hospital personnel to
the patient’s respiratory sample. Vacuum (negative
pressure) should not exceed 1 mmHg at the Gas Module
Pump Exhaust fitting (50). Excessive scavenge vacuum may
result in damage to the Gas Module’s internal pump.
vii 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

Warnings, Precautions and Notes Introduction
Cautions
CAUTION: Connection of non-isolated devices to the optional RS232
Connector on this unit may cause chassis leakage to exceed
the specification standards.
CAUTION: Only use the Abbreviated Operating Check List if you are
already familiar with this product. If not, please continue
with the remainder of this chapter, Detailed Operating
Instructions.
CAUTION: Always attach all desired peripheral equipment prior to

powering on the Passport. If required to attach more or
change what is connected, turn the Passport off, attach
what is needed, and then turn the Passport on again.
CAUTION: Observe extreme caution on all patients (neonates,

pediatrics, and adults) when NIBP is set to the Continuous
Mode. A 5 minute limit is placed on continuous
measurements. After 5 minutes the unit will take a
measurement once every 5 minutes. Reports have been
made of nerve injury occurring during use of automatically
cycled blood pressure cuffs. See the Appendix, “Precautions
when Using Automatically Cycled Blood Pressure
Cuffs”.Observe extreme caution on all patients (neonates,
measurement once every 5 minutes.
Reports have been made of nerve injury occurring during

use of automatically cycled blood pressure cuffs. See the
Appendix, “Precautions when Using Automatically Cycled
Blood Pressure Cuffs”.
CAUTION: It is the users responsibility to confirm correct operation of

the Passport with external devices. It is essential that a
biomedical engineer verify correct operation of the Passport
with an external device. Testing should include verification
that the maximum delay for cardioversion synchronization
does not exceed 60 ms (monitor and defibrillator). Cable
should be labeled with the devices they have been tested
for use with.
CAUTION: Do not use this special “Y” shaped power cable for any
devices other than the Passport and Gas Module II.
CAUTION: Vacuum (negative pressure) should not exceed 1 mmHg at

the Passport Pump Exhaust fitting (39). Excessive scavenge
vacuum may result in an “OCCLUSION” message or
damage to the Passport’s internal pump. The scavenge
system if used must be on during calibration.

the Passport XG with external devices. Before using this
cable it is essential that a biomedical engineer verify correct
operation of the Passport XG with an external device using
this cable. Testing should include verification that the
maximum delay for cardioversion synchronization does not
exceed 60 ms (monitor and defibrillator). Cable should be
labeled with the devices they have been tested for use with.
Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 viii

CAUTION: When cleaning sensors do not use excessive amounts of

liquid. Wipe the sensor surface with a soft cloth, dampened
with the cleaning solution.
CAUTION: Using dark colored soaks may stain the cuffs. Test a single
cuff to ensure that no damage will occur. ETO sterilization
may also be used.
CAUTION: When ironing or pressing the cuffs, be aware that the

Velcro® fasteners can melt at temperatures above 325°F,
162°C.
ix 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

x 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

1.0 Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG)
Contents of this Chapter ..................................................Page

1.1 Introduction (5-Lead, 5L, LT) ..................................... 1-1
1.2 Controls, Indicators and Connectors (5-Lead, 5L, LT) . 1-3
1.3 Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT) ........................................ 1-13
1.4 Introduction (XG) ..................................................... 1-77
1.5 Controls, Indicators and Connectors (XG) ................. 1-77
1.6 Operation (XG) ........................................................ 1-97
1.1 Introduction (5-Lead, 5L, LT)

This section of the Service Manual provides general information about the Datascope
Passport Monitors 5-Lead, 5L and LT. All functions, standard and optional, are described in
this section. The pictures of the unit and the displays should be used as samples and may not
be exactly as your unit appears. Table 1-1 on page 1-2 lists the functions available on the
Passport 5-Lead/5L and the Passport LT.
Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 1-1

Introduction (5-Lead, 5L, LT) Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG)
TABLE 1-1
PASSPORT 5L PASSPORT LT
FUNCTIONS* STANDARD OPTIONAL STANDARD OPTIONAL

NIBP
• •
IBP
• •
ECG
• •
SpO2 - Datascope
• •
SpO2 - Nellcor
•
Respiration
• •
CO2
•
Recorder
• •
Temperature
• •
* For detailed instructions of each function see the Table of Contents for sections and page numbers.
NOTE: Sections 1.2 and 1.3 are included as a review of instrument

functions and operation, although the reader is encouraged
to refer to the Operating Instructions, P/N 0070-00-0324,
for more complete details.
1-2 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG) Controls, Indicators and Connectors (5-Lead, 5L, LT)
1.2 Controls, Indicators and Connectors (5-Lead, 5L, LT)

The keys on the front panel of the Passport Monitor are classified as single action, repeat
action, or delayed action keys.
A single action key provides one action each time it is pressed, regardless of how long it is
held.
A repeat action key provides the an action when pressed, then waits half a second before
repeating the action until the key is released.
A delayed action key provides an action, but only after the key has been held pressed for a
(key specific) period of time.
1. p and q (Set-up) 8. ZERO 1 (IBP) (Optional 15. MUTE (Alarms)

2. SELECT (Set-up) 9. ZERO 2 (IBP) (Optional)16. TREND/RETURN (Trends)
3. END (Set-up) 10. START (NIBP) 17. TIME UP p and DOWN
q (Trends)
4. CENTRAL SILENCE 11. INTERVAL (NIBP) 18. BEEP VOLUME
(Optional)
5. LEAD (ECG) 12. DEFLATE (NIBP) 19. RECORD (Optional)
6. SIZE (ECG) 13. VOLUME (Alarms) 20. DC INPUT
7. FREEZE (ECG) 14. CHECK/RETURN 21. DISPLAY
(Alarms)
PARAGRAPH CONTROL/DISPLAY PAGE

NUMBER DESCRIPTION NUMBER NUMBER
1.2.1 Front Panel 1 - 21 1-4
1.2.2 Left Side Panel 22 - 30 1-9
1.2.3 Right Side Panel 31 - 34 1-11
1.2.4 Remote Color Display 1-12 12 - 14

Controls, Indicators and Connectors (5-Lead, 5L, LT) Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG)
1.2.1 Front Panel
5 Datascope Passport
R TM
2121
SET- UP ECG IBP NIBP ALARM S TRENDS

MODE L
TR EN D BEEP
SELECT LEAD ZER O 1 START VOLUM E
RETU RN VO LUME EL
1 END SIZE ZERO 2 IN TERVAL
CH ECK
RETURN
TIM E RECO RD
D.C. INP UT
CENTRAL
FR EEZE DEFLATE M UTE TIM E
SILENCE
!
9
11 20
22 3 4 5 13 15
3 4 5 66 7
7 88 9 101011 12
12 17
13 1414 15 16 17 18
18 19 20
16 19
FIGURE 1-1 Front Panel Controls
Introduction
The keys on the front panel of the Passport Monitor are classified as single action, repeat
held.
A repeat action key provides the an action when pressed, then waits half a second before
A delayed action key provides an action, but only after the key has been held pressed for
a (key specific) period of time.
NOTE: Only one key function will be recognized at any time. The
Passport will ignore multiple key selections.
All key actions are acknowledged by a key click, except for BEEP VOL and ALARM VOL. If a
key is not available a double key click will sound.
1. p and q (UP and DOWN) (Set-Up)

Two repeat action keys used to move the highlighted screen cursor or change the setting/
value of a menu item. As the cursor is moved, the highlighted menu window is displayed.
2. SELECT (Set-Up)
A repeat action key used to select the function or value indicated by the highlighted cursor.

3. END (Set-Up)
A single action key which causes the display to return to the main screen display (as
specified in the DISPLAY section). This key is always available.
4. CENTRAL SILENCE (Optional)

A single-action key which mutes the alarms of the corresponding channel on the VISA Central
Station. The amount of time the alarms are silenced, is determined by the VISA.
5. LEAD (ECG)
A single action key which selects the ECG lead to be displayed. Each depression of the key
selects and displays the next ECG lead from the list. The list wraps around after the last entry
is selected. Choices are: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF or V.
6. SIZE (ECG)
A single action key which selects the ECG size to be displayed. Each depression of the key
selects and displays the next ECG size from the list. The list wraps around after the last entry
is selected.
7. FREEZE (Screen)
A single action key which enables or releases the screen freeze function. The freeze key
stops or starts the ECG waveform (waveform 1), except when waveform 2 is used for
cascaded ECG. When this is the case, pressing the freeze key the first time causes the
currently displayed ECG waveform data to be transferred to waveform 2 and frozen.
Waveforms 1 and 3 continue to move. Pressing FREEZE again causes waveform 2 to return
to cascaded ECG.
8. ZERO 1 (IBP) (Optional)

A delayed action key which zeros the current pressure in the BP1 channel. If the transducer
zero process is unsuccessful, “UNABLE TO ZERO” is displayed in the window containing BP
value. This key is only available when a pressure transducer is present.

zero process is unsuccessful, “UNABLE TO ZERO” is displayed in a temporary window
within the parameter window. This key is only available when a pressure transducer is
present.
10. START (NIBP)

A single action key which initiates an NIBP measurement. This function is not available if a
measurement is in progress.
11. INTERVAL (NIBP)

A repeat action key which selects the interval setting for NIBP measurements. Values wrap
around at the lowest/highest choices. Choices are: Off, Continuous, 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20,
30, 60, and 120 minutes. Five seconds after the selection is made and the key is released,
the new interval takes effect.

12. DEFLATE (NIBP)

A single action key which stops any NIBP measurement in progress, including any timed
measurement sequence, and deflates the cuff. When a timed measurement is stopped an
“NIBP: DEFLATE” message followed by an “NIBP: IDLE” message displays in the NIBP
message window until the timer mode is restarted by either pressing START or changing the
interval.
13. VOLUME (Alarms and Alarm LED)

A repeat action key which adjusts the alarm volume in 5 steps. There is no off position for this
tone. The tone wraps to the minimum volume once the maximum is reached. The red alarm
bell LED illuminates when an alarm condition exists. Refer to “Alarms” on page 1-49.
14. CHECK/RETURN (Alarms)

A single action key which provides access to the alarm menu to view and select alarm
values. Press SELECT to change the alarm values. Pressing CHECK/RETURN a second time
or the END key, returns the display to the main screen and exits the alarm menu.
15. MUTE (Alarms)

A single action and delayed action key which silences all currently alarming parameters or
suspends all alarms. A single key press will silence the current alarm tone for 2 minutes. Any
new alarms that occur while the alarm tone is muted will disable the mute and sound the
alarm tone. An alarm mute symbol is displayed next to each muted parameter. The word
Alarm Mute
Symbol Mute is displayed above the menu selections.
When the key is pressed and held for 3 seconds, all set alarms will be suspended for 2
minutes. This is indicated by the Alarm Mute Symbol and the words All Mute displayed
above the menu selections.
When “Aud alm standby” is set to ON (in the User Configuration Menu), and the MUTE key
is pressed and held for 4 seconds, all alarms are indefinitely suspended. This is indicated by
the Alarm Mute Symbol in all parameter windows and the words Aud Alm Sby flashing
The All Mute and Aud Alm Sby modes can be exited by pressing the mute key.
NOTE: When “Aud alm standby” is set to ON and the unit is power
off and then on again, the unit will power up in the Aud alm
standby mode.
16. TRENDS/RETURN (Trends)

A single action and delayed action key which displays and clears trended data. The most
recent page of data is displayed when the key is first pressed. Press this key a second time to
view additional trended data. Pressing and holding the key for 3 seconds clears all trended
data.
17. TIME UP p and q TIME DOWN (Trends)

Two repeat action keys which are used to scroll through the trend data.

18. BEEP VOLUME

A repeat action key which adjusts the beep volume in 5 steps plus OFF. When the maximum
volume is reached, the volume will wrap around to OFF, then to the minimum volume
19. RECORD (Optional)

A combination single action and delayed action key which initiates or stops a recording.
Pressing the key once initiates a printout. Holding the key pressed for three seconds, when
waveforms are displayed, initiates a continuous printing of waveforms. Pressing the key
while the printing is in progress, stops the recorder. The recorder prints either waveforms or
trend data, depending on what is displayed (i.e. trend data is printed when trend list is
displayed.). The Recorder Set-up will determine which waveform or waveforms are printed.
The Recorder Set-up will also determine the Record Destination - Local (recording from the
Passport), Remote (recording from the VISA, no recording from the Passport), or Both
(recording from the Passport and VISA).
NOTE: When a remote (VISA) recording is printed, the information

that is printed is determined by the set-up in the VISA.
20. DC INPUT
A green LED used to indicate that the POWER Switch (33) is in the ON position.
ECG AREA
MENU PARAMETER
AREA AREA
MULTI-FUNCTION AREA
MESSAGE AREA
FIGURE 1-2 Display

21. DISPLAY
The Display is used to present information which is divided into 5 graphic display areas.
They are:
A. MENU Display Area

B. ECG Display Area
C. PARAMETER Display Area
D. MULTI-FUNCTION Display Area
E. MESSAGE Display Area
Passport will ignore multiple key selections.

1.2.2 Left Side Panel
Pres s to Open
SpO2 CUFF 24
24
Re place only w i th:
To
25
25
10c m
26
26
22
22 ECG/EKG
E.S.I.S.
All Patient Connec ti ons

27
27
Ele ctrica lly Is olate d
IBP 1
PI 1
28
28
IBP 2
BATT. PI 2
! 29
29
CO
2
23
23
!
30
30
FIGURE 1-3 Left Side Panel with Datascope SpO2
24
24 25
25
Pres s to Op en
CUFF
Re place only w ith:
SpO2
10 cm
To
22
22 26
26
ECG/EKG
E.S.I.S.
All Patie nt Connections 27

27
Ele ct rica lly Is olated
IBP 1
PI 1
28
28
IBP 2
BATT. PI 2
!
29
29
CO2
23
23
!
30
30
FIGURE 1-4 Left Side Panel with Nellcor® SpO2

22. RECORDER (Optional)

A two trace thermal strip chart recorder with integral paper spool.
23. BATTERY PACK

Two internal, user replaceable, rechargeable, sealed lead acid batteries that provide power
to operate the monitor when not connected to the power pack. The battery packs may be
removed and replaced independently while the unit is operating.
24. CUFF
A connector used to attach the NIBP cuff assembly to the monitor.
25. SpO2
An 8-pin DIN type or 9-pin sub miniature D (Nellcor) type female connector used to attach
the SpO2 sensor assembly to the monitor.
26. T (Temperature)
A standard three wire phone jack used to mate with either the YSI series 400 or 700*
temperature probes. The Passport automatically identifies which probe is connected.
27. ECG / EKG

A six-pin AAMI (ECG-D10/75) standard connector (AMP P/N 864900-1; Datascope P/N
0131-00-0079) used for patient cable connections.
*Feature applicable only if available installed in your unit.
28. IBP1 (Optional)

A six-pin male connector (Datascope P/N 0131-00-0094) used for Datascope specified
pressure transducers listed in Chapter 5, Accessories.
29. IBP2 (Optional)

A six-pin male connector (Datascope P/N 0131-00-0094) used for Datascope specified
pressure transducers listed in Chapter 5, Accessories.
30. CO2 (Optional)

A 20 pin connector used to attach the CAPNOSTAT CO2 sensor to the monitor.
1 - 10 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

1.2.3 Right Side Panel
31
32
33
34
FIGURE 1-5 Right Side Panel
31. DATASETTE
A user replaceable software cartridge used for installing updated software revisions.
32. DC POWER INPUT (CONNECTOR)

A four terminal connector to supply low voltage DC power to the unit and charge the
batteries. The power pack provides power to the unit independent of battery installation.
33. J1
A communication interface connector used to connect the Passport to a VISA Central Station
Monitor, Remote Color Display, Nurse Call, DPD Defibrillator or other peripheral devices.
34. POWER
A recessed rocker switch which interrupts power to the main unit but does not prevent
charging of the batteries.
Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 1 - 11

1.2.4 Remote Color Display

REMOTE COLOR DISPLAY, REAR PASSPORT MONITOR, FRONT VIEW
Remote Color Display Interface Cable Passport Video Interface Cable

P/N 0012-00-0994 P/N 0012-00-0983
1. Connect Interface cable, 2. Connect PASSPORT Monitor 3. Connect the PASSPORT

P/N 0012-00-0994, to the Analog Video Interface cable, Monitor Video Interface Cable to
Input connector on the Remote P/N 0012-00-0983. to the Remote J1 on the PASSPORT Monitor
Color Display. Color Display Interface cable,
P/N 0012-00-0994.
FIGURE 1-6 Remote Color Display
For instructions on mounting the remote display to a wall, refer to Operating Instructions.
its set-up.

Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG) Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT)
1.3 Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT)

Abbreviated Operating Check List
Instructions.
A. Setting-Up
1. Set POWER switch to OFF.
2. Connect, if desired, peripheral equipment (i.e., Remote Color Display, P.C., etc.).
3. Attach power pack and/or install charged batteries as needed.
4. Set POWER switch to ON.
5. Using the menus and keyboard, set (when appropriate) the following:
--
• Patient Size and Trend Clear • HR Information

• Set Up Information (speed, waveform • SpO2 Information 2 and 3, etc.)
• ECG Information • Recorder Information (when available)
• Resp. Information • Alarm Limits
• Alarm Volume • NIBP Information
• Beep Volume • IBP Information
B. Initiating an NIBP Measurement

1. Select cuff.
2. Attach cuff hose to NIBP connector and place cuff on patient.
3. Select timer interval, if desired.
4. Select cuff pressure, if necessary.
5. Press START to begin an NIBP measurement.
6. Press DEFLATE to suspend measurement.
C. Establishing SpO2
1. Select the appropriate sensor.
2. Attach sensor to SpO2 connector and apply to the patient.
3. Set either waveform 2 or 3 in the set-up menu to display the SpO2 waveform, if desired.

Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT) Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG)
D. Establishing CO2 / CAPNOSTAT*

1. Plug sensor into the side of the monitor.
2. If a new CAPNOSTAT is used, calibrate the system.
3. Apply sensor to the breathing circuit.
4. Set Waveform 2 or 3 to CO2.
5. Set the Resp. Source to CO2.
* CAPNOSTAT is a trademark of NOVAMETRIX, Inc.
E. Recording Information
1. Select wave to be recorded through Record Menu or if desired to record tabular trend,
press TREND/RETURN.
2. Press Record to start recording function.
3. Press Record again to stop the recording function.
F. Temperature Measurement
1. Attach the desired temperature probe to the Temperature connector on the side of the
Passport. The Passport automatically detects which probe is connected, 400 or 700
series.
Detailed Operating Instructions

This section of the Service Manual provides guidelines and step-by-step instructions for
proper operation of the monitor. Numbers in parentheses ( ) relate to the displays and
controls described in “Controls, Indicators and Connectors (5-Lead, 5L, LT)” on page 1-3
1.3.1 Setting-up / Turning Power On

1. Set the POWER switch (34) to OFF.
2. Attach any peripheral equipment, i.e., Visa Central Station, Remote Color Display.

3. Attach the power pack to the DC POWER INPUT connector (32). If battery operation is
required, ensure that two fully charged batteries are installed.
NOTE: If power pack is connected ensure that the screw is

tightened so that the cord does not detach.
4. Set the POWER switch (34) to ON.

Internal self tests will run and the display will come on. A “DIAGNOSTIC IN
PROGRESS” message will display and once the self tests have been completed a “SELF
TEST COMPLETE” message will display. After this the main screen is displayed.
If any failures occur, see “Status Messages” on page 1-57 for further instructions.

1.3.2 Factory - Default Control Settings

The following are the factory initial (default) control settings. This is the state that the unit will
power up in unless a “current configuration” has been saved from the set up menu.
TABLE 1-2 Default Settings
MENU FUNCTION DEFAULT SETTINGS

Patient Size Adult
Clear Trend Memory No
Pacer Enhancement Off
Set-up Speed 25 mm/sec.
Resp Speed 12.5 mm/sec.
Waveform 2 Cascade ECG
Waveform 3 Pleth
Resp Source ECG
Powerup Settings No change
Record Wave Selection ECG
Record on Alarm No
Recorder Destination Local
Alarms Low High
Heart Rate Off Off
SpO2 85 Off
IBP1 Sys Off Off
IBP1 Dia Off Off
NIBP Sys Off Off
NIBP Dia Off Off
IBP2 Mean Off Off
Resp Rate Off Off
Apnea Delay Off Adult, Off Ped., 10 sec
Neonate
ETCO2 Off Off
NIBP Start Pressure 180 mmHg Adult, 140 mmHg
Ped., 120 mmHg Neonate
IBP IBP1 Scale Range 150 mmHg
IBP2 Scale Range 37.5 mmHg
Respiration Scale 3 cm/ohm
HR Source Auto
SpO2 Pleth Scale* 3
CO2 Scale Range 40 Torr
Trend Trigger NIBP
Interval Timer 5 min
ECG Lead II
Size 1 cm/mV
NIBP Interval Off
Volume Beep Off
Alarm 1

TABLE 1-2 Default Settings (Continued)

Temperature Scale ºF**
HrSpO2 Size Hr SpO2 Size HR small, SpO2 large
Audio Alarm delay Audio Alarm delay Off
Aud alm standby Aud alm standby Off
Serial Output Type Serial Output Type Visa
Changes can be made and saved to these default settings. The default settings can also be
restored. Refer to “Setting-up / Turning Power On” on page 1-14.
* If your unit is equipped with Nellcor® SpO2, there is no pleth scale adjustment. This is replaced with operat-
ing mode options 1, 2, and 3.
** Farhenheit is the default setting for English units only. All other language units default to Centigrade.
1.3.3 Display
ECG AREA
MENU PARAMETER
AREA AREA
MULTI-FUNCTION AREA
MESSAGE AREA
FIGURE 1-7 Window Layout
The Display is divided into five graphic areas as shown above.
MENU Display Area - displays the main menu selections available with the cursor and
select keys, the battery symbol and the mute categories.
ECG Display Area - displays the ECG trace, ECG information and pacer enhancement
status.
PARAMETER Display Area - displays the current values of patient parameters.

MULTI-FUNCTION Display Area - displays additional waveforms and temporary boxes

for menu functions.
MESSAGE Display Area - displays messages relating to NIBP, SpO2, CO2 and recorder
operation.
1.3.3.1 Menu Display Area
The menu area displays the main menu selections available. These are accessed by using the
UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1) and SELECT (2) set-up keys. One of the menu item is
always highlighted by the cursor. This window also contains the TIME, DATE, PATIENT SIZE
and MUTE CATEGORY (when active) information.
For each patient size available there are different choices within the menu selections.
Table 1-3 on page 1-18 indicates the choices for each menu set-up and also where there are
different selections for each patient size.
A list of all menus and the selections available is provided in Table 1-2 on page 1-15. For a
graphic representation of each of these menus, see “Use of Menus” on page 23.
NOTE: The “IBP”, “Recorder” and “CO2” menu items only appear
only on models equipped with these options.
NOTE: The display sample shown above may not be an exact

representation of your unit.

TABLE 1-3 Menu List
MENU
LIST MENU ITEM CHOICES
Patient Size Adult, Pediatric, Neonate
Clear Trend Memory No, Yes
Pacer Enhancement On, Off
Setup Speed 12.5, 25, 50 mm/sec.
Resp Source Off, ECG, CO2
Resp Speed 3.125, 6.25, 12.5, 25 mm/sec.
Waveform 2 BP1, ECG casc., Pleth., Resp., CO2
Waveform 3 BP1, BP2, Pleth., Resp., CO2
Power up Settings No Change, Save Current, Restore Factory
Record Record on Alarm Yes, No
Wave Selection ECG, Pleth., Resp., ECG and BP1, ECG and BP2, BP1
and BP2, ECG and Resp., CO2
Record Destination Local, Remote Both
Alarm HR Low (Off, 30-100), High (Off, 100-250) bpm
SpO2 Low (50-99), High (Off, 80-100) %
IBP1 Sys Adult: Low (Off, 5 - 130), High (Off, 70 - 240) mmHg
Ped.: Low (Off, 5-130), High (Off, 40 - 180) mmHg
Neo.: Low (Off, 5-130), High (Off, 40 - 180) mmHg
IBP1 Dia Adult: Low (Off, 5 - 90), High (Off, 40 - 130) mmHg
Ped.: Low (Off, 5 - 50), High (Off, 50 - 100) mmHg
Neo.: Low (Off, 5 - 50), High (Off, 50 - 100) mmHg
NIBP Sys Adult: Low (Off, 50 - 150), High (Off, 70 - 240) mmHg
Ped.: Low (Off, 15 - 130), High (Off, 40-180) mmHg
Neo.: Low (Off, 15 - 130), High (Off, 40-180) mmHg
NIBP Dia Adult: Low (Off, 30 - 120), High (Off, 40 - 130) mmHg
IBP2 (Mean) Adult: Low (Off, 2 - 100), High (Off, 5 - 150) mmHg
Respiration Low (Off, 5 - 50), High (Off, 30 - 200) bpm
Apnea Delay Adult Off, 10 -40 secs.
Ped. Off, 10 - 30 secs.
Neonate 10 - 20 secs.
ETCO2 Torr: Low (Off, 5 - 60), High (Off, 20 - 100) %: Low
(Off, 1 - 8), High (Off, 2 - 11) kPa: Low (Off, 1.0 -
8.0), High (Off, 2.0 - 11.0)
NIBP Start Pressure Adult: 100-260 mmHg
Ped.: 60-180 mmHg
Neonate: 40-120 mmHg
IBP BP1 Scale Range 37.5, 75, 150, 300 mmHg
BP2 Scale Range 37.5, 75, 150, 300 mmHg
Resp Scale 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
HR HR Source Auto, ECG, BP1, SpO2
SpO2 Pleth Size 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
(Standard)

TABLE 1-3 Menu List (Continued)
MENU
LIST MENU ITEM CHOICES
SpO2 Response Mode 1, 2, 3
(Nellcor)
CO2 CO2 Scale 40, 60, 100 Torr / 5, 8, 12 kPa / 5, 8, 12 %
(Capnostat)
Start Zero Calibration Yes, No
Start Adapter Calibration Yes, No
N2O Compensation On, Off
O2 Compensation 0, 21, 40, 60, 80, 100
1.3.3.2 ECG Display Area
FIGURE 1-9 ECG Display Area
The ECG Display Area contains the ECG waveform, the ECG size, scale, lead information,
Pacer Enhancement ON/OFF message, and when appropriate a message indicating there is
no ECG waveform available.

• ECG SIZE - The ECG size displays a vertical bar and a “1 mV” label. The vertical bar is
used as a reference to determine the size of the displayed ECG waveform. There are a
total of 6 size settings for the vertical bar. Five size settings are 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 3 cm.
The sixth setting is larger than the ECG waveform window and therefore the “1 mV” label
is removed. The size that measures a 1 cm signal on the display is indicated by small line
segments added to the top and bottom of the vertical bar (as shown above).
• ECG LEAD - The ECG lead display shows the current ECG lead selection. The lead
display options are I, II, III, aVR, aVF, aVL, and V.
• ECG WAVEFORM - The display shows the ECG waveform at a user selected speed.
This provides 4 seconds of data on the display (at 25mm/sec). The scale of the waveform
is determined by the ECG size selected.
• LEAD FAULT MESSAGE - The lead fault message box displays “ECG Lead Fault” and is
positioned over the area where the ECG waveform normally resides.
• PACER ENHANCEMENT - Factory default is “Pacer enh OFF” (pacer enhancement off).
The OFF setting allows any pacer to appear as it normally would on the ECG waveform.
When pacer enhancement is turned on via patient menu selection, detected pacers are
enhanced and appear as full scale, narrow square waves.
• ESU INTERFERENCE MESSAGE- When a large high frequency noise component is
present on the ECG waveform, the message “ESU Interference” is displayed. If both high
frequency and 60 Hz noise are present, the “ESU Interference” message has priority over
the “Interference” message to display. The “Artifact” message is also displayed in the
Heart Rate window.
• INTERFERENCE MESSAGE- When a large 60 Hz noise component is present on the
ECG waveform and the notch filter is enable, the “Interference” massage is displayed.
Check the patient electrode connectors and the cable for proper connection. The
message may be the result of using inappropriate 3-Lead cables. The “Artifact” message
is also displayed in the Heart Rate window.
1.3.3.3 Multi-function Display Area
FIGURE 1-10 Multi-Function Display Area

Displayed within the Multi-function Area of the screen are the:
A. Waveforms
B. Trend Lists
Waveforms
The waveform display is the normal display in the multi-function area. The waveforms occupy
the entire multi-function area.
This area is divided horizontally in two. These two areas are used for waveforms 2 and 3.
The options for each waveform are listed in Table 1-3 on page 1-18.
The scale information for invasive pressures consists of a 0 at the bottom of each window to
represent zero pressure level and the scale range value at the top of the window.
The waveform provides four seconds of data when the selected speed is 25mm/sec.

C. Trend Lists
FIGURE 1-11 Trend List Display
Pressing the TREND/RETURN key (15) displays the trend lists, as shown above. The trend
lists take up the entire Multi-function area. To display additional parameters press the
TREND/RETURN key (15) again. Pressing this key a third time returns the screen to normal.
Pressing and holding the TREND/RETURN key (15) for 3 seconds will clear all trended data.
Each entry to the trend list is added to the bottom of list until the page is full. Eleven lines of
data can be displayed on each page. The trend data memory is large enough to contain
more than one page of data. When the most current page is full and new data is available,
the top line of data in the window is removed (but kept in memory), the other lines of data
are scrolled up and the new data is added as the last line of data in the window. To scroll
through the data that is in memory press the TIME UP p and TIME DOWN q trend keys
(16).
The trend lists display consists of a heading that includes the page #, the time, the
parameters with their units, and the listed data in columns under the appropriate heading.

If no data is available for a particular column, dashes (—-) are displayed. If an NIBP
measurement was attempted and a valid reading was unable to be obtained (xxx) will be
displayed in the NIBP column.
If respiration is turned off, “OFF” is displayed in the respiration column.
NOTE: The IBP1 column displays only in models that are equipped
with the invasive pressure option.
The Trend Trigger and Interval are set in the User Configuration Trend menu.
To clear the trend data, press and hold the TREND/RETURN key (15) for 4 seconds.
NOTE: Trend data will be stored in memory for 1 hour after the
unit has been powered down. After 1 hour the trend data
will be cleared.


1.3.3.4 Parameters Display Area
FIGURE 1-12 Parameter Display Area
The parameters display area contains the current values of the patient parameters. The
contents and the layout of the parameters area depends on how many invasive blood
pressure transducers are connected to the monitor. The example above is with two
transducers connected.
Within the NIBP parameter area the interval chosen is displayed and the elapsed time (ET)
since the last NIBP measurement was taken is displayed. If another NIBP measurement is not
taken within 15 minutes the ET and the NIBP readings will change to dashes.
An “Artifact” message is displayed in the Parameter area (under the ECG Heart Rate)
whenever 60 Hz noise or ESU Interference is present on the ECG waveform.

1.3.3.5 Message Display Area

This area of the display contains messages relating to NIBP, SpO2, CO2 and recorder
operation. Refer to “Status Messages” on page 1-57 for a complete list of these messages.
1.3.4 Use of Menus

The main menus are accessed by using the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1), SELECT (2),
and END (3) keys.The following is an example of how to set the menu options.
1. Using the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1), move the cursor to select the desired
main menu item.
NOTE: As the cursor is moved up and down the list of menu items,
view windows for each menu item are displayed.

2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, (in this case SET-UP has been chosen) press
SELECT (2) to enter into the change window.
When SELECT is pressed, the first item in the sub-menu will be
highlighted.
3. To change the highlighted item use the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1). The
choices available are listed in the CHOICES bar. Once the desired choice is displayed,
press SELECT (2) to enter it and move the cursor down to the next item in the sub-menu.
If no change is required to the highlighted item, press SELECT to move the cursor down
to the next item on the list. Keep pressing SELECT until the required item to change is
high-lighted.
1 mV
FIGURE 1-13
4. Press the END (3) key to return to the normal monitoring mode when all of the
sub-menu items have been set as desired.
END
END
FIGURE 1-14

1.3.5 Initiation of NIBP Measurements

1.3.5.1 Manual Initiation of NIBP Measurements
1. Select a pressure cuff that is appropriate for the size of the patient using the chart below
as a guideline.
TABLE 1-4 Cuff Selections
LIMB
CIRCUMFERENCE DESCRIPTION / DATASCOPE PART NUMBER
(CM) CUFF NAME
Reusable Disposable
45 - 66 Thigh * 0998-00-0003-05
30 - 47 Large Adult 0998-00-0003-02 0683-07-0001-01
24 - 36 Adult 0998-00-0003-01 0683-07-0001-02
18 - 27 Child 0998-00-0003-03 0683-07-0001-03
16 - 25 Small Child 0998-00-0003-04 0683-07-0001-04
10 - 19 Infant 0998-00-0003-06
6 - 11 Newborn 0998-00-0003-07
11 - 17 Neonatal, Size 3 0683-03-0003-02
9 - 13 Neonatal, Size 2 0683-03-0002-02
7 - 10 Neonatal, Size 1 0683-03-0001-02
6- 8 Neonatal, Size 0 0683-03-0004-02
COLOR CODED CUFFS**

46 - 66 Thigh - Brown 0998-00-0003-26
33 - 47 Large Adult - Grey 0998-00-0003-25
25 - 35 Adult - Tan 0998-00-0003-24
18 - 26 Child - Red 0998-00-0003-23
10 - 19 Infant - Green 0998-00-0003-22
6 - 11 New Born - Blue 0998-00-0003-21
* When using the thigh cuff, this product will not comply with AAMI accuracy standards.
** The limb circumferences of the Color Coded Cuffs adhere to the AHA guidelines for size.
A cuff that is too narrow for the limb will result in erroneously high readings. The correct size
of the pressure cuff for a given patient has, among other considerations, a direct bearing on
the accuracy of the obtained NIBP measurements. Base your selection of the cuff size on the
limb circumference of the patient. Table 1-4 on page 1-25 indicates the available Datascope
cuffs for use with the Datascope Passport Monitor. The design dimensions of the cuffs and
their intended uses are based on recommendations of the American Heart Association.
NOTE: See Optional Accessories in the Operating Instructions, for a

detailed list of cuffs.
NOTE: Cuffs become more supple as they age and sometimes

develop permanent folds that can leave temporary marks
on the limb. Any cuffs that exhibit this effect should be
replaced.
NOTE: Ensure that the pressure tubes are not compressed or

restricted.

The pressure on the limb may not fall to zero between measurements if the cuff is wrapped
too tightly. Therefore, assure that the cuff is properly applied.
The skin is sometimes fragile (i.e., on pediatrics, geriatrics, etc.). In these cases, a longer
timer interval should be considered to decrease the number of cuff inflations over a period of
time. In extreme cases, a thin layer of soft roll or webril cotton padding may be applied to
the limb in order to cushion the skin when the cuff is inflated. This measure may affect NIBP
performance and should be used with caution.
2. Attach cuff hose to NIBP Connector (24).

3. Apply the cuff to the patient. To reduce errors, the cuff should be fitted snugly, with little
or no air present within the cuff. Be sure the cuff lies directly against the patient’s skin.
No clothing should come between the patient and the cuff.
NOTE: The NIBP cuff should not be placed on a limb that is being
utilized for any other medical procedure. For example, an
I.V. catheter or an SpO2 sensor.
4. Select Patient Size through the PATIENT MENU as described in “Menus” on page 1-64.
Choices are ADULT, PEDIATRIC or NEONATE.
5. If necessary, enter the NIBP parameter menu to change the initial cuff inflation pressure.
Initial cuff inflation pressures depend on the PATIENT SIZE setting. The choices of cuff
inflation are:
TABLE 1-5 Cuff Inflations
PATIENT SIZE SETTING INITIAL CUFF INFLATION VALUES

Adult 100 - 260 mmHg
Pediatric 60 - 180 mmHg
Neonate 40 - 120 mmHg
6. Press START (9) to begin an NIBP measurement.
NOTE: Inflate the cuff only after proper application to the patient’s
limb. Cuff damage can result if the cuff is left unwrapped
and then inflated.
The cuff begins to inflate to the selected cuff pressure. After reaching the selected value the
cuff begins to slowly deflate and the Datascope Passport Monitor collects oscillometric
pulsations.
If the initial cuff inflation is found to be inadequate, the unit retries with a higher inflation
pressure (+50 mmHg in the adult mode; +30 mmHg in the pediatric and neonate modes).
Have the patient remain still to avoid the introduction of unnecessary motion artifact. After the
cuff pressure drops below the diastolic pressure, the results of the measurement are
displayed.
If NIBP is the only parameter measured with the Passport, a heart rate can be derived from
NIBP. The HR source menu selection must be in the Auto mode (i.e., not selected for ECG, IBP
or SpO2) and no heart rate alarm limits are set. (see “Alarms” on page 1-49).

If NIBP is a selected trend trigger, then NIBP and heart rate values are stored in trend lists.
The NIBP and NIBP heart rate will be automatically removed from the display after 15
minutes have elapsed.
If another heart rate source is selected (ECG, IBP or SpO2)< before the 15 minute display
time has elapsed, the NIBP heart rate will be replaced by the heart rate from the selected
source.
To display heart rate from NIBP:
a. Choose AUTO for HR source.

b. Discontinue monitoring of ECG, SpO2 and IBP.
c. Set high and low heart rate alarms to off.
d. Make a valid NIBP measurement.
During or after an NIBP measurement, one of several advisory messages may be

displayed. Refer to “Status Messages” on page 1-57, for their explanations.
7. If desired, press DEFLATE (12) to interrupt a measurement. The cuff will deflate.
1.3.5.2 Automatic Initiation of NIBP Measurements

Follow steps 1 - 5 in Section 1.3.5.1 on page 1-25.
6. Press INTERVAL (11) until the desired time displays. The choices are: OFF, continuous,
1, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60, and 120 minutes.
7. A measurement will be taken when the selected interval has elapsed. If an immediate
measurement is desired, press START (10).
NOTE: If the monitor is in the interval mode when it is turned on,

no measurement will be taken until the “START” key is
depressed. Subsequent measurements are referenced to the
time the unit was turned on. See example in Section 1.3.5.5
on page 1-28.
NOTE: When the NIBP continuous interval is chosen, the Passport

will continually take back to back blood pressure readings.
As a safety precaution, a five minute limit is placed on
continuous measurements. After 5 minutes, the NIBP
interval will automatically switch to measurements taken
every 5 minutes.
Automatic Adjustment in the Timer Mode

In the timer mode, the unit adjusts the inflation pressure according to the previous reading of
the systolic pressure. After the first measurement in the timer mode, the inflation pressure is
the previous systolic +50 mmHg in the Adult Mode and +30 mmHg in the pediatric and
neonate mode.

Suspension of Automatic NIBP Feature

To suspend an automatically timed measurement sequence or to end a measurement cycle
already in progress (deflate cuff):
1. Press DEFLATE (12).
To take an immediate measurement and resume a suspended timed measurement

sequence:
2. Press START (10).
NOTE: Press DEFLATE (12) at any time to postpone a scheduled

measurement or to terminate a measurement cycle already
in progress.

when Using Automatically Cycled Blood Pressure Cuffs”.
1.3.5.3 NIBP Pressure Limit Fail Safe

If the cuff pressure is over-pressurized, the cuff will automatically vent to atmosphere and the
NIBP message window reads CUFF OVERPRESSURE.
The unit must be turned off and back on again to reset the overpressure switch before any
new measurements are taken.
1.3.5.4 Cuff Inflation Time

If the cuff pressure does not attain 20 mmHg within 40 seconds of the start of inflation or if
the target pressure is not reached within another 60 seconds, then the cuff is vented and the
“RETRY” or “UNABLE TO MEASURE” message will display in the NIBP message window.
1.3.5.5 START and DEFLATE Functions

The START and DEFLATE functions have the following effects on the timed measurement
sequence.
• INTERVAL is set and you Press START (10):

An unscheduled measurement is made. Taking this unscheduled measurement does not affect
the timing of the interval cycle, therefore, the scheduled measurements will be taken as if
there were no interruptions. Only one measurement is taken for each measurement cycle -
even if the unscheduled measurement coincides with the scheduled measurement.

• INTERVAL is set and you press DEFLATE (12):

The timed measurement is suspended and the cuff deflates.
• INTERVAL is set and you change the interval:

The measurement cycle is reset with the new interval. A measurement will be taken after the
new interval has elapsed.
For example, with the interval set to five minutes:

TABLE 1-6 Interval Sequence
TIME MODE/TIMER INTERACTION RESULT

9:45 Unit turned on with interval set to 5 minutes. No measurement taken
9:52 Start key pressed Measurement taken
9:55 Timer requests a measurement Measurement taken
10:00 Not in Deflate mode and timer requests a measurement Measurement taken
10:04 Deflate mode is entered Deflate message is
displayed on display
10:05 Timer requests a measurement Measurement is skipped
10:07 Interval is changed to 10 min. Interval timing is reset
1.3.6 ECG Acquisition

The patient ECG signal is acquired with a patient cable and skin electrodes. The type of skin
electrode and technique of applying the electrodes are major factors in determining the
quality of the signal obtained. Use high quality, silver-silver chloride electrodes. These are
designed to acquire the ECG with excellent base line stability, recovery from defibrillation,
and minimum artifact from patient movement.
WARNING: Ensure that the conductive parts of ECG electrodes do not

1. For optimal skin contact, thoroughly prep patient skin for electrode placement by doing
the following.
• Shave hair from electrode sites.
• Cleanse skin thoroughly with alcohol to remove skin oils.
• Dry with a rough towel or gauze to remove dry skin.
• Attach electrodes to lead wire first before placing onto patient.
NOTE: Using more than one type of electrode on the same patient
should be avoided because of variations in electrical
resistance.

2. Use the ESIS choke cable if an electro-surgical device is to be used on the patient.
3. Plug patient cable into the ECG (27) connector.
An ECG waveform should now be present on the screen and the heart rate read-out
should now be functional.
4. Select desired lead setting by pressing the front panel ECG LEAD key (5). Lead II is
automatically selected at power-up.
5. Select desired ECG size by pressing the front panel ECG SIZE key (6). An ECG of 1cm/
mV is automatically selected at power-up.
6. If cascaded ECG is desired in waveform 2, use the Set-up menu, Section 1.3.4, to
choose this option.
7. Choose HR source for rate meter from HR menu. Choices are: ECG, BP1, SpO2, or
AUTO. AUTO selects the source from a hierarchy (ECG, IBP1, SpO2) of what is currently
monitored. If no HR source is found, then an alarm tone is sounded.Press BEEP VOLUME
(18) to set the volume of the systole beep.

Messages Associated with ECG Leads

“Lead Off”
• The Passport will display the message “Lead Off” to indicate when ECG monitoring is
inoperative.
“ECG Lead Fault”
• When ECG lead I, II or III is being monitored, a lead fault sensed by RA, LA, or LL will
cause the “ECG Lead Fault” message to display.
• When lead aVR, aVL, or aVF is being monitored, a lead fault sensed by RA, LA, LL, or RL
will cause the “ECG Lead Fault” message to display. When the specified 3-Lead cable is
used, the “ECG Lead Fault” message will display because the RL lead is not available.
• When ECG V lead is being monitored, a lead fault sensed on RA, LA, LL, RL or C will
cause the “ECG Lead Fault” message to display. When the specified 3-Lead cable is
used, the “ECG Lead Fault will display because the RL and C is not available.
WARNING: Do not use the following 3-Lead ECG cables with Passport 5L
(P/N, 0998-00-0126-xx) and 5L-CE (P/N, 0998-00-0131-xx):
0012-00-0620-05, -06, -07, -08; 0012-00-0722-05, -06, -07,
-08; 0012-00-0723-05, -06, -07, -08; 0012-00-0724-05, -06,
-07, -08. The above 3-Lead cables contain a jumper wire
which connects RL (right leg) to LL (left leg). As a result, when
you view aVR, aVL and aVF you will see the appropriate ECG
waveforms (even though you are using a 3-lead cable).
However, there may be excessive noise on these waveforms
which can corrupt the heart rate calculation. See Section 5 in
the Operating Instructions for a list of the proper ECG cables.

1.3.6.1 Adult Electrode Placement

For 5 Lead ECG Monitoring
W hite Black
RA LA
Brown
V Lead
C ( any position)
Gr een
Red
RL LL
FIGURE 1-15 5-Lead Electrode Placement
• Place black electrode on left shoulder under clavicle.

• Place white electrode on right shoulder under clavicle.
• Place red electrode on lower left abdomen under the sixth rib.
• Place green electrode on lower right abdomen under the ribs.
• Place the brown lead in any one of the V lead (V1 - V6) positions, see Figure 1-17 on
page 33.

Description of V-Lead Placement
RA LA
V6
V1
V5
V4
LL
RL
V2 V3
FIGURE 1-16 V-Lead Electrode Placement
• V1-Fourth intercostal space, right sternal border.

• V2-Fourth intercostal space, left sternal border.
• V3-Midway between V2 and V4 on a line joining these 2 locations.
• V4-Fifth interspace in mid-clavicular line.
• V5-Fifth interspace in anterior axillary line.
• V6-Fifth interspace in mid-axillary line.

For Lead II ECG Monitoring
Whit e Black W hite
RA LA RA
Black Red
LA
LL
Red
LL
FIGURE 1-17 3-Lead Electrode Placement FIGURE 1-18 3-Lead Electrode Placement
(standard configuration) (for MCL)
For Lead II ECG Monitoring For MCL
• Place black electrode on left shoulder under • Place white electrode on left shoulder
clavicle. under clavicle.
• Place white electrode on right shoulder • Place black electrode on right sternal
under clavicle. border, 4th intercostal space.
• Place red electrode on lower left abdomen • Place red electrode on midaxillary line, 5th
under the sixth rib. intercostal space.
• Place lead select on lead II. • Select lead I for monitoring.
• For MCL, select lead II for monitoring.
1.3.6.2 Neonatal Electrode Placement
White
LA Red
RA
Black
FIGURE 1-19 Neonatal Electrode Placement
Lead placement on the neonate with a three lead set is directed towards obtaining the best
respiration waveform. The thoracic impedance is measured between the RA and LA
electrodes therefore, the electrodes must be placed across the chest from each other to
optimize measurement of chest movement.

1.3.7 Invasive Pressure Acquisition

1. Plug the pressure transducer into the PRESSURE TRANSDUCER connector (28) or (29) on
the side panel.
2. To establish a monitoring site introduce an arterial pressure catheter into the patient’s
artery in accordance with standard hospital procedures. “Best practice,” as determined
by the medical community, should be observed.
NOTE: The arterial pressure catheter should not be used on a limb

that is being utilized for any other medical procedure. For
example, an I.V. catheter or an SpO2 sensor.
3. Connect catheter line with flushing device to the pressure transducer.

4. Zero pressure transducer as follows:
Initially, a “TRANSDUCER NOT ZEROED” message is displayed in the parameter

window, indicating the need to zero the transducer.
a. Open transducer vent to atmosphere.
b. Press ZERO (8) or (9) and hold for a minimum of one second.
After one second has elapsed, an audible click will sound, and the automatic zero
process is complete. The pressure display should indicate zeros.
NOTE: If the transducer offset should exceed 120 mmHg, it will not
be possible to automatically zero the transducer. Pressure
values will be —- and an “UNABLE TO ZERO” message
replaces the “TRANSDUCER NOT ZEROED” message.
5. Close the pressure transducer vent from atmosphere and check that the pressure
waveform is displayed on the screen.
6. Select the desired pressure scale in the IBP Menu. The choices are: 37.5, 75, 150, or
300 mmHg.
7. Flush arterial line at regular intervals per standard hospital procedure.
NOTE: Pressure transducers are protected against the effects of

defibrillation and electrocautery.
1.3.8 Sequence for Establishing SpO2

To obtain SpO2 measurements, SpO2 Heart Rate, and the plethysmographic waveform from
the Passport Monitor (including units equipped with Nellcor® SpO2).
1. Select the appropriate sensor for the patient.
Guidelines for the selection of Datascope sensors are provided in the Table 1-7 on
page 1-38.
2. Plug the patient cable into the SpO2 Connector (25) on the left side panel.
3. Apply sensor and connect to cable.
NOTE: Do not place the sensor on an extremity with an invasive

catheter or blood pressure cuff in place.

4. The digital SpO2 values and SpO2 heart rate will be displayed in the SpO2 parameter
window.
5. If a pleth waveform is desired, enter the set-up menu as described in Section 1.3.4, Use
of Menus, to display it as waveform 2.
6. To change the size of the waveform displayed select the SpO2 menu and chose the
desired size. Choices are: 1, 2, 3 or 4.
7. Press BEEP VOLUME (18) to set the volume of the SpO2 beep.
1.3.8.1 Datascope Pulse Oximetry Sensors

A. Introduction
A wide range of Datascope sensors are available for connection to Datascope Passport
Monitors equipped with Datascope SpO2. The sensors cover both short-term and long-term
monitoring needs on patients ranging from neonates to large adults.
The DATASENSOR is intended for short-term adult monitoring.
The FLEXISENSOR® SD, available in five different sizes, provides both short-term and long-
term monitoring for large adults, adult ear, adults, pediatrics, infants, and neonates. The
FLEXISENSOR® SD is used when the DATASENSOR is not convenient or suitable.
The ear sensor is intended for long-term adult monitoring.
A range of disposable bandages are available for use with the FLEXISENSOR® SDs. They
are available in 3 styles, SENSOR GUARD™ (used for large adults, adults and pediatrics),
Coban with SENSOR GUARD™ (used for infants) and LIGHTGUARD™ (used for neonates).
Use of the sensors does not cause any penetration of the skin, nor is there any electrical
contact or transfer of excessive heat to the patient.
The sensor is composed of a light emitting diode (emitter) and a photo diode (detector). The
emitter discharges two colors (wave lengths) of light into the patient’s extremity (finger, toe,
ear). The detector receives that amount of light not absorbed by the blood or tissue
components. The Passport then uses the relative absorption of the two light wavelengths to
compute and display SpO2 and Rate measurements
• electrocautery noise (ESU) noise • good motion artifact rejection

• tracking of weak peripheral • pulse levels
• rejection of ambient light • Can be re-sterilized (ETO sterilization - 3
times)
• patient isolation • ease of application and removal
• long term patient comfort

The key benefits of the sensors are:
• Electrocautery Noise (ESU) Rejection - The sensor configuration of both the

DATASENSOR and the FLEXISENSOR® SD provide uninterrupted monitoring and
absence of false alarms during the use of ESU (ESU can be set at any power level). This
design prevents electro-surgical noise entering the monitor, via the sensor, and interfering
with unit operation.
• Monitoring Restless Patients - Motion artifact rejection is achieved in several ways.
1. The sensor design used with their recommended bandages assures a snug fit of the
sensor to the patient.
2. Light emitting diodes (LEDs) and detectors gather a strong signal from the patient.
3. Software in the Passport evaluates the shape of each pulse and automatically rejects
noisy and unreliable pulses.
4. When in the presence of motion, the software adjusts the “averaging-period”,
increasing it to a maximum of 15 seconds during motion, and automatically reducing it
during quiet periods to obtain a fast response. This combination reduces the number of
monitoring interruptions and false alarms from patient motion.
• Tracking of Weak Peripheral Pulse Levels - Many patients suffer poor peripheral
perfusion due to hypothermia, hypovolemia, reduced cardiac output, etc. The Passport is
designed to automatically increase its gain to track patients with poor peripheral
perfusion.
• Rejection of Ambient Light - Many monitoring situations involve high levels of
ambient light, i.e., operating room lights, neonatal phototherapy, heat warmers, etc. The
PASSPORT Monitor, sensors, and bandages each contribute to the rejection of ambient
light. The monitor automatically measures and corrects for high levels of ambient light.
The enclosed design of the DATASENSOR prohibits the interference of high levels of
ambient light on adults with sensor operation. And the opaque material used in the
composition of the bandages, which are used with the FLEXISENSOR® SD, helps keep
out ambient light.
• Patient Comfort - The FLEXISENSOR® SD line is designed to work with a disposable
bandage of three styles (SENSOR GUARD™, Coban and LIGHTGUARD™) which
conform comfortably and safely to the particular patient’s anatomy.
B. Sensor Selection and Application
Selection of a specific sensor is based on the patient’s size, physical condition, and expected
monitoring duration. General guidelines for the selection of a sensor are provided in the
Table 1-7 on page 1-38. Instructions for the application of a sensor to a patient are provided
in each sensor package.
C. Sensor Connection to the Passport Monitor

1. Align the cable connector on the sensor assembly with the SpO2 Patient Connector (25)
on the Passport Monitor.
2. Push the cable connector into the SpO2 Patient Connector (25). Confirm that the cable
connector is securely in place.
NOTE: To obtain maximum cable use, do not twist the cable

connector when attaching to or disconnecting from the
Passport Monitor.

D. Sensor Inspection
Before use, always inspect sensors, cables, and connectors for damage, i.e., cuts and
abrasions. Do not use the sensor, cable or connector if damaged. Replace with a good
working sensor.
For long sensor life:
• Do not drop on the floor, or give other sharp shocks to the sensor(s).Between use, store
the sensors in the optional FLEXISENSOR® SD Organizer, accessory pouch, or coil the
sensor cable and store on the side of the Passport using the optional cable retainer. For
accessory part number information see Section 5 in the Operations Manual.
• Avoid running any cart, bed, or any piece of equipment over the sensor cable.
• Avoid strong pulls on the sensor cable (10 lbs/4kg).
• Watch for cracks in the DATASENSOR housing.
• Watch for cracks, cuts, rips, fogging, or signs of moisture in the FLEXISENSOR® SD.
E. Sensor Performance
For the BEST performance of all Datascope sensors:
• DO NOT PLACE any sensor on an extremity with an arterial catheter or blood pressure
cuff in place. Placement of an arterial catheter or blood pressure cuff on an extremity may
obstruct normal blood flow. False pulse rate information may result if the FLEXISENSOR®
SD is placed on that same extremity. Place the sensor on the limb opposite the site of the
arterial catheter or blood pressure cuff.
• Encourage the patient to remain still. Patient motion may affect the sensor’s performance.
If it is not possible for the patient to remain still, replace the sensor bandage on the
FLEXISENSOR® SD to assure good adhesion, or change the site of the DATASENSOR.
• Check the DATASENSOR site every 2 hours and check the FLEXISENSOR® SD site every
8 hours on adults and every 4 hours on neonatal patients for indications of skin
abrasions, sensor displacement, sensor damage, or circulation impairment. Check the
sensor site every 4 hours if the ear clip is used. If necessary, remove and reapply the
sensor. If any of the above mentioned indications occur, immediately remove the sensor
and find an alternate site.
NOTE: Check the sensor site more frequently on infant and active
patients.

• Incorrect placement can also reduce the acquired sensor signal, and therefore
compromise performance. Select an alternate site (toe) or use a FLEXISENSOR® SD if the
sensor can not be placed on the patient’s finger correctly or if the fingernails interfere
with the acquisition of a reliable signal.
• Use of the DATASENSOR is not recommended for long-term monitoring (4-6 hours). For
monitoring situations exceeding 4-6 hours, either reposition the DATASENSOR every 2-4
hours to a different site (finger/toe) or use a FLEXISENSOR® SD with its appropriate
bandage.
• Do not over-tighten the sensor bandages. Excessive pressure on the monitoring site can
affect SpO2 readings and may reduce readings below true SpO2. Excessive pressure can
also result in pressure necrosis and other skin damage.
• Sensor configuration provides uninterrupted monitoring in the following situations:
Electro-cautery Noise - ESU rejection is designed into the sensors.
Motion Artifact - The monitor’s software adjusts the “averaging period” increasing it
during motion and reducing it during inactivity. This decreases the number of monitoring
interruptions and false alarms.
Weak Peripheral Pulses - The monitor’s gain is automatically increased to track pulses on
patients with decreased peripheral perfusion.
• SpO2 measurements may interfere with Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) procedures.
• SpO2 is calibrated to display functional saturation.
TABLE 1-7 Sensor Selections
LARGE
ADULT PEDIATRIC INFANT NEONATE ADULT DATA-
SENSORS (LA) ADULT (A) (P) (I) (N) EAR (AE) SENSOR
Approximate >80kg/>176 30 -90kg/ 10 - 40kg/22 4.5 - 10kg/ Up to 5kg/Up >40kg/>88 40+ kg/90+
Patient lbs 66 - 198 lbs - 88 lbs 10 - 22 lbs to 11 lbs lbs lbs
Weight
Where Used Fingers, Toes Fingers, Toes Fingers, Toes Feet, Palms, Feet, Palms, Adult Ear Fingers, Toes
Big Toes Heel,Calf
Long or Short Long and Long and Long and Long and Long and Long and Short Term
Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term
Monitoring
ESIS Included Included Included Included Included Included Included
Reusable Yes Up to 20 Yes Up to 20 Yes Up to 20 Yes Up to Yes Up to 20 Yes Up to 20 Yes 6-Months
Uses Uses Uses 20 Uses Uses Uses
Bandage Adhesive, Adhesive, Adhesive, Non- Non- N/A N/A
Type Disposable Disposable Disposable Adhesive*, Adhesive*
Disposable Disposable
**Part
Numbers
0998-00- 0998-00- 0998-00- 0998-00- 0998-00- 0998-00- 0600-00-
Sensors
0076-06 0076-05 0076-04 0074-03 0074-04 0074-05 0026-01 (3"
sensor
cable)***
Bandages
0683-00- 0683-00- 0683-00- 0683-00- 0683-00- N/A N/A
0409-01 0409-02 0409-03 0415 0440
* Non-adhesive bandages are recommended for premature infants to minimize prenatal skin damage.
** See Accessories, Chapter 5, for more detailed information
*** Additional choices: 0060-00-0026-02 (10’ sensor cable) 0020-00-0071-01 (3’ sensor cable plus 7’ extension
cable)

1.3.9 Sequence for Establishing SpO2 with Nellcor® Pulse Oximetry *

1. Select the appropriate sensor for the patient (Table 3-1 on page 3-4).
2. Plug the sensor directly into the SpO2 connector located on the side panel of the monitor
or if necessary, use a Nellcor® EC-4 or EC-8 sensor extension cable.
* This feature applicable only if available / installed in your unit.







3. The digital SpO2 value will be displayed in the Parameter Window.

4. If a pleth waveform is desired, enter the set-up menu as described in “Use of Menus” on
page 23 to display it as Waveform 2.
5. Press the BEEP VOLUME (18) to set the volume of the SpO2 beep.
1.3.9.1 Nellcor® Sensors

Nellcor® provides a family of sensors suitable for a wide variety of clinical settings and
patients. Specific sensors have been developed for neonates, infants, children, and adults.
OXISENSOR™ oxygen transducers are sterile adhesive sensors with optical components
mounted on adhesive tape. OXIBAND® oxygen transducers and the DURAFORM™ oxygen
transducer system are reusable sensors that are applied with disposable adhesive. The
DURASENSOR® DS-100A adult digit oxygen transducer is a reusable sensor with its optical
components mounted in a plastic casing. The Nellcor® RS-10 reflectance oxygen transducer
is an adhesive sensor for application to forehead or temple.
NOTE: Nellcor®, OXIBAND® and DURASENSOR® are registered

trademarks of Nellcor® Incorporated. OXISENSOR™ and
DURAFORM™ are trademarks of Nellcor Incorporated.
Selecting a Sensor
Sensors are designed for specific sites on patients with designated weight ranges. To select
the appropriate sensor, consider the patient’s weight, level of activity, adequacy of
perfusion, which sensor sites are available, whether sterility is required, and the anticipated
duration of monitoring.
Cleaning and Re-use

Do not immerse any OXISENSOR™, DURASENSOR®, OXIBAND®, or DURAFORM™
oxygen transducer, the Nellcor® RS-10 oxygen transducer, or any Nellcor® adhesive in
water or cleaning solution. Clean DURASENSOR®, OXIBAND®, and DURAFORM™ oxygen
transducers, and the Nellcor® RS-10 oxygen transducer by wiping with a disinfectant such
as 70% alcohol. Do not sterilize by irradiation, steam, or ethylene oxide. Use a new
OXIBAND® adhesive wrap or FORM-A adhesive bandage for each patient. Do not re-
sterilize OXISENSOR™ oxygen transducers.
Performance Considerations
To ensure optimal performance, use an appropriate sensor, apply it as directed, and observe
all warnings and cautions.
If excessive ambient light is present, cover the sensor site with opaque material. Failure to do
so may result in inaccurate measurements. Light sources that can affect performance include
surgical lights, especially those with a xenon light source, bilirubin lamps, fluorescent lights,
infrared heating lamps, and direct sunlight.

If poor perfusion affects instrument performance, and the patient weighs more than 50 kg
(110 lbs.), consider using the OXISENSOR™ R-15 adult nasal oxygen transducer. Because
the R-15 obtains its measurements from the nasal septal anterior ethmoid artery, an artery
supplied by the internal carotid, this sensor may obtain measurements when peripheral
perfusion is relatively poor. For low peripheral perfusion, consider using the Nellcor® RS-10
reflectance oxygen transducer, which is applied to the forehead or temple.
If patient movement presents a problem:
• Verify that the sensor is properly and securely applied.

• Use a new sensor with fresh adhesive backing.
• Move the sensor to a less active site.
• Use a type of sensor that tolerates some patient motion, such as the OXISENSOR™ D-25,
D-20, N-25, or I20 oxygen transducer.
TABLE 1-8 Nellcor® Sensor Family
SELECTION D25/D25L R-15 N-25 I-20 D-20 RS-10

GUIDE ADULT ADULT NEONATAL INFANT PEDIATRIC ADULT
Patient Size >30 kg >50 kg <3 kg >40 kg 1-20 kg 10-50 kg >40 kg
Duration of Use Short or Short or Short or Long Short or Long Short or Long Short Term
Long Term Long Term Term Term Term
Sterility Sterile1 Sterile1 Sterile1 Sterile1 Sterile1 Non-sterile
Patient Activity Limited Inactive Limited Activity Limited Activity Limited Limited
Activity Activity Activity
OXISENSOR OXISENSOR OXISENSOR OXISENSOR OXISENSOR RS-10
adult digit adult nasal neonatal infant digit pediatric digit reflectance
oxygen oxygen oxygen oxygen oxygen oxygen
transducer transducer transducer transducer transducer transducer
1 In an unopened, undamaged package.
All Nellcor® accessories and sensors must be purchased form Nellcor® Inc., 25495
Whitehall Street, Hayward, Ca. 94545. To contact Nellcor®, call 1-800-NELLCOR.
1.3.9.2 Special Features

Automatic Calibration
The oximetry subsystem incorporates automatic calibration mechanisms. It is automatically
calibrated each time it is turned on, at periodic intervals thereafter, and whenever a new
sensor is connected. Also, the intensity of the sensor’s LEDs is adjusted automatically to
compensate for differences in tissue thickness.
Each sensor is calibrated when manufactured; the effective mean wavelength of the red LED
is determined and encoded into a calibration resistor in the sensor plug. The instrument’s
software reads this calibration resistor to determine the appropriate calibration coefficients
for the measurements obtained by that sensor.

Oximetry Operating Modes

The Passport’s three operating modes for SpO2 enable it to make accurate measurements
despite differing levels of patient activity. In all three modes, the Passport updates its
measurements with every pulse beat. Data from the most recent beat replaces data from the
earliest beat and new averages are determined and displayed. The three modes are: 1
(default setting), 2, and 3.
1. the default operating mode, uses a 5 to 7 second averaging time and is useful in
situations in which the patient is relatively inactive.
2. this mode uses a 2 to 3 second averaging time and therefore is more affected by patient
motion. It is useful for special applications that require a fast response time, such as
sleep studies.
3. this mode uses a 10 to 15 second averaging time and consequently is least affected by
patient motion. In this mode, pulse rate is not displayed and there is no pulse tone.
Pleth Auto Scaling

The Pleth waveform is automatically scaled when using Nellcor® SpO2. There is no
adjustment that can be made to the pleth waveform size.
Changing Operating Modes

To change from 1 to 2 or 3, select SpO2 in the menu and toggle through the choices of 1, 2,
and 3 using the up and down arrow keys. Press SELECT (2) then END (3) to lock the choice
in and return to monitoring mode. See “Use of Menus” on page 23 for details on using
menus.
The operating mode will be displayed in the pleth waveform window.
1.3.10 Respiration Monitoring

The Passport Monitor offers two kinds of respiratory monitoring: thoracic impedance and
CO2 waveform. Either method may be used to ensure that the patient in not apneic, and both
methods offer certain benefits and limitations.

1.3.10.1 Thoracic Impedance

The Passport Monitor presents a small electrical signal across the RA and LA ECG limb leads.
This signal changes as the patient’s chest wall rises and falls during the breath cycle. The
advantage of the thoracic impedance method is that respiration is obtained non-invasively
and without any extra cost. Disadvantages include loss of signal when “choke blocks” are
utilized, possible cardiac interference, and missed apneic events.
Choke blocks are electrical filters that may be used in electro-cautery environments where
ECG interference can be substantial. These filters remove the electro-cautery noise, but also
block the signal used by the Passport Monitor to measure respiration.

The filling and emptying of the heart chambers can interfere with the thoracic impedance
signal, so called cardiovascular artifact (CVA), such that the respiratory signal matches the
heart rate. The Passport warns the operator when the respiration value equals the heart rate
by displaying the CVA message.
If the patient’s airway is obstructed and the patient attempts to breath, then the chest wall can
move and create a respiratory signal even though no gas flow is occurring to the patient.
1.3.10.2 CO2 Waveform

When used with the mainstream CO2 analyzer the Passport may use the breath waveform to
report the respiration rate by measuring the actual breaths per unit time. The advantage of
the CO2 waveform method is that the signal is a direct result of respiration and can only
occur if the patient is actually breathing. The disadvantage to the CO2 waveform method is
that intubation is required.
1.3.10.3 Respiration Monitoring on the Passport

1.3.10.3.1 Thoracic Impedance
1. Select the SET-UP menu.
2. Select WAVEFORM 3 and set to RESP (if waveform desired).
3. Select RESP SOURCE and set to ECG.
4. Press the END key (3).
1.3.10.3.2 CO2 Waveform (requires optional mainstream CO2)

2. Select WAVEFORM 3 and set to CO2 (if waveform desired).
3. Select RESP SOURCE and set to CO2.
4. Press the END key (3).
1.3.11 Gas Monitoring

The Passport offers the Capnostat mainstream method of measuring respiratory rate and end
tidal CO2. Capnostat requires a hardware option within the Passport Monitor. It utilizes a
large lumen adapter which is placed directly into the endotracheal tube.

1.3.11.1 Sequence for Establishing Capnostat CO2

1. Plug the CO2 sensor into the Passport connector. The “Sensor Warming Up” message is
displayed.
2. Select CO2 as the Resp. Source in the Setup Menu.
3. Snap a clean airway adapter into the U-shaped sensor. Align the line on the bottom of
the adapter with the line on the bottom of the sensor.
4. Position the airway adapter between the endotracheal tube and the Y-piece of the
breathing circuit.
5. After the Passport has detected valid breaths, it will display numbers for ETCO2, Inspired
CO2 and Respiratory Rate.
6. Select the CO2 waveform to be displayed on Waveform 2 or Waveform 3 using the
Setup Menu.
7. If desired the CO2 waveform scale can be changed by entering the CO2 menu. See
Section 1.3.4, “Use of Menus” for details.
8. The CO2 menu also has provisions for N2O and O2 compensation.
NOTE: See “User Configuration Mode” on page 53 for Barometric

Pressure and CO2 Units selection.
NOTE: See “CO2 Messages (only units equipped with Capnostat

CO2)” on page 60 for more details on messages.
1.3.11.2 Adapter Calibration

Adapter calibration compensates for the optical differences between the adult and neonatal
airway adapters.
Adapter calibration needs to be performed each time the type of airway adapter is switched.
For example: if switching from using an adult to a neonatal or neonatal to an adult adapter a
calibration is needed (not if switching from an adult adapter to another adult adapter).
Adapter calibration should also be performed if the message “Check Adapter” displays.
To perform an adapter calibration:
1. Place the sensor and airway adapter away from all sources of CO2 (including the
patient’s and your own exhaled breath, and ventilator exhaust valves).
2. Choose Start Adapter Cal - Yes from the CO2 menu. (See “Use of Menus” on page 23.)
NOTE: If the monitor detects changing CO2 levels (breaths) during

an adapter calibration, an “Adapter Cal Failure” message
displays. Remove the source of CO2 and repeat the
calibration.

1.3.11.3 Adapter Selection

Selection of an airway adapter is based on the diameter of the patient’s endotracheal tube.
There are two sizes of airway adapters available:
• Adult Airway Adapter (P/N 0103-15-0003). For use on patients with endotracheal tube
diameters greater than 4.0 mm.
• Neonatal Airway Adapter (P/N 0103-15-0013). For use on patients with endotracheal
tube diameters less than or equal to 4.0 mm.
1.3.11.4 Use of Adult Airway Adapter

The adult airway adapter should be used when monitoring patients with endotracheal tube
1. Verify the windows are clean and dry. Clean or replace the adapter if necessary.
2. Snap the airway adapter into the Capnostat® sensor. Align the line on the bottom of the
airway adapter with the line on the bottom of the Capnostat®. Press the sensor and
airway adapter together until they “click”.
3. If necessary, perform an adapter calibration. See “Adapter Calibration” on page 44.
4. Place the Capnostat® / airway adapter assembly between the elbow and the ventilator
circuit wye.
NOTE: For optimal results, DO NOT place the airway adapter

between the endotracheal tube and the elbow, as this may
allow patient secretions to block the adapter windows.
Position the airway adapter with it’s windows in a vertical

and NOT a horizontal position. This helps keep patient
secretions from “pooling” on the windows.
To prevent “rain-out” and moisture from draining into the airway adapter, DO NOT place
the airway adapter in a gravity dependent position.
CAPNOSTAT R
CO 2 Sensor
To
Ventilator
Elbow Wye Cable Clip
Adult Airway Adapter
To
Patient
FIGURE 1-20 Adult Airway Adapter

5. Check that the connections have been made correctly by verifying a proper CO2
waveform (capnogram) on the monitor display.
NOTE: The CO2 waveform is displayed by choosing CO2 as

Waveform 2 or 3 and the Resp. Source in the Setup menu
6. The sensor cable should face away from the patient. To secure the sensor cable safely
out of the way, attach the sensor cable holding clips to the airway tubing, then connect
the sensor cable to the clips.

1.3.11.5 Use of Neonatal Airway Adapter

The neonatal airway adapter should be used when monitoring patients with endotracheal
2. Snap the airway adapter into the Capnostat® sensor. Align the line on the bottom of the
airway adapter with the line on the bottom of the Capnostat®. Press the sensor and
airway adapter together until they “click”.
3. If necessary, perform an adapter calibration. See “Adapter Calibration” on page 44.
circuit wye.
NOTE: Position the airway adapter with it’s windows in a vertical

To prevent “rain-out” and moisture from draining into the

airway adapter, DO NOT place the airway adapter in a
gravity dependent position.
CAPNOSTAT R
CO 2 Sensor
To
Patient
To
Ventilator
Neonatal Airway Adapter

Wye
FIGURE 1-21 Pediatric Airway Adapter
For routine maintenance of airway adapter, separate the system between the endotracheal
tube and the airway adapter. Lavage and suctioning of the airway can then be performed
without fluids and mucous accumulating on the neonatal airway adapter window.
NOTE: The CO2 waveform is displayed by choosing CO2 as

Waveform 2 or 3 and the Resp Source in the Setup menu.

1.3.11.6 CO2 Sensor Calibration Verification

Calibration can be verified at anytime and should be verified at least once a week.
To verify calibration:
1. Verify the Passport is turned on and the Capnostat® is connected and warmed-up.
2. Place the Capnostat® sensor onto the REF (reference) cell. The reference cell is the one
farthest from the side of the monitor. The sensor cable should face away from the
Passport.
3. The “Sensor on Reference Cal” message is displayed and the reference value is
displayed in the ETCO2 window. The value should be between 36 and 40 Torr.
o
R
E
F
FIGURE 1-22 Reference Cell
1.3.11.7 CO2 Sensor Calibration

The Capnostat® CO2 sensor does NOT need to be calibrated at each monitor power up.
Calibration of a sensor is required the first time a particular sensor is connected to a

particular monitor and when the monitor requests it.
Once a sensor is calibrated, the Passport can be turned off and on, the sensor can be
unplugged and reconnected, without having to recalibrate. However, if a second sensor is
connected in place of the original, the second sensor must be calibrated and if the original
sensor is used again, it too will have to be recalibrated.

To perform a Capnostat® sensor calibration:
1. Verify the Passport is turned on and the Capnostat® is plugged in and warmed-up.
2. Place the Capnostat® onto the ZERO cell.
3. The “Sensor on Zero Cell” message is displayed.
4. Select Start Zero Cal - Yes from the CO2 menu. The “Zero Cal in Progress” message is
displayed. The "Zero Cal Complete" message is displayed when complete and a 0
value is displayed.
5. Remove sensor from the zero cell and place onto the airway adapter.
o
R
E
F
FIGURE 1-23 Zero Cell
1.3.12 Alarms
The Datascope Passport Monitor provides high and low alarm limits for heart rate (HR),
systolic pressure (BP1/NIBP Sys), diastolic pressure (BP1/NIBP Dia), mean pressure (BP2
Mean), respiration rate, ETCO2, and SpO2. An alarm for apnea delay is also provided.

1.3.12.1 Setting Parameter Alarm Limits

1. Using the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1) select ALARM from the menu window.
When ALARM is highlighted an ALARM MENU is displayed in the multi-function area. A

sample of this alarm menu is shown in Figure 25.
FIGURE 1-24 Alarm Menu
2. Using the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1) and SELECT (2) keys (as described in
“Use of Menus” on page 23) set parameter limits as desired.
1.3.12.2 Alarm Limits

All of the alarm limits have an “OFF” position with the exception of low SpO2 and apnea in
the neonate mode. A separate table of alarm limit settings are maintained for each patient
size. When the patient size is changed the appropriate table is automatically used. See
Table 1-9 on page 1-50 for alarm ranges.
TABLE 1-9 Alarm Limits
ALARM PARAMETERS
HIGH LO
PED/
PARAMETERS ADULT PED/NEONATE ADULT NEONATE
Heart Rate (bpm) Off, 100-250 Off, 100-250 Off, 30-100 Off, 30-100
IBP1 Sys (mmHg) Off, 70-240 Off, 40-180 Off, 5-130 Off, 5-130
+
IBP1 Dia (mmHg) Off, 40-130 Off, 50-100 Off, 5-90 Off, 5-50
NIBP Sys (mmHg) Off, 70-240 Off, 40-180* Off, 50-150 Off, 15-130
NIBP Dia (mmHg) Off, 40-130 Off, 50-100 Off, 30-120 Off, 10-50
Full Battery
IBP2 Mean Off, 5-150 Off, 5-100 Off, 2-100 Off, 2-50
Symbol (mmHg)
SpO2 (%) Off, 80-100 Off, 80-100 50*-99 50*-99
+
Resp Rate (rpm) Off, 30-200*+ Off, 30-200*+ Off, 5-50 Off, 5-50
* These alarm parameters may be set outside the accurate measurement range. Refer to the specifications,
Chapter 6, for accuracy ranges.
Low Battery
+ Respiration rate measurement range is limited to 2 - 150 rpm when Mainstream CO2 is selected as the rate
Symbol source. Values above 150 rpm will be displayed as 150 rpm..

TABLE 1-9 Alarm Limits (Continued)
ALARM PARAMETERS
HIGH LO
PED/
PARAMETERS ADULT PED/NEONATE ADULT NEONATE
Apnea Delay Off, 10-40 Off, 10-30 (Ped) / ETCO2 (Torr) Off, 20-80
(sec) 10 - 20 (Neo)
Off, 20-100 Off, 5-60 Off, 5-60 ETCO2 (%) Off, 2-11
Off, 2-11 Off, 1-8 Off, 1-8 ETCO2 (kPa) Off, 2.0-11.0
Off, 2.0-11.0 Off, 1.0-8.0 Off, 1.0-8.0
+ Respiration rate measurement range is limited to 2 - 150 rpm when Mainstream CO2 is selected as the rate
source. Values above 150 rpm will be displayed as 150 rpm..
NOTE: The alarm parameters that are highlighted in grey are

available only in models that are equipped with the
invasive pressure option.
The ETCO2 alarm is available only in models that are equipped with the CO2 option.
1.3.12.3 Alarm Violations

There are three types of alarm situations. They are Parameter Alarms, a Heart Rate Fault
Alarm, and an Apnea Alarm.
NOTE: The heart rate alarm tone has a different pitch than other
alarms.
A. Parameter Alarms
An alarm condition exists if the parameter is equal to or is outside the high/low limit range.
When an alarm limit is violated, the following actions occur:
• The alarm LED (12) flashes.

• The alarm tone is sounded (unless it is muted with the MUTE key (14)).
• The recorder prints the currently selected waveform (if Record On Alarm is selected from
the Recorder menu).
NOTE: On the waveform printouts that are caused by alarm

situations, a bar is printed above the alarming area. On
trend printouts, the value that has caused an alarm is
printed with square brackets around it. If the recorder is
printing a waveform and an alarm situation occurs, the
currently printing waveform will be completed and then the
alarm waveform printout will be printed.
• The violated parameter is displayed in reverse graphics in the parameter window.

B. Heart Rate Fault Alarm

The Heart Rate Fault Alarm occurs if the selected heart rate source is no longer able to detect
a heart rate. This may be due to an ECG lead fault, a problem with an SpO2 sensor, or
various other reasons. This alarm is only active if a low heart rate limit is set. The alarm
operation is the same as for a parameter alarm. The heart rate value will be dashes (“—-”)
and inverted. A further message from a lead fault or SpO2 fault may be present to help
diagnose the problem.
NOTE: Only the value displayed in the heart rate window is used
to determine heart rate alarm conditions.
C. Apnea Alarm
The Apnea Alarm is active when the respiration function is enabled. The Apnea Alarm is
violated when a breath is not detected for a longer period of time than the apnea delay
specified in the Alarm Menu. The alarm operation is the same as for a parameter alarm.
D. General Alarms
• ALARMS OFF - If alarms are not set on any one parameter, an alarm bell off symbol will
be displayed next to the numerical data for that parameter.
NOTE: Both the high and low alarm must be set for a particular
parameter for the bell symbol to go away.
• VOLUME KEY - Increases or decreases the intensity of the alarm.

• MUTE - Silences all currently alarming parameters for 2 minutes. Any new alarms that
occur, while an alarm tone is muted, will disable the mute and sound the alarm. An alarm
mute symbol (a loudspeaker with a cross through it) is displayed next to each muted
alarm. The word MUTE is displayed above the menu selections area during this time. The
alarms may be suspended for 2 minutes by pressing and holding the MUTE key (14) for 3
seconds. Alarms suspended is indicated by displaying the alarm mute symbol in reverse
graphics. The words ALL MUTE are displayed above the menu selections area during this
time. When the Audio Alarm Standby mode has been enabled and the MUTE key (14) is
pressed and held for 4 seconds, all alarms are indefinitely suspended. This is indicated
by a flashing alarm mute symbol in all parameter windows and a flashing “AUDIO
ALARM STANDBY” message is displayed above the menu selections. Press MUTE to
activate alarms.
1.3.12.4 Battery Indicators

When the monitor is powered from the battery, a battery symbol will display.
When the battery charge is low, but not below the cutoff voltage, the low battery symbol will
display and a beep is generated every 3 seconds.
NOTE: Approximately 15 minutes of operating time remains when

the low battery symbol displays.
Battery recharge time is 16 hours.
NOTE: Recorder is not operational when the battery charge is low.

1.3.13 How to Set the Clock

1. Enter the User Configuration Mode. (See Section 1.3.14.)
2. Use the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1) to select Date or Time in the User
Configuration Menu. Press the SELECT Key (2) to choose that menu item. The current
choice is highlighted.
3. Use the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1) to select a new setting. Once the desired
choice is highlighted, press the SELECT key (2).
4. To save this setting press the SELECT key (2) and then the END key (3).
Repeat for each menu item that needs to change.
1.3.14 User Configuration Mode

The Trend Configuration, Time/Date, Temperature Scale, Heart Rate/SpO2 Size Select,
Alarm Audio Delay, Audio Alarm Standby, Serial Output Type, and CO2 settings may
changed in the User Configuration Mode. This function is only available at power up and not
during normal operation. The User Configuration Mode is accessed via a special power-up
sequence.
To enter the User Configuration Mode:
1. Turn the POWER switch (34) ON.

2. After the “DIAGNOSTIC IN PROGRESS” message is displayed, press and hold the
FREEZE key (6) until a second beep is heard (approximately 2 seconds). The User
Configuration Mode will display.
The operation of the menu system is the same as the operation of the menu system during
normal operation (See Section 1.3.4). To access normal operation when user configuration
is complete, either time-out (no Set-Up key pressed within 1 minute) or press the END (3) key
for 3 seconds. The following table describes the User Configuration Mode menu structure:
TABLE 1-10 User Configuration Menu List
USER CONFIG.
MENU MENU ITEM CHOICES
Date Year 0 to 99
Month 1 to 12
Day 1 to 31
Time Hours 0 to 23
Minutes 0 to 59
Trend Trigger Alarms, NIBP*, Interval, NIBP and
Interval, Interval and Alarms,
Interval and NIBP, Interval and
NIBP and Alarms
Interval 1, 2.5, 5*, 10, 20, 30, 60, 120
mins.
Temperature Scale Fahrenheit, Centigrade
CO2 Barometric Pressure 500 to 800 mmHg
CO2 Units TORR, kPa**, %

TABLE 1-10 User Configuration Menu List
USER CONFIG.
HR SpO2 Size Size Change HR Large/SpO2 Small, HR Small/
SpO2 Large*
Alarm Audio Delay Delay Off*, 4, 6, 8 sec.
Audio Alarm Function Off*, On
Standby
Serial Output Type Protocol VISA*, ACCUTORR, Message,
DIAP
For a graphic representation of the configuration menus see sections 1.3.19.11 through
1.3.19.19.
* Factory default settings.

** kPa is not available when VISA is selected as the serial output type.
The Trend Trigger setting is what causes new data to be stored in the trend memory. It may
be set to trigger whenever there is an alarm, an NIBP measurement is performed, the trend
timer expires (interval), or may be set to trigger at any combination of these items. The trend
interval is only used when trend is triggering on interval, and it is used to set the time
between interval triggers. The trend interval is independent of the NIBP interval.
The temperature scale can be changed between Fahrenheit and Centigrade.
The HR SpO2 size change option allows the user to select a large SpO2 reading compared
to HR or vice versa.
The Alarm Audio Standby allows the user to enable (or disable) this feature (see section
3.13.3).
The Serial Output Type allows the user to select the communication protocols for interfacing
with other specialized equipment: VISA, ACCUTORR (sends data the same way as an
ACCUTORR), message (for diagnostic purposes) with the Passport Monitor.
Once the unit is in the User Configuration Mode, the time and/or date can be changed using
the set-up keys as described in Section 1.3.4, “Use of Menus”.
1.3.15 Recorder (optional)

The Datascope Passport Recorder can provide a permanent record of a patient’s: systolic
pressure, diastolic pressure, mean pressure, heart rate, SpO2, CO2, respiration and
temperature. It is a two trace thermal strip chart recorder with an integral paper spool. The
recorder uses plain white thermal paper 5 cm wide (see Section 4.7 for replacement
instructions).
All grid patterns and data are printed by the recorder.

1.3.15.1 Operation of Printer

1. Using the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1) select RECORDER from the main menu.
When RECORDER is highlighted a RECORDER MENU is displayed in the multi-function

area. A sample of this menu is show below.
FIGURE 1-25 Recorder Menu
2. Press SELECT (2) to enter the RECORDER MENU.

3. Using the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1) and SELECT (2) keys (as described in
“Use of Menus” on page 23) set the desired waveforms or trend to be printed.
4. Press RECORD (19) to initiate a printing or stop a printing when one is in progress.
When RECORD (19) is pressed to initiate a printing, a 16 second strip is printed. The 16
second strip consists of 8 seconds of prior and 8 seconds of post waveform from when
RECORD (19) is pressed. If a continuous printing is required, press and hold RECORD (19)
for 3 seconds (until a beep is heard). Press RECORD again to stop a real time printing.
NOTES:
• When the ECG is frozen and RECORD (19) is pressed, the recorder prints the frozen
displayed ECG.
• If the RECORD key (19) is pressed for 3 seconds while the ECG is frozen, the recorder
prints a continuous real-time ECG waveform.
• If the RECORD key (19) is pressed while List Trend is displayed (and the ECG waveform is
not frozen), the recorder prints the list trend report.
• See Section 4.7, in the Operating Instructions, of paper installation.

1.3.15.2 Printer Formats

Single waveform format:
ECG and pleth waveforms are automatically positioned in the center of the chart paper.
Invasive pressure and respiration waveforms are relative to the lower border. The four
centimeter waveform area has a grid pattern printed as follows: 100% darkness on 1 cm
grid with 50% darkness on 2 mm grid.
The upper and lower borders have the date, time and physiologic parameters currently
available as well as the ECG size and lead configuration the recorder is printing. All
parameters include their units.
FIGURE 1-26 Sample Printout, Single Waveform
Two waveforms separate field format:

The two waveforms are printed in a separate field format with two centimeters assigned to
each waveform. The waveforms do not overlap. Grids are printed as for one waveform.
The upper and lower borders are printed as for the single waveform.
FIGURE 1-27 Sample Printout, Two Waveform
Trend list format:

The list trend data is printed with text running along the length of the strip. If more than one
page of data is available then all additional pages are printed along the length of the strip.

FIGURE 1-28 Sample Printout, Trend List Format
NOTE: On waveform printouts that are caused by alarm situations

(Record on Alarm must be selected YES in the Recorder
menu), a bar is printed above the alarming area. On trend
printouts and in annotations, the value that has caused an
alarm is printed with square brackets around it. If the
recorder is printing a waveform and an alarm situation
occurs, the currently printing waveform will be completed
and then the alarm waveform printout will be printed.
NOTE: IBP1 and IBP2 data is printed only when models are
equipped with the invasive pressure option.
1.3.16 Status Messages

The monitor uses the Message Display Area to provide messages to the user relating to
monitor status. The following lists these messages and a description of the message. The
messages are grouped by function.

1.3.16.1 NIBP Measurement Messages

MESSAGE REASON SOLUTION
NIBP: IDLE Displayed while system is idle. Press START to take a single
measurement. Press
INTERVAL to select an
interval and start timed
measurements.
NIBP: DEFLATE Displayed while the timer Press START to take an
mode is stopped, usually by immediate measurement
pressing the DEFLATE key. and resume timed
measurements.
NIBP: INTERVAL Displayed in the interval Press DEFLATE to suspend
between two timed timed measurements. Press
measurements. INTERVAL to change timer
to OFF to stop timer.
NIBP: INITIALIZING The NIBP system is being Wait until initialization is
initialized. complete, indicated by
NIBP: IDLE message.
Initialization may take up to
3 minutes from power up.
NIBP: FAILURE The NIBP system has detected Power cycle unit. If message
a potential error. reappears, call Service.
NIBP:MEASURING CUFF Displayed during a Press DEFLATE to suspend a
measurement to show the cuff measurement and deflate
pressure. the cuff.
NIBP:RETRY MOTION Measurement has been Retry will be attempted.
attempted but no reading was Have patient remain still.
possible due to detected
motion and the retry limit has
not been reached.
NIBP:RETRY PUMP HIGHER A measurement has been Retry will be attempted.
attempted but no reading was Check that appropriate
possible due to pulse patient size is set. Preset
detection at highest cuff initial inflation pressure.
pressure and the retry limit has
not been reached.
NIBP:RETRY A measurement has been Retry will be attempted.
attempted but no reading was Check for leaks and quality
possible. of peripheral pulses.
Decrease patient movement.
Switch cuff to another limb.
NIBP:UNABLE TO MEASURE* An unsuccessful measurement Switch cuff to another limb.
cycle has been completed. Decrease patient movement.
Press START to retry. Be
prepared to auscultate BP
manually.
NIBP:CUFF OVERPRESSURE The internal hardware cuff Power cycle unit. If message
pressure check valve has been reappears, call Service.
tripped.
• Always have an alternate method of BP verification available.

• On vasoconstricted patients, failure to evacuate air from the cuff can distort BP
measurement.
• Do not place cuff on extremity that has an IV.

• Arm should be at heart level.

* The presence of arrhythmias may increase the time required to complete a measurement and may extend
this time to a point where a measurement cannot be completed.
1.3.16.2 SpO2 Messages

SpO2 NO SENSOR No sensor is connected to the monitor. Attach sensor cable to
the monitor.
SpO2 SENSOR OFF Sensor may not be connected to the Check patient
patient. connection.
SpO2 INTERFERENCE Noise detected on the pulse signal Decrease patient
prevents pulse discrimination. motion, check sensor.
SpO2 PULSE SEARCH Hardware settings are being adjusted in Change to site where
order to discriminate a pulse waveform. pulse is stronger if
patient is
vasoconstricted.
Change or readjust
sensor if loose.
SpO2 WEAK PULSE Detected patient pulse is marginal. Change site.
SpO2 NO PULSE No detectable pulse is measured.
CHECK SpO2 SENSOR Insufficient light is received by the sensor Check alignment of
detector, or the sensor has a malfunction. emitter and detector or
change sensor.
SpO2 PR UNDER 30 Detected pulse rate is below thirty beats Check patient status.
per minute. Check alignment of
sensor. Reapply sensor.
SpO2 PR OVER 250 Detected pulse rate is above 250 beats Check patient status.
per minute. Decrease patient
motion. Reapply sensor.
SpO2 UNCALIBRATED Detected SpO2 falls below calibrated Check patient status.
range. Check sensor.
SpO2 SYSTEM CHECK Self test is being performed. Wait for completion of
self test.
SpO2 FAILURE ROM checksum fail. RAM test fail. Filter Power cycle unit. If
mismatch. Offset mismatch. message reappears, call
Service.
The following messages pertain to Nellcor SpO2 Operation.

SpO2 Self test is being performed. Wait for completion of
SYSTEM self test.
CHECK
SpO2 NO No sensor is connected to the monitor. Attach sensor cable to
SENOSR the monitor.
SpO2 PULSE Hardware settings are being adjusted in order to Change to site where
SEARCH discriminate a pulse waveform. pulse is stronger if
patient is
vasoconstricted.
Change or readjust
sensor if loose.
SpO2 NO No detectable pulse is measured.
PULSE


SpO2 FAILURE ROM checksum fail. RAM test fail.Filter mismatch. Power cycle unit. If
Offset mismatch. message reappears, call
Service.
SpO2 Passport is in Nellcor Diagnostics Mode. Wait for completion of
DIAGNOSTIC diagnostics.
S
• Administration of certain vasoconstrictive drugs, i.e. norepinephrine, may reduce

peripheral perfusion to a level that prevents SpO2 measurements.
• Arterial compression, tricuspid regurgitation, or irregular heart rhythms may reduce
perfusion and prevent SpO2 measurement.
• Intra-vascular dyes, depending on concentration, may affect SpO2 measurements.
1.3.16.3 Recorder Messages (only units equipped with recorder)

RECORDER DOOR OPEN The door of the recorder is not closed. Close recorder door.
RECORDER PAPER OUT The roll of recorder paper is used up. Replace with a new roll
of paper.
1.3.16.4 CO2 Messages (only units equipped with Capnostat CO2)

CO2: INITIALIZING This message usually appears at power Wait for the message to
up. The CO2 subsystem has been reset go away. It takes about
and is performing internal self tests prior to 15 seconds for the CO2
operation. subsystem to initialize.
CO2: NO SENSOR No CO2 sensor is connected to the Attach the CO2 sensor
monitor. to the CO2 connector
(30).
CO2: SENSOR The CO2 sensor has not reached its Wait for the message to
WARMING UP operating temperature. Either the monitor go away. It takes up to
was just turned on or the sensor was five minutes for the
recently plugged in or the sensor was sensor to
removed from the adapter or calibration
cells.
CO2:CHECK ADAPTER The CO2 sensor is not correctly placed on Check the installation
the airway adapter or a different type of and condition of the
airway adapter has been connected or the airway adapter. Clean
adapter is dirty or damaged. or replace the adapter if
necessary. An adapter
calibration should be
performed if the
message persists. This is
accessed through the
CO2 menu.
CO2: CHECK SENSOR The CO2 sensor is out of calibration or A zero calibration
damaged. should be performed if
the message persists.
This is accessed through
the CO2 menu.


CO2: SENSOR ON The CO2 sensor is positioned on the The sensor should be
REFERENCE CELL reference cell. This is located on the sensor removed from the
cable adjacent to the connector. The reference cell and
ETCO2 reading should range from 36 to placed back on the
40 Torr when on this cell. airway adapter.
CO2: SENSOR ON The CO2 sensor is positioned on the zero After completing the
ZERO CELL cell. This is located on the sensor cable calibration, the sensor
adjacent to the connector. The ETCO2 should be removed from
reading should be 0 when on this cell. the zero cell and placed
back on the airway
adapter.
CO2: ZERO CAL IN The CO2 sensor is placed on the zero cell CO2:ADPTER CAL IN
PROGRESS and a CO2 calibration is in progress.Wait PROGRESS
for the zero calibration to complete. Zero
calibration takes less than 30 seconds.
CO2:ADPTER CAL IN A CO2 adapter calibration has been Wait for the adapter
PROGRESS requested and is in calibration to complete.
progress. Adapter cal takes less
than 30 seconds.
CO2: ZERO CAL The zero calibration was not completed Wait for the unit to
FAILURE successfully. The zero calibration may complete warming up.
have been requested when the sensor had Repeat the zero
not completed warming up. calibration.
CO2: ADAPTER CAL The adapter calibration was not Wait for the unit to
FAILURE completed successfully. The adapter complete warming up or
calibration may have been requested check the installation of
when the sensor had not completed the sensor on the airway
warming up or the sensor was not adapter. Repeat the
correctly installed on the airway adapter. adapter calibration.
CO2: CAL FAILED - A zero calibration was attempted while Attach the sensor to the
INSERT ZERO CELL the sensor was not attached to the zero zero cell and repeat the
cell. zero calibration. The
zero cell is located on
the sensor cable
adjacent to the
connector.
CO2: CAL FAILED - An adapter calibration was attempted Remove the sensor from
INSERT while the sensor was attached to the zero the zero or reference
ADAPTER or reference cell. cell and attach it to the
air-way adapter. Repeat
the adapter cal.
CO2: ZERO CAL The zero calibration has been successfully Remove the CO2 sensor
COMPLETE completed. from the zero cell and
place back on the
adapter to continue
monitoring.
CO2: ADAPTER CAL The adapter calibration has been Normal operation. The
COMPLETE successfully completed. message is removed
after a few seconds.
CO2: FAILURE The CO2 subsystem has failed. Cycle the power on the
monitor to determine if
the problem persists. If
the message returns then
the unit needs to be
serviced.

1.3.16.5 Monitor Operation Messages

The following messages pertain to the operation of the monitor.

DIAGNOSTICS Self test is being performed. Wait for completion of self-test. See
IN PROGRESS Section 3.1.
SELF TEST Diagnostics OK. ESU INTERFERENCE
COMPLETE
Poor electrode Excessive high frequency noise. Check site; rearrange electrodes.
site preparation. Change electrodes. Use ECG cable
Excessive cautery with choke.
(ESU) noise.
LEAD FAULT Lead off of patient. Check electrodes / leads.
INTERFERENCE Poor electrode site preparation. Check site. Change Lead selection.
Improper lead selection.Excessive 50 Use proper ECG cable.
or 60 Hz noise.Wrong 3-Lead cable
may be in use.*
ARTIFACT A 50 or 60 Hz noise is detected on the Check site. Change Lead selection.
ECG waveform. The displayed heart Use proper ECG cable.
rate may not be correct.
* See section 1.3.6 for more details on ECG cables.
1.3.17 Monitor Problem Solving

This guide is provided to establish the possible causes and solutions to some monitoring
problems.
PROBLEM REASON SOLUTION

No trace for a -Improper attachment of transducer to -Check transducer connection.-
desired parameter monitor. Try a different transducer.
-Faulty transducer.
Wandering ECG -Respiration artifact. -Try a different base line lead
configuration.
Noisy ECG traces -Loose or dry electrodes. -Apply new electrodes.-Replace
-Defective electrode wires. wires as necessary.
-Patient cable or leads are routed too close -Eliminate 60Hz interference.
to other electrical devices. -Use ECG cable with built-in
filter block.
Low Amplitude -Electrode could be positioned over a bone -Reposition electrodes.
ECG or muscle mass. -Press ECG SIZE key.
Excessive Electro- -Inadequate skin prep prior to application -Repeat skin prep and electrode
surgical of electrode. placement procedures.-Add
Interference additional gel to electrodes.
AC Noise -Gain set too high (set through SIZE key). -Readjust as necessary.
-Electrodes dry. -Re-prep skin and apply fresh,
-Patient cable entwined with cables of other moist electrodes.
electrical devices. -Separate patient cable from all
other cables.
Intermittent Signal -Connections not tight and properly -Ensure proper connection.
secured.-Electrodes dry. (Electrode to lead, lead to
-Cable or lead wires damaged. cable, cable to monitor.)
-Re-prep skin and apply fresh
moist electrodes.
-Check with continuity tester.


Excessive alarms: -Electrodes dry. -Re-prep skin and apply fresh,
heart rate, lead -Alarm limits set too close to patient’s moist electrodes.
fault normal heart rate. -Readjust.
-R-wave wrong size.-Excessive patient -Must be twice the amplitude of
movement or muscle tremor. other part of waveform.
-Reposition electrodes and
secure with tape if necessary.
Low Amplitude -Gain set too low. (Set through SIZE key.) -Readjust as required.
ECG Signal -Skin improperly prepared. -Abrade skin.
-Possibly not patient’s normal complex. -Check with 12 lead
-Electrode could be positioned over a bone electrocardiogram.
or muscle mass. -Reposition electrodes.
Trace Not Moving -FREEZE key may have been pressed. -Press the FREEZE key to
unfreeze the trace.
Temperature -Poor contact from probes to body. Check the body surface contact
Probes not at the probe tip. Reposition or
Working apply thermoconductive gel.
Display Appears -Mains power switch may not be on.-Unit -Check mains power switch on
to be Off may not be plugged into an AC outlet. side panel.
-If used as a portable, battery pack may be -Check power cord (Is it
drained. plugged in?).
-If battery pack is drained, plug
into an AC outlet to recharge
the battery. A period of 16
hours is required for a full
charge.
Disabled Alarm -Mute key pressed. -Check for alarm mute symbol.
Tone, QRS Tone, -Beep volume low. -Increase beep volume.
or Other Function
ECG Base Line -Gain control not set high enough. Set -Readjust as required.
With No through SIZE key. -Check insertion.
Waveform -Lead wires and patient cable not fully -Check with lead continuity
inserted into proper receptacle. tester.
-Cable or lead wires damaged.
Base Line Wander -Patient moving excessively. -Secure lead wires and cable to
-Patient’s respiration. patient.
-Electrodes dry. -Reposition electrodes.
-Static build up around patient. -Re-prep skin and apply fresh
moist electrodes.
-Check with hospital engineer.
Damped Invasive -Air bubbles in tubing.-Kinked catheter. -Eliminate air from tubing.
Waveform -Catheter against will of blood vessel. -Slightly alter position of
-Blood in tubing. catheter.
-Check for leaks at connector.
-Pump pressure bag up to 300
mmHg.
Recorder Report -Thermal paper may be installed -Remove paper and re-install
Appears Totally incorrectly. (up-side down) with paper feeding off of the
Blank spool from the bottom.
Resp. Waveform -Scales set inappropriately. -Change scale via menu.
Too Large
Resp. Waveform -Patient breathing shallow or turned on -Change lead position to better
Too Small side. detect respirations.
-Scale set inappropriately. -Change scale.


False Apnea -Apnea delay may be improperly set. -Choose another apnea delay.
Alarm -Patient may be having frequent episodes -Reposition electrodes to better
of CVA. detect respirations.
-Scale size may be too low.
“CK Lead” -Due to increased impedance. -Prep chest.
Message -Chest hair under electrodes. -Change electrodes.
-Dried electrode gel. -Replace electrode.
-Electrode off. -Replace lead.
-Lead off. -Replace lead wires.
-Cracked lead wires -Clean and abrade skin before
-Poor skin prep. applying electrodes.
“CVA” Message -Can be caused by shallow breathing or an -Check the patient - adjust
apnea event. scales or leads if necessary.
No Resp. -Patient not connected to a patient safety -Turn respiration on (“OFF” will
Waveform or Rate cable.-Respiration parameter is “OFF”. be displayed in resp.
Displayed -Patient connected using Patient ESIS window).Check that proper
Choke/Cable. patient cable is used.
-Use 3-lead Patient Cable - non
ESIS. (See Accessories, section
5.1.)
Waveform -Front End Failure -Replace Front End Board.
Acquisition Failure -External Supply Failure-+12/-23 Volt -Check External Supply Output
Board Failure voltage.
-CPU Board Failure -Replace F1 fuse on +12/-23
-CO2 Interface Board Failure (optional) Volt Board.
-Replace CPU Board.
-Replace CO2 Interface Board
1.3.18 Connection to External Devices

The Passport provides a high level ECG waveform output from the J1 connector (33). The
output specifications are listed in section 6.1.

the Passport with external devices. It is essential that a
biomedical engineer verify correct operation of the Passport
with an external device. Testing should include verification
that the maximum delay for cardioversion synchronization
does not exceed 60 ms (monitor and defibrillator). Cable
should be labeled with the devices they have been tested
for use with.
1.3.19 Menus
This section contains all the menus used in the Passport. A sample of each menu with each
menu item highlighted is provided. For each menu item highlighted, the Choices bar
indicates the available selections. The menu Instructions bar indicates the available actions to
take. See “Use of Menus” on page 23 for detailed instructions on menu operation.

1.3.19.1 Patient Menu

Size: Changing the patient size will adjust the Passport for monitoring adults, pediatrics or
neonates. The alarm limit selections will change accordingly. The Passport displays the
patient size in the menu display area.
Clear Trend Memory: Choosing “Yes” deletes all the stored trend data.
Pacer Enhancement: Set to ON to display the pacer signal as a full scale square wave.
CHANGE PATIENT
Size: Adult
Clear trend memory: No
Pacer Enhancement: OFF
Choices: ADULT, PED, NEO
= Adjust valve END = quit
SELECT = Enter/move
CHANGE PATIENT
Size: Adult
Choices: Yes, No
SELECT = Enter/move
CHANGE PATIENT
Size: Adult
Choices: enhance ON/OFF
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-29 Patient Menu

1.3.19.2 Set-up Menu

Speed: Sets the speed of the ECG and IBP waveforms.
Resp Speed: Sets the speed of the Respiration waveform.
Waveform 2/3: Set the type of waveform to display.
Resp Source: Set which source will be used for the Respiration information.
Powerup settings: Select save current to keep all configured items for the next time the
Passport is powered on. Select restore factory to return to the factory default settings.
CHANGE SET-UP CHANGE SET-UP

Waveform 2: IBP1 Waveform 2: IBP1
Waveform 3: PLETH Waveform 3: PLETH
Auto Display IBP1: Waveform 2 Auto Display IBP1: Waveform 2
Auto Display CO2: Waveform 3 Auto Display CO2: Waveform 3
Powerup settings: No change Powerup settings: No change
Choices: IBP1, Casc, ECG, Pleth, Resp, Choices: Waveform 3, Off
CO2
= Adjust valve EXIT = quit = Adjust valve EXIT = quit
SELECT = Enter/move SELECT = Enter/move

Choices: IBP1, IBP2, Pleth, Resp, CO2 Choices: Waveform 2, Waveform 3, Off


Choices: Waveform 2, Waveform 3, Off Choices: no change, save, restore

FIGURE 1-30 Set-up Menu

1.3.19.3 Recorder Menu

Wave Selection: Set the waveform or waveforms to be printed.
Record on Alarm: Set to ON for a recording to be printed each time an alarm situation
occurs.
Record Destination: Set where the print out will occur. Local - from the Passport, Remote -
from the Visa, Both - from both the Passport and the Visa.
CHANGE RECORDER
Wave Selection: ECG
Record on Alarm: No
Record Destination Local
ECG, Pleth, Resp, ECG & IBP1, ECG &
IBP2, IBP1 & IBP2, CO2, ECG & RESP
SELECT = Enter/move
CHANGE RECORDER
Wave Selection: ECG
Record on Alarm: No
Choices: Yes, No

SELECT = Enter/move
CHANGE RECORDER
Wave Selection: ECG
Record on Alarm: No
Choices: Local, Remote, Both

SELECT = Enter/move

1.3.19.4 Alarm Menu

The alarm menu provides access to change the settings for all available parameter alarms.
CHANGE ALARMS Low High CHANGE ALARMS Low High

HR: OFF OFF BPM HR: OFF OFF BPM
SpO2: 85 OFF % SpO2: 85 OFF %
IBP1 Sys: OFF OFF mmHg IBP1 Sys: OFF OFF mmHg
IBP1 Dia: OFF OFF mmHg IBP1 Dia: OFF OFF mmHg
NIBP Sys: OFF OFF mmHg NIBP Sys: OFF OFF mmHg
NIBP Dia: OFF OFF mmHg NIBP Dia: OFF OFF mmHg
IBP2 Mean: OFF OFF mmHg IBP2 Mean: OFF OFF mmHg
Respiration: OFF OFF RPM Respiration: OFF OFF RPM
Apnea Delay: OFF sec Apnea Delay: OFF sec
ETCO2: OFF OFF % ETCO2: OFF OFF %
Low: OFF, 30-100 High, OFF, 100-250 Low: OFF, 5-90 High, OFF, 40-130
SELECT = Enter/move = Adjust valve EXIT = quit SELECT = Enter/move = Adjust valve EXIT = quit

Low: 50-99 High, OFF, 85-100 Low: OFF, 50-150 High, OFF, 70-240


Alarm Menu Continued

Low: OFF, 2-100 High, OFF, 5-150 Range: OFF, 10-40

1.3.19.5 NIBP Menu

Start Pressure - Change the start pressure to affect the pump up pressure of the NIBP cuff. The
range shown is for the adult patient size. The range for pediatrics is 60-180 mmHg, and the
range for neonates is 40-120 mmHg.
CHANGE NIBP
Start Pressure: 180 mmHg
Range: 100-260 mmHg
= Adjust valve EXIT = quit
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-34 NIBP Menu

1.3.19.6 IBP Menu

IBP1 Scale, IBP2 Scale - Sets the full scale value of the display.
CHANGE IBP
IBP1 Scale: 150 mmHg
IBP2 Scale: 37.5 mmHg
Choices: 37.5, 75, 150, 300 mmHg
SELECT = Enter/move
CHANGE IBP
Choices: 37.5, 75, 150, 300 mmHg
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-35 IBP Menu
1.3.19.7 Resp Menu

Scale - Sets the scale of the Resp waveform.
CHANGE RESP
Scale: 3
Choices: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-36 Resp Menu
1.3.19.8 HR Menu
Source - Select which source is used for the heart rate reading. The Auto selection uses a built
in algorithm to automatically choose the strongest heart rate source.
CHANGE HR
Source: AUTO
Choices: Auto, ECG, IBP1, SpO2
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-37 HR/ECG Menu

1.3.19.9 SpO2 Menu / Nellcor SpO2 Menu

Pleth Size - Sets the scale of the plethysmograph waveform.
Mode - Sets the scale of the plethysmograph waveform on units with Nellcor.
CHANGE SPO2
Pleth Size: 3
Choices: 1, 2, 3, 4
SELECT = Enter/move
CHANGE SPO2
Mode: 1
Choices: 1, 2, 3
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-38 SpO2
1.3.19.10 CO2 Menu

CO2 Scale - Select the size of the displayed CO2 waveform.
Start Zero Calibration - Select Yes to initiate the calibration of the sensor.
Start adapter cal - Select Yes to initiate the calibration of the airway adapter with the sensor.
N2O Compensation - Select ON to compensate for interference caused by nitrous oxide

present in the gas being analyzed.
O2 Compensation - Select ON to compensate for interference caused by oxygen present in

the gas being analyzed.

CHANGE CO2 CHANGE CO2

CO2 Scale: 0-8% CO2 Scale: 0-8%
Start Zero Calibration: No Start Zero Calibration: No
Start adapter cal: No Start adapter cal: No
N2O Compensation: OFF N2O Compensation: OFF
O2 Compensation: 21% O2 Compensation: 21%
Choices: 5, 8, 12 % Choices: ON, OFF


Choices: Yes, No Range: 0 - 100 %

CHANGE CO2
CO2 Scale: 0-8%
Start Zero Calibration: No
Start adapter cal: No
N2O Compensation: OFF
O2 Compensation: 21%
Choices: Yes, No

SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-39 CO2 Menu
User Configuration Menu

The User Configuration Menu is accessed during the power-up sequence. See “User
Configuration Mode” on page 53 for complete details.
1.3.19.11 User Configuration - Date Menu

Year, Month, Day - Use the up and down arrow keys (1) to set each item to the appropriate
number.
USER CONFIGURATION
Press & hold the END key for 3 sec, to leave configuration mode.
Date CHANGE DATE

Time Year: 95
Trend Month: 4
Temp Day: 27
Hr SpO2 size
Alarm Audio delay
Aud alm standby
SELECT = Enter/move
Serial output type
CO2
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-40 Date Menu

1.3.19.12 User Configuration - Time Menu

Hours, Minutes - Use the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1) to set each item to the
appropriate number.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date
Time CHANGE TIME
Trend Hours: 16
Temp Minutes: 54
Hr SpO2 size
Alarm Audio delay
Aud alm standby SELECT = Enter/move
Serial output type
CO2
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-41 Time Menu
1.3.19.13 User Configuration - Trend Menu

Trend Trigger - Choose the events that when they occur causes the current parameter
information to be stored in the trend memory. The selections for multiple triggers are:
(Interval, NIBP, and Alarms), (Interval and NIBP), (Interval and Alarms) or (NIBP & Alarms).
Interval - Each time the selected time interval has elapsed, the parameter information is stored
in the trend memory.
NOTE: Interval or multiple triggers must be selected as the trend

trigger. The selections within the range are: 1, 2.5, 5, 10,
20, 30, 60 or 120 minutes.
USER CONFIGURA TION

P res s & hold the E ND k ey for 3 sec, to l eave configuration m o de.
Date/Ti m e
T rend
T em perature C HA NG E TR EN D
Hr S pO 2 S iz e Trigge r: NIB P
A larm Audio Delay Interval : 5 m in
A udio Alarm S tandby Ch oices: Interv al, NIB P , Al arm s or m ultiple tri ggers
S erial O utput Ty pe = A djust valve E XIT = quit
CO 2 S ELE CT = E nter/m ove
Co lor Setti ngs
NIB P : Idle S PO2
USER CONFIGURA TION

P res s & hold the E ND k ey for 3 sec, to l eave configuration m o de.
Date/Ti m e
T rend
T em perature C HA NG E T R EN D
Hr S pO 2 S iz e T rigge r: NIB P
A larm Audio Delay Interval : 5 m in
A udio Alarm S tandby Range: 1 - 120 m i n
S erial O utput Ty pe = A djust valve E XIT = quit
CO 2 S ELE CT = E nter/m ove
Co lor Setti ngs
NIB P : Idle S PO 2
FIGURE 1-42 Trend Menu

1.3.19.14 User Configuration - Temperature Menu

Temperature Scale - Select the temperature to be measured in fahrenheit or centigrade units.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date/Time
Trend
Temperature
Hr SpO2 Size CHANGE TEMP
Alarm Audio Delay Temperature Scale: Fahrenheit
Audio Alarm Standby
Choices: Fahrenheit, Centigrade
Serial Output Type
CO2
SELECT = Enter/move
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-43 Temperature Menu
1.3.19.15 User Configuration - HR SpO2 Size Menu

Hr SpO2 size - Re-sizes the HR and SpO2 display areas.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date/Time
Trend
Temperature
Hr SpO2 Size CHANGE HR SPO2 SIZE
Alarm Audio Delay Hr SpO2 Size: HR small, SpO2 large
Audio Alarm Standby Choices: HR larger, smaller
Serial Output Type
CO2 SELECT = Enter/move
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-44 Hr SpO2 Size Menu
1.3.19.16 User Configuration - Alarm Audio Delay Menu

Alarm Audio delay - Set to 4, 6 or 8 seconds to delay the tone of an alarm for the selected
amount of time.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date
Time
Trend
Temp CHANGE ALARM AUDIO DELAY
Hr SpO2 size Alarm Audio delay:OFF
Alarm Audio delay
Choices: OFF, 4,6,8 sec
Aud alm standby
Serial output type
SELECT = Enter/move
CO2
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-45 Audio Alarm delay Menu

1.3.19.17 User Configuration - Audio Alarm Standby Menu

Aud alm standby - When this function is set to ON, pressing and holding the MUTE key for 4
seconds will indefinitely suspend the alarms.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date
Time
Trend
Temp
Hr SpO2 size CHANGE ALARM STANDBY
Alarm Audio delay Aud alm standby: OFF
Aud alm standby Choices: ON/OFF
Serial output type = Adjust valve END = quit
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-46 Audio Alarm Standby Menu
1.3.19.18 User Configuration - Serial Output Type Menu

Serial output type - Select the communication protocols for interfacing with other specialized
equipment.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date
Time
Trend
Temp
Hr SpO2 size CHANGE SERIAL OUTPUT TYPE
Serial output type: Visa
Alarm Audio delay
Aud alm standby Choices: Visa,Accutorr,Msg,Diap
Serial output type = Adjust valve END = quit
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-47 Serial Output Type Menu

1.3.19.19 User Configuration - CO2 Menu

Barometric Pressure - Allows the facility to adjust to the current pressure.
CO2 Units - Allows the facility to select the units of measure.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date
Time
Trend
Temp
Hr SpO2 size CHANGE CO2
Alarm Audio delay Barometric Pressure: 760 mmHg
Aud alm standby CO2 Units: %
Serial output type Range: 500 - 800 mmHg
CO2 = Adjust valve END = quit

SELECT = Enter/move
NIBP: Idle SPO2
USER CONFIGURATION
Date
Time
Trend
Temp
Hr SpO2 size CHANGE CO2
Alarm Audio delay Barometric Pressure: 760 mmHg
CO2 Units: %
Aud alm standby
Serial output type Choices: Torr, %
CO2 = Adjust valve END = quit

SELECT = Enter/move
NIBP: Idle SPO2

Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG) Introduction (XG)
1.4 Introduction (XG)

This section of the Service Manual provides general information about the Datascope
Passport XG Monitor.
Section 1.5 on page 1-77 and Section 1.6 on page 1-97 are included as a review of
instrument functions and operation, although the reader is encouraged to refer to the
Operating Instructions, P/N 0070-00-0397, for more complete details.
1.5 Controls, Indicators and Connectors (XG)

This section of the Operating Instructions identifies and describes each control and display of
the Datascope Passport XG Monitor.
Refer to the paragraph and page numbers listed below for the location of specific controls
and displays.
Step-by-step instructions for operation of the monitor are provided in “Operation (XG)” on
page 1-97.
The following is a list of all the controls, connectors and indicators and their item numbers.
The item number refers to the call outs on the drawings within this chapter of the manual. If
looking for a particular item, locate it on this list and then use the table below to determine
the page where it can be found.
1. p and q (Set-up) 9. FREEZE (ECG) 17. LIMITS (Alarms)

2. SELECT (Set-up) 10.ZERO 1 (IBP) (Optional) 18. MUTE (Alarms)
3. EXIT (Set-up) 11.ZERO 2 (IBP) (Optional) 19. DISPLAY (Trends)
4. ADMIT (Central) (Optional) 12.CO2 PUMP (Optional) 20. p and q (Trends)
5. DISCHARGE (Central) 13.START (NIBP) 21. BEEP VOLUME
(Optional)
6. SILENCE (Central) 14.INTERVAL (NIBP) 22. PRINT (Optional)
(Optional)
7. LEAD (ECG) 15.DEFLATE (NIBP) 23. BATTERY CHARGING
LED
8. SIZE (ECG) 16.VOLUME (Alarms/Alarms 24. DISPLAY
LED)

Controls, Indicators and Connectors (XG) Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG)
PARAGRAPH CONTROL/DISPLAY PAGE

NUMBER DESCRIPTION NUMBER NUMBER
1.5.1 Front Panel 1-24 1-79
1.5.2 Left Side Panel 25 - 34 1-87
1.2.3 Right Side Panel 35 - 39 1-90
1.5.4 Rear Panel 40 1-91
1.5.5 Remote Color Display (optional) 1-92
1.5.6 Gas Module (Optional)- Front 41-43 1-93
Panel
1.5.7 Gas Module (Optional)- Rear 44-51 1-95
Panel

Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG) Controls, Indicators and Connectors (XG)
1.5.1 Front Panel

R
SET UP CENTRAL ECG IBP NIBP ALARMS TRENDS

BEEP
SELECT ADMIT LEAD ZERO 1 START VOLUME DISPLAY VOLUME
HOLD 3 SEC. TO CLEAR
EXIT DISCHARGE SIZE ZERO 2 INTERVAL LIMITS PRINT
SILENCE FREEZE CO2 PUMP DEFLATE MUTE - +
HOLD 3 SEC. TO STOP
1 2
3 5 6
FIGURE 1-49 Front Panel Controls
Introduction
The keys on the front panel of the Passport XG Monitor are classified as single action, repeat
held.
A repeat action key provides an action when pressed, then waits half a second before
A delayed action key provides an action, but only after the key has been held pressed for
a (key specific) period of time.
Passport XG will ignore multiple key selections.
All key actions are acknowledged by a key click, except for BEEP VOLUME and ALARM
VOLUME. If a key is not available a double key click will sound.
1. p and q (UP and DOWN) (Set-Up)

Two repeat action keys used to move the highlighted screen cursor or change the setting/
value of a menu item. As the cursor is moved, the highlighted menu window is displayed.
2. SELECT (Set-Up)
A repeat action key used to select the function or value indicated by the highlighted cursor.
3. EXIT (Set-Up)
A single action key which causes the display to return to the main screen display (as
specified in the DISPLAY section). This key is always available.

4. ADMIT (Central) (Optional)

A single action key which transmits an admit command to the VISA Central Station.
5. DISCHARGE (Central) (Optional)

A single action key which transmits a discharge command to the VISA Central Station.
6. SILENCE (Central) (Optional)

A single-action key which mutes the alarms of the corresponding channel on the VISA Central
Station. The amount of time the alarms are silenced, is determined by the VISA.

Front Panel (Continued)

R
7 10

BEEP
HOLD 3 SEC. TO STOP
8 9 11 12
7. LEAD (ECG)
A single action key which selects the ECG lead to be displayed. Each depression of the key
selects and displays the next ECG lead from the list. The list wraps around after the last entry
is selected. Choices are: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF or V.
8. SIZE (ECG)
A single action key which selects the size of the displayed ECG waveform. Each press of the
key selects and displays the next ECG size which wraps around after the last size is selected.
A vertical bar is placed in front of the ECG waveform. This vertical bar is used as a reference
to determine the size of the displayed ECG waveform.
9. FREEZE (Screen)
A single action key which enables or releases the screen freeze function. The freeze key
stops or starts all waveforms, except when waveform 2 is used for cascaded ECG. When this
is the case, pressing the freeze key the first time causes the currently displayed ECG
waveform data to be transferred to waveform 2 and frozen. Waveforms 1 and 3 continue to
move. Pressing FREEZE again causes waveform 2 to return to cascaded ECG. The freeze key
is also used to enter the user configuration menu. See “User Configuration Mode” on
page 1-153 for further details.

zero process is unsuccessful, “UNABLE TO ZERO” is displayed in the IBP1 data window. This
window is only available when a pressure transducer is present.

zero process is unsuccessful, “UNABLE TO ZERO” is displayed in the IBP2 data window. This
window is only available when a pressure transducer is present.

12. CO2 PUMP (Optional)

A single action key which turns on the sidestream CO2 pump and initiates an adapter and
pump calibration. Holding this key for 3 seconds turns the pump off.


R
16

BEEP
HOLD 3 SEC. TO STOP
15 17
14 13 18
13. START (NIBP)
A single action key which initiates an NIBP measurement. This function is not available if a
measurement is in progress.
14. INTERVAL (NIBP)

A repeat action key which selects the interval setting for NIBP measurements. Values wrap
around at the lowest/highest choices. Choices are: Off, Continuous, 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20,
30, 60, and 120 minutes. Five seconds after the selection is made and the key is released,
the new interval takes effect.
15. DEFLATE (NIBP)

A single action key which stops any NIBP measurement in progress, including any timed
measurement sequence, and deflates the cuff. When a timed measurement is stopped an
“NIBP: DEFLATE” message followed by an “NIBP: IDLE” message displays in the NIBP
message window until the timer mode is restarted by either pressing START or changing the
interval.
16. VOLUME (Alarms and Alarm LED)

A repeat action key which adjusts the alarm volume in 5 steps. There is no off position for this
tone. The tone wraps to the minimum volume once the maximum is reached. The red alarm
bell LED illuminates when an alarm condition exists. See “Alarms” on page 1-149 for
detailed information on alarm situations.
17. LIMITS (Alarms)

A single action key which provides access to the alarm menu to view and select alarm
values. Press SELECT to change the alarm values. Press the LIMITS key again to access
additional alarm parameters (when the Gas Module is installed). To return the display to the
main screen, press the EXIT key.

18. MUTE (Alarms)

A single action and delayed action key which silences all currently alarming parameters or
suspends all alarms. A single key press will silence the current alarm tone for 2 minutes. Any
new alarms that occur while the alarm tone is muted will disable the mute and sound the
Alarm Mute alarm tone. An alarm mute symbol is displayed next to each muted parameter. The word
Symbol Mute is displayed above the menu selections.
When the key is pressed and held for 3 seconds, all set alarms will be suspended for 2
minutes. This is indicated by the Alarm Mute Symbol and the words All Mute displayed
When “Audio alarm standby” is set to ON (in the User Configuration Menu), and the MUTE
key is pressed and held for 4 seconds, all audio alarms are indefinitely suspended. This is
indicated by the Alarm Mute Symbol in all parameter windows and the words Aud Alm Sby
flashing above the menu selections.
NOTE: When “Aud alm standby” is set to “ON and active on

power up,” the unit will power up in the Aud alm standby
mode. All audio alarms will be muted.


R

BEEP
HOLD 3 SEC. TO CLEAR 24
HOLD 3 SEC. TO STOP
21
23
20 19 22
19. DISPLAY (Trends)

A single action and delayed action key which displays and clears trended data. The most
recent page of data is displayed when the key is first pressed. Press this key a second time to
view additional trended data. Pressing and holding the key for 3 seconds clears all trended
data.
20. p and q (Trends)

Two repeat action keys which are used to scroll through the trend data.
21. BEEP VOLUME

A repeat action key which adjusts the beep volume in 5 steps plus OFF. When the maximum
volume is reached, the volume will wrap around to OFF, then to the minimum volume.
22. PRINT (Optional)

A combination single action and delayed action key which initiates or stops a recording.
Pressing the key once initiates a printout. Holding the key pressed for three seconds, when
waveforms are displayed (see Section 1.6.18 on page 1-155), initiates a continuous printing
of waveforms. Pressing the key while the printing is in progress, stops the recorder. The
recorder prints either waveforms or trend data, depending on what is displayed (i.e. trend
data is printed when trend list is displayed.). The Recorder Set-up will determine which
waveform or waveforms are printed. The Recorder Set-up will also determine the Record
Destination - Passport (recording from the Passport), Central (recording from the VISA, no
recording from the Passport), or Both (recording from the Passport and VISA).
NOTE: When a remote (VISA) recording is printed, the information

that is printed is determined by the set-up in the VISA.
23. BATTERY CHARGING LED

A green LED used to indicate that the batteries are charging.

24. DISPLAY
ECG AREA
MENU PARAMETER
AREA AREA
MULTI-FUNCTION AREA
MESSAGE AREA
FIGURE 1-50 Display
The Display is used to present information which is divided into 5 graphic display areas.
They are:
A. MENU Display Area

B. ECG Display Area
C. PARAMETER Display Area
D. MULTI-FUNCTION Display Area
E. MESSAGE Display Area
See Section 1.6.3 on page 1-102 for details.

1.5.2 Left Side Panel
27
27
Press to Open
SpO2 CUFF
25 To 28
28
25
29
29
ECG/EKG
E.S.I.S.
All Patient Connections

Electrically Isolated
30
30
IBP 1
PI 1
31
31
2626 IBP 2
PI 2
PUMP
INPUT 32
32
CO2
33
33
!
34
34
FIGURE 1-51 Left Side Panel with Datascope SpO2
27
27
Press to Open
CUFF
25 28
28
25 SpO2
o
T
29
29
ECG/EKG
E.S.I.S.

30
30
IBP 1
PI 1
31
31
26
26 IBP 2
PI 2
PUMP
INPUT
32
32
CO2
33
33
!
34
34
FIGURE 1-52 Left Side Panel with Nellcor® SpO2

28
27
Press to Open CUFF
SpO2
25
25
To 28
27
29
29
ECG/EKG
E.S.I.S.

30
30
IBP 1
PI 1
31
31
26
26 IBP 2
PI 2
PUMP
INPUT
32
32
CO2
33
33
!
34
34
FIGURE 1-53 Left Side Panel with Masimo SpO2
25. RECORDER (Optional)

A two trace thermal strip chart recorder with integral paper spool.
26. BATTERY PACK

Two internal, user replaceable, rechargeable, sealed lead acid batteries that provide power
to operate the monitor when not connected to the power pack. The battery packs may be
removed and replaced independently while the unit is operating.
27. CUFF
A connector used to attach the NIBP cuff assembly to the monitor.
28. SpO2
An 8-pin DIN type, 9-pin sub miniature D (Nellcor) type female connector or 14-pin sub
miniature D (Massimo) type female connector used to attach the SpO2 sensor assembly to the
monitor.
29. T (Temperature)
A standard three wire phone jack used to mate with either the YSI series 400 or 700
temperature probes. The Passport XG automatically identifies which probe is connected.
30. ECG / EKG

A six-pin AAMI (ECG-D10/75) standard connector used for patient cable connections.
31. IBP1 (Optional)

A six-pin male connector used for Datascope specified pressure transducers listed in Chapter
5, Accessories of the Passport Operating Instructions Manual.
32. IBP2 (Optional)

A six-pin male connector used for Datascope specified pressure transducers listed in Chapter
5, Accessories of the Passport Operating Instructions Manual.

33. PUMP INPUT (Optional)

This is used to connect the sampling tubing for Sidestream CO2.
34. CO2 (Optional)

A 20 pin connector used to attach the CAPNOSTAT® CO2 sensor to the monitor.

1.5.3 Right Side Panel
35
35
36
36
DATASETTE
D.C. POWE R INPUT

En tr ée a l i ment ati o n c ont i nu e
Gl ei c hs tr om Ei ng a ng
En tr ada al i men t ac i ó c ont i nu a
37
37
3939
38
38
J1 POWE R
Al i me nt a ti o n
! St r om
R ed
FIGURE 1-54 Right Side Panel
35. DATASETTE
A user replaceable software cartridge used for installing updated software revisions.
36. DC POWER INPUT (Connector)

A four terminal connector to supply low voltage DC power to the unit and charge the
batteries. The power pack provides power to the unit independent of battery installation.
37. J1 (Optional)
A communication interface connector used to connect the Passport to a VISA Central Station
Monitor, Remote Color Display, Nurse Call, DPD Defibrillator, Gas Module, or other
peripheral devices.
NOTE: The VISA Central Station and Gas Module cannot be used at
the same time.
38. POWER
A recessed rocker switch which interrupts power to the main unit but does not prevent
charging of the batteries.
39. PUMP EXHAUST (Optional)

This panel mount coupling is used for attaching a gas scavenging system.

1.5.4 Rear Panel
4040
FIGURE 1-55 Rear Panel
40. CO2 Filter Housing

Passport CO2 filter (P/N 0103-00-0452) is located inside this housing. This filter should be
replaced at least once a year. This filter is not part of the optional Gas Module.

1.5.5 Remote Color Display (optional)
REMOTE COLOR DISPLAY, REAR VIEW PASSPORT XG MONITOR, FRONT VIEW
SETUP CENTRAL ECG IBP N IBP ALARMS TRENDS

BEEP
SELECT SILENCE LEAD ZERO 1 START VOLUM E DISPLA Y V OLUM E
HOLD3SEC. TOCLEAR
EXIT A DMIT SIZE ZERO 2 INTERVA L LIM ITS PRIN T
DISCHARGE FREEZE DEFLATE MUTE
Remote Color Display Interface Cable Passport Video Interface Cable

P/N 0012-00-0994 P/N 0012-00-0983
1. Connect Interface cable, 2. Connect Passport Monitor 3. Connect the Passport

P/N 0012-00-0994, to the Analog Video Interface cable, Monitor Video Interface Cable
Input connector on the Remote P/N 0012-00-0983. to the Remote to J1 on the Passport Monitor
Color Display. Color Display Interface cable,
P/N 0012-00-0994.
FIGURE 1-56 Remote Color Display
For instructions on mounting the remote display to a wall, see Chapter 5 in Datascope P/N’s
0070-00-0397, 0070-00-0440, and 0070-00-0503 of the Passport Operating Instructions
Manual.
its set-up.

1.5.6 Gas Module (Optional)- Front Panel
Datascope
R

SELECT ADMIT LEAD VOLUME DISPLAY BEEP
ZERO 1 START VOLUME
HOLD 3 SEC. TO STOP
Datascope Gas Module SE™ 43

41
44
46
42
45
FIGURE 1-57 Gas Module Front Panel
NOTE: This Manual refers to the Gas Module II and the Gas Module
SE as Gas Module. All illustrations represent the Gas Module
SE. Any parts or descriptions unique to either product will be
identified as such.
41. Input Port

This port is used to connect the sampling tubing to the Gas Module.
42. Water Trap Assembly (includes Water Trap Reservoir)

The Water Trap Assembly (P/N 0202-00-0129 and 0202-00-0134) is used to capture
moisture drawn in with the patient sample. The Water Trap Reservoir must be emptied and
rinsed (with water only) whenever more than half full or whenever changing patients. To
remove push latch to left. Refer to section 4.11 of the Passport Operating Instructions for
more details.
43. Dust Filter

The Dust Filter (P/N 0378-00-0040) protects the Gas Module from airborne dust. It should
be removed and cleaned on a regular basis. Refer to section 4.11 of the Passport Operating
Instructions for more details.
44. Dust Filter Cover

The Dust Filter Cover is removed to access the filter.

45. Power Indicator Lamp

This lamp illuminates when power is applied to the Gas Module and the power switch is
turned on.
46. Power Switch

A switch used to power the unit on and off. It is located on the front of the Gas Module SE
and on the back of the Gas Module II.

1.5.7 Gas Module (Optional)- Rear Panel
47
55
54
53
50
52
48 49 51
FIGURE 1-58 Gas Module Rear Panel
47. J1 Expansion Box

This expansion box (P/N 0997-00-00396) allows the user to connect up to three devices at
one time to the J1 port.
NOTE: The Visa Central Station cannot be used in conjunction with

the Gas Module II option.
48. AC Power Input

This input is used to attach the special “Y” Shaped Power Cord.
49. AC/DC Power Pack

This AC/DC Power Pack (P/N 0014-00-0173-04, with 9" cable) provides DC voltage to the
Passport. When used with the Gas Module the Y-Shaped cord (53) is plugged into both the
rear of the Gas Module and into the AC/DC Power Pack as shown.
50. Exhaust Port

This panel mount coupling is used for attaching a gas scavenging system (P/N 0997-00-
0923 or P/N 0997-00-0984) to the Gas Module.
51. Reference Port

This port is used only to measure room air. This port is not to be connected to anything. Do
not block this port.
52. External Interface Port

A communication interface port used to connect the Gas Module to the Passport XG.

53. “Y” Shaped Power Cable

This special “Y” shaped power cable (P/N 0012-00-1081-XX) allows the Gas Module and
Passport XG to be connected to an AC power source via one cable.
CAUTION: Do not use this special “Y” shaped power cable for any
devices other than the Passport and Gas Module II.
54. External Interface Cable

This cable (P/N 0012-00-1082) is used to interface the Gas Module to the J1 port on the
Passport XG.
55. Gas Module II Mounting Bracket

This bracket (P/N 0406-00-0729-01) mounts the Gas Module and Passport XG together. The
Passport XG Power Pack can be mounted to the rear of this bracket as well.

Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG) Operation (XG)
1.6 Operation (XG)

Abbreviated Operating Check List
Instructions.
A. Setting-Up
1. Set POWER switch to OFF.
2. Connect, if desired, peripheral equipment (i.e., Remote Color Display, P.C., etc.).
3. Attach power pack and/or install charged batteries as needed.
4. Set POWER switch to ON.
5. Using the menus and keyboard, set (when appropriate) the following:
• Patient Size • ECG Information

• Set Up Information (speed, waveform • Resp. Information
2 and 3, Auto Display, etc.)
• Recorder Information (when • Alarm Volume
available)
• Alarm Limits • Beep Volume
• NIBP Information • Trend Clear (hold down Display key
for 3 seconds)
• IBP Information • CO2 Information
• HR Information (Speed and Source) • Gas Module Information
• SpO2 Information
B. ECG
1. Press LEAD to change viewed lead type (I,II, III, aVR, aVF, or V).
2. Press SIZE to change ECG waveform size.
3. Press the FREEZE key to freeze all waveforms. If the “Cascade ECG” waveform is
chosen as the second waveform, only the ECG waveform will be frozen.
C. Initiating an NIBP Measurement

1. Attach cuff hose to NIBP connector and place cuff on patient.
2. If necessary, set cuff pressure through NIBP menu.
3. Press START to immediately initiate NIBP measurement.
4. To enable automatic measurements, press INTERVAL key to set desired period. The
NIBP measurement will start when the INTERVAL time has expired.
5. Press DEFLATE to suspend measurement. This also stops interval measurements.

Operation (XG) Operation (5-Lead, 5L, LT and XG)
D. Initiating an IBP Measurement

1. Open the transducer stop-cock to atmosphere.
2. Press and hold ZERO1 or ZERO2 for 1 second until “beep” sounds.
3. Turn stop-cock to patient to begin monitoring.
E. Establishing SpO2
1. Select the appropriate sensor.
2. Attach sensor to SpO2 connector and apply to the patient.
3. Set either waveform 2 or 3 in the set-up menu to display the SpO2 waveform, if
desired.
F. Establishing CO2 / CAPNOSTAT®*

1. Plug sensor into the side of the monitor.
2. If a new CAPNOSTAT is used, calibrate the system.
3. Apply sensor to the breathing circuit.
4. Set Waveform 2 or 3 to CO2 or Auto Display CO2 to Waveform 2 or 3.
5. Set the Resp. Source to CO2/ECG.
* CAPNOSTAT® is a trademark of NOVAMETRIX, Inc.
G. Recording Information
1. Select wave to be recorded through Record Menu. Press PRINT to start Recording.
2. Press PRINT again to stop the recording in process.
3. If a printout of a tabular trend is desired, press DISPLAY followed by PRINT.
H. Temperature Measurement
1. Attach the desired temperature probe to the Temperature connector on the side of the
Passport XG. The Passport XG automatically detects which probe is connected, 400
or 700 series.
I. CO2, O2, N2O and Agent Monitoring with the Gas Module
1. Connect nasal cannula (non-intubated) or sample line (intubated) to the Patient.
2. Connect other end of nasal cannula or sample line to Gas Module.
3. Empty and clean water trap if more than half full or whenever changing Patients.
4. Set Waveform 2 or 3 to CO2, Agent or O2 or Auto Display CO2 to Waveform 2 or
3.
5. Set the Resp. Source to CO2/ECG.

J. Setting Alarms
1. To access the Alarms Limits menu press the Alarms LIMITS key.
2. Using the UP and DOWN and SELECT keys set parameter limits as desired.
Press SELECT key again to enter the chosen limits.
3. Press the LIMITS key again to access further alarm parameters (when the Gas Module
is installed).
4. Press the EXIT key to return to the main menu.
Detailed Operating Instructions

This section of the Operating Instructions provides guidelines and step-by-step instructions for
proper operation of the monitor. Numbers in parentheses ( ) relate to the displays and
controls described in “Controls, Indicators and Connectors (XG)” on page 1-77.
1.6.1 Setting-up / Turning Power On

1. Set the POWER switch (38) to OFF.
2. Attach any peripheral equipment (i.e., Visa Central Station, Remote Color Display).

3. Attach the power pack to the DC POWER INPUT connector (36). If battery operation is
required, ensure that two fully charged batteries are installed.
NOTE: If power pack is connected ensure that the screw is

tightened so that the cord does not detach.
4. Set the POWER switch (38) to ON.Internal self tests will run and the display will come
on. A “DIAGNOSTICS IN PROGRESS” message will display and once the self tests have
been completed a “SELF TEST COMPLETE” message will display. After these messages
the main screen is displayed.
If any failures occur, see “Status Messages” on page 1-158 for further instructions.
1.6.2 Factory - Default Control Settings

The following are the factory initial (default) control settings. These are the settings that the
unit will power up in unless a “current configuration” has been saved from the set up menu.
Changes can be made and saved to these default settings. The default settings can also be
restored. Refer to the “Set-up Menu” on page 1-176.
DEFAULT
MENU FUNCTION SETTINGS
Patient Size Current setting
Admit* No
Discharge* No
Full Disclosure* Off
Arrhythmia* Off
* This item only appears if the serial output type is set to Visa or Visa w/ Admit.
** These items only appear if the related function is installed.

DEFAULT
Pacer Enhancement Off
Set-up Waveform 2 Cascade ECG
Waveform 3 Pleth
Auto Display IBP1** Waveform 2
Auto Display IBP2** Waveform 3
Auto Display CO2** Waveform 3
Powerup Settings No change
Recorder Wave Selection ECG
Record on Alarm No
Recorder Destination* Passport
Alarms Alarms: Low High
HR Off Off
SpO2 85 Off
IBP1 Sys** Off Off
IBP1 Dia** Off Off
NIBP Sys Off Off
NIBP Dia Off Off
IBP2 Mean** Off Off
Respiration Off Off
Apnea Delay Off Adult, Off Ped., 10 sec
Neonate
ETCO2** Off Off
Alarms (Gas Module Resp Rate Off Off
only)
ET CO2 Off Off
INS CO2 Off
ET O2 Off Off
INS O2 Off Off
INS N2O Off
ET ISO Off Off
INS ISO Off Off
ET ENF Off Off
INS ENF Off Off
ET DES Off Off
INS DES Off Off
ET SEV Off Off
INS SEV Off Off
ET HAL Off Off
INS HAL Off Off
NIBP Start Pressure 180 mmHg Adult, 140 mmHg
Ped., 120 mmHg Neonate
IBP** IBP1 Scale Range 150 mmHg

DEFAULT
IBP2 Scale Range 37.5 mmHg
Resp Resp Speed 12.5 mm/sec.
Scale 3
Resp Source CO2/ECG or ECG if CO2 not
installed
HR/ECG Trace Speed 25 mm/sec.
Source Auto
SpO2 (Datascope)** Pleth Size 3
Sensor-Off Audio On
SpO2 (Nellcor)** Response Mode 3
Sensor-Off Audio On
SpO2 (Masimo)** Sensor-Off Audio On
Sensitivity Mode Normal
Post Average Time (sec) 8
CO2** Scale 60 Torr
Start Zero Calibration No
Start Adapter Cal No
N2O Compensation Off
O2 Compensation 21%
ECG Lead II
Size 1
NIBP Interval Off
Gases** CO2 Scale 0 - 60 Torr
Resp Speed 12.5 mm/sec
Start Zero No
Start Calibration No
Restart Pump No
Agent Selection Auto
Agent Scale 10%
O2 Scale 18 - 30%
Volume Beep Off
Alarm 1

1.6.2.1 User Configuration Menu Items

The following are the initial factory settings for the User Configuration Menu. These settings
can only be changed within this menu. Initial factory settings can be changed within the User
Configuration Menu only.

Trend Trigger NIBP
Interval Timer 5 mins
Temperature Scale Fahrenheit*
HrSpO2 Size HrSpO2 Size HR small, SpO2 large
Alarm Audio Delay Alarm Audio Delay Off
Audio Alarm Standby Audio Alarm Standby On
Serial Output Type Serial Output Type Visa
Accutorr Baud Rate 1200 bps
CO2 Barometric Pressure 760 mmHg
CO2 Torr
Color Settings ECG Color White
NIBP Color White
SpO2 Color Green
Gases Color Green
IBP1 Color Red
IBP2 Color Red
Resp Color Red
Temp Color Red
Gas Monitor CO2 Units mmHg
* Fahrenheit is the default setting for English units only. All other language units default to Centigrade.
1.6.3 Display
ECG AREA
MENU PARAMETER
AREA AREA
MULTI-FUNCTION AREA
MESSAGE AREA

The Display is divided into five graphic areas as shown above.
MENU Display Area - displays the main menu selections available with the
cursor and select keys, the battery symbol and the mute categories.
ECG Display Area - displays the ECG trace, ECG information and pacer
enhancement status.
PARAMETER Display Area - displays the current values of patient parameters.
MULTI-FUNCTION Display Area - displays additional waveforms and
temporary boxes for menu functions.
MESSAGE Display Area - displays messages relating to NIBP, SpO2, CO2, Gas Module
and recorder operation.
1.6.3.1 Menu Display Area
The menu area displays the main menu selections available. These are accessed by using the
UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1) and SELECT (2) set-up keys. See “Use of Menus” on
page 1-109 for details on using these keys. One menu item is always highlighted by the
cursor. This window also contains the TIME, DATE, PATIENT SIZE and MUTE status (when
active) information.
For each patient size available there are different choices within the menu selections. The
following table indicates the choices for each menu set-up and also where there are different
selections for each patient size. For a graphic representation of each of these menus see
“Use of Menus” on page 1-109.
NOTE: The “IBP”, “Recorder”, “CO2” and “Gas Module” (Gases)

menu items only appear on models equipped with these
options.

NOTE: The sample display shown may not be an exact

MENU LIST MENU ITEM CHOICES

Patient Size Adult, Pediatric, Neonate
Admit* Yes, No
Discharge* Yes, No
Full Disclosure* On, Off
Arrhythmia* On, Off
Pacer Enhancement On, Off
Setup Waveform 2 IBP1, Cascade ECG, Pleth, Resp, CO2,
Agent**, O2**
Waveform 3 IBP1, IBP2, Pleth, Resp, CO2, Agent**,
O2**
Auto Display IBP1** Waveform 2, Waveform 3, Off
Auto Display IBP2** Waveform 3, Off
Auto Display CO2** Waveform 2, Waveform 3, Off
Power up Settings No Change, Save Current, Restore
Factory
Recorder Wave Selection ECG, Pleth., Resp., ECG & IBP1, ECG &
IBP2, IBP1 & IBP2, CO2, ECG & Resp.,
CO2 & O2**, CO2 & Agent**
Record on Alarm Yes, No
Record Destination Passport, Central, Both
NIBP Start Pressure Adult: 100-260 mmHg
Ped.: 60-180 mmHg
Neonate: 40-120 mmHg
IBP* BP1 Scale Range 37.5, 75, 150, 300 mmHg
BP2 Scale Range 37.5, 75, 150, 300 mmHg
Resp Resp Speed 1.3.125, 6.25, 12.5, 25 mm/sec.
Scale 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Resp Source Off, ECG (If CO2 is installed) Off,
ECG/CO2/Off, CO2/ECG
HR/ECG Trace Speed 12.5, 25, 50 mm/sec.
HR Source Auto, ECG, IBP1, SpO2
SpO2*(Datascope) Pleth Size 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Sensor-Off Audio On, Off, Cont.
SpO2*(Nellcor) Response Mode 1, 2, 3
Sensor-Off Audio On, Off, Cont.
SpO2*(Masimo) Sensor-Off Audio ON, OFF, CONT
Sensitivity Mode Normal, High
Post Average Time (sec) 4,6,8,10,12,14,16
CO2*(Capnostat) CO2 Scale 40, 60, 100 Torr / 5, 8, 12 kPa / 5, 8,
12 %
Start Zero Calibration Yes, No
Start Adapter Calibration Yes, No
* These items only appear if the related function is installed.
** This item only appears if the Gas Module option is installed and serial output is set to Gas Module.

MENU LIST MENU ITEM CHOICES

N2O Compensation On, Off
O2 Compensation 0, 21, 40, 60, 80, 100
Gases ** CO2 Scale 40, 60, 100 mmHg
Resp Speed 1.3.125, 6.25, 12.5, 25 mm/sec.
Start Zeroing Yes, No
Start Calibration Yes, No
Restart Pump Yes, No
Agent Selection Iso, Enf, Des, Sev, Hal, Auto
Agent Scale 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 20%
O2 Scale 18-30%, 18-60%, 18-100%
* These items only appear if the related function is installed.
** This item only appears if the Gas Module option is installed and serial output is set to Gas Module.
1.6.3.2 ECG Display Area
FIGURE 1-61 ECG Display Area
The ECG Display Area contains the ECG waveform, the ECG size, scale, lead information,
Pacer Enhancement ON/OFF message, and when appropriate a message indicating there is
no ECG waveform available.
• ECG SIZE - The ECG size displays a vertical bar and a “1 mV” label. The vertical bar is
used as a reference to determine the size of the displayed ECG waveform. There are a
total of 6 size settings for the vertical bar. Five size settings are 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 3 cm.
The sixth setting is larger than the ECG waveform window and therefore the “1 mV” label
is removed. The size that measures a 1 cm signal on the display is indicated by small line
segments added to the top and bottom of the vertical bar (as shown above).
NOTE: Changing the ECG SIZE only changes the display scale not
the ECG amplitude.
• ECG LEAD - The ECG lead display shows the current ECG lead selection. The lead
display options are I, II, III, aVR, aVF, aVL, and V.
• ECG WAVEFORM - The display shows the ECG waveform at a user selected speed. This
provides 4 seconds of data on the display (at 25mm/sec). The
vertical scale of the waveform is determined by the ECG size selected.

• LEAD FAULT MESSAGE - The lead fault message box displays “ECG Lead Fault” and is
positioned over the area where the ECG waveform normally resides.
• PACER ENHANCEMENT - Factory default is “Pacer enh OFF” (pacer enhancement off).
The OFF setting allows any pacer to appear as it normally would on the ECG waveform.
When pacer enhancement is turned on via patient menu selection, detected pacers are
enhanced and appear as full scale, narrow square waves.

• INTERFERENCE MESSAGE- When large 60 Hz noise component is present on the ECG

waveform and the notch filter is enabled, the “Interference” message is displayed. The
“Artifact” message will also be displayed in the Parameter Display area. Check the
patient electrode connectors and the cable for proper connection. This message may be
the result of using inappropriate 3-Lead cables.
• ESU INTERFERENCE MESSAGE- When a large high frequency noise component is
present on the ECG waveform, the message “ESU Interference” is displayed. If both high
frequency and 60 Hz noise are present, the “ESU Interference” message and the Artifact
message are displayed.
1.6.3.3 Multi-function Display Area
FIGURE 1-62 Multi-Function Display Area
Displayed within the Multi-function Area of the screen are the:
A. Waveforms
B. Trend Lists
A. Waveforms
The waveform display is the normal display in the multi-function area. The waveforms occupy
the entire multi-function area.This area is divided horizontally in two. These two areas are
used for waveforms 2 and 3.
The options for each waveform are listed in Table 1-4, page 1-23.
The scale information for invasive pressures consists of a 0 at the bottom of each window to
represent zero pressure level and the scale range value at the top of the window.
The waveform provides four seconds of data when the selected speed is 25mm/sec.


B. Trend Lists
FIGURE 1-63 Trend List Display
Pressing the DISPLAY key (19) displays the trend lists, as shown above. The trend lists take up
the entire Multi-function area. To view additional parameters press the DISPLAY key (19)
again. Pressing this key a third time returns the screen to normal. Pressing and holding the
DISPLAY key (19) for 3 seconds will clear all trended data.
Each entry to the trend list is added to the bottom of the list until the page is full. Nine lines of
data can be displayed on each page. The trend data memory is large enough to contain
more than one page of data. When the most current page is full and new data is available,
the top line of data in the window is removed (but kept in memory). The other lines of data
are scrolled up and the new data is added as the last line of data in the window. To scroll
through the data that is in memory press the q and p trend keys (20).
The trend lists display consists of a heading that includes the page #, the time, the
parameters with their units, and the listed data in columns under the appropriate heading.
If no data is available for a particular column, dashes (—-) are displayed. If an NIBP
measurement was attempted and a valid reading was unable to be obtained (xxx) will be
displayed in the NIBP column.
If respiration is turned off, “OFF” is displayed in the respiration column.
NOTE: The IBP1, CO2 and Gas Module columns display only in
models that are equipped with these options. If CO2 is being
monitored, the CO2 trend will replace the Temp trend. All
Gas Module trends will be on a separate page.
The Trend Trigger and Interval are set in the User Configuration Trend menu. See “User
Configuration Mode” on page 1-153.
To clear the trend data, press and hold the DISPLAY key (19) for 3 seconds.
NOTE: Trend data will be stored in memory for 1 hour after the
unit has been powered down. After 1 hour the trend data
will be cleared.


1.6.3.4 Parameters Display Area
FIGURE 1-64 Parameters Display Area
The parameters display area contains the current values of the patient parameters. The
contents and the layout of the parameters area depends on how many invasive blood
pressure transducers are connected and whether or not the Gas Module option is installed to
the monitor. The example above is with two transducers connected and with the Gas Module
configured.
Within the NIBP parameter area the interval chosen is displayed and the elapsed time (ET)
since the last NIBP measurement was taken is displayed. If another NIBP measurement is not
taken within 15 minutes the ET and the NIBP readings will change to dashes.
An “Artifact” message is displayed in this area, under the ECG Heart Rate, whenever 60 Hz
noise is present on the ECG waveform.

1.6.3.5 Message Display Area

This area of the display contains messages relating to NIBP, SpO2, CO2, Gas Module and
recorder operation. See “Status Messages” on page 1-158 for a complete list of these
messages.

1.6.4 Use of Menus

The main menus are accessed by using the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1), SELECT (2),
and EXIT (3) keys.
FIGURE 1-65
FIGURE 1-66
The following is an example of how to set the menu options.
1. Using the UP p and DOWN q arrow keys (1), move the cursor to select the desired
main menu item.
NOTE: As the cursor is moved up and down the list of menu items,
view windows for each menu item are displayed.
2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, (in this case SET-UP has been chosen) press
SELECT (2) to enter into the change window.When SELECT is pressed, the first item in
the sub-menu will be highlighted.
3. To change the highlighted item use the UP p and DOWN q (1) keys. The choices
available are listed in the CHOICES bar. Once the desired choice is displayed, press
SELECT (2) to enter it and move the cursor down to the next item in the sub-menu.
If no change is required to the highlighted item, press SELECT to move the cursor down
to the next item on the list. Keep pressing SELECT until the required item to change is
highlighted.


4. Press the EXIT (3) key to return to the normal monitoring mode when all of the sub-menu
items have been set as desired.
1.6.5 Initiation of NIBP Measurements

1.6.5.1 Manual Initiation of NIBP Measurements
1. Select a pressure cuff that is appropriate for the size of the patient using the chart below
as a guideline.
LIMB
CIRCUMFERENCE DESCRIPTION / CUFF
(CM) NAME DATASCOPE PART NUMBER
Reusable Disposable
45 - 66 Thigh * 0998-00-0003-05
30 - 47 Large Adult 0998-00-0003-02 0683-07-0001-01
24 - 36 Adult 0998-00-0003-01 0683-07-0001-02
18 - 27 Child 0998-00-0003-03 0683-07-0001-03
16 - 25 Small Child 0998-00-0003-04 0683-07-0001-04
10 - 19 Infant 0998-00-0003-06
6 - 11 Newborn 0998-00-0003-07
11 - 17 Neonatal, Size 3 0683-03-0003-02
9 - 13 Neonatal, Size 2 0683-03-0002-02
7 - 10 Neonatal, Size 1 0683-03-0001-02
6- 8 Neonatal, Size 0 0683-03-0004-02
Color Coded Cuffs**
46 - 66 Thigh - Brown 0998-00-0003-26
33 - 47 Large Adult - Grey 0998-00-0003-25
25 - 35 Adult - Tan 0998-00-0003-24
18 - 26 Child - Red 0998-00-0003-23
10 - 19 Infant - Green 0998-00-0003-22
6 - 11 New Born - Blue 0998-00-0003-21

A cuff that is too narrow for the limb will result in erroneously high readings. The correct size
of the pressure cuff for a given patient has, among other considerations, a direct bearing on
the accuracy of the obtained NIBP measurements. Base your selection of the cuff size on the
limb circumference of the patient. The table above indicates the available Datascope cuffs for
use with the Datascope Passport XG Monitor. The design dimensions of the cuffs and their
intended uses are based on recommendations of the American Heart Association.
NOTE: See Accessories section in P/N’s 0070-00-00397, 0070-00-

0440, and 0070-00-0503 for a detailed list of cuffs.
NOTE: Cuffs become more supple as they age and sometimes

develop permanent folds that can leave temporary marks
on the limb. Any cuffs that exhibit this effect should be
replaced.
NOTE: Ensure that the pressure tubes are not compressed or

restricted.
* When using the thigh cuff, this product will not comply with AAMI accuracy standards.
** The limb circumferences of the Color Coded Cuffs adhere to the AHA guidelines for size.
The pressure on the limb may not fall to zero between measurements if the cuff is wrapped
too tightly. Therefore, insure that the cuff is properly applied.
The skin is sometimes fragile (i.e., on pediatrics, geriatrics, etc.). In these cases, a longer
timer interval should be considered to decrease the number of cuff inflations over a period of
time. In extreme cases, a thin layer of soft roll or webril cotton padding may be applied to
the limb in order to cushion the skin when the cuff is inflated. This measure may affect NIBP
performance and should be used with caution.
2. Attach cuff hose to CUFF Connector (27).

3. Apply the cuff to the patient. To reduce errors, the cuff should be fitted snugly, with little
or no air present within the cuff. Be sure the cuff lies directly against the patient’s skin.
No clothing should come between the patient and the cuff.
NOTE: The NIBP cuff should not be placed on a limb that is being
utilized for any other medical procedure. For example, an
I.V. catheter or an SpO2 sensor.

4. Select Patient Size through the PATIENT MENU as described in “Use of Menus” on
page 1-109. Choices are ADULT, PEDIATRIC or NEONATE.
5. If necessary, enter the NIBP parameter menu to change the initial cuff inflation pressure.
Initial cuff inflation pressures depend on the PATIENT SIZE setting. The choices of cuff
inflation are:
PATIENT SIZE SETTING INITIAL CUFF INFLATION VALUES

Adult 100 - 260 mmHg
Pediatric 60 - 180 mmHg
Neonate 40 - 120 mmHg
6. Press START (13) to begin an NIBP measurement.
NOTE: Inflate the cuff only after proper application to the patient’s
limb. Cuff damage can result if the cuff is left unwrapped
and then inflated.
The cuff begins to inflate to the selected cuff pressure. After reaching the selected value the
cuff begins to slowly deflate and the Datascope Passport XG Monitor collects oscillometric
pulsations.
If the initial cuff inflation is found to be inadequate, the unit retries with a higher inflation
pressure (+50 mmHg in the adult mode; +30 mmHg in the pediatric and neonate modes).
Have the patient remain still to avoid the introduction of unnecessary motion artifact. After
the cuff pressure drops below the diastolic pressure, the results of the measurement are
displayed.
If NIBP is the only parameter measured with the Passport XG, a heart rate can be derived
from NIBP. The HR source menu selection must be in the Auto mode (i.e., not selected for
ECG, IBP or SpO2) with no heart rate alarm limits set. (See “Alarms” on page 1-149, for
details).
If NIBP is a selected trend trigger (see “User Configuration Mode” on page 1-153 for details
on user configuration), then NIBP and heart rate values are stored in trend lists. The NIBP and
NIBP heart rate will be automatically removed from the display after 15 minutes have
elapsed.
If another heart rate source is available, the NIBP heart rate will be replaced by the heart
rate from the selected source.
To display heart rate from NIBP:
a. Chose AUTO for HR source.

b. Discontinue monitoring of ECG, SpO2 and IBP.
c. Set high and low heart rate alarms to off.
d. Make a valid NIBP measurement.
During or after an NIBP measurement, one of several advisory messages may be displayed.
Refer to “Status Messages” on page 1-158, for their explanations.

7. If desired, press DEFLATE (15) to interrupt a measurement. The cuff will deflate.
1.6.5.2 Automatic Initiation of NIBP Measurements

Follow steps 1 - 5 in the “Automatic Initiation of NIBP Measurements” on page 1-113.
6. Press INTERVAL (14) until the desired time displays. The choices are: OFF, continuous, 1,
2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60, and 120 minutes.
7. A measurement will be taken when the selected interval has elapsed. If an
immediate measurement is desired, press START (13).
NOTE: If the monitor is in the interval mode when it is turned on,

no measurement will be taken until the “START” key is
pressed. Subsequent measurements are referenced to the
time the unit was turned on. See example in “Start and
Deflate Functions” on page 1-114.
NOTE: When the NIBP continuous interval is chosen, the Passport

XG will continually take back to back blood pressure
readings. As a safety precaution, a five minute limit is
placed on continuous measurements. After 5 minutes, the
NIBP interval will automatically switch to measurements
taken every 5 minutes.

Automatic Adjustment in the Timer Mode

In the timer mode, the unit adjusts the inflation pressure according to the previous reading of
the systolic pressure. After the first measurement in the timer mode, the inflation pressure is
the previous systolic +50 mmHg in the Adult Mode and +30 mmHg in the pediatric and
neonate mode.
Suspension of Automatic NIBP Feature

To suspend an automatically timed measurement sequence or to end a measurement cycle
already in progress (deflate cuff):
1. Press DEFLATE (15).

To take an immediate measurement and resume a suspended timed measurement
sequence:
2. Press START (13).
NOTE: Press DEFLATE (15) at any time to postpone a scheduled

measurement or to terminate a measurement cycle already
in progress.

when Using Automatically Cycled Blood Pressure Cuffs”.
1.6.5.3 NIBP Pressure Limit Fail Safe

If the cuff pressure is over-pressurized, the cuff will automatically vent to atmosphere and the
NIBP message window reads CUFF OVERPRESSURE.
The unit must be turned off and back on again to reset the overpressure switch before any
new measurements are taken.
1.6.5.4 Cuff Inflation Time

If the cuff pressure does not attain 20 mmHg within 40 seconds of the start of inflation or if
the target pressure is not reached within another 60 seconds, then the cuff is vented and the
“RETRY” or “UNABLE TO MEASURE” message will display in the NIBP message window.
1.6.5.5 Start and Deflate Functions

The START and DEFLATE functions have the following effects on the timed measurement
sequence.

• INTERVAL is set and you Press START (13):

An unscheduled measurement is made. Taking this unscheduled measurement does not
affect the timing of the interval cycle, therefore, the scheduled measurements will be taken
as if there were no interruptions. Only one measurement is taken for each measurement
cycle - even if the unscheduled measurement coincides with the scheduled measurement.
• INTERVAL is set and you press DEFLATE (15):
The timed measurement is suspended and the cuff deflates.
• INTERVAL is set and you change the interval:
The measurement cycle is reset with the new interval. A measurement will be taken after
the new interval has elapsed.
For example, with the interval set to five minutes:
TIME MODE/TIMER INTERACTION RESULT

9:45 Unit turned on with interval set to 5 minutes. No measurement taken
9:52 Start key pressed Measurement taken
10:00 Not in Deflate mode and timer requests a measurement Measurement taken
10:04 Deflate mode is entered Deflate message is
displayed on display
10:05 Timer requests a measurement Measurement is skipped
10:07 Interval is changed to 10 min. Interval timing is reset
1.6.6 ECG Acquisition

The patient ECG signal is acquired with a patient cable and skin electrodes. The type of skin
electrode and technique of applying the electrodes are major factors in determining the
quality of the signal obtained. Use high quality, silver-silver chloride electrodes. These are
designed to acquire the ECG with excellent base line stability, recovery from defibrillation,
and minimum artifact from patient movement.
WARNING: Insure that the conductive parts of ECG electrodes do not

1. For optimal skin contact, thoroughly prep patient skin for electrode placement by doing
the following.
• Shave hair from electrode sites.
• Cleanse skin thoroughly with alcohol to remove skin oils.
• Dry with a rough towel or gauze to remove dry skin.
• Attach electrodes to lead wire first before placing onto patient.
NOTE: Using more than one type of electrode on the same patient
should be avoided because of variations in electrical
resistance.

2. Use the ESIS choke cable if an electro-surgical device is to be used on the patient.
3. Plug patient cable into the ECG (30) connector.
An ECG waveform should now be present on the screen and the heart rate read-out
should now be functional.
4. Select desired lead setting by pressing the front panel ECG LEAD key (7). Lead II is
automatically selected at power-up.
5. Select desired ECG size by pressing the front panel ECG SIZE key (8). An ECG of 1cm/
mV is automatically selected at power-up.
6. If cascaded ECG is desired in waveform 2, use the Set-up menu (see “Use of Menus” on
page 1-109), to choose this option.
NOTE: Set the Auto Display for IBP1 and CO2 to either waveform 3
or Off. If either of these functions are set to waveform 2,
they will have a higher priority to display, if they are
detected.
7. Choose HR source for rate meter from HR menu. Choices are: ECG, BP1, SpO2, or
AUTO. AUTO selects the source from a hierarchy (ECG, IBP1, SpO2) of what is currently
monitored.
8. Press BEEP VOLUME (21) to set the volume of the systole beep.

“ECG Lead Fault” Message

• The Passport XG will display the message “ECG Lead Fault” to indicate when ECG
monitoring is inoperative.
• When ECG lead I, II or III is being monitored, a lead fault sensed by RA, LA, or LL will
• When lead aVR, aVL, or aVF is being monitored, a lead fault sensed by RA, LA, LL, or RL
will cause the “ECG Lead Fault” message to display. When the specified 3-Lead cable is
used, the “ECG Lead Fault” message will display because the RL lead is not available.
• When ECG V lead is being monitored, a lead fault sensed on RA, LA, LL, RL or C will
• When the specified 3-Lead cable is used, the “ECG Lead Fault will display because the RL
and C is not available.
WARNING: Do not use the following 3-Lead ECG cables with Passport
XG (P/N’s 0998-00-0133-xx, 0998-00-0134-xx and 0998-
00-0137-xx): 0012-00-0620-05, -06, -07, -08; 0012-00-
0722-05, -06, -07, 08; 0012-00-0723-05, -06, -07, -08;
0012-00-0724-05, -06, -07, -08. The above 3-Lead cables
contain a jumper wire which connects RL (right leg) to LL (left
leg). As a result, when you view aVR, aVL and aVF you will
see the appropriate ECG waveforms (even though you are
using a 3-lead cable). However, there may be excessive
noise on these waveforms which can corrupt the heart rate
calculation. See Section 5 in the Datascope P/N’s 0070-00-
397, 0070-00-0440, 0070-00-0503 of the Passport
Operating Instructions for a list of the proper ECG cables.
1.6.6.1 Adult Electrode Placement

For 5 Lead ECG Monitoring

W hite Black
RA LA
RA LA
Brown
V Lead
C ( any position)
V6
V1
Gr een V5
Red V4
RL LL LL
RL
V2 V3
FIGURE 1-67 5 Lead Electrode FIGURE 1-68 V-Lead Electrode

Placement Placement
• Place black electrode on left shoulder • V1-Fourth intercostal space, right
under clavicle. sternal border.
• Place white electrode on right shoulder • V2-Fourth intercostal space, left sternal
under clavicle. border.
• Place red electrode on lower left • V3-Midway between V2 and V4 on a
abdomen under the sixth rib. line joining these 2 locations.
• Place green electrode on lower right • V4-Fifth interspace in mid-clavicular
abdomen under the ribs. line.
• Place the brown lead in any one of the • V5-Fifth interspace in anterior axillary
V lead (V1 - V6) positions, see line.
• V6-Fifth interspace in mid-axillary line.
W hit e Blac k W hite
RA LA RA
Blac k Red
LA
LL
Red
LL
FIGURE 1-69 3 Lead Electrode FIGURE 1-70 3-Lead Electrode

Placement (standard Placement (for MCL)
configuration)
• Place black electrode on left shoulder • Place white electrode on left shoulder
under clavicle. under clavicle.
• Place white electrode on right shoulder • Place black electrode on right sternal
under clavicle. border, 4th intercostal space.
• Place red electrode on lower left • Place red electrode on midaxillary line,
abdomen under the sixth rib. 5th intercostal space.

W hit e Blac k W hite
RA LA RA
Blac k Red
LA
LL
Red
LL
FIGURE 1-69 3 Lead Electrode FIGURE 1-70 3-Lead Electrode

Placement (standard Placement (for MCL)
configuration)
• Place black electrode on left shoulder • Place white electrode on left shoulder
under clavicle. under clavicle.
• Place lead select on lead II. • Select lead I for monitoring.
• For MCL, select lead II for monitoring.
1.6.6.2 Neonatal Electrode Placement
White
LA Red
RA
Black
FIGURE 1-71 Neonatal Electrode Placement
Lead placement on the neonate with a three lead set is directed towards obtaining the best
respiration waveform. The thoracic impedance is measured between the RA and LA
electrodes therefore, the electrodes must be placed across the chest from each other to
optimize measurement of chest movement.
1.6.7 Invasive Pressure Acquisition

1. Plug the pressure transducer into the PRESSURE TRANSDUCER connector (31) or (32) on
the side panel.

2. To establish a monitoring site introduce an arterial pressure catheter into the patient’s
artery in accordance with standard hospital procedures. “Best practice,” as determined
by the medical community, should be observed.
NOTE: The arterial pressure catheter should not be used on a limb

that is being utilized for any other medical procedure. For
example, an I.V. catheter or an SpO2 sensor.
3. Connect catheter line with flushing device to the pressure transducer.

4. Zero pressure transducer as follows:
Initially, a “TRANSDUCER NOT ZEROED” message is displayed in the parameter

window, indicating the need to zero the transducer.
a. Open transducer vent to atmosphere.
b. Press ZERO (10) or (11) and hold for a minimum of one second.
After one second has elapsed, an audible click will sound, and the automatic zero
process is complete. The pressure display should indicate zeros.
NOTE: If the transducer offset should exceed 120 mmHg, it will not
be possible to automatically zero the transducer. Pressure
values will be —- and an “UNABLE TO ZERO” message
replaces the “TRANSDUCER NOT ZEROED” message.
5. Close the pressure transducer vent from atmosphere. If an IBP waveform is desired, use
the Set-up menu (see “Use of Menus” on page 1-109), to assign a waveform window to
display IBP. If the Auto Display function is used to display an IBP waveform, ensure that
the Auto Display CO2 is not set to the same waveform as Auto Display IBP. The Auto
Display feature assigns a higher priority to the CO2 function than IBP. Also, IBP1 has a
higher priority than IBP2.
6. Select the desired pressure scale in the IBP Menu. The choices are: 37.5, 75, 150, or
300 mmHg.
7. Flush arterial line at regular intervals per standard hospital procedure.
NOTE: Pressure transducers are protected against the effects of

defibrillation and electrocautery.
1.6.8 Sequence for Establishing SpO2

To obtain SpO2 measurements, SpO2 Heart Rate, and the plethysmographic waveform from
the Passport Monitor: (see “Sequence for Establishing SpO2 with Masimo® Pulse Oximetry”
on page 1-124 for units with Masimo® SpO2 and “Sequence for Establishing SpO2 with
Nellcor® Pulse Oximetry” on page 1-127 for units with Nellcor SpO2)
1. Select the appropriate sensor for the patient.

Guidelines for the selection of Datascope sensors are provided in Table 1-1 on page 1-
124.
2. Plug the patient cable into the SpO2 Connector (28) on the left side panel.
3. Apply sensor and connect to cable.


4. The digital SpO2 values and SpO2 heart rate will be displayed in the SpO2 parameter
window.
page 1-109, to display it as waveform 2.
detected.
6. To change the size of the waveform displayed select the SpO2 menu and chose the
desired size. Choices are: 1, 2, 3 or 4.
7. Press BEEP VOLUME (21) to set the volume of the SpO2 beep.
8. Set the “Sensor -Off Audio”, in the SpO2 menu to the desired setting. Set to "OFF", the
Passport will not give an audio beep when the SpO2 sensor is off the patient. Set to
“ON”, the Passport will give a one time series of 5 triple beeps. Set to “CONT”, the
Passport will give a series of 5 triple beeps every 30 seconds.
1.6.8.1 Datascope Pulse Oximetry Sensors

A. Introduction
A wide range of Datascope sensors are available for connection to the Datascope Passport
XG Monitor equipped with Datascope SpO2. The sensors cover both short-term and long-
term monitoring needs on patients ranging from neonates to large adults.
The DATASENSOR is intended for short-term adult monitoring.
The FLEXISENSOR® SD, available in five different sizes, provides both short-term and long-
term monitoring for large adults, pediatrics, infants, and neonates. The FLEXISENSOR® SD is
used when the DATASENSOR is not convenient or suitable.
An adult ear sensor is also available. It is intended for long-term adult monitoring.
A range of disposable bandages are available for use with the FLEXISENSOR® SDs. They
are available in 3 styles, SENSOR GUARD™ (used for large adults, adults and pediatrics),
Coban with SENSOR GUARD™ (used for infants) and LIGHTGUARD™ (used for neonates).
Use of the sensors does not cause any penetration of the skin, nor is there any electrical
contact or transfer of excessive heat to the patient.
The sensor is composed of a light emitting diode (emitter) and a photo diode (detector). The
emitter discharges two colors (wave lengths) of light into the patient’s extremity (finger, toe,
ear). The detector receives that amount of light not absorbed by the blood or tissue
components. The Passport then uses the relative absorption of the two light wavelengths to
compute and display SpO2 and Rate measurements.

The key benefits of the sensors are:
• electrocautery noise (ESU) rejection • Can be re-sterilized (ETO sterilization - 3

times)
• good motion artifact rejection • patient isolation
• tracking of weak peripheral pulse levels • ease of application and removal
• rejection of ambient light • long term patient comfort
• Electrocautery Noise (ESU) Rejection - The sensor configuration of both the

DATASENSOR and the FLEXISENSOR® SD provide uninterrupted monitoring and
absence of false alarms during the use of ESU (ESU can be set at any power level). This
design prevents electro-surgical noise entering the monitor, via the sensor, and interfering
with unit operation.
• Monitoring Restless Patients - Motion artifact rejection is achieved in several ways.
1. The sensor design used with their recommended bandages assures a snug fit of the
sensor to the patient.
2. Light emitting diodes (LEDs) and detectors gather a strong signal from the patient.
3. Software in the Passport evaluates the shape of each pulse and automatically rejects
noisy and unreliable pulses.
4. When in the presence of motion, the software adjusts the “averaging-period”,
increasing it to a maximum of 15 seconds during motion, and automatically reducing
it during quiet periods to obtain a fast response. This combination reduces the
number of monitoring interruptions and false alarms from patient motion.
• Tracking of Weak Peripheral Pulse Levels - Many patients suffer poor peripheral
perfusion due to hypothermia, hypovolemia, reduced cardiac output, etc. The Passport is
designed to automatically increase its gain to track patients with poor peripheral
perfusion.
• Rejection of Ambient Light - Many monitoring situations involve high levels of
ambient light, i.e., operating room lights, neonatal phototherapy, heat warmers, etc. The
Passport Monitor, sensors, and bandages each contribute to the rejection of ambient
light. The monitor automatically measures and corrects for high levels of ambient light.
The enclosed design of the DATASENSOR prohibits the interference of high levels of
ambient light on adults with sensor operation. And the opaque material used in the
composition of the bandages, which are used with the FLEXISENSOR® SD, helps keep
out ambient light.
• Patient Comfort - The FLEXISENSOR® SD line is designed to work with a disposable
bandage of three styles (SENSOR GUARD™, Coban and LIGHTGUARD™) which
conform comfortably and safely to the particular patient’s anatomy.
B. Sensor Selection and Application
Selection of a specific sensor is based on the patient’s size, physical condition, and expected
monitoring duration. General guidelines for the selection of a sensor are provided in the
Sensor Selection Table, page 1-44. Instructions for the application of a sensor to a patient
are provided in each sensor package.
C. Sensor Connection to the Passport Monitor

1. Align the cable connector on the sensor assembly with the SpO2 Patient Connector (28)
on the Passport XG Monitor.

2. Push the cable connector into the SpO2 Patient Connector (28). Confirm that the cable
connector is securely in place.
NOTE: To obtain maximum cable use, do not twist the cable

connector when attaching to or disconnecting from the
Passport XG Monitor.
D. Sensor Inspection
Before use, always inspect sensors, cables, and connectors for damage, i.e., cuts and
abrasions. Do not use the sensor, cable or connector if damaged. Replace with a good
working sensor.
For long sensor life:
• Do not drop on the floor, or give other sharp shocks to the sensor(s). Between use, store
the sensors in the optional FLEXISENSOR® SD Organizer, accessory pouch, or coil the
sensor cable and store on the side of the Passport using the optional cable retainer. For
accessory part number information see Section 5 in Datascope P/N’s 0070-00-0397,
0070-00-0440, 0070-00-0503 of the Passport Operating Instructions.
• Avoid running any cart, bed, or any piece of equipment over the sensor cable.
• Avoid strong pulls on the sensor cable.
• Watch for cracks in the DATASENSOR housing.
• Watch for cracks, cuts, rips, fogging, or signs of moisture in the FLEXISENSOR® SD.
E. Sensor Performance
For the BEST performance of all Datascope sensors:
• DO NOT PLACE any sensor on an extremity with an arterial catheter or blood pressure
cuff in place. Placement of an arterial catheter or blood pressure cuff on an extremity may
obstruct normal blood flow. False pulse rate information may result if the FLEXISENSOR®
SD is placed on that same extremity. Place the sensor on the limb opposite the site of the
arterial catheter or blood pressure cuff.
• Encourage the patient to remain still. Patient motion may affect the sensor’s performance.
If it is not possible for the patient to remain still, replace the sensor bandage on the
FLEXISENSOR® SD to assure good adhesion, or change the site of the DATASENSOR.
• Check the DATASENSOR site every 2 hours and check the FLEXISENSOR® SD site every
8 hours on adults and every 4 hours on neonatal patients for indications of skin
abrasions, sensor displacement, sensor damage, or circulation impairment. Check the
sensor site every 4 hours if the ear clip is used. If necessary, remove and reapply the
sensor. If any of the above mentioned indications occur, immediately remove the sensor
and find an alternate site.
NOTE: Check the sensor site more frequently on infant and active
patients.

• Incorrect placement can also reduce the acquired sensor signal, and therefore
compromise performance. Select an alternate site (toe) or use a FLEXISENSOR® SD if the
sensor can not be placed on the patient’s finger correctly or if the fingernails interfere
with the acquisition of a reliable signal.
• Use of the DATASENSOR is not recommended for long-term monitoring (4-6 hours). For
monitoring situations exceeding 4-6 hours, either reposition the DATASENSOR every 2-4
hours to a different site (finger/toe) or use a FLEXISENSOR® SD with its appropriate
bandage.
• Do not over-tighten the sensor bandages. Excessive pressure on the monitoring site can
affect SpO2 readings and may reduce readings below true SpO2. Excessive pressure can
also result in pressure necrosis and other skin damage.
• Sensor configuration provides uninterrupted monitoring in the following situations:
Electro-cautery Noise - ESU rejection is designed into the sensors.
Motion Artifact - The monitor’s software adjusts the “averaging period” increasing it
during motion and reducing it during inactivity. This decreases the number of monitoring
interruptions and false alarms.
Weak Peripheral Pulses - The monitor’s gain is automatically increased to track pulses on
patients with decreased peripheral perfusion.
• SpO2 measurements may interfere with Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) procedures.
• SpO2 is calibrated to display functional saturation.
LARGE PEDIATRIC INFANT NEONATE ADULT EAR

SENSORS ADULT (LA) ADULT (A) (P) (I) (N) (AE) DATASENSOR
Approximat >80kg/>176 30 -90kg/ 10 - 40kg/ 4.5 - 10kg/ Up to 5kg/ >40kg/>88 40+ kg/90+ lbs
e Patient lbs 66 - 198 lbs 22 - 88 lbs 10 - 22 lbs Up to 11 lbs
Weight lbs
Where Used Fingers, Toes Fingers, Toes Fingers, Feet, Palms, Feet, Palms, Adult Ear Fingers, Toes
Toes Big Toes Heel,Calf
Long or Long & Short Long & Short Long & Long & Long & Long & Short Short Term
Short Term Term Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Term
Monitoring
ESIS Included Included Included Included Included Included Included
Reusable Yes Up to 20 Yes Up to 20 Yes Up to Yes Up to Yes Up to Yes Up to 20 Yes 6-Months
Uses Uses 20 Uses 20 Uses 20 Uses Uses
Bandage Adhesive, Adhesive, Adhesive, Non- Non- N/A N/A
Type Disposable Disposable Disposable Adhesive*, Adhesive*
Disposable Disposable
**Part
Numbers
0998-00- 0998-00- 0998-00- 0998-00- 0998-00- 0998-00- 0600-00-0026-
Sensors
0076-06 0076-05 0076-04 0074-03 0074-04 0074-05 01 (3" sensor
cable)***
Bandages 0683-00- 0683-00- 0683-00- 0683-00- 0683-00- N/A N/A

0409-01 0409-02 0409-03 0415 0440
* Non-adhesive bandages are recommended for premature infants to minimize prenatal skin damage.
** See Accessories, Chapter 5, for more detailed information.
*** Additional choices: 0060-00-0026-02 (10’ sensor cable) 0020-00-0071-01 (3’ sensor cable plus 7’ extension
cable)

1.6.9 Sequence for Establishing SpO2 with Masimo® Pulse Oximetry *

1. Select the appropriate sensor for the patient from the table below. All sensors below are
non-sterile and can be used during patient movement.
TABLE 1-1 Masimo® Sensor Family
DISPOSABLE
SELECTION PART NUMBER PATIENT SIZE / REUSABLE
LNOP® - Adt Adult Disposable Finger 0600-00-0043-01 > 30 kg. Disposable
Sensor
LNOP® -Pdt Pediatric/Slender Digit 0600-00-0044-01 10 to 50 kg. Disposable
Disposable Sensor
LNOP® - Neo Neonatal Disposable 0600-00-0045-01 > 2000 gm. Disposable
Sensor
LNOP® - Neo Pt Neonatal Pre-term 0600-00-0046-01 < 2000 gm. Disposable
Disposable Sensor
LNOP® - DC1 Adult Reusable Finger 0600-00-0047 > 30 kg. Reusable
Sensor
LNOP® DCSC Adult Reusable Spot 0600-00-0077 > 30 kg. Reusable
Check Sensor
LNOP® YI Multisite Reusable Sensor 0600-00-0078 > 1 kg. Reusable
LNOP® EAR Reusable Ear Sensor 0600-00-0079 > 30 kg. Reusable
2. Attach the PC12 Patient Cable (P/N 0012-00-1099-02) to the sensor and plug the other
end of the patient cable into the SpO2 connector (28) located on the left side panel of
the monitor.
NOTE: The PC12 Patient Cable is not used with the LNOPDCSC
Sensors.

NOTE: Ensure proper routing of patient cable to avoid

entanglement and/or strangulation.






WARNING: Many patients suffer from poor peripheral perfusion due to

hypothermia, hypovolemia, severe vasoconstriction,
reduced cardiac output, etc. These symptoms may cause a
loss in vital sign readings.
WARNING: The site should be checked at least every eight (8) hours
(every four (4) hours with the Adult re-usable finger sensor).
Ensure proper adhesion, skin integrity, and proper
alignment. Nail polish and fungus may effect readings.
Exercise extreme caution with poorly perfused patients.
Skin erosion and pressure necrosis can be caused when
sensors are not frequently monitored. Assess the site every
two (2) hours with poorly perfused patients.


page 1-109, to display it as Waveform 2.
detected.

1.6.9.1 Masimo® Sensors and Patient Cable

Masimo® provides a family of sensors suitable for a wide variety of clinical settings and
All sensors are indicated for continuous noninvasive monitoring of arterial oxygen saturation
(SpO2) and pulse rate. The LNOP DCSC Adult Reuable Spot Check Sensor is used for ‘‘Spot
Check’’ applications. The LNOP® - DC1 Adult Re-usable Finger Sensor can also be used for
“spot check” applications if needed. All sensors are intended for “single-patient use only”
unless indicated as ‘‘reusable’’.
Selecting a Sensor
the appropriate sensor, consider the patient’s weight, level of activity, adequacy of perfusion,
which sensor sites are available and the anticipated duration of monitoring.
Cleaning And Re-use

The sensor may be reattached to the same patient if the emitter and detector windows are
clear and the adhesive still adheres to the skin. The adhesive can be partially rejuvenated by
wiping with an alcohol wipe and allowing the sensor to thoroughly air dry prior to
replacement on the patient.
To insure optimal performance, use an appropriate sensor, apply it as directed, and observe
In the event that you are unable to get any reading, or the reading you get is inaccurate,
consider the following:
• If your patient is poorly perfused, try applying the sensor to another site - such as a
different finger or toe.
• Check that the sensor is properly aligned.
• In electrosurgery, make sure sensor is not too close to ESU devices or cables.
• Check to make sure the site area is clean/non-greasy, clean site and sensor if needed.
Nail polish and fungus should be removed.
• Excessive patient motion can affect readings and may cause a “SpO2 Interference”
message to be displayed. Encourage the patient to remain still. If this is not possible try
moving the sensor to another site.


• Ensure proper sensors are used for the proper application. For instance, LNOP® - Adt
Adult Disposable Finger Sensors are not intended for use across a child’s hand or foot.

Oximetry Sensitivity Modes and Post Average Time

The Passport has two sensitivity modes for SpO2, normal and high. The user should choose
the sensitivity mode depending upon signal quality and patient motion. In most cases, the
normal setting will be appropriate. If the patient motion is limited, high sensitivity can be
used. High sensitivity will provide a better reading, however detection of a “SpO2 SENSOR
OFF” condition will be less.
The Passport has the ability to change the averaging of the Saturation, Pulse Rate, and Signal
Strength measurements for SpO2. The post average time can be changed to 4,6,8,10,12,14
or 16 seconds.
Pleth Auto Scaling

The Pleth waveform is automatically scaled when using Masimo® SpO2. There is no
Changing Sensitivity Modes

To change the sensitivity mode, select SpO2 in the menu and toggle the sensitivity mode
choices for normal and high. Press SELECT (2) and EXIT (3) to lock in the choice and return to
monitoring mode. See “Use of Menus” on page 1-109.
Changing Post Average Time

To change the post average time, select SpO2 in the menu and set the post average time
between 4 and 16. Press SELECT (2) and EXIT (3) to lock in the choice and return to
monitoring mode. See “Use of Menus” on page 1-109.
1.6.10 Sequence for Establishing SpO2 with Nellcor® Pulse Oximetry *

1. Select the appropriate sensor for the patient see table on page 1-51.

2. Plug the sensor directly into the SpO2 connector (28) located on the left side panel of the
monitor or if necessary, use a Nellcor® EC-4 or EC-8 sensor extension cable.








page 1-109, to display it as Waveform 2.
detected.

1.6.10.1 Nellcor® Sensors

Nellcor® provides a family of sensors suitable for a wide variety of clinical settings and
OXISENSOR™ oxygen transducers are sterile adhesive sensors with optical components
mounted on adhesive tape. OXIBAND® oxygen transducers and the DURAFORM™ oxygen
transducer system are reusable sensors that are applied with disposable adhesive. The
DURASENSOR® DS-100A adult digit oxygen transducer is a reusable sensor with its optical
components mounted in a plastic casing. The Nellcor® RS-10 reflectance oxygen transducer
is an adhesive sensor for application to forehead or temple.
NOTE: Nellcor®, OXIBAND® and DURASENSOR® are registered

trademarks of Nellcor® Incorporated. OXISENSOR™ and
DURAFORM™ are trademarks of Nellcor Incorporated.

Selecting a Sensor
the appropriate sensor, consider the patient’s weight, level of activity, adequacy of perfusion,
which sensor sites are available, whether sterility is required, and the anticipated duration of
monitoring.
Cleaning and Re-use

Do not immerse any OXISENSOR™, DURASENSOR®, OXIBAND®, or DURAFORM™
oxygen transducer, the Nellcor® RS-10 oxygen transducer, or any Nellcor® adhesive in
water or cleaning solution. Clean DURASENSOR®, OXIBAND®, and DURAFORM™ oxygen
transducers, and the Nellcor® RS-10 oxygen transducer by wiping with a disinfectant such
as 70% alcohol. Do not sterilize by irradiation, steam, or ethylene oxide. Use a new
OXIBAND® adhesive wrap or FORM-A adhesive bandage for each patient. Do not re-
sterilize OXISENSOR™ oxygen transducers.
To insure optimal performance, use an appropriate sensor, apply it as directed, and observe
If poor perfusion affects instrument performance, and the patient weighs more than 50 kg
(110 lbs.), consider using the OXISENSOR™ R-15 adult nasal oxygen transducer. Because
the R-15 obtains its measurements from the nasal septal anterior ethmoid artery, an artery
supplied by the internal carotid, this sensor may obtain measurements when peripheral
perfusion is relatively poor. For low peripheral perfusion, consider using the Nellcor® RS-10
reflectance oxygen transducer, which is applied to the forehead or temple.

• Use a type of sensor that tolerates some patient motion, such as the OXISENSOR™ D-25,
D-20, N-25, or I20 oxygen transducer.

TABLE 1-1 Nellcor® SENSOR FAMILY
SELECTION D25/D25L N-25 I-20 D-20 RS-10

GUIDE ADULT R-15 ADULT NEONATAL INFANT PEDIATRIC ADULT
Patient Size >30 kg >50 kg <3 kg >40 kg 1-20 kg 10-50 kg >40 kg
Duration of Short or Long Short or Long Short or Long Short or Short or Long Short Term
Use Term Term Term Long Term Term
Sterility Sterile1 Sterile1 Sterile1 Sterile1 Sterile1 Non-sterile
Patient Limited Activity Inactive Limited Limited Limited Activity Limited
Activity Activity Activity Activity
OXISENSOR OXISENSOR OXISENSOR OXISENSOR OXISENSOR RS-10
adult digit adult nasal neonatal infant digit pediatric digit reflectance
oxygen oxygen oxygen oxygen oxygen oxygen
transducer transducer transducer transducer transducer transducer
1
In an unopened, undamaged package.
All Nellcor® accessories and sensors must be purchased form Nellcor® Inc., 25495
Whitehall Street, Hayward, Ca. 94545. To contact Nellcor®, call 1-800-NELLCOR.

Oximetry Operating Modes

The Passport’s three operating modes for SpO2 enable it to make accurate measurements
despite differing levels of patient activity. In all three modes, the Passport updates its
measurements with every pulse beat. Data from the most recent beat replaces data from the
earliest beat and new averages are determined and displayed. The three modes are: 1
(default setting), 2, and 3.
1. The default operating mode, uses a 5 to 7 second averaging time and is useful in
situations in which the patient is relatively inactive.

2. This mode uses a 2 to 3 second averaging time and therefore is more affected by
patient motion. It is useful for special applications that require a fast response time, such
as sleep studies.
3. This mode uses a 10 to 15 second averaging time and consequently is least affected by
patient motion. In this mode, if SpO2 has been selected as the source for pule rate
information, pulse rate is not displayed and there is no pulse tone.
Pleth Auto Scaling

The Pleth waveform is automatically scaled when using Nellcor® SpO2. There is no
Changing Operating Modes

To change from 1 to 2 or 3, select SpO2 in the menu and toggle through the choices of 1, 2,
and 3 using the up and down arrow keys. Press SELECT (2) then EXIT (3) to lock the choice in
and return to monitoring mode. See “Use of Menus” on page 1-109 for details on using
menus.
The operating mode will be displayed in the pleth waveform window.
1.6.11 Respiration Monitoring

The Passport XG Monitor offers two kinds of respiratory monitoring: thoracic impedance and
CO2 waveform. Both methods offer certain benefits and limitations. A respiration source must
be selected, see “Resp Menu” on page 1-179.

1.6.11.1 Thoracic Impedance

The Passport XG Monitor presents a small electrical signal across the RA and LA ECG limb
leads. This signal changes as the patient’s chest wall rises and falls during the breath cycle.
The advantage of the thoracic impedance method is that respiration is obtained non-
invasively and without any extra cost. It is important to use cables with internal resistors for
Thoracic Impedance, see Section 5 in the Datascope P/N’s 0070-00-0397, 0070-00-0440,
0070-00-0503 Passport Operating Instructions for a list of cables.
Choke blocks are electrical filters that may be used in electro-cautery environments where
ECG interference can be substantial. These filters remove the electro-cautery noise, but also
block the signal used by the Passport XG Monitor to measure respiration.
The filling and emptying of the heart chambers can interfere with the thoracic impedance
signal, so called cardiovascular artifact (CVA), such that the respiratory signal matches the
heart rate. The Passport XG warns the operator when the respiration value equals the heart
rate by displaying the CVA message.
If the patient’s airway is obstructed and the patient attempts to breath, then the chest wall can
move and create a respiratory signal even though no gas flow is occurring to the patient.

1.6.11.2 CO2 Waveform

When used with the optional mainstream/sidestream CO2 or optional Gas Module the
Passport XG may use the breath waveform to report the respiration rate by measuring the
actual breaths per unit time. The advantage of the CO2 waveform method is that the signal is
a direct result of respiration and can only occur if the patient is actually breathing. Refer to
Section 1.6.12 on page 1-134 through Section 1.6.14 on page 1-146 for more details on
the above options for CO2 monitoring.

1.6.11.3 Respiration Monitoring on the Passport XG

1.6.11.3.1 Thoracic Impedance
2. Select WAVEFORM 3 and set to RESP (if waveform desired).
NOTE: Set the Auto Display for IBP1, IBP2 and CO2 to either
waveform 2 or Off. If any of these functions are set to
waveform 3, they will have a higher priority to display, if
they are detected.
3. Press the SELECT key (2), then the EXIT key (3).
4. Select RESP menu, choose RESP SOURCE and set to ECG.
1.6.11.3.2 CO2 Waveform (requires optional mainstream/sidestream CO2 or

Gas Module)
2. Select Auto Display CO2 and set to waveform 3 (if waveform desired).
4. Select RESP menu, choose RESP SOURCE and set to CO2/Off or CO2/ECG.
NOTE: Refer to “Resp Menu” on page 1-179 for further

information on RESP SOURCE settings.
1.6.12 Mainstream CO2 Gas Monitoring

The Passport XG offers the Capnostat® mainstream and sidestream method of measuring
respiratory rate and end tidal CO2. (For Sidestream CO2 information, see “Sidestream CO2
Gas Monitoring” on page 1-139) Capnostat® requires a hardware option within the
Passport XG Monitor. It utilizes a large lumen adapter which is placed directly into the
endotracheal tube.
1.6.12.1 Sequence for Establishing Mainstream Capnostat® CO2

1. Plug the CO2 sensor into the Passport XG CO2 connector (34). The “Sensor Warming
Up” message is displayed.
NOTE: The CO2 waveform displays while the sensor is warming

up, however numeric data will not be available until the
“Sensor Warming Up” message disappears.

2. Select CO2/Off or CO2/ECG as the Resp. Source in the Resp Menu.

3. Snap a clean airway adapter into the U-shaped sensor. Align the arrow on the bottom of
the adapter with the arrow on the bottom of the sensor.
4. Position the airway adapter between the endotracheal tube and the Y-piece of the
breathing circuit.
5. When the Passport XG has detected valid breaths, numeric data will display for ETCO2,
Inspired CO2 and Respiratory Rate.
6. Using the Setup Menu, select the “Auto Display CO2” waveform to be displayed on
Waveform 2 or Waveform 3.
7. If desired, the CO2 waveform scale can be changed by entering the CO2 menu. See
“Use of Menus” on page 1-109 for details. The CO2 menu also has provisions for N2O
and O2 compensation.
NOTE: See “User Configuration Mode” on page 1-153 for

Barometric Pressure and CO2 Units selection.
NOTE: See “CO2 Messages (only units equipped with Capnostat

CO2)” on page 1-162 for more details on messages.

airway adapters for mainstream CO2 operation.
For example: if switching from using a re-usable adult to a neonatal or neonatal to a re-
usable adult adapter, a calibration is needed (not if switching from a re-usable adult adapter
to another re-usable adult adapter). Adapter calibration should also be performed if the
message “Check Adapter” displays.
NOTE: In order to perform an accurate adapter calibration, the

“Sensor Warming Up” message must not be displayed.
1. Place the sensor and airway adapter away from all sources of CO2 (including
the patient’s and your own exhaled breath, and ventilator exhaust valves).
2. Choose Start Adapter Cal - Yes from the CO2 menu. (See “Use of Menus” on page 1-
109.)

an adapter calibration, a “Breaths Detected ... Retry”
message displays, and then an “Adapter Cal Failure”
message will display. Remove the source of CO2 and repeat
the calibration.

1.6.12.3 Adapter Selection

Selection of an airway adapter is based on the diameter of the patient’s endotracheal tube.
There are two sizes of airway adapters available:
Adult (For use on patients with endotracheal tube diameters > 4.0 mm):
• Re-useable Adult Airway Adapter (P/N 0103-15-0003).

• Disposable Adult Airway Adapters (P/N 0103-00-0410-02 for 10 piece package or
P/N 0103-00-0410-03 for 25 piece package).
Neonatal (For use on patients with endotracheal tube diameters â 4.0 mm):
• Re-usable Neonatal Airway Adapter (P/N 0103-15-0013). Disposable

• Neonatal Airway Adapters are not available at this time.
1.6.12.4 Use of Adult Airway Adapter

The adult airway adapter should be used when monitoring patients with endotracheal tube
2. Snap the airway adapter into the Capnostat® sensor. Align the arrow on the bottom of
the airway adapter with the arrow on the bottom of the Capnostat®. Press the sensor
and airway adapter together until they “click”.
3. If necessary, perform an adapter calibration. See “Adapter Calibration” on page 1-
135.
circuit wye.
NOTE: For optimal results, DO NOT place the airway adapter

between the endotracheal tube and the elbow, as this may
allow patient secretions to block the adapter windows.
CAPNOSTAT R
CO 2 Sensor
To
Ventilator
Elbow Wye Cable Clip
Adult Airway Adapter
To
Patient
FIGURE 1-72 Adult Airway Adapter

NOTES: For optimal results, DO NOT place the airway adapter between the endotracheal
tube and the elbow, as this may allow patient secretions to block the adapter windows.
Position the airway adapter with it’s windows in a vertical and NOT a horizontal position.
This helps keep patient secretions from “pooling” on the windows.
NOTE: The CO2 waveform is displayed by choosing Auto Display

CO2 as Waveform 2 or 3 and the Resp. Source as CO2/Off
or CO2/ECG in the Resp menu.
1.6.12.5 Use of Neonatal Airway Adapter

The neonatal airway adapter should be used when monitoring patients with endotracheal
2. Snap the airway adapter into the Capnostat® sensor. Align the arrow on the bottom of
the airway adapter with the arrow on the bottom of the Capnostat®. Press the sensor
and airway adapter together until they “click”.
3. If necessary, perform an adapter calibration. See “Adapter Calibration” on page 1-
135.
circuit wye.
R
CAPNOSTAT
CO 2 Sensor
To
Patient
To
Ventilator
Neonatal Airway Adapter

Wye
FIGURE 1-73 Neonatal Airway Adapter
NOTES: For optimal results, DO NOT place the airway adapter between the endotracheal
tube and the elbow, as this may allow patient secretions to block the adapter windows.
Position the airway adapter with it’s windows in a vertical and NOT a horizontal position.
This helps keep patient secretions from “pooling” on the windows.


CO2 as Waveform 2 or 3 and the Resp Source as CO2/Off or
CO2/ECG in the Setup menu.

2. Place the Capnostat® sensor onto the reference cell labeled REF.
o
R
E
F
3. The “Sensor on Reference Cell” message is displayed and the reference value is


Once a sensor is calibrated, the Passport XG can be turned off and on, the sensor can be
NOTE: In order to perform an accurate Sensor calibration, the

1. Verify the Passport XG is turned on and the Capnostat® is plugged in and warmed-up.


displayed. The" Zero Cal Complete" message is displayed when complete and a 0
value is displayed.
o
R
E
F
1.6.13 Sidestream CO2 Gas Monitoring

Sidestream Capnography is a technique used for measuring the CO2 in the respiration of
adult and pediatric patients. Sidestream capnography can be acquired via a nasal cannula
(non-intubated) or through a sampling line connected to a breathing circuit (intubated).
WARNING: Connection of the Passport’s exhaust port to the hospital’s

waste gas scavenge system is recommended to prevent
exposure of hospital personnel to the patient’s respiratory
sample.
The sidestream application has an inherent start-up delay. For situations where time to
waveform is critical the mainstream application is quicker.
The sidestream application has an inherent CO2 measurement delay caused by the time the
sample takes to travel from the monitoring site to the sampling airway adapter. The longer
and/or wider the sampling tube, the longer the delay.
NOTE: The pump must be turned-off before any change is made to

the tubing configuration, including nasal cannula, nafion
tubing, filter or airway adapter with sample tube. After the
changes are made, start the pump as described in step 6 in
Section Section 1.6.13.1 on page 1-140.
NOTE: For sidestream operation, always set the apnea and CO2
alarms.

1.6.13.1 Sequence for Establishing Sidestream Capnostat® CO2 for Non-

Intubated Patients
1. Plug the Capnostat® CO2 sensor into the Passport XG CO2 connector (34). The “CO2:
Sensor Warming Up” message is displayed. The CO2 numeric data and waveform will
not be available until the “CO2: Sensor Warming Up” message disappears.

CO2 as Waveform 2 or 3 in the setup menu and the Resp.
Source as CO2/Off or CO2/ECG in the Resp menu.

3. Snap a clean airway adapter with tubing into the U-shaped Capnostat® CO2 sensor.
Align the arrow on the bottom of the adapter with the arrow on the bottom of the sensor.
See Figure 1-29 on page 65.

4. Connect the sampling tubing to the CO2 Pump Input connector (33).
NOTE: Ensure all tubing connections are secure. When required,

connect to a waste gas scavenging system to the Pump
Exhaust fitting (39) via a 1/8" barbed insert P/N 0103-00-
0454-02.

Capnostat (Kit)
P/N 0600-00-0037
P/N 0103-00-0443-01
Sampling Airway
Adapter with
Tubing
P/N 0103-00-0444-01
Nafion Tubing Assembly

P/N 0008-00-0259
Disc Filter
P/N 0103-00-0445-01
FIGURE 1-76 Adult/Pediatric Airway Adapter (Non-Intubated)

5. Connect a disc filter (optional), nafion tubing (optional-recommended for high humidity
situations), and nasal cannula to the patient side of the airway adapter. This is the side
that has the Capnostat® name.
NOTE: Ensure all tubing connections are secure. Ensure that the
nasal cannula is away from all sources of CO2 (including the
patient’s and your own exhaled breath and ventilator
exhaust valves).
NOTE: Connecting the optional disc filter and tubing is

recommended when high humidity exists or during lengthy
monitoring periods. However, to maintain specified
accuracy for breath rates over 50, the disc filter should be
removed.
6. Press the CO2 PUMP key (12), then the SELECT key (2), to turn the sampling pump on
and to initiate a pump calibration. When the pump calibration is complete, the message
“CO2: Pump Cal Complete” displays. See “Sidestream CO2 Messages (on Passports
with Sidestream CO2 only)” on page 1-164 for additional CO2 messages.
NOTE: This pump calibration also calibrates the adapter. It is not

necessary to perform a separate adapter calibration at this
time.
7. After the pump calibration is complete, place the nasal cannula on the patient.
8. When the Passport XG has detected valid breaths, numbers will display for ETCO2,
Inspired CO2 and Respiratory Rate (if enabled for CO2 as source).
9. If not already set, use the Setup Menu, to select “Auto Display CO2”waveform to be
displayed on Waveform 2 or Waveform 3.
“Use of Menus” on page 1-109” for details. The CO2 menu also has provisions for N2O

Barometric Pressure and CO2 Units selection. On units with
sidesteam CO2 capability, there is automatic compensation
for barometric pressure.
NOTE: See “Sidestream CO2 Messages (on Passports with

Sidestream CO2 only)” on page 1-164 for more details on
messages.
1.6.13.2 Sequence for Establishing Sidestream Capnostat® CO2 for

Intubated Patients
WARNING: In an intubated configuration, ensure all tubing connections
are tight. If tubing disconnects on the monitor side of the
airway adapter, ventilator pressures cause inaccurate CO2
waveforms and readouts to be displayed.
When Sidestream is used to monitor CO2 in an intubated configuration, the aspired gas
within the intubation line is sampled and used to measure the CO2 level. This setup
procedure is described below.
Sensor Warming Up” message is displayed. The CO2 numeric dataand waveform will
not be available until the “CO2: Sensor Warming Up” message disappears.


CO2 as Waveform 2 or 3 in the setup menu and the Resp.
Source as CO2/Off or CO2/ECG in the Resp menu.

3. Snap a clean airway adapter with tubing into the U-shaped Capnostat® CO2 sensor.
Align the arrow on the bottom of the adapter with the arrow on the bottom of the sensor.
See Figure 1-30.

4. Connect the sampling tubing to the CO2 Pump Input connector (33).
NOTE: Ensure all tubing connections are secure. When required,

connect a waste gas scavenging system to the Pump
Exhaust fitting (39) via a 1/8" barbed insert (P/N 0103-00-
0454-02).

5. Connect the disc filter to the airway adapter.
NOTE: The disc filter is not recommended for breath rates over 18
bpm, due to the increased dead space.
Capnostat CO2 Sensor (Kit)

P/N 0600-00-0037
To Monitor
CO2 Connector Nafion Tubing Assembly
P/N 0008-00-0259
Capnostat
Serial Number REF Capilary Line, 5 foot
P/N 0683-00-0405-11
XXXXX
To Monitor
Sampling Inlet Straight Intubated Adapter
P/N 0683-00-0242-21
Sampling Airway Adapter
with Tubing Disc Filter
P/N 0103-00-0444-01 P/N 0103-00-0445-01 To Ventillator To Patient
FIGURE 1-77 Adult/Pediatric Airway Adapter (Intubated)
6. Connect the five foot capillary tubing to the filter.

7. Connect the Nafion tube to the capillary tube. Nafion is recommended for high humidity
situations.
8. Press the CO2 PUMP key (12), then the SELECT key (2), to turn the sampling pump on
and to initiate a pump calibration. When the pump calibration is complete, the message
“CO2: Pump Cal Complete” displays. See “Sidestream CO2 Messages (on Passports
with Sidestream CO2 only)” on page 1-164 for additional CO2 messages.

time.

NOTE: The sampling tube must NOT be attached to a patient at this

time and must be away from all sources of CO2 (including
the patient’s and your own exhaled breath, and ventilator
exhaust valves). If the monitor detects changing CO2 levels
(breaths) during a pump calibration, a “Breaths Detected ...
Retry” message displays and then a “Pump Cal Failure”
message will display. To continue, remove the source of
CO2, wait 30 seconds and repeat the calibration.
9. Connect the sampling tube to the patient airway and observe the capnogram on the
monitor’s display.
NOTE: The bed clip may be used to secure the assembly to a

convenient place. Use the plastic twist clips to connect the
sensor cable and sample tubing together for easy
identification.
10. When the Passport XG has detected valid breaths, numbers will display for ETCO2,
Inspired CO2 and Respiratory Rate (if enabled for CO2 as source).
11. If not already set, use the Setup Menu, to select “Auto Display CO2”waveform to be
“Use of Menus” on page 1-109 for details. The CO2 menu also has provisions for N2O

Barometric Pressure and CO2 Units selection. On units with
sidesteam CO2 capability, there is automatic compensation
for barometric pressure.
NOTE: See “Sidestream CO2 Messages (on Passports with

Sidestream CO2 only)” on page 1-164 for more details on
messages.

1.6.13.3 Pump Calibration

Pump calibration is necessary when the tubing configuration or sampling cell airway adapter
is changed. This calibration enables the unit to determine when an occlusion is present in the
tubing.
To perform a pump calibration:
Sensor Warming Up” message is displayed. The pump calibration cannot be performed
until the “CO2: Sensor Warming Up” message disappears.
2. Press the CO2 PUMP key (12). A “Warning” message displays. Ensure that the sampling
tubing is correctly connected and that the nasal cannula is clear of all sources of CO2
(including the patient’s and your own exhaled breath, and ventilator exhaust valves).
Press SELECT to turn the sampling pump on and to initiate the calibration.
3. The “CO2: Pump Cal in Progress” and “CO2: Pump On” messages alternately display.
When the pump calibration is complete, the message “CO2: Pump Cal Complete”
displays and then the “CO2: Pump On” message displays. The “CO2: Pump On”
message will continue to display as long as the pump is on. See “Sidestream CO2
Messages (on Passports with Sidestream CO2 only)” on page 1-164 for additional CO2
messages.

time, unless the message “Check Adapter” displays.
NOTE: If the monitor detects changing CO2 levels (breaths) during a

pump calibration, a “Breaths Detected ... Retry” message
displays and then a “Pump Cal Failure” message will
display. Remove the source of CO2 and repeat the
calibration.

Performing a Pump Calibration automatically calibrates the adapter. An Adapter Calibration
is necessary whenever the sampling cell airway adapter is replaced or when the “Check
Adapter” message displays.
Sensor Warming Up” message is displayed. The adapter calibration cannot be
performed until the “CO2: Sensor Warming Up” message disappears.
2. Ensure that the nasal cannula is away from all sources of CO2 (including the patient’s
and your own exhaled breath, and ventilator exhaust valves).
3. Choose Start Adapter Cal - Yes from the CO2 menu. (See “Use of Menus” on page 1-
109.)

the calibration.


2. Place the Capnostat® sensor onto the reference cell. The reference cell is labeled REF.
The sensor cable should face away from the Passport.
o
R
E
F



Sensor Warming Up” message is displayed. The sensor calibration cannot be
value is displayed.
o
R
E
F
1.6.14 Gas Module Option

The Gas Module option allows for the measurement of anesthetic gases, O2, N2O and CO2
levels. Measurement can be acquired via a nasal cannula (non-intubated) for oxygen and
CO2 only, or through a sampling line connected to a breathing circuit (intubated).
1.6.14.1 Sequence for Monitoring Anesthetic Gases, O2, N2O and/or CO2
1. For non-intubated patients, apply the nasal cannula to the patient. For intubated patients
connect the sample line to the breathing circuit. Refer to instruction provided in the
packets.
2. Connect the other end of the nasal cannula or sample line to the Gas Module at the
Input Port (41). Refer to Figure 1-57 on page 93. Do not connect anything to Reference
Port (51), Figure 1-58 on page 95, on the rear of the unit. This port is used to monitor
the room air only. Ensure all tubing connections are tight.
WARNING: Connection of the Gas Module exhaust port (50) to the

hospital’s waste gas scavenge system is strongly
recommended to prevent exposure of hospital personnel to
the patient’s respiratory sample. Vacuum (negative
pressure) should not exceed 1 mmHg at the Gas Module
Pump Exhaust fitting (50). Excessive scavenge vacuum may
result in damage to the Gas Module’s internal pump.

3. Turn on the Gas Module and Passport XG, and configure the Passport XG to be used
with the Gas Module. Set alarms as desired.
NOTE: Refer to “User Configuration - Serial Output Type Menu” on

page 1-188, “Gas Module Menu” on page 1-182 and
“Alarm Limits” on page 1-150.
4. Check for a clean water trap. If cleaning is necessary, “Safety Precautions” on page 4-1
for details.
6. Observe the capnogram on the monitor’s display. When the Passport XG has detected
valid breaths, numbers will display for CO2, O2, Agent, N2O and Respiratory Rate.
NOTE: The Gas Module must be warmed up a minimum of two

minutes for accurate CO2, O2 and N2O readings and five
minutes for agent readings.
7. If not already set, use the Setup Menu, to select “Auto Display CO2” waveform to be
8. If desired, the Gases waveform scale and speed can be changed by entering the Gases
menu. See “Use of Menus” on page 1-109 for details.
NOTE: See “Gas Module Messages (on Passports with Gas Module
installed only)” on page 1-164 for more details on
messages.
1.6.14.2 Gas Monitor Calibration

Accuracy verification of the Gas Module is recommended at six (6) month intervals or
whenever gas readings appear to be in error. The date of the last successful mixture
calibration appears at the bottom of the “Gases” menu. The operator may elect to perform a
Zero calibration (lasting approximately 10 seconds) or a Span calibration (lasting
approximately 2 minutes) at any time. During the calibration session gas readings and all
other gas functions are not available.
Zero calibration is a single action command that compensates all gas channels for the effects
of offset drift. Zero calibration may be performed on command and also takes place
automatically at preset intervals. To manually perform a Zero cal, choose ‘YES’ from the Zero
calibration gas menu (refer to “Gas Module Menu” on page 1-182).
Span calibration is a set of prompted commands that enables the operator to align the gas
display(s) to specific gas concentration(s) within the Datascope Calibration Gas canister.
Span calibration can be initiated by the operator any time the gas module’s readings are
suspected to be inaccurate. Span calibration should be performed if after performing a Zero
cal, the gas readings do not display the accurate valves.
Always verify accuracy using a full canister of Datascope approved precision calibration
gas, after calibration is performed. Never use calibration gas that has expired, has a
different concentration, or a canister that is indicating low pressure. The pressure indicator
on the Datascope gas regulator must operate in the green zone during the entire calibration
session.

NOTE: The Gas Module must be fully warmed up before

performing a gas calibration. For maximum accuracy, a
warm-up time of 30 minutes is recommended.
1. Select Start Calibration and “Yes” within the Gas Module Menu (refer to “Gas Module
Menu” on page 1-182). The menu shown on the next page will appear:
CHANGE CAL GAS

CalGas Selection: Mixture
Calibrate: No
Choices: Mixture, 5% CO2,
55% O2, 33% N20, 2% DES
= Adjust value EXIT = Quit

SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-80 Start Calibration Menu
2. Select the calibration gas type from the choices, and “Yes” to start calibration.
3. If Mixture has been selected, the following window will appear:
CALIBRATION DATA
CO2:
O2:
N2O:
DES:
Zero In Progress
EXIT = Cancel Calibration
FIGURE 1-81 Calibration Data
4. At the start of the calibration, the Gas Module will zero the gas channels. After a
successful zeroing, the Gas Module will request the calibration gas.
NOTE: If the Gas Module cannot zero, a “zeroing error” will be

displayed and the previous calibration data will be
restored. Repeat the calibration procedure from step 1. If
problems persist, call for service.
5. The message “Feed Calibration Gas” will appear. At this point, attach the calibration
gas canister to the regulator and turn it on. Increasing gas values will appear in the
window as the Gas Module samples the calibration gas.
6. When sampling is complete, a “Continue?” message will appear. If the values are
acceptable, press the SELECT key. If for any reason, it is desired to cancel calibration,
press EXIT to re-install the previous calibration values. The entire calibration must be
accepted as a whole or not at all.
NOTE: To avoid premature emptying of the gas canister, always

remove the regulator at the end of the procedure, prior to
storage.

7. The message “Calibration Complete” will appear when all the channel(s) have been
successfully calibrated. Any channel that has been adjusted will display “Adj”.
CALIBRATION DATA
CO2: 5.0% ADJ
O2: 33% ADJ
N2O: 55% ADJ
DES: 2.0% ADJ
Calibration Complete
EXIT = Quit
FIGURE 1-82 Calibration Completed
NOTE: If any channel cannot be calibrated due to a sampling error,

the “Sampling Error” message will appear under the
“Continue?” message and “ERR” will be displayed next to
any channels with a sampling error. Pressing select will
calibrate only those channels that do not have a sampling
error.
If any channel fails calibration, the gas value will be “XXX”. These channels will appear as
“XXX” in the normal run mode as well. Repeat procedure from step 1. If problems persist, call
for service.
1.6.15 Alarms
The Datascope Passport XG Monitor provides high and low alarm limits for heart rate (HR),
systolic pressure (IBP1/NIBP Sys), diastolic pressure (IBP1/NIBP Dia), mean pressure (IBP2
Mean), respiration rate, ETCO2, and SpO2. An alarm for apnea is also provided. If the
optional Gas Module is installed, a second and third page of alarm limits is added.
1.6.15.1 Setting Parameter Alarm Limits

1. To access the Alarms Limits menu press the Alarms Limits key (17).
2. Using the UP q and DOWN p arrow keys (1) and SELECT (2) keys, (see “Use of
Menus” on page 1-109) set parameter limits as desired.
3. Press the limits key again to access further alarm parameters (when the Gas Module is
installed) or press the exit key to return to the main menu.
ALARMS
Depress the Alarms
Limits Key to access VOLUME
the Alarms Menu
LIMITS
MUTE

1.6.15.2 Alarm Limits

All of the alarm limits have an "OFF" position with the exception of low SpO2 and apnea in
the neonate mode. A separate table of alarm limit settings is maintained for each patient
size. When the patient size is changed, the appropriate table is
automatically used. See table below for alarm ranges.
ALARM PARAMETERS
HIGH LO
Parameters Adult Ped/Neonate Adult Ped/Neonate
Heart Rate (bpm) Off, 100-250 Off, 100-250 Off, 30-100 Off, 30-100
IBP1 Sys (mmHg) Off, 70-240 Off, 40-180 Off, 5-130 Off, 5-130
IBP1 Dia(mmHg) Off, 40-130 Off, 50-100 Off, 5-90 Off, 5-50
NIBP Sys(mmHg) Off, 70-240 Off, 40-180* Off, 50-150 Off, 15-130
NIBP Dia(mmHg) Off, 40-130 Off, 50-100 Off, 30-120 Off, 10-50
IBP2 Mean (mmHg) Off, 5-150 Off, 5-100 Off, 2-100 Off, 2-50
SpO2 (%) Off, 85-100 Off, 85-100 50*-99 50*-99
Resp Rate (rpm) Off, 30-200* ® Off, 30-200* ® Off, 5-50 Off, 5-50
Apnea Delay (sec) Off, 10-40 Off, 10-30 (Ped) / 10 - 20 (Neo)
ETCO2 (Torr) Off, 20-100 Off, 20-100 Off, 5-60 Off, 5-60
ETCO2 (%) Off, 2-11 Off, 2-11 Off, 1-8 Off, 1-8
ETCO2 (kPa) Off, 2.0-11.0 Off, 2.0-11.0 Off, 1.0-8.0 Off, 1.0-8.0
NOTE: The alarm parameters that are highlighted in grey are

available only in models that are equipped with the
invasive pressure option.
NOTE: The ETCO2 alarm is available only in models that are

equipped with the CO2 or Gas Module option.
® Respiration rate measurement range is limited to 2 - 150 rpm when Mainstream CO2 is selected as the rate
source. Values above 150 rpm will be displayed as 150 rpm.
NOTE: When equipped with the optional Gas Module, a second

and third page of alarm limits are available by pressing the
limit key a second and third time. These Alarm Limits are not
patient size dependent. If the patient size is changed the
Alarm Limits do not change.
TABLE 1-1 Alarm Parameters (Gas Module Only)
PARAMETERS HIGH LO
Resp Rate* Off, 20 - 60 Off, 5 - 40
ET CO2 (kPa or %) Off, 6.0 - 15.0 Off, 0.5 - 9
ET CO2 (Torr or mmHg) Off, 50 - 115 Off, 5 - 70
* This Alarm Limit is found on page one of the Alarm Limit Menus, since it applies whether the
Gas Module is configured or not. However, when the Gas Module is configured this Alarm
parameter will have different ranges and it will be saved separately.

TABLE 1-1 Alarm Parameters (Gas Module Only)
PARAMETERS HIGH LO
INS CO2 (kPa or %) Off, 1, 2, 3
INS CO2 (Torr or mmHg) Off, 8, 16, 24
ET O2 Off, 40 - 100 % Off, 10 - 60 %
INS O2 Off, 40 - 100 % Off, 18 - 60 %
INS N2O Off, 82 %
ET ISO Off, 3.0 - 6 % Off, 0.5 - 4 %
INS ISO Off, 3.0 - 6 % Off, 0.5 - 4 %
ET ENF Off, 3.0 - 6 % Off, 0.5 - 4 %
INS ENF Off, 3.0 - 6 % Off, 0.5 - 4 %
ET DES Off, 8.0 - 20 % Off, 0.5 - 12 %
INS DES Off, 8.0 - 20 % Off, 0.5 - 12 %
ET SEV Off, 3.0 - 8 % Off, 0.5 - 5.0 %
INS SEV Off, 3.0 - 8 % Off, 0.5 - 5.0 %
ET HAL Off, 3.0 - 6 % Off, 0.5 - 4 %
INS HAL Off, 3.0 - 6 % Off, 0.5 - 4 %
* This Alarm Limit is found on page one of the Alarm Limit Menus, since it applies whether the
Gas Module is configured or not. However, when the Gas Module is configured this Alarm
parameter will have different ranges and it will be saved separately.
1.6.15.3 Alarm Violations

There are three types of alarm situations. They are Parameter Alarms, a Heart Rate Fault
Alarm, and an Apnea Alarm.
NOTE: The heart rate alarm tone has a different pitch than other
alarms.
A. Parameter Alarms
An alarm condition exists if the parameter is equal to or is outside the high/low limit range.
When an alarm limit is violated, the following actions occur:
• The alarm LED (16) flashes.

• The alarm tone is sounded (unless it is muted with the MUTE key (18)).
• The recorder prints the currently selected waveform (if Record On Alarm is selected from
the Recorder menu).
NOTE: On the waveform printouts that are caused by alarm

situations, a bar is printed above the alarming area. On
trend printouts, the value that has caused an alarm is
printed with square brackets around it. If the recorder is
printing a waveform and an alarm situation occurs, the
currently printing waveform will be completed and then the
alarm waveform printout will be printed.
• The violated parameter is displayed in reverse graphics in the parameter window.

B. Heart Rate Fault Alarm

The Heart Rate Fault Alarm occurs if the selected heart rate source is no longer able to detect
a heart rate. This may be due to an ECG lead fault, a problem with an SpO2 sensor, or
various other reasons. This alarm is only active if a low heart rate limit is set. The alarm
operation is the same as for a parameter alarm. The heart rate value will be dashes (“—-”)
and inverted. A further message from a lead fault or SpO2 fault may be present to help
diagnose the problem.
NOTE: Only the value displayed in the heart rate window is used
to determine heart rate alarm conditions.
C. Apnea Alarm
The Apnea Alarm is active when the respiration function is enabled. The Apnea alarm is
violated when a breath is not detected for a longer period of time than the apnea delay
specified in the Alarm Menu. The alarm operation is the same as for a parameter alarm.
D. General Alarms
• ALARMS OFF - If alarms are not set on any one parameter, an alarm bell off symbol will
be displayed next to the numerical data for that parameter.
NOTE: Both the high and low alarm must be set for a particular
parameter for the bell symbol to go away.
• VOLUME KEY - Increases or decreases the intensity of the alarm.

• ALARM MUTES - One or more alarms can be muted for either a period of 2 minutes or
indefinitely. The following is a description of how to enable the different mute modes.
SINGLE MUTE - Any current alarm can be muted for 2 minutes by pressing the MUTE
key (18). Any new alarms that occur, while in this mode, will disable the mute and
sound the alarm. An alarm mute symbol (a loudspeaker with a cross through it) is
displayed next to each muted alarm. The word MUTE is displayed above the menu
selections area during this time. This mode will expire after 2 minutes or by pressing the
Alarm Bell mute key again.
Off Symbol
ALL MUTE - All alarms can be suspended for 2 minutes by pressing and holding the
MUTE key (18) for 3 seconds. Any new alarms that occur, while in the all mute mode,
will not sound the alarm. All alarms suspended is indicated by displaying the alarm
mute symbol in reverse graphics. The words ALL MUTE are displayed above the menu
selections area during this time. This mode will expire after 2 minutes or by pressing the
mute key again.
AUDIO ALARM STANDBY MODE - This feature can only be enabled in the User
Configuration Menu. Refer to the table below for a description of the three choices
“OFF”, “ON”, or “ON and ACTIVE on Power up”. This feature allows alarms to be
suspended indefinitely by pressing and holding the MUTE key for 4 seconds. This is
indicated by a flashing alarm mute symbol in all parameter windows and a flashing
“Aud Alm Sby” message is displayed above the menu selections. When in this mode,
press MUTE to re-activate alarms.

AUDIO ALARM
STANDBY ENABLE INDEFINITE SUSPENSION POWER UP MUTE
SETTING OF ALARMS CONDITION
OFF No Audio Alarms Active
ON Yes Audio Alarms Active
ON and ACTIVE Yes Audio Alarms
on Power up Suspended Indefinitely
1.6.15.4 Battery Indicators

+
When the Passport XG is powered from the battery, a battery symbol will display. When the
battery charge is low, but not below the cutoff voltage, the low battery symbol will display
Full Battery
and a beep is generated every 3 seconds.
Symbol
NOTE: Less than 15 minutes of operating time remains depending
+ upon the number of functions that are operational when the
low battery symbol displays.
Battery recharge time is 16 hours.

Low Battery
Symbol NOTE: Recorder is not operational when the battery charge is low.
1.6.16 How to Set the Clock

1. Enter the User Configuration Mode. (See “User Configuration Mode” on page 1-153.)
2. Use the UPp and DOWN q arrow keys (1) to select Date/Time in the User
Configuration Menu. Press the SELECT Key (2) to choose that menu item. The current
choice is highlighted.
3. Use the UPp and DOWN q arrow keys (1) to select a new setting. Once the desired
choice is highlighted, press the SELECT key (2).
4. To save this setting press the SELECT key (2) and then the EXIT key (3).
Repeat for each menu item that needs to change.
1.6.17 User Configuration Mode

The Trend Configuration, Date/Time, Temperature Scale, Heart Rate/SpO2 Size Select,
Alarm Audio Delay, Audio Alarm Standby, Serial Output Type, CO2, Color settings and Gas
Module settings may be changed in the User Configuration Mode. This function is only
available at power up and not during normal operation. The User Configuration Mode is
accessed via a special power-up sequence.
To enter the User Configuration Mode:
1. Turn the POWER switch (34) ON.

2. After the “DIAGNOSTICS IN PROGRESS” message is displayed, press and hold the
FREEZE key (9) until a second beep is heard (approximately 2 seconds). The User
Configuration Mode will display.
The operation of the menu system is the same as the operation of the menu system during
normal operation (see “Use of Menus” on page 1-109). To access normal operation when
user configuration is complete, either time-out (no Set-Up key pressed within 1 minute) or
press the EXIT (3) key for 3 seconds. The following table describes the User Configuration
Mode menu structure:
USER CONFIG.
Date/Time Year 0 to 99
Month 1 to 12
Day 1 to 31
Hours 0 to 23
Minutes 0 to 59
Trend Trigger Alarms, NIBP*, Interval, NIBP & Alarms,
Interval & Alarms, Interval & NIBP, Interval &
NIBP & Alarms
Interval 1, 2.5, 5*, 10, 20, 30, 60, 120 mins.
Temperature Scale Fahrenheit*, Centigrade
HR SpO2 Size Size Change HR Large/SpO2 Small, HR Small/SpO2
Large*
Alarm Audio Delay Delay Off*, 4, 6, 8 sec.
Audio Alarm Standby Function Off*, On, On and Active on Powerup
Serial Output Type*** Serial Output Type VISA*, VISA with Admit, Accutorr, Message,
DIAP, Gas Monitor
Accutorr Baud Rate 1200bps*, 2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps
CO2 Barometric Pressure** 500 to 800 mmHg, 760 mmHg*
CO2 Units TORR, kPa, %
Color Settings ECG Color White*, Green, Red
NIBP Color White*, Green, Red
SpO2 Color White, Green*, Red
Gases Color White, Green*, Red
IBP1 Color White, Green, Red*
IBP2 Color White, Green, Red*
Resp Color White, Green, Red*
Temp Color White, Green, Red*
Gas Monitor*** CO2 Units TORR, mmHg, kPa, %
* Initial Factory settings
** On units with sidesteam CO2 capability, there is automatic compensation for barometric pressure.
*** Only applicable if J1 connector is installed.
The Trend Trigger setting is what causes new data to be stored in the trend memory. It may
be set to trigger whenever there is an alarm, an NIBP measurement is performed, the trend
timer expires (interval), or may be set to trigger at any combination of these items. The trend
interval is only used when trend is triggering on interval, and it is used to set the time
between interval triggers. The trend interval is independent of the NIBP interval.

The Temperature scale can be changed between Fahrenheit and Centigrade.
The HR SpO2 size change option allows the user to select a large SpO2 reading compared
to HR or vice versa.
The Alarm Audio Standby allows the user to enable (or disable) this feature (see “* This
Alarm Limit is found on page one of the Alarm Limit Menus, since it applies whether the Gas
Module is configured or not. However, when the Gas Module is configured this Alarm
parameter will have different ranges and it will be saved separately.” on page 1-150).
with other specialized equipment: VISA, VISA with Admit from bedside feature, Accutorr
(uses the same data protocol as an Accutorr), message (for diagnostic purposes), Gas
Module (optional) with the Passport XG Monitor. The baud rate for the Accutorr protocol can
be set for 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps.
Once the unit is in the User Configuration Mode, the time and/or date can be changed using
the set-up keys as described in “Use of Menus” on page 1-109.
1.6.18 Recorder (optional)

The Datascope Passport XG Recorder can provide a permanent record of a patient’s: systolic
pressure, diastolic pressure, mean pressure, heart rate, SpO2,CO2, O2, Agent, respiration
and temperature. It is a two trace thermal strip chart recorder with an integral paper spool.
The recorder uses plain white thermal paper 5 cm wide (see “Recorder Paper Replacement”
on page 8-5 for replacement instructions).
All grid patterns and data are printed by the recorder.
1.6.18.1 Operation of Printer

1. Using the UP q and q DOWN arrow keys (1), select RECORDER from the main
menu.When RECORDER is highlighted a RECORDER MENU is displayed in the multi-
function area. A sample of this menu is shown to the right.
2. Press SELECT (2) to enter the RECORDER MENU.
3. Using the UP q and q DOWN arrow keys (1) and SELECT (2) keys, (see “Use of
Menus” on page 1-109) set the desired waveforms or trend to be printed.
4. Press PRINT (22) to initiate a printing or stop a printing when one is in progress.
When PRINT (22) is pressed to initiate a printing, a 16 second strip is printed. The 16
second strip consists of 8 seconds of prior and 8 seconds of post waveform from when PRINT
(22) is pressed. If a continuous printing is required, press and hold PRINT (22) for 3 seconds
(until a beep is heard). Press PRINT again to stop a real time printing.

NOTES:
• When the ECG is frozen and PRINT (22) is pressed, the recorder prints the frozen
displayed ECG.
• If the PRINT key (22) is pressed for 3 seconds the recorder prints a continuous
real-time ECG waveform.
• If the PRINT key (22) is pressed while List Trend is displayed (and the ECG
waveform is not frozen), the recorder prints the list trend report.
• See “Recorder Paper Replacement” on page 8-5 for paper installation
1.6.18.2 Printer Formats

Single waveform format:
ECG and pleth waveforms are automatically positioned in the center of the chart paper.
Invasive pressure and respiration waveforms are relative to the lower border. The four
centimeter waveform area has a grid pattern printed as follows: 100% darkness on 1 cm
grid with 50% darkness on 2 mm grid.
The upper and lower borders have the date, time and physiologic parameters currently
available as well as the ECG size and lead configuration the recorder is printing. All
parameters include their units.

FIGURE 1-85 Sample Printout, Single Waveform
Two waveforms separate field format:

The two waveforms are printed in a separate field format with two centimeters assigned to
each waveform. The waveforms do not overlap. Grids are printed as for one waveform.
The upper and lower borders are printed as for the single waveform.
FIGURE 1-86 Sample Printout, Two Waveform
Trend list format:

The list trend data is printed with text running along the length of the strip. If more than one
page of data is available then all additional pages are printed along the length of the strip.
FIGURE 1-87 Sample Printout, Trend List Format

NOTE: On waveform printouts that are caused by alarm situations

(Record on Alarm must be selected YES in the Recorder
menu), a bar is printed above the alarming area. On trend
printouts and in annotations, the value that has caused an
alarm is printed with square brackets around it. If the
recorder is printing a waveform and an alarm situation
occurs, the currently printing waveform will be completed
and then the alarm waveform printout will be printed.
NOTE: IBP1, IBP2, CO2, and Gas Module data is printed only when
models are equipped with these options.
1.6.19 Status Messages

The monitor uses the Message Display Area to provide messages to the user relating to
monitor status. The following lists these messages and a description of the message. The
messages are grouped by function.

1.6.19.1 NIBP Measurement Messages

NIBP: IDLE Displayed while system is idle. Press START to take a
single measurement.
Press INTERVAL to select
an interval and start
timed measurements.
NIBP: DEFLATE Displayed while the timer mode is stopped, usually Press START to take an
by pressing the DEFLATE key. immediate measurement
and resume timed
measurements.
NIBP: INTERVAL Displayed in the interval between two timed Press DEFLATE to
measurements. suspend timed
measurements. Press
INTERVAL to change
timer to OFF to stop
timer.
NIBP: The NIBP system is being initialized. Wait until initialization
INITIALIZING is complete, indicated
by NIBP: IDLE message.
Initialization may take
up to 3 minutes from
power up.
NIBP: FAILURE The NIBP system has detected a potential error. Power cycle unit. If
message reappears, call
Service.
NIBP:MEASURIN Displayed during a measurement to show the cuff Press DEFLATE to
G CUFF pressure. suspend a measurement
and deflate the cuff.
NIBP:RETRY Measurement has been attempted but no reading Retry will be attempted.
MOTION was possible due to detected motion and the retry Have patient remain
limit has not been reached. still.
NIBP:RETRY A measurement has been attempted but no reading Retry will be attempted.
PUMP HIGHER was possible due to pulse detection at highest cuff Check that appropriate
pressure and the retry limit has not been reached. patient size is set. Preset
initial inflation pressure.
NIBP:RETRY A measurement has been attempted but no reading Retry will be attempted.
was possible. Check for leaks and
quality of peripheral
pulses. Decrease patient
movement. Switch cuff
to another limb.
NIBP:UNABLE TO An unsuccessful measurement cycle has been Switch cuff to another
MEASURE* completed. limb. Decrease patient
movement. Press START
to retry. Be prepared to
auscultate BP manually.
NIBP:CUFF The internal hardware cuff pressure check valve Power cycle unit. If
OVERPRESSURE has been tripped. message reappears, call
Service.
* The presence of arrhythmias may increase the time required to complete a measurement and may extend
this time to a point where a measurement cannot be completed.
• Always have an alternate method of BP verification available.

• On vasoconstricted patients, failure to evacuate air from the cuff can distort BP

measurement.
• Do not place cuff on extremity that has an IV.
• Cuff should be at heart level.
1.6.19.2 SpO2 Messages

the monitor.
SpO2 SENSOR OFF Sensor may not be connected to the patient. Check patient
connection.
SpO2 INTERFERENCE Noise detected on the pulse signal prevents Decrease patient
pulse discrimination. motion, check sensor.
SpO2 PULSE SEARCH Hardware settings are being adjusted in Change to site where
order to discriminate a pulse waveform. pulse is stronger if
patient is
vasoconstricted.
Change or readjust
sensor if loose.
SpO2 WEAK PULSE Detected patient pulse is marginal. Change site.
SpO2 CHECK SENSOR Insufficient light is received by the sensor Check alignment of
detector, or the sensor has a malfunction. emitter and detector or
change sensor.
SpO2 PR UNDER 30 Detected pulse rate is below thirty beats per Check patient status.
minute. Check alignment of
sensor. Reapply sensor.
SpO2 PR OVER 250 Detected pulse rate is above 250 bpm. Check patient status.
Decrease patient
motion. Reapply sensor.
SpO2 UNCALIBRATED Detected SpO2 falls below calibrated range. Check patient status.
Check sensor.
SpO2 SYSTEM CHECK Self test is being performed. Wait for completion of
self test.
Service.
The following messages pertain to Nellcor SpO2 Operation.

SpO2 SYSTEM Self test is being performed. Wait for completion of
CHECK self test.
the monitor.
SpO2 PULSE SEARCH Hardware settings are being adjusted in order Change to site where
to discriminate a pulse waveform. pulse is stronger if
patient is
vasoconstricted.
Change or readjust
sensor if loose.


Service.
SpO2 DIAGNOSTICS Passport is in Nellcor Diagnostics Mode. Wait for completion of
diagnostics.
The following messages pertain to Masimo SpO2 Operation.

SpO2 SYSTEM Self test is being performed. Wait for completion of
CHECK self test.
the monitor.
SpO2 PULSE Hardware settings are being adjusted in order Change to site where
SEARCH to discriminate a pulse waveform. pulse is stronger if
patient is
vasoconstricted.
Change or readjust
sensor if loose.
Service.
SpO2 SENSOR OFF Sensor may not be connected to the patient. Check patient
connection.
SpO2 Noise detected on the pulse signal prevents Decrease patient
INTERFERENCE pulse discrimination. motion, check sensor.
SpO2 CHECK Insufficient light is received by the sensor Check alignment of
SENSOR detector, or the sensor has a malfunction. emitter and detector or
change sensor.
SpO2 LOW Poorly perfused patients may cause this Move sensor to another
PERFUSION message. monitoring site.
SpO2 AMBIENT There is too much ambient light. Cut down on ambient
LIGHT light.
SpO2 UNKNOWN Sensor is not recognized. Use only Datascope
SENSOR approved sensors.
• Administration of certain vasoconstrictive drugs, i.e., norepinephrine, may reduce

peripheral perfusion to a level that prevents SpO2 measurements.
• Arterial compression, tricuspid regurgitation, or irregular heart rhythms may reduce
perfusion and prevent SpO2 measurement.
• Intra-vascular dyes, depending on concentration, may affect SpO2 measurements.
• SpO2 measurements may be difficult on patients undergoing IABP treatments.
This monitor measures functional hemoglobin.

1.6.19.3 Recorder Messages (only units equipped with recorder)

RECORDER DOOR OPEN The door of the recorder is not closed. Close recorder door.
RECORDER PAPER OUT The roll of recorder paper is used up. Replace with a new roll
of paper.
1.6.19.4 CO2 Messages (only units equipped with Capnostat CO2)

CO2: INITIALIZING This message usually appears at power Wait for the message to
up. The CO2 subsystem has been reset go away. It takes about
and is performing internal self tests prior 15 seconds for the CO2
to operation. subsystem to initialize.
CO2: NO SENSOR No CO2 sensor is connected to the Attach the CO2 sensor
monitor. to the CO2 connector
(30).
CO2: SENSOR WARMING The CO2 sensor has not reached its Wait for the message to
UP operating temperature. Either the go away. It takes up to
monitor was just turned on or the sensor five minutes for the
was recently plugged in or the sensor sensor to warm up.
was removed from the adapter or
calibration cells.
CO2: CHECK ADAPTER The CO2 sensor is not correctly placed Check the installation
on the airway adapter or a different and condition of the
type of airway adapter has been airway adapter. Clean
connected or the adapter is dirty or or replace the adapter if
damaged. necessary. An adapter
calibration should be
performed if the
message persists. This is
accessed through the
CO2 menu.
CO2: CHECK SENSOR The CO2 sensor is out of calibration or A zero calibration
damaged. should be performed if
the message persists.
This is accessed through
the CO2 menu.
CO2: SENSOR ON The CO2 sensor is positioned on the The sensor should be
REFERENCE CELL reference cell. This is located on the removed from the
sensor cable adjacent to the connector. reference cell and
The ETCO2 reading should range from placed back on the
36 to 40 Torr when on this cell. airway adapter.
CO2: SENSOR ON ZERO The CO2 sensor is positioned on the After completing the
CELL zero cell. This is located on the sensor calibration, the sensor
cable adjacent to the connector. The should be removed from
ETCO2 reading should be 0 when on the zero cell and placed
this cell. back on the airway
adapter.
CO2: ZERO CAL IN The CO2 sensor is placed on the zero Wait for the zero
PROGRESS cell and a CO2 calibration is in calibration to complete.
progress.


CO2: ADAPTER CAL IN A CO2 adapter calibration has been Wait for the adapter
PROGRESS requested and is in progress. calibration to complete.
It takes less than 30
seconds.
CO2: ZERO CAL FAILURE The zero calibration was not completed Wait for the unit to
successfully. The zero calibration may complete warming up.
have been requested when the sensor Repeat the zero
had not completed warming up. calibration.
CO2: ADAPTER CAL The adapter calibration was not Wait for the unit to
FAILURE completed successfully. The adapter complete warming up or
calibration may have been requested check the installation of
when the sensor had not completed the sensor on the
warming up or the sensor was not airway adapter. Repeat
correctly installed on the airway the adapter calibration.
adapter.
CO2: CAL FAILED - INSERT A zero calibration was attempted while Attach the sensor to the
ZERO CELL the sensor was not attached to the zero zero cell and repeat the
cell. zero calibration. The
zero cell is located on
the sensor cable.
CO2: CAL FAILED - INSERT An adapter calibration was attempted Remove the sensor from
ADAPTER while the sensor was attached to the the zero or reference
zero or reference cell. cell and attach it to the
air-way adapter. Repeat
the adapter cal.
CO2: ZERO CAL The zero calibration has been Remove the CO2 sensor
COMPLETE successfully completed. from the zero cell and
place back on the
adapter. Perform an
adapter zero.
CO2: ADAPTER CAL The adapter calibration has been Normal operation. The
COMPLETE successfully completed. message is removed
after a few seconds.
CO2: FAILURE The CO2 subsystem has failed. Cycle the power on the
monitor to determine if
the problem persists. If
the message returns
then the unit needs to be
serviced.

1.6.19.5 Sidestream CO2 Messages (on Passports with Sidestream CO2 only)
CO2: PUMP ON The CO2 sidestream pump is on. Message will display at
all times when the CO2
sidestream pump is on.
CO2: PUMP CAL IN The CO2 sidestream pump is turned on and a Message will clear
PROGRESS pump calibration has been requested. when cal is complete.
CO2: BREATHS Breaths are detected while the CO2 Move the sensor/
DETECTED...RETRY sidestream pump calibration is in progress or adapter away from any
an adaptor calibration is in progress. source of CO2.
CO2: PUMP CAL The CO2 sidestream pump calibration was Check sampling line for
FAILURE not completed successfully. The pump correct assembly. Retry
calibration could have been requested when calibration. If message
the sampling line was not attached correctly. persists refer to
technical service
personnel.
CO2: PUMP FAILURE The CO2 sidestream pump failed. Refer to technical
service personnel.
CO2: OCCLUSION- The CO2 hardware is indicating the sampling Check sampling line
CHECK SYSTEM pump line is blocked while the CO2 and filter for blockage,
sidestream pump is on. clear sampling line if
possible. Replace
sampling line and/or
filter if necessary. If
sampling cell is
replaced, perform a
pump calibration.
CO2: NO SSCO2 The patient size is set to Neonate and the Do not have the patient
ON NEONATE CO2 sidestream pump is on, or when the size set to Neonate and
patient size is set to Neonate and the user press the CO2 pump
presses the CO2 pump key. key.
CO2: PUMP CAL The pump calibration has been successfully Message will clear
COMPLETE completed. automatically.
1.6.19.6 Gas Module Messages (on Passports with Gas Module installed only)
GM: WARMING UP Appears when the system has been turned on, Wait for the message to
and the sensors have not reached their stable go away. It takes up to
operating temperature. two minutes for the
device to warm up.
GM: AGENT This message appears after the GM: Wait for the message to
WARMING UP WARMING UP message disappears. It go away. It takes ups to
indiactes that the Agent ID Bench is warming five minutes from power-
up and readings will not be available. up for the Agent ID
Bench to warm up.
GM: EXHAUST Appears when the system detects a blockage Remove waste gas
BLOCKED at the exhaust gas outlet, as indicated by an scavenging assembly,
increase in internal pressure. check if message
disappears. Check
exhaust line for
blockage and clear if
possible. If message
persists call for service.


GM: MIXED Appears in Inverse Video when more than one Message will disappear
AGENTS anesthetic agent is detected by the system. when a single agent is
detected again.
GM: AIR LEAK Appears when the system detects a pneumatic Turn Gas Module and
leak. Also may appear when the Gas Module Passport off. Install/
has been turned on without a sample line check sample lines,
attached or if the Gas Module has been on for filters, water trap and
a long period of time without the Passport electrical connections.
Monitor being on. Turn on Gas Module
and Passport Monitor.
GM: REPLACE TRAP Indicates residue build-up on the water trap Replace water trap
membrane. This decreases air flow. reservoir.
GM: OCCLUSION Appears when the system detects an Empty and rinse water
obstruction in the sampling line or the water trap. Change water trap
trap bottle is full. if necessary. Check
sampling line and filter
for blockage, clear
sampling line if
possible. Replace
sampling line and/or
filter if necessary. If
problem persists call for
service.
GM: ZERO IN Appears when the system is zeroing all of it’s This is Normal
PROGRESS channels. This appears whether initiated by Operation. Wait for
the user or is automatic. message to clear.
GM: CO2 ZERO Appears when the system has been unable to Manually start zeroing
ERROR successfully zero the CO2 sensor. the system again. If
service.
GM: O2 ZERO Appears when the system has been unable to Manually start zeroing
ERROR successfully zero the O2 sensor. the system again. If
service.
GM: N2O ZERO Appears when the system has been unable to Manually start zeroing
ERROR successfully zero the N2O sensor. the system again. If
service.
GM: AGENT ZERO Appears when the system has been unable to Manually start zeroing
ERROR successfully zero the Anesthetic Agent sensor. the system again. If
service.
GM: PUMP OFF Appears when the system has turned off the Restart pump from Gas
pump due to a pneumatic error. Module menu. Refer to
“Gas Module Menu” on
page 1-182. If problem
persists, call for service.
GM: AGENT Appears in Inverse Video when the system Match the Agent
MISMATCH - HAL detects Halothane as the primary agent and administered with the
the manually selected agent is neither Agent selected, or select
Halothane nor the detected secondary agent. Agent Auto ID.
MISMATCH - ISO detects Isoflurane as the primary agent and administered with the
Isoflurane nor the detected secondary agent. Agent Auto ID.


MISMATCH - ENF detects Enflurane as the primary agent and the administered with the
manually selected agent is neither Enflurane Agent selected, or select
nor the detected secondary agent. Agent Auto ID.
MISMATCH - SEV detects Sevoflurane as the primary agent and administered with the
Sevoflurane nor the detected secondary agent. Agent Auto ID.
MISMATCH - DES detects Desflurane as the primary agent and administered with the
Desflurane nor the detected secondary agent. Agent Auto ID.
GM: UNKNOWN Appears in Inverse Video when the system Rectify situation.
AGENT detects a gas that does not match the
spectroscopic signatures of the five known
anesthetic agents.
GM: CANNOT Appears when the Passport requests a Zeroing Allow system to retry
ZERO ... RETRYING (either on the automatic cycle or by a user without intervention. If
request), and the Gas Module is unable to problem persists call for
initialize the cycle. service.
GM: RESP HIGH Appears when the respiration rate is greater Check patient.
than or equal to the value set for the Resp High
Alarm.
GM: RESP LOW Appears when the respiration rate is less than Check patient.
or equal to the value set for the Resp Low
Alarm.
GM: ET CO2 HIGH Appears when the End Tidal CO2 Check patient.
measurement is greater than or equal to the
value set for the ET CO2 High Alarm.
GM: ET CO2 LOW Appears when the End Tidal CO2 Check patient.
measurement is less than or equal to the value
set for the ET CO2 Low Alarm.
GM: INSP CO2 Appears when the FiCO2 measurement is Check patient.
HIGH greater than or equal to the value set for the
INSP CO2 High Alarm.
GM: ET O2 HIGH Appears when the End Tidal O2 measurement Check patient.
is greater than or equal to the value set for the
ET O2 High Alarm.
GM: ET O2 LOW Appears when the End Tidal O2 measurement Check patient.
is less than or equal to the value set for the ET
O2 Low Alarm.
GM: INSP O2 HIGH Appears when the FiO2 measurement is Check patient.
greater than or equal to the value set for the
INSP O2 High Alarm.
GM: INSP O2 LOW Appears when the FiO2 measurement is less Check patient.
than or equal to the value set for the INSP O2
Low Alarm.
GM: INSP N2O Appears when the Inspired N2O measurement Check patient.
HIGH is greater than or equal to the value set for the
INSP N2O High Alarm.
GM: ET AGENT Appears when the End Tidal Anesthetic Agent Check patient.
HIGH measurement is greater than or equal to the
value set for the ET Agent High Alarm.


GM: ET AGENT Appears when the End Tidal Anesthetic Agent Check patient.
LOW measurement is less than or equal to the value
set for the ET Agent Low Alarm.
GM: INSP AGENT Appears when the Inspired Agent Check patient.
HIGH measurement is greater than or equal to the
value set for the INSP Agent High Alarm.
GM: INSP AGENT Appears when the Inspired Agent Check patient.
LOW measurement is less than or equal to the value
set for the INSP Agent Low Alarm.
GM: CO2 Appears after an unsuccessful calibration Ensure proper gas
UNCALIBRATED attempt of the CO2 sensor. The numeric data mixture is attached
for CO2 will appear as - - -, and the CO2 tightly and regulator is
waveform will be a flatline. on. Repeat calibration
procedure. If problem
GM: O2 Appears after an unsuccessful calibration Ensure proper gas
UNCALIBRATED attempt of the O2 sensor. The numeric data for mixture is attached
O2 will appear as - - -, and the O2 waveform tightly and regulator is
will be a flatline. on. Repeat calibration
GM: N2O Appears after an unsuccessful calibration Ensure proper gas
UNCALIBRATED attempt of the N2O sensor. The numeric data mixture is attached
for N2O will appear as - - -, and the N2O tightly and regulator is
GM: AGENTS Appears after an unsuccessful calibration Ensure proper gas
UNCALIBRATED attempt of the Agent sensor. The numeric data mixture is attached
for all agents will appear as - - -, and the agent tightly and regulator is
GM: FAILED Appears when the Gas Module detects an Call for Service.
unrecoverable error in its own operation.
GM: Appears when the Passport cannot detect Ensure Gas Module is
DISCONNECTED signals being sent by the Gas Module. turned on and interface
cable is properly
connected. If problem
SAMPLING ERROR Appears when a sampling error occurs on one Repeat calibration
or more Gas Module channels during procedure. If problem
calibration. persists, call for service.
CALIBRATION NOT Appears when the Gas Module is unable to Repeat calibration
STARTED initialize calibration. procedure. If problem
CALIBRATION Appears when a sampling error occurs in all Repeat calibration
ERROR SAMPLING four Gas Module channels during calibration. procedure. If problem
ERROR persists, call for service.
CALIBRATION Appears when the Gas Module cannot Repeat calibration
ERROR ZEROING perform a Zero during calibration. procedure. If problem
ERROR persists, call for service.

1.6.19.7 Monitor Operation Messages

The following messages pertain to the operation of the monitor.

DIAGNOSTICS IN Self test is being performed. Wait for completion of
PROGRESS self-test. Refer to
“Setting-up / Turning
Power On” on page 1-
99.
SELF TEST Diagnostics OK.
COMPLETE
ESU Poor electrode site preparation. Excessive cautery Check site; rearrange
INTERFERENCE (ESU) noise.Excessive high frequency noise. electrodes. Change
electrodes. Use ECG
cable with choke.
LEAD FAULT Lead off of patient. Check electrodes /
leads.
INTERFERENCE Poor electrode site preparation. Improper lead Check site. Change
selection. Excessive 50 or 60 Hz noise.Wrong 3- Lead selection. Use
Lead cable may be in use.* proper ECG cable.
ARTIFACT A 50 or 60 Hz noise is detected on the ECG Check site. Change
waveform. The displayed heart rate may not be Lead selection. Use
correct. proper ECG cable.
* See Section 5 in the Datascope P/N’s 0070-00-397, 0070-00-0440, and 0070-00-0503 of the Passport Oper-
ating Instructions for a list of the proper ECG cables.
1.6.20 Monitor Problem Solving

This guide is provided to establish the possible causes and solutions to some Monitoring
problems.

No trace for a -Improper attachment of transducer to monitor. -Check transducer
desired -Faulty transducer. connection.
parameter -Try a different
transducer.
Wandering ECG -Respiration artifact. -Try a different base line
lead configuration.
Noisy ECG -Loose or dry electrodes. -Apply new electrodes.-
traces -Defective electrode wires. Replace wires as
-Patient cable or leads are routed too close to other necessary.
electrical devices. -Eliminate 60Hz
interference.
-Use ECG cable with
built-in filter block.
Low Amplitude -Electrode could be positioned over a bone or -Reposition electrodes.
ECG muscle mass. -Press ECG SIZE key.
Excessive Electro- -Inadequate skin prep prior to application of -Repeat skin prep and
surgical electrode. electrode placement
Interference procedures.
-Add additional gel to
electrodes.


AC Noise -Gain set too high (set through SIZE key). -Readjust as necessary.
-Electrodes dry. -Re-prep skin and apply
-Patient cable entwined with cables of other fresh, moist electrodes.
electrical devices. -Separate patient cable
from all other cables.
Intermittent -Connections not tight and properly secured.- -Ensure proper
Signal Electrodes dry. connection. (Electrode
-Cable or lead wires damaged. to lead, lead to cable,
cable to monitor.)
-Re-prep skin and apply
fresh moist electrodes.
-Check with continuity
tester.
Excessive -Electrodes dry. -Re-prep skin and apply
alarms: heart -Alarm limits set too close to patient’s normal heart fresh, moist electrodes.
rate, lead fault rate. -Readjust.
-R-wave wrong size. -Must be twice the
-Excessive patient movement or muscle tremor. amplitude of other part
of waveform.
-Reposition electrodes
and secure with tape if
necessary.
Low Amplitude -Gain set too low. (Set through SIZE key.) -Readjust as required.
ECG Signal -Skin improperly prepared. -Abrade skin.
-Possibly not patient’s normal complex. -Check with 12 lead
-Electrode could be positioned over a bone or electrocardiogram.
muscle mass. -Reposition electrodes.
Trace Not -FREEZE key may have been pressed. -Press the FREEZE key to
Moving unfreeze the trace.
Temperature -Poor contact from probes to body. Check the body surface
Probes not contact at the probe tip.
Working Reposition or apply
thermoconductive gel.
Display Appears -Mains power switch may not be on. -Check mains power
to be Off -Unit may not be plugged into an AC outlet. switch on side panel.
-If used as a portable, battery pack may be drained. -Check power cord (Is it
plugged in?).
-If battery pack is
drained, plug into an
AC outlet to recharge
the battery. A period of
16 hours is required for
a full charge.
Disabled Alarm -Mute key pressed. -Check for alarm mute
Tone, QRS Tone, -Beep volume low. symbol.
or Other -Increase beep volume.
Function
ECG Base Line -Gain control not set high enough. Set through SIZE -Readjust as required.
With No key. -Check insertion.
Waveform -Lead wires and patient cable not fully inserted into -Check with lead
proper receptacle. continuity tester.
-Cable or lead wires damaged.


Base Line -Patient moving excessively. -Secure lead wires and
Wander -Patient’s respiration. cable to patient.
-Electrodes dry. -Reposition electrodes.
-Static build up around patient. -Re-prep skin and apply
fresh moist electrodes.
-Check with hospital
engineer.
Damped Invasive -Air bubbles in tubing. -Eliminate air from
Waveform -Kinked catheter. tubing.
-Catheter against wall of blood vessel. -Slightly alter position of
-Blood in tubing. catheter.
-Check for leaks at
connector.
-Pump pressure bag up
to 300 mmHg.
Recorder Report -Thermal paper may be installed incorrectly. (up-side -Remove paper and re-
Appears Totally down) install with paper
Blank feeding off of the spool
from the bottom.
Resp. Waveform -Scales set inappropriately. -Change scale via
Too Large menu.
Resp. Waveform -Patient breathing shallow or turned on side. -Change lead position
Too Small -Scale set inappropriately. to better detect
respirations.
-Change scale.
False Apnea -Apnea delay may be improperly set. -Choose another apnea
Alarm -Patient may be having frequent episodes of CVA. delay.
-Scale size may be too low. -Reposition electrodes to
better detect
respirations.
“CHK Lead” -Due to increased impedance. -Prep chest.
Message -Chest hair under electrodes. -Change electrodes.
-Dried electrode gel.-Electrode off. -Replace electrode.
-Lead off. -Replace lead.
-Cracked lead wires -Replace lead wires.
-Poor skin prep. -Clean and abrade skin
before applying
electrodes.
“CVA” Message -Can be caused by shallow breathing or an apnea -Check the patient-
event. adjust scales or leads if
necessary.


No Resp. -Patient not connected to a patient safety cable.- -Turn respiration on
Waveform or Respiration parameter is “OFF”. (“OFF” will be
Rate Displayed -CO2/Off and no CO2. displayed in resp.
-Patient connected using Patient ESIS Choke/Cable. window).Check that
proper patient cable is
used.-Use 3-lead Patient
Cable - non ESIS.
Waveform -Front End Failure-External Supply Failure -Replace Front End
Acquisition -+12/-23 Volt Board Failure-CPU Board Failure Board.
Failure -CO2 Interface Board Failure (optional) -Check External Supply
Output voltage.
-Replace F1 fuse on
+12/-23 Volt Board.
-Replace CPU Board.
-Replace CO2 Interface
Board

1.6.21 Connection to External Devices (optional)

The Passport XG provides a high level ECG waveform output from the J1 connector (37). To
facilitate connection of the Passport to external devices requiring an ECG waveform for
synchronization, Datascope provides interface cable:
• P/N 0012-00-0753-01 cable which is terminated with a Hewlett Packard (HP) 8 pin
round connector, commonly used for ECG input on HP defibrillators.
This cable attenuates the high level ECG waveform output from the Passport XG Monitor to a
low level output and is intended to provide a means to synchronize compatible external
devices with an ECG signal. An example of such a device is a defibrillator for cardioversion
synchronization.

the Passport XG with external devices. Before using this
cable it is essential that a biomedical engineer verify correct
operation of the Passport XG with an external device using
this cable. Testing should include verification that the
maximum delay for cardioversion synchronization does not
exceed 60 ms (monitor and defibrillator). Cable should be
labeled with the devices they have been tested for use with.
1.6.22 Using the Passport XG with the Visa Central Station (optional)
The Passport XG must be connected, either through hardwire or telemetry, to the VISA
Central Station. This connection allows the Passport XG to communicate with the VISA to
ADMIT, DISCHARGE, SILENCE and PRINT. The serial output type in the User Configuration
Menu must be set to either “VISA” or “VISA WITH ADMIT”.
NOTE: The VISA Central Station cannot be used in conjuction with

the Gas Module option.
If set to “VISA”, the passport XG can be used to mute alarms and print waveforms on the
VISA. However, the ADMIT and DISCHARGE features will be disabled.
If set to “VISA WITH ADMIT”, the Passport XG can be used to help ADMIT and DISCHARGE
patients to and from the VISA, as well as mute alarms and print waveforms on the VISA.
NOTE: See the VISA Operating Instructions, P/N 0070-00-0245, for

more details on VISA operation with the Passport XG.
The keys that are used on the Passport XG in conjunction with the VISA are: ADMIT (4),
DISCHARGE (5), SILENCE (6) and PRINT (22).

Admit (4)
When a new patient is being monitored by the Passport XG, press the ADMIT (4) key to
receive that patient’s information on the corresponding channel on the VISA Central Station.
A patient can also be admitted using the patient menu. The following “Warning” message
displays:
Warning: Admit Selected
To admit, you will discharge last patient.

This will erase last patient's data at Central.
Press SELECT to admit

Press EXIT to cancel
FIGURE 1-88 VISA Admit
When you press SELECT to admit, the following “Warning” message displays:
Warning
Verify admit selections at Central.
Press EXIT to continue
FIGURE 1-89 Verify VISA Admit
Along with the ADMIT request the current settings for Full Disclosure and Arrhythmia are sent
to the VISA Central Station for processing. Full Disclosure “ON” requests that all patient data
be stored at the VISA. Arrhythmia “ON” requests Arrhythmia detection to be enabled at the
VISA. The newly admitted channel on the VISA Central Station will change color and a beep
tone will be generated every 30 seconds until the admit is confirmed on the VISA. To confirm
the admit on the VISA either click on the yellow tile with the mouse or tap on the tile if the
VISA has a touch screen.

Discharge (5)
To discharge a patient from the corresponding channel on the VISA Central Station, press the
DISCHARGE key (5). A patient can also be discharged using the setup menu. The following
“Warning” message displays:
Warning: Discharge Selected
This monitor's data will be erased at Central!
Press SELECT to discharge

Press EXIT to cancel
FIGURE 1-90 VISA Discharge
When SELECT is chosen, the following “Warning” message displays:
Warning
Verify discharge at Central.
FIGURE 1-91 Verify VISA Discharge
NOTE: If “VISA WITH ADMIT” is not selected as the serial output

type in the user configuration mode, and Admit or
Discharge is selected, the following “Warning” message
displays:
Warning
Admit from Bedside feature is not installed.
FIGURE 1-92 VISA with Admit not Installed
Silence (6)
Press the SILENCE key (6) to mute alarms that are initiated from the Passport and sent to the
VISA Central Station. The amount of time the alarms are silenced, is determined through the
VISA.

Print (22)
If the record destination in the record menu (see “Recorder Menu” on page 1-177) is set to
either remote or both, then pressing the print key will initiate a waveform printing on the VISA
central station.
1.6.23 Menus
This section contains all the menus used in the Passport XG. A sample of each menu with
each menu item highlighted is provided. For each menu item highlighted, the Choices bar
indicates the available selections. The menu Instructions bar indicates the available actions to
take. See “Use of Menus” on page 1-109 for detailed instructions on menu operation.
1.6.23.1 Patient Menu

Size: Changing the patient size will adjust the Passport XG for monitoring adults, pediatrics
or neonates. The alarm limit selections will change accordingly. The Passport displays the
patient size in the menu display area.
The following four options are available only if the Serial Output Type is set to “VISA with
Admit”:
Admit: Choosing “Yes” transmits an admit message to the VISA Central Station.
Discharge: Choosing “Yes” transmits a discharge message to the VISA Central Station.
Full Disclosure: If ON is desired, it must be selected prior to selecting Admit “YES”. Full
Disclosure “ON” requests that all patient data be stored at the VISA.
Arrhythmia: If ON is desired, it must be selected prior to selecting Admit “YES”.

Arrhythmia “ON” requests Arrhythmia detection to be enabled at the VISA.
Pacer Enhancement: Set to ON to display the pacer signal as a full scale square wave.

CHANGE PATIENT CHANGE PATIENT

Size: Adult Size: Adult
Admit: No Admit: No
Discharge: No Discharge: No
Full Disclosure: OFF Full Disclosure: OFF
Arrythmia: OFF Arrythmia: OFF
Pacer Enhancement: OFF Pacer Enhancement: OFF
Choices: Adult, Pediatric, Neonate Choices: ON, OFF

Admit: No Admit: No
Choices: Yes, No Choices: ON, OFF

Admit: No Admit: No
Choices: Yes, No Choices: Enhance ON/OFF
FIGURE 1-93 Patient Menu
1.6.23.2 Set-up Menu

Waveform 2/3: Set the type of waveform to display.
Auto Display IBP1 / IBP2 / CO2: When these are set to waveform 2 or 3, and
information for these parameters is available, the waveform for the corresponding parameter
will automatically be displayed, regardless of what is chosen in “Waveform 2" and
”Waveform 3".
NOTE: If Auto Display for is set with two or more functions set on
the same waveform, CO2 takes the highest priority, then
IBP1 and then IBP2.
Powerup settings: Select “Save Current” to keep all configured items for the next time the
Passport XG is powered on. Select “Restore Factory” to return to the factory default settings.
NOTE: The choices for Waveform 2 and Waveform 3 only include

the Agent and O2 selections when the Gas Module is
installed and configured.


Choices: IBP1, Casc, ECG, Pleth, Resp, Choices: Waveform 3, Off
CO2, Agent, O2

Choices: IBP1, IBP2, Pleth, Resp, Choices: Waveform 2, Waveform 3, Off
CO2, Agent, O2

Choices: Waveform 2, Waveform 3, Off Choices:No change, Save, Restore

FIGURE 1-94 Set-up Menu
1.6.23.3 Recorder Menu

Wave Selection: Set the waveform or waveforms to be printed.
Record on Alarm: Set to ON for a recording to be printed each time an alarm situation
occurs.
Record Destination: Set where the print out will occur. Passport - from the Passport XG,
Central - from the Visa, Both - from both the Passport XG and the Visa.
NOTE: Choices for Wave Selection only include the CO2, IBP1, IBP2,
and Gas Module selections when these items are installed
and configured.
NOTE: Record Destination is only displayed when Serial Output

Type is set to “VISA” or “VISA WITH ADMIT”.

CHANGE RECORDER
Wave Selection: ECG
Record on Alarm: No
Record Destination Passport
ECG, Pleth, Resp, ECG & IBP1, ECG & IBP2,
IBP1 & IBP2, CO2, ECG & RESP
CO2 & O2, CO2 & Agent
SELECT = Enter/move
CHANGE RECORDER
Wave Selection: ECG
Record on Alarm: No
Choices: Yes, No

SELECT = Enter/move
CHANGE RECORDER
Wave Selection: ECG
Record on Alarm: No
Choices: Passport, Central, Both

SELECT = Enter/move
1.6.23.4 NIBP Menu

Start Pressure: Change the start pressure to affect the pump up pressure of the NIBP cuff.
The range shown is for the adult patient size. The range for pediatrics is 60-180 mmHg, and
the range for neonates is 40-120 mmHg.
CHANGE NIBP
Start Pressure: 180 mmHg
Range: 100-260 mmHg
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-96 NIBP Menu

1.6.23.5 IBP menu

IBP1 Scale, IBP2 Scale: Sets the full scale value of the display.
CHANGE IBP
Choices: 37.5, 75, 150, 300 mmHg
SELECT = Enter/move
CHANGE IBP
Choices: 37.5, 75, 150, 300 mmHg
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-97 IBP Menu
1.6.23.6 Resp Menu

Resp Speed: Sets the speed of the respiration waveform. This may be set either in this
menu or in the Gas Module Menu (if installed).
Scale: Sets the scale of the Resp waveform.
Resp Source: Sets the source of the respiration information. “CO2/OFF” sets the source to
CO2, if CO2 is present. If CO2 is not present, the Resp Source is OFF. “CO2/ECG” sets the
source to CO2, if CO2 is present. If CO2 is not present, the Resp Source is set to ECG. If
CO2 option is not installed, Resp Source choices are OFF or ECG.

CHANGE RESP CHANGE RESP

Resp Speed: 12.5 mm/sec Resp Speed: 12.5 mm/sec
Scale: 3 Scale: 3
Resp Source: CO2/ECG Resp Source: CO2/ECG
Choices: 3.125, 6.25, 12.5, 25 mm/sec Choices: Off, ECG, CO2/Off, CO2/ECG
CHANGE RESP
Resp Speed: 12.5 mm/sec
Scale: 3
Resp Source: CO2/ECG
Choices: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-98 Resp Menu
1.6.23.7 HR/ECG Menu

Trace Speed: Sets the speed of the ECG, IBP1, IBP2, CO2 and Pleth waveforms.
Source: Select which source is used for the heart rate reading. The Auto selection uses a
built in algorithm to automatically choose the strongest heart rate source. The order of priority
starts with ECG, then IBP, then SpO2, and then NIBP.
CHANGE HR/ECG
Trace Speed: 25 mm/sec
Source: AUTO
Choices: 12.5, 25, 50 mm/sec
SELECT = Enter/move
CHANGE HR/ECG
Trace Speed: 25 mm/sec
Source: AUTO
Choices: Auto, ECG, IBP1, SpO2
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-99 HR/ECG Menu

1.6.23.8 SpO2 Menu / Nellcor SpO2 / Masimo SpO2 Menu

Pleth Size: Sets the scale of the plethysmograph waveform.
Sensor-Off Audio: Set to Off - no beep tone from the Passport. Set to ON - a one time
series of 5 triple beeps upon recognition of a SpO2 sensor off condition. Set to CONT - a
series of 5 triple beeps every 30 seconds.
Mode (Nellcor SpO2 only): Sets the averaging time of the plethysmograph waveform on
units with Nellcor. Scaling is automatic, refer to “Special Features” on page 1-131.
Sensitivity Mode (Masimo SpO2 only): Sets the sensitivity mode depending upon
signal quality.
Post Average Time (Masimo SpO2 only): Changes averaging time for Saturation,
Pulse Rate, and Signal Strength measurements for SpO2.
Datascope SpO2
CHANGE SPO2 CHANGE SPO2
Pleth Size: 3 Pleth Size: 3
Sensor-Off Audio: ON Sensor-Off Audio: ON
Choices: 1, 2, 3, 4 Choices: ON, OFF, CONT
Nellcor SpO2
Mode: 1 Mode: 1
Sensor-Off Audio: ON Sensor-Off Audio: ON
Choices: 1, 2, 3 Choices: ON, OFF, CONT.
Masimo SpO2
Sensor-Off Audio ON Sensor-Off Audio ON
Sensitivity Mode: Normal Sensitivity Mode: Normal
:Post Average Time (sec) 8 :Post Average Time (sec) 8
Choices: ON, OFF, CONT Choices: Normal, High
CHANGE SPO2
Sensor-Off Audio: ON
Sensitivity Mode: Normal
Post Average Time (sec) 8
Choices: 4,6,8,10,12,14,16
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 1-100 SpO2 Menu
1.6.23.9 CO2 Menu

CO2 Scale: Select the size of the displayed CO2 waveform.
Start Zero Calibration: Select Yes to initiate the calibration of the sensor.
Start adapter cal: Select Yes to initiate the calibration of the airway adapter with the
sensor.

N2O Compensation: Select ON to compensate for interference caused by nitrous oxide

present in the gas being analyzed.
O2 Compensation: Select % to compensate for interference caused by oxygen present in

the gas being analyzed.

Choices: 5, 8, 12 % Choices: ON, OFF


Choices: Yes, No Range: 0 - 100 %

CHANGE CO2
CO2 Scale: 0-8%
Start Zero Calibration: No
Start adapter cal: No
N2O Compensation: OFF
O2 Compensation: 21%
Choices: Yes, No

SELECT = Enter/move
NOTE: If the Gas Module is installed and configured, a message

will appear asking the user to re-configure the Serial Output
in the User Configuration.
1.6.23.10 Gas Module Menu

CO2 Scale: Select the size of the displayed CO2 waveform.
Resp Speed: Sets the speed of the respiration waveform. This may be set either in this
menu or in the Resp Menu (see “Resp Menu” on page 1-179).
Start Zeroing: Select Yes to manually initiate re-zeroing of the Agent, CO2, and N20 Gas
Module parameters.

Start Calibration: Select Yes to initiate the Gas Module calibration routine. See “Gas
Module Option” on page 1-146 for more details.
Restart Pump: Select Yes to manually restart the Gas Drive Pump.
Agent Selection: Auto ID is the default. Manual override is allowed. If an agent other than
the one selected is detected, a message indicating an agent mismatch will appear.
Agent Scale: Select the scale of the Agent.
O2 Scale: Select the scale of the O2.
CHANGE GAS MODULE CHANGE GAS MODULE

CO2 Scale: 0-60 mmHg CO2 Scale: 0-60 mmHg
Start Zeroing: No Start Zeroing: No
Start Calibration: No Start Calibration: No
Restart Pump No Restart Pump No
Agent Selection: Auto Agent Selection: Auto
Agent Scale: 5.0% Agent Scale: 5.0%
O2 Scale: 18 - 30% O2 Scale: 18 - 30%
Choices: 40, 60, 100 mmHg Choices: Yes, No
Date of last mixture calibration: 09/15/97 Date of last mixture calibration: 09/15/97
= Adjust SELECT=enter/move EXIT = Adjust SELECT=enter/move EXIT

O2 Scale: 18 - 30% O2 Scale: 18 - 30%
Choices: 3.125, 6.25, 12.5, 25 mm/sec Choices: Yes, No
FIGURE 1-102 Gas Module Menu

Gas Module Menu Continued

O2 Scale: 18 - 30% O2 Scale: 18 - 30%
Choices: 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 20% Choices: Yes, No

O2 Scale: 18 - 30% O2 Scale: 18 - 30%
Choices: 18-30%, 18-60%, 18-100% Choices: Iso, Enf, Des, Sev, Hal, Auto
FIGURE 1-103 Gas Module Menu, continued
1.6.23.11 Alarm Menu

This menu is accessible by pressing the “LIMITS” key, see “Alarms” on page 1-149 for more
details.
The alarm menu provides access to change the settings for all available parameter alarms.
The following illustrates a sample of what may be displayed depending on the options
installed.
NOTE: IBP1, IBP2, Gas Module and CO2 are optional and will not
appear on menu if not installed.
NOTE: When the Gas Module is installed and configured, two more
pages with additional alarm limits become available, refer
to “Alarm Limits” on page 1-150 for complete details on
limits.

CHANG E ALARM S Low H igh C H A N G E A LA R M S Low H igh

HR: OFF OFF B PM HR: OFF O FF BPM
S p O 2: 85 OFF % S pO 2: 85 OFF %
IB P 1 S ys: OFF OFF mm H g IB P 1 S y s: OFF OFF mmHg
IBP1 D ia: OFF OFF mm H g IBP 1 D ia: OFF OFF mmHg
N IBP Sys: OFF OFF mm H g N IBP Sys: OFF OFF mmHg
N IBP D ia: OFF OFF mm H g N IBP D ia: OFF OFF mmHg
IBP2 Mean: OFF OFF mm H g IBP 2 M ean: OFF OFF mmHg
R espiration: OFF OFF R PM R espiration: OFF OFF R PM
A pnea D elay: OFF sec Apnea D elay: OFF sec
E TC O2: OFF OFF % ET C O2: OFF OFF %
Lo w : O FF , 30 -10 0 H igh, O FF , 100 -250 Low : O FF , 5-9 0 H ig h, O F F, 4 0-130
S ELE C T = E nter/m ove = A djust valve E X IT = quit S ELE C T = Enter/m ove = A djust valve E X IT = quit

S p O 2: 85 OFF % S pO 2: 85 OFF %
Apnea D elay: OFF sec Apnea D elay: OFF sec
Lo w : 50-9 9 H ig h, O FF , 85-1 00 Low : O FF , 50-150 H ig h, O F F , 7 0-2 40

S p O 2: 85 OFF % S pO 2: 85 OFF %
Apnea D elay: OFF sec Apnea D elay: OFF sec
Lo w : O FF , 5-1 30 H igh, O F F , 7 0-2 40 Lo w : O FF , 30 -12 0 H ig h, O F F , 4 0-1 30
Alarm Menu continued

Low: OFF, 2-100 High, OFF, 5-150 Range: OFF, 10-40

FIGURE 1-105 Alarm Menu, continued

User Configuration Menu

The User Configuration Menu is accessed during the power-up sequence. See “User
Configuration Mode” on page 1-153 for complete details.
1.6.23.12 User Configuration - Date/Time Menu

Year, Month, Day, Hours, Minutes - Use the UP q and q DOWN arrow keys (1) to set each
item to the appropriate number.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date / Time CHANGE DATE

Trend Year: 97
Temperature Month: 9
Hr SpO2 Size Day: 27
Alarm Audio Delay Hours: 16
Audio Alarm Standby Minutes: 54
Serial Output Type
CO2 = Adjust valve EXIT = quit
Color Settings SELECT = Enter/move
Gas Monitor
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-106 Date/Time Menu
1.6.23.13 User Configuration - Trend Menu

Trend Trigger: Choose the events that when they occur cause the current parameter
information to be stored in the trend memory. The selections for triggers are: (Interval),
(NIBP), (Alarms), (Interval, NIBP, & Alarms), (Interval & NIBP), (Interval & Alarms) or (NIBP &
Alarms).
Interval: Each time the selected time interval has elapsed, the parameter information is
stored in the trend memory. The selections within the range are: 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60 or
120 minutes.
U S E R C O N F IG U R A T IO N
P re s s & h o ld th e E N D k e y f o r 3 s e c , to le a v e co n fig u ra tio n m o d e .
D a te /T im e
T re n d
T e m p e ra tu re C H AN G E TR EN D
H r S p O 2 S iz e T rig g e r : N IB P
A la rm A u d io D e la y In te rv a l: 5 m in
A u d io A la rm S ta n d b y C h o ic e s: In te rv a l, N IB P , A la rm s o r m u ltip le trig g e rs
S e ria l O u tp u t T y p e = A d ju s t v a lv e E X IT = q u it
CO2 S E L E C T = E n te r/m o v e
C o lo r S e ttin g s
G a s M o n ito r
N IB P : Id le SPO2
P re s s & h o ld th e E N D k e y f o r 3 s e c , to le a v e co n fig u ra tio n m o d e .
D a te /T im e
T re n d
T e m p e ra tu re CHANGE TREND
H r S p O 2 S iz e T rig g e r: N IB P
A la rm A u d io D e la y In te rv a l: 5 m in
A u d io A la rm S ta n d b y R a n g e : 1 - 1 2 0 m in
S e ria l O u tp u tT yp e = A d ju s t va lv e E X I T = q u it
CO2 S E L E C T = E n te r/m o v e
C o lo r S e ttin g s
G a s M o n ito r
N IB P : Id le SPO2
FIGURE 1-107 Trend Menu

1.6.23.14 User Configuration - Temperature Menu

Temperature Scale: Select the temperature to be measured in Fahrenheit or Centigrade
units.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date/Time
Trend
Temperature
Hr SpO2 Size CHANGE TEMP
Alarm Audio Delay Temperature Scale: Fahrenheit
Audio Alarm Standby Choices: Fahrenheit, Centigrade
Serial Output Type
CO2
SELECT = Enter/move
Color Settings
Gas Monitor
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-108 Temperature Menu
1.6.23.15 User Configuration - Hr SpO2 Size Menu

Hr SpO2 size: Re-sizes the Hr and SpO2 display areas.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date/Time
Trend
Temperature
Hr SpO2 Size CHANGE HR SPO2 SIZE
Alarm Audio Delay Hr SpO2 Size: HR small, SpO2 large
Audio Alarm Standby Choices: HR larger, smaller
Serial Output Type
Color Settings
Gas Monitor
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-109 HR SpO2 Menu
1.6.23.16 User Configuration - Alarm Audio Delay Menu

Alarm Audio delay: Set to 4, 6 or 8 seconds to delay the tone of an alarm for the
selected amount of time.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date/Time
Trend
Temperature
Hr SpO2 Size CHANGE ALARM AUDIO DELAY
Alarm Audio Delay OFF
Alarm Audio delay:
Audio Alarm Standby
Choices: OFF, 4,6,8 sec
Serial Output Type
CO2
SELECT = Enter/move
Color Settings
Gas Monitor
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-110 Alarm Audio Delay Menu

1.6.23.17 User Configuration - Audio Alarm Standby Menu

Aud alm standby: When this function is set to ON, pressing and holding the MUTE key
for 4 seconds will indefinitely suspend the alarms. When set to “Active on Powerup”, the
Audio Alarm Standby mode is automatically set on powering up the unit. This indefinitely
suspends alarms. To deactivate the Audio Alarm Standby mode, press the MUTE key. When
this function is set to OFF, alarms cannot be indefinitely suspended.
USER CONFIGURATION
Date/Time
Trend
Temperature
Hr SpO2 Size
Alarm Audio Delay CHANGE ALARM STANDBY
Audio Alarm Standby Audio Alarm Standby: OFF
Serial Output Type Choices: OFF, ON, ON & Active on Powerup
CO2 = Adjust valve EXIT = quit
Color Settings SELECT = Enter/move
Gas Monitor
NIBP: Idle SPO2
FIGURE 1-111 Audio Alarm Standby Menu
1.6.23.18 User Configuration - Serial Output Type Menu

Serial Output Type: Select the communication protocols for interfacing with other
specialized equipment. Six options are available. The VISA with Admit option should be
selected when the VISA Central Station supports the “Admit from Bedside” feature. The Gas
Module option should be selected when the Passport XG is to be used with the optional Gas
Module.
with other specialized equipment: VISA, VISA with Admit from bedside feature, Gas Module
(optional), Accutorr (uses the same data protocol as an Accutorr), message (for diagnostic
purposes) with the Passport XG Monitor. The baud rate for the Accutorr protocol can be set
for 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps.
NOTE: The VISA Central Station cannot be used in conjunction with

the Gas Module option.

P res s & ho ld th e E N D k e y fo r 3 se c, to lea ve c on fig u ra tion m od e.
Date /T ime
T re n d
Temp era ture CH ANG E SER IAL O U TPUT TYPE
H r S p O 2 S ize S e ria l O utpu t T yp e : V is a
Alarm Audio Delay A c cu to rr B a u d R a te: 12 00 bp s
Audio Alarm Standby
C ho ic es : V isa ,V isa w ith A d m it, A c c uto rr,
S e ria l O utp ut T y pe M es sa g e ,D ia p , G a s M o nitor
CO 2 = A djus t v a lve EXIT = quit
C olor Se ttings S E LE C T = E n te r/m o ve
G as M o nitor
NIBP: Idle SPO2
P res s & ho ld th e E N D k e y fo r 3 se c, to lea ve c on fig u ra tion m od e.
D ate /T im e
T re n d
Tem p era ture C H A N G E S ER IA L O U T P U T TY P E
H r S p O 2 S ize S erial O utp u t T yp e : V is a
Alarm Audio Delay A ccu torr B a ud R ate: 120 0 bps
Audio Alarm Standby
C ho ice s: 12 00 , 2 4 00 , 4 80 0, 9 60 0 b ps
S e ria l O utp ut T y pe
CO2 = A d jus t v a lve E XIT = quit
C olor S etting s S E L E C T = E n te r/m o ve
G as M o nitor
NIBP : Idle SP O 2
FIGURE 1-112 Serial Output Type Menu
1.6.23.19 User Configuration - CO2 Menu

Barometric Pressure: Allows the facility to adjust to the current pressure. Units equipped
with Sidestream CO2 read this value from monitor and adjusts automatically. The user does
not need to change this value.
CO2 Units: Allows the facility to select the units of measure.
P r e s s & h o l d t h e E N D k e y f o r 3 s e c , t o le a v e c o n f i g u r a t i o n m o d e .
D a t e / T im e
T re n d
T e m p e r a tu re
H r S p O 2 S iz e
A la r m A u d io D e la y CHANGE CO2
A u d io A la r m S t a n d b y B a ro m e tr ic P r e s s u re : 760 m m Hg
S e ria l O u tp u t T y p e C O 2 U n it s : %
CO2 R ange: 500 - 800 m m H g
C o lo r S e tt in g s = A d ju s t v a lv e E X I T = q u it
G a s M o n it o r S E L E C T = E n te r /m o v e
N I B P : Id le SPO2
P r e s s & h o l d t h e E N D k e y f o r 3 s e c , t o le a v e c o n f i g u r a t i o n m o d e .
D a t e / T im e
T re n d
T e m p e r a tu re
H r S p O 2 S iz e
CHANGE CO2
A la r m A u d io D e la y
B a ro m e tr ic P r e s s u re : 760 m m Hg
A u d io A la r m S t a n d b y
S e ria l O u tp u t T y p e C O 2 U n it s : %
C h o ic e s : T o r r, k P a , %
CO2
= A d ju s t v a lv e E X I T = q u it
C o lo r S e tt in g s
G a s M o n it o r S E L E C T = E n te r /m o v e
N I B P : Id le SPO2


2.0 Theory of Operation
Contents of this Chapter ............................................................. Page

Block Diagrams .......................................................................... 2-1
Detailed Circuit Descriptions........................................................ 2-7
The Theory of Operation provides block diagrams, an overview of each board, and a
detailed circuit description of each board. The circuit descriptions are included to assist
service personnel while repairing the printed circuit board on a component level. Refer to the
schematic diagrams in Chapter 2 when reading the Detailed Circuit Descriptions.
2.1 Block Diagrams

The Block Diagrams indicate the internal organization of the instrument. It depicts several
circuit boards, numerous connectors and the cathode ray tube. The block diagrams are used
to gain both familiarity with the instrument and locate malfunctioning PC boards as readily as
possible. To avoid clutter, the number of PC board interconnects is minimized. The
interconnects shown represent major or essential signal flow and clock connections. Also, the
power supply connections for each board are shown.
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAMS ....................................................... Page

Passport 5L/LT Block Diagram .................................................... 2-3
Passport 5L with CO2 Block Diagram .......................................... 2-4
Passport XG Block Diagram........................................................ 2-5
Password XG, (Masimo) Block Diagram...................................... 2-6
DETAILED BLOCK DIAGRAMS ....................................................... Page

Interconnect Board ..................................................................... 2-8
Overall Front End Block Diagram ................................................ 2-14
ECG Pre-Amp Block Diagram ...................................................... 2-14

Block Diagrams Theory of Operation
Respiration Preamp Block Diagram ............................................ 2-15

Pressure Preamp Block Diagram................................................. 2-17
Temperature PreAmp Block Diagram .......................................... 2-18
Power Supply Block Diagram ..................................................... 2-20
Data Acquistion System Block Diagram....................................... 2-22
SpO2 Block Diagram................................................................... 2-27
Masimo/Nellcor SpO2 Interface Module Block Diagram............... 2-35
EPLD, U4 Block Diagram ............................................................. 2-37
IOCHRDY Logic Diagram ............................................................. 2-38
CPU Board Block Diagram .......................................................... 2-40
Line/Battery Block Diagram........................................................ 2-49
Diode OR Circuit ......................................................................... 2-50
Comparatory 20 Second Delay Circuit......................................... 2-52
Oscillator/Charge Pump Circuit ................................................... 2-53
Power Module Diagram ............................................................. 2-53
Internal Power Supply Block Diagram ........................................ 2-54
Planar EL Panel Board Block Diagram......................................... 2-56
CO2 Interface Module Block Diagram .......................................... 2-57
NIBP Module Block Diagram....................................................... 2-59
Linear Bleed Block Diagram........................................................ 2-62
Panel Board Block Diagram ........................................................ 2-63
Termination Board Choke Assembly............................................ 2-66
Termination Board Terminated Signals ........................................ 2-67

Theory of Operation Block Diagrams
SpO2 IS AN OPTION IN THE PASSPORT LT *

J23
SPO2 INTERFACE BD.
0670-00-0557 P23
THIS FEATURE IS A FUTURE OPTION IN THE PASSPORT LT

P5
J5
NELLCOR SPO2
MODULE J21
NELLCOR SPO2 SENSOR 0671-00-0007
J34
0012-00-0883
P J J
P
TEST POINTS PUMP
1 1 TEST PTS. TEST PTS.
3
JP1 J22 PNEUMATICS BD. J
2
P
2
9 9 0119-00-0116
670-00-0477
0670-00-0605 (CE/LINEAR BLEED)
J30
OR P21 0012-00-0658 P30
50 PIN 0012-00-0656
20 PIN
P31 50 PIN NOT USED
0012-00-0431-06 P21 J21 SpO2 BD. J31 J32

T
E
0670-00-0482 S
J
J21 CONTROL BD. 3
T
670-00-0375 3 P
T
Spo2 S
Daughter .
0012-00-1009
Board. 0012-00-1007 J21 J27
TEST PTS. TEST PTS.
USE IN CE COMPLIANT UNIT
0670-00-0619
J24 J22 (J2)
P27
NIBP MODULE
0012-00-0593-02
ONLY. 0997-00-0293
0670-00-0576 INTERCONNECT BD. 0997-00-0915-01 (CE)
0670-00-0615 HP 26 PIN
0670-00-0628 (CE) P65 P62

0670-00-0629 HP (CE)
P4 J65 J62
FRONTEND BD.
TEMP (400/700)
670-00-0560-03 RS232
P3 J66J1
ECG DAUGHTER BOARD INTERFACE
J1 P1 18 PIN
0670-00-0611 10 PIN P64 J64 CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
0670-00-0627 (CE) J42 P42
P1 5 LEAD
0012-00-0674
670-00-0591
PRESSURE 1 0670-00-0623 (CE)
P2 0670-00-0624-01 (CE)
0670-00-0624-02 HP (CE)
PRESSURE 2 TEST PTS.
ON BD. BATTERY 146-02-0001
DATASETTE EQUIPOTENTIAL
J43
J61
50
CONNECTOR
P81
0012-00-0673
16 PIN P67 J67
0670-00-0561-08
J63 J68 . 0012-00-0829
P63 P68
0012-00-0659
50 PIN
0012-00-0744 LCD Version Only
40 PIN
TEST PTS. P57 To CPU BD.
P71
J56 J57
J71 P68
0012-00-0744
POWER SWITCH +12/-23 VOLT BD. RECORDER PLANAR EL DISPLAY BD.

40 PIN
0261-00-0139-02
670-00-0450 P71
0670-00-0500
(AR42) 0670-00-0622 (CE) J71
P58 683-00-0441 J74 J75 J72 PANEL BD.(LCD)

PUSH ON
TERMINAL X2 P74 P75 P72 0670-00-0546
0012-00-0734
J74 J75 J72
14 PIN 20 PIN 0012-00-0257-01
P74 P75 P72
SPEAKER
J0 POWER SUPPLY
PLANAR EL DISPLAY BD.
KEYPAD 0012-00-0257-01
To Keypad / Overlay
AC CABLE &
CONNECTOR
PART OF EXT.
0160-00-0009 SET-UP ECG IBP NIBP ALARMS TRENDS SPEAKER
TREND BEEP
MAINS POWER SUPPLY
BRN. 1 J54
SELECT LEAD ZERO 1 START VOLUME
RETURN VOLUME
0012-00-0676
EXTERNAL 3
RED
ORN.
2
3
J3
END SIZE ZERO 2 INTERVAL
CHECK
TIME 18 PIN
RECORD
4 P53 J53 RETURN
0012-25-0001
POWER 4
1
YEL.
BLU. 5 0670-00-0449
1
BATT. CLIP
1 0012-00-0735
2 VIO. 6 0670-00-0621 (CE) 146-00-0043 FREEZE DEFLATE MUTE TIME
+ 3
SUPPLY 1=12VDC .35A 0012-00-0662 J51 P51
2 BATT 1
dc input
INPUT=120VAC 60HZ. .65A

0014-00-0173-01 2=12VDC .35A
3=17VDC .95A
LINE BATTERY BD. + 2
4
1
2 BATT 2 J1 KEYPAD: 331-00-0068
0014-00-0027-24 (CE)
4=COMMON 146-00-0043 OVERLAY
0012-00-0661 PLANAR EL DISPLAY E.L. WITH IBP 331-00-0064-01 P1
3 2 2 3 E.L. W/O IBP 331-00-0064-02
KEYPAD: 331-00-0068
0160-00-0009 BLANK LABEL FOR NO
J1
RECORDER OPTION: 334-00-0973 OVERLAY
640 X 200
1 4
4 1 CENTRAL SILENCE LABEL
VISA OPTION 0334-00-1197
LCD DISPLAY LCD WITH IBP 331-00-0064-03
LCD W/O IBP 331-00-0064-04
640 X 200 RECORDER OPTION: 334-00-0973
CENTRAL SILENCE LABEL
Passport 5 Lead/5L - All Options Available VISA OPTION 0334-00-1197
Passport LT - SpO2, NIBP Optional

* Only Datascope SpO2 Is Available As An
Option On The Passport LT
FIGURE 2-1 Passport 5L/LT Block Diagram

J23
SPO2 INTERFACE BD.
0670-00-0557 P23
P5
J5
NELLCOR SPO2
MODULE
J21
NELLCOR SPO2 SENSOR 0671-00-0007
J34
P J J TEST POINTS PUMP

0012-00-0883 1 1 P
TEST PTS.
TEST PTS.
3
JP1
J22 0012-00-0658 w/o CO2
PNEUMATICS BD. J
2
P
2
0119-00-0116
0012-00-0737 0670-00-0447 9 9
OR P21 50 PIN
0670-00-0605 (CE/LINEAR BLEED)
J30
P30
SpO2 BD. 0012-00-0656
0012-00-0431-06 P21 J21
0670-00-0482 20 PIN
P31
J21 50 PIN NOT USED
Spo2 J31 J32

T
Daughter E
0012-00-1009 0012-00-1007 J21
Board. S
J
0670-00-0619 TEST PTS. TEST PTS. CONTROL BD. 3
T
670-00-0375 3 P
USE IN EMC COMPLIANT UNIT J24
J22 (J2) T
ONLY. S
.
CO2 INPUT J27
J J J J
0012-00-0733 2 2 9 9
P P27
J606 0 0 0012-00-0743 9
1 4 2 1
CO2 CONTROL MODULE

1
0012-00-0593-04 0997-00-0293
CO2 INTERFACE BD.
0671-00-0001
0670-00-0497
0997-00-0915-01 (CE)
J93
INTERCONNECT BD. P93 P65 P62
0670-00-0576
0670-00-0615 HP J65 J62
0670-00-0628 (CE)
0670-00-0629 HP (CE)
RS232
J66
P4
FRONTEND BD. INTERFACE
TEMP (400/700)
0670-00-0560-03 CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
P3 0670-00-0591
0670-00-0623 (CE)
ECG DAUGHTER BOARD
16 PIN 0670-00-0611
J1 P1 P41 10 PIN
0670-00-0627 (CE) J42 P42 J64
PRESSURE 1
P1
5 LEAD
0012-00-0674 P64 ON BD. BATTERY 146-02-0001
DATASETTE EQUIPOTENTIAL
P2 0670-00-0624-01 (CE)
J61
50 CONNECTOR
0670-00-0624-02 HP (CE) P81
PRESSURE 2 TEST PTS.
0012-00-0673
J43 P67 J67
16 PIN
0670-00-0561-08
J63 J68
0012-00-0829
P63 P68
0012-00-0659 0012-00-0721
50 PIN 40 PIN
TEST PTS. P57 P71
J56 J57 J71
POWER SWITCH +12/-23 VOLT BD. PLANAR EL PANEL BD.

RECORDER
261-00-XXXX-XX
0670-00-0450 0670-00-0500
(AR42) 0670-00-0622 (CE)
0683-00-0441
P58 J74 J75 J72
PUSH ON
TERMINAL X2 P74 P75 P72
0012-00-0734
20 PIN
14 PIN
0012-00-0257-01
SPEAKER
KEYPAD
AC CABLE &
CONNECTOR
PART OF EXT. J0 POWER SUPPLY
MAINS POWER SUPPLY BRN. 1 J54
SET-UP ECG IBP NIBP ALARMS TRENDS
EXTERNAL 3
RED
ORN.
2 PLANAR EL DISPLAY BD. SELECT LEAD ZERO 1 START VOLUME
TREND
RETURN
BEEP
VOLUME
3 0160-00-0009
4 P53J53
0012-25-0001
POWER 4
1
YEL.
BLU. 5 1
BATT. CLIP
1 J3 CKECK
146-00-0043 END SIZE ZERO 2 INTERVAL TIME RECORD
2 VIO. 6 +
SUPPLY 1=12VDC .35A 0012-00-0662 J51 P51
3 2 BATT 1 RETURN
INPUT=120VAC 60HZ. .65A

0014-00-0173-01 2=12VDC .35A
3=17VDC .95A
LINE BATTERY BD. + 2
4
1
2 BATT 2 0012-00-0735
FREEZE DEFLATE MUTE TIME dc input
0014-00-0027-24 (CE) 670-00-0449 146-00-0043
0012-00-0661
3 2 2 3 KEYPAD: 331-00-0068
J1 OVERLAY
1 4 E.L. WITH IBP 331-00-0064-01
4 1 PLANAR EL DISPLAY E.L. W/O IBP 331-00-0064-02
RECORDER OPTION: 334-00-0973
640 X 200
CENTRAL SILENCE LABEL
VISA OPTION 0334-00-1197
FIGURE 2-2 Passport 5L with CO2 Block Diagram

FIGURE 2-3 Passport XG Block Diagram

PUMP 0104-00-0019
P1 SpO2 INTERFACE BD. (OPTIONAL)
0012-00-1052
NELLCOR
0012-00-0883 (CE) JP1 0670-00-0665-01 MS-1 J34
J P J
Nellcor SpO2 P 0012-00-0885 0670-00-0665-02 Nellcor
Module P 2 2 TEST POINTS
5 14 PIN INTERFACE CONNECTION
0671-00-0007 5 3 3 (OPTIONAL) ONLY ONE SpO2 PNEUMATICS BD.
(FLEX) OPTION CAN BE INSTALLED,
J21 P21 0670-00-0447
0012-00-1099-02 0012-00-1204 DATASCOPE, MASIMO,
PC12 Cable (12 PIN) 0012-00-0885 P J OR NELLCOR.
J P CE/Linear Bleed
2 2
Ferrite J Masimo MS-1 3 3 14 PIN 0670-00-0605-01 VR1-Over Pressure Set
3 3
1 SpO2 Module J NOTE: The 0997-00-0469-01 NIBP Module
P J
0671-00-0126 J P 0012-00-1102 Pwr. In 2 P29
2 2
2 2
J24 9
uses the 0670-00-0657 board.
3 PIN 5 5
0600-00-0047-01 - LNOP-DCI Adult Sensor J30 The 0997-00-0468-01 NIBP Module
0108-00-0076 P24
P30
uses the 0670-00-0375 board.
SpO2 BD. 0012-00-0656

0012-00-0431-06 P23 J23 20 PIN
8 PIN Datascope
DATASCOPE P31 50 PIN
0670-00-0482 NOT USED
J21 P21
Datasensor 10', 0600-00-0026-02 CONNECTION J31 J32
or 3' 0600-00-0026-01 used with SpO2 BD. T
instrument Cable 0012-00-0516-02 0012-00-1009 Daughter Bd. E
J2 J1 16 PIN J23
10 PIN 0670-00-0619 TEST PTS. TEST PTS. CONTROL BD. S
J
CE Units 3 T
J24 0670-00-0375
J22
0670-00-0657 (CE-Unit) VR1-NIBP Cal.
3
P
0012-00-1007 NIBP MODULE
T
0131-00-0244 Labeled 0997-00-0469-01, Replacement 0997-00-0293E
Sensor CO2 INPUT S
0600-00-0037 . XG-CE/Linear Bleed 0997-00-0468-01
CO2 CONTROL MODULE CO2 INTERFACE BD. J28
0670-00-0632-02
REF 0 0012-00-1046 0012-00-0658 w/o CO2
(998-134) 0012-00-0737 W/CO2 P28
J91 P91
J204
Cable Part Pump Cal.
J606 10 PIN
of 118 Bd. 0671-00-0118 J94 0012-00-0593-04
8 pin HP defibrillator interface cable 0012-00-0753-01
0671-00-0120 (CE) To J24
J93 8 pin HP defibrillator interface cable (CE) 0012-00-1027
W i th Main Stream Adapter 665 Bd.
Intubated Patient A
P103 H B
1 2
P93 F C
RED BLK/RED E D
OR
50 PIN
0103-00-0453 Exuast Port
P65 26 PIN
0103-00-0450 Tubing
Pressure nurse call cable 0012-00-0981
RT. Back Housing
Vacuum J65 P62 to bedside nurse
0103-00-0448 Pump Input SSCO2 RS232 call panel
Pump J62
0104-00-0017 CONTROL MODULE (PCM) INTERFACE 6 pin aami defibrillator interface cable 0012-00-0732
Sample Flow J1 6 pin aami defibrillator interface cable (CE) 0012-00-1026
J66
LT. Side Panel 0670-00-0631 (998-134) F A
Back Housing Filter Assy - 0103-00-0446-02.
W ith Sidestr eam Adap ter 0670-00-0651 (CE, 998-137) E B
Non-Intubated Patient Filter - 0103-00-0452 D C
0012-00-0701 FRONTEND BD.
Interconnect
Gnd W ire
0670-00-0620-01 ON BD. BATTERY 0146-02-0001 (BR2325)
TEMP 10 PIN 10' video
0670-00-0620-02 (HP) P64 J64
(400/700) J42 P42
0012-00-0674 cable
Video interface cable 0012-00-0983 0012-00-0994-01
P3 0012-00-1064
20 Pin
ECG J68
P1 J1 P1 J1 P1 J61 50
0012-00-1100 P81
P67 J67 Terminator Bd.
PRESSURE 1 0670-00-0648 (CE, 998-137)
P2 J71 J68
J63 DATASETTE
TEST PTS. 0670-00-0574-09 - Masimo, GMII, Color, SSCO2, (998-134, TP)
PRESSURE 2 P63 P68
0012-00-0659 0670-00-0574-08 - (CE Units, 998-137, TN)
J43 Cable is behind recorder Non- CE Units 0012-00-0744
0012-00-1067 50 PIN
INTERCONNECT BD. Cable above recorder Used on CE Units 40 PIN
0670-00-0628 16 PIN
0670-00-0629 (HP ECG & P1/P2) 12:12 Lead H R B PM SPO2% HR 56BPM
II
08-02-96
TEST PTS. P57 P71
ECG
56
Adult
(AR42) 1mV 56
J56 J57 RECORDER

Patient
Set-u p NIBP
J71 Recorder
Alarms
ECG
NIBP 1mV
683-00-0441 IBP
RESP
+12/-23 VOLT BD. PANEL BD. HR

SPo2 150 .0
IBP1
INTERNAL: 5 ET: min
0670-00-0617-05 For EL Display mmH g RESP RPM TE MP F
0670-00-0450 0670-00-0617-06 For LCD Color

0
15 96.5
J52 P52 NIBP: Idle SPO 2:
0670-00-0617-03 For EL Display (CE Only)

F1, .315A S.B
0159-27-0008
J77 - LCD Color
P58 J78 J74 - EL Display J75 J72
POWER SWITCH 0012-00-1040 15" remote color display

P74 P75 P72 0160-00-0022
5 Pin
0261-00-0139-02 CN1 0012-00-1005-EL 20PIN
0012-00-1039- Color 31 PIN
AC/DC Inverter
PUSH ON 14 PIN 0014-00-0177
(Color Only)
TERMINAL X2
CN2 J1
SPEAKER
Backlight
J54 P1 0012-00-0257-01
Bulb Assy.
KEYPAD
0014-00-0173-03 (6 Ft. Cable) LINE BATTERY BD.
0014-00-0173-04 (6 Inch Cable) CABLE & 0012-00-1012 12:12 Lead
II
HR BPM SPO2% HR 56 BPM
08-02-96 SET UP CENTRAL ECG ALARMS TRENDS
CONNECTOR 0670-00-0656 ECG IBP NIBP
56
J52 P52 Adult
PART OF EXT.
Thumb Screw BRN. 1 10 PINS 1mV 56 SELECT ADMIT LEAD ZERO 1 START VOLUME DISPLAY
BEEP
VOLUME
0012-25-0001 (US) P/N 0211-00-0138
POWER SUPPLY RED 2 Patient
0012-25-0002 (Europe) +17 Set-up NIBP

EXIT SIZE ZERO 2 INTERVAL LIMITS PRINT
3 ORN. 3 F1, 2.5A S.B DISCHARGE
Datascope
Recorder ECG
0012-25-0003 (UK/Ireland) 4 YEL. 4 P53 J53 0159-12-0021 Alarms
NIBP 1mV SILENCE FREEZE DEFLATE MUTE
CO2 PUMP
1 BLU. 5 BATT. CLIP IBP
- +
RESP HOLD 3 SEC. TO STOP

2 VIO. 6 Batt 1 F2, 4A S.B 1 1 HR
+ 3 0146-00-0043 SPo2
AC INPUT=85 - 264 Vac 0159-12-0023 2 BATT 1
15 0.0
Keypad 0331-00-0092 - XG (0998-0133)
47 - 63 HZ. 0012-00-0662-02 J51 P51 IBP1
0331-00-0098 - XG2 (0998-0134), XG2-CE (0998-0137)
MAINS 2 1
INTERNAL: 5 ET: min
0012-00-1070 XG-CE Batt 2 F3, 4A S.B + mmHg RESP RPM TEMP F

Keypad Overlay W/IBP, W /OCo2 W /O IBP/Co2 W /IBP & CO2 W/O IBP, W/CO2
Pin 1=14VDC . 3 2 2 3 0159-12-0023 4 2 BATT 2
0
15 96.5
2=14VDC English 01 04 17 18
EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY 0146-00-0043 NIBP: Idle SPO2:
3=17VDC 0012-00-0661 German 05 08 19 20

4=GND French 09 12 21 22
1 4 4 1 Spanish 13 16 23 24
PLANAR VGA E.L. DISPLAY 0160-00-0026
Italian 27 26 25 28
LCD Color Display 0160-00-0028 Keypad P/N - 0330-00-0017-XX
640 x 480 pixels
FIGURE 2-4 Password XG, (Masimo) Block Diagram

2.2 Detailed Circuit Descriptions

This section of the manual describes the operation of each circuit block. Refer to the
schematic diagrams in Chapter 2.
Included are descriptions for the following Circuit Board Assemblies:
Circuit Descriptions ..................................................................... Page

2.2.1 Interconnect Board .......................................................... 2-8
2.2.2 Frontend Board/Daughter Board ..................................... 2-10
2.2.3 SpO2 Board ..................................................................... 2-26
2.2.3.1 Masimo/Nellcor SpO2 Interface Board .......................... 2-35
2.2.4 CPU Board ....................................................................... 2-40
2.2.5 Line Battery Board ........................................................... 2-49
2.2.6 +12 / -23.5 Volt Converter Board .................................... 2-54
2.2.7 Planar EL Panel Board ..................................................... 2-55
2.2.8 CO2 Interface Module ...................................................... 2-57
2.2.9 NIBP Module: NIBP Pneumatic Board ............................... 2-59
2.2.10 Panel Board / Display Interface ..................................... 2-63
2.2.11 Termination Board ......................................................... 2-66

2.2.1 Interconnect Board

Overview
The Passport Interconnect module is a hardware interface which provides the physical
connection between the patient connected cables, and the preamplifiers and signal
conditioning circuitry of the Front End Module. It incorporates ESD and defibrillator voltage
suppression circuitry, along with spark-gap connection to non-isolated system common.
ECGRA
Transient Voltage
ECGLA Suppression RRA
ESU Filter
RLA
ECGLL
RA
ECGRL
ECGC LA
CShield LL
Transient Voltage
Suppression
RL
+IN
-IN C
+OUT P1 +IN
-OUT P1
+OUT P1
Shield
-OUT P1
Transient Voltage +OUT P2
Suppression
+IN -OUT P2
-IN
+OUT P2 -IN
-OUT P2
Shield
Shield
TIP
Transient Voltage
RING
Suppression SLEEVE
Controlled
TIP High Voltage
Discharge
RING Path
SLEEVE
FIGURE 2-5 Interconnect Board Block Diagram
Detail
Refer to the block diagram (Figure 2-5 on page 2-8), and complete circuit schematics, while
reading the following operation description.
The Interconnect Board can be viewed simply as the hardware connection between the
monitors external patient connectors for ECG, respiration, invasive pressure, and
temperature, and the internal signal processing circuitry. As it does this, it also provides high
voltage transient suppression.
ECG
Connection to the patient is made by ECGRA, ECGLA, ECGRL, ECGLL, and ECGC, via P3, a
standard ECG connector. Transient high voltage suppression is provided by R1, R2, R3, R9,
R10, CR1, CR2, CR3, CR10, and CR11. The resistors act as current limiting devices, while
the bidirectional transorbs limit the output signal voltages of RA, LA, RL, LL, and C, to 200
volts differential to “Shield” potential. “Shield” is ultimately connected to isolated ground on
the Front End Module.

After the high voltage suppression stage, each ECG leadwire’s signal enters a separate RC
filter to attenuate electro-surgical frequencies, as well as the respiration carrier generated on
the Front End Module. The five RC filters are R11-C6, R6-C9, R8-C7, R5-C10, and R7-C8.
Respiration
Connection to the patient is made by ECGRA, and ECGLA, via J3. High voltage protection,
up to 6000 volts differentially, is provided by capacitors C1 and C2. The patient signal is
finally routed to the Front End Module as RRA and RLA, via J1.
Pressure
This monitor incorporates two invasive pressure transducer channels. Connection to the
patient for the P1 channel is via connector P1, and for the P2 channel, connector P2. Voltage
excitation for the transducers is provided by the +IN and -IN signals which is a 5v supply (-IN
is connected to isolated ground on the Front End Module). Transducer output is carried
differentially on the +OUT and -OUT (P1 and P2) signals to the Front End Module. High
voltage electrostatic discharge protection is provided by suppressors CR8 through C12.
Temperature
Both Series 400 and Series 700 type sensors can be connected to the monitor using the
connector jack J4. The input signals are protected by transient voltage suppressor CR9. EMI
and RFI suppression is provided by common mode choke L1, and C3, C4, and C5. TIP,
RING, and SLEEVE signals are sent to the Front End Module via J1.
Controlled High Voltage Discharge

The Interconnect board provides a specific path to bleed off slowly accumulated static energy
to non isolated monitor ground, through R4, a 100 MW resistor. Rapid accumulation of
charge (voltage) at levels of over approximately 5500 volts, are discharged through DG1, a
gas spark gap device to non isolated monitor ground potential. The connection to the non
isolated monitor ground is via a direct wire strap from the resistor and spark gap
combination non isolated side, to the monitor’s internal center chassis structure.

2.2.2 Frontend Board/Daughter Board

Overview
The Passport Frontend Module consists of nine major blocks: the ECG, pressure, respiration,
temperature, isolated power supply, A/D converter, isolated microcontrollers, non-isolated
microcontroller, and data isolation sub-systems.
The ECG channel has five lead capability. It has an analog gain of 390, incorporates pacer
detect/reject processing, and electrosurgery interference detection function.
The dual invasive pressure channels each provide for a linear input range of -20 to +300
mmHg and can reject up to 120 mmHg of offset. The P1 channel systolic trigger level is fixed
at approximately 18 mmHg.
Patient respiration monitoring is accomplished using standard impedance pneumography,

actively driving a patient through the RA and LA ECG leads with several hundred
microamperes at 114kHz. Respiration can be measured over a range of 50 to 2000 ohms
equivalent body impedance. The circuitry outputs a signal representing a modulation of this
impedance, up to a maximum of 10 ohms.
The temperature preamplifier is capable of measuring with either 400 or 700 series
thermistor sensors. Measurement is valid over the range of 15 to 45 degrees C. Integral
calibration is provided internally at an equivalent temperature of 37.5 degrees C.
The Frontend Module creates its own isolated power from the system’s bulk power source,
which is either an unregulated 11 to 18 volt supply, or a battery supply of 11 to 14 volts. The
power conversion is implemented with a switch mode forward converter, to provide an
isolated supply of approximately 8 volts. Regulated +5 volts for circuitry and pressure
transducers is accomplished using series linear regulators.
Analog to digital conversion is implemented with a 12 bit converter, having 11 multiplexed

analog inputs and a serial digital data output. This function is controlled by an isolated
microcontroller, which also controls the configuration and operation of the various sub-
circuits. This processor is an 8 bit low power microcontroller with parallel I/O capability.
The isolated microcontroller communicates in a serial format with the non-isolated
microcontroller via opto-couplers, from which it receives its operational information, and to
which it sends the patient data and circuit status.
The non-isolated microcontroller is a high-performance 32 bit integrated processor with

direct memory access.

Daughter Board
The daughter board connects to the front end board at the existing J41 header, and also at a
new connector installed in the location formerly occupied by multiplexer U3. The J41 header
was the original attachment for the interconnect board in the 3-lead version. The respiration,
pressure and temperature signals simply pass through the daughter board from the
interconnect board to their original pins on J41. The ECG signals, however, are intercepted
to provide the 5-lead functions. Certain signals not available on J41, such as power and the
lead selection lines, are obtained from the connector installed in place of U3.
Each of the leadwires RA, LA, LL, RL and C, is brought from the interconnect board through
J2. The active leads (RA, LA, LL and C) are passed through an ESIS filter, consisting of two
cascaded R-C stages. For RA, this consists of R2-C1 and R19-C5, while identical circuits are
provided in the remaining leadwires. Each signal is then buffered by one section of quad
opamp U1, which is connected as a voltage follower. The buffer amplifier is used to provide
a bootstrapped lead bias for lead fault detection. Again using RA as a example, the series
connected diode pair CR1 and resistor R26 produce a level shifted version of the buffered
RA signal. This level shifted signal will always track two diode drops, or about 1.2 volts,
more negative than the RA signal. Bias resistor R1 is connected from this level shifted signal
to the RA lead input. Therefore, regardless of the voltage at the RA input (within range) a bias
current equal to (1.2 volts)/R1, or about 55 nA, flows as the lead bias. This bias current is
negative, meaning that the buffered lead signal will assume a strong negative voltage (near
the negative supply rail) when the leadwire is disconnected. Each of the active leads has an
identical circuit.
The RL lead has a different circuit, because it is used only as a drive lead, and never as an
active (input) lead. When displaying any lead except, I, II or III, a 5-wire cable is needed,
and RL is the drive lead. However, to allow compatibility with 3-wire cables when displaying
leads I, II or III, the LL, LA and RA wires (respectively) are used as the drive. The selection of
the drive lead is performed by multiplexer IC U4. Resistor R32 is used to attenuate the drive
signal (supplied from the front end board) so that it cannot exceed the +5 volt supply rail of
U4. Were this to occur, U4 would malfunction, and lead fault would not be reliably detected.

The buffered active lead signals are applied to a conventional Wilson network, consisting of
resistors R11, R13, R16, R17, R21, R23, R24, R27 and R29. These resistors provide the
weighted leadwire signals when displaying leads aVR, aVL and aVF, as well as the “Wilson
Central Terminal” (WCT) for display of lead C. For example, lead aVR is defined as 50%
each of the LL and LA signals taken as one ECG amplifier input, and RA as the other.
Resistors R11 and R17 perform the 50% weighting of signals LL and LA. Similarly, the C lead
is defined as the voltage on the C leadwire, measured against the average of the RA, LA and
LL voltages, known as the WCT. Resistors R13, R21 and R27 develop the WCT voltage. The
correct points for each lead display are picked off of the Wilson network by multiplexers U2
and U3. The outputs of these multiplexers are called ECG+ and ECG-, corresponding to the
positive and negative inputs of the ECG amplifier on the front end board. They are carried to
the front end board on pins 4 and 10 of J1, which mates with the connector installed in the
former site of U3 of the front end board. On the front end board, jumpers installed in position
U4 carry these signals to lines F and G, which are the inputs of ECG differential amplifier
U33.
The lead select multiplexers, U2 and U3, as well as the drive multiplexer, U4, are controlled
by three select lines, which select one of 7 leads or the ECG calibrate function. The lines
LSEL0 and LSEL1 correspond to the original LS0 and LS1 lines used in the 3-lead version. An
additional line, LSEL2, has been added to allow selection of the added leads. The network
R14-C11 in this line provides isolation between the microcontroller and the ECG
multiplexers, and is identical to the networks found in the LS0 and LS1 lines on the front end
board.
Lead fault detection is performed by measuring the DC voltage of the ECG+ and ECG-
signals. Resistors R33 and R34, together with diodes CR5 and CR6, select the lower (more
negative) of the two voltages on these points, and routes it to signal A, which is passed to the
lead fault comparator on the front end board. The operation of the lead fault detection takes
into account simulators which may short the ECG and pressure circuits together. The Passport
will not show a spurious lead fault with most such simulators, although it may fail to detect
certain lead faults when the pressure is connected to the simulator. Since this is a different
operating mode than the original Passport lead fault detection, the lead fault comparator has
been modified, as is discussed below.
Front End Board

The ECG section of the front end board has been modified from the previous 3-lead system.
The ESIS filters and lead bias resistors have been removed entirely. U3 has been replaced by
a connector which mates with the daughter board. Multiplexer U4 has been replaced by two
jumper wires, which allow the ECG signal from the daughter board to pass to the ECG
amplifier U33, as has been discussed previously. The additional lead selection line has been
added by connecting pin 27 of U38 to pin 1 of the connector used in place of U3. This line
is activated when enhanced microcontroller and Datasette software is used. In order to allow
the software to be backwards compatible with the 3-lead system, the 5-lead board is
identified by grounding pin 21 of the microcontroller, which is high on the 3-lead systems.

The drive amplifier signal is attenuated, as discussed above, by R32 on the daughter board,
and R12 on the front end board. To restore the drive gain to a higher value, R160 has been
increased to 30.1 K. To facilitate the new lead fault detection scheme, the bias point of the
drive amplifier has been changed slightly be changing R161 and R162. The lead fault
sensing voltage arrives from the daughter board by pin 5 of the connector installed in place
of U3. The signal is buffered by voltage follower U34, and then processed by the lead fault
comparator, U24. Lead fault is indicated when this signal becomes too negative. Therefore,
the comparator, which was originally configured as a window comparator, has been
modified to detect only negative voltages. When a simulator having a connection between
the ECG and pressure is used, the lead fault voltage is driven in a positive direction, and will
therefore not indicate lead fault. The modification of the comparator consists of omitting
diode D30 and resistor R166. A noise filter has been constructed by installing a 22.1 k
resistor in place of D37, and a 0.1 uF capacitor in place of R165. The threshold voltage of
the comparator has been adjusted by changing R168 and R214. When the leads are
attached, the voltage applied to the comparator is roughly -0.4 volts. When lead fault
occurs, this voltage becomes more negative, passing the approximately -1.3 volt threshold
set by R168 and R214.
Because the lead fault is detected from the output of the lead select multiplexer, only those
leadwires actually involved in producing the displayed lead are monitored for lead fault.
Therefore, only RA, LA and LL are considered in lead I, II or III; additionally RL is considered
in aVR, aVL and aVF; and all leadwires are considered in C. However, because the aVR,
aVL, aVF and C lead selections involve averaging the voltage on two or three electrodes, the
lead fault indication is less strong on these lead selections. This is because the bias voltage of
the disconnected lead may become averaged with the voltage of a lead which is still
attached. Therefore, the lead fault comparator will see a voltage nearly equal to the negative
supply rail if a fault occurs in leads I, II or III, but will see a voltage as little as -2 volts if one
of LA, RA or LL is detached in lead C.

+5V +7.5V VDC

REGULATOR POWER
-7.5 V
RA ISOLATION
LEAD SEL GND PGND
LA LEAD FAULT +5V T TRACKING
ECG PRE AMP E TRIGGER
RL REGULATOR
DAUGHTER BD. ECG FILTER
LL ESU NOISE
ECGRM
C
ECG RE SET
A/D
CONVERTER
RESP
RRA RESP. OFF/O N
DATA OUT
PRE AMP HI Z
RLA
I/O CLOCK
115KHZ
ADDRESS
SELECT
RESP FLT
RESP RESET
+ OUT P1
- OUT P1 PRESSURE PRESS 1
PRE AMP P TRIGGER DATA IN DATA IN
+ IN
+5T
- IN
SIGNAL DATA ISOLATION

LEAD SELECT DATA OUT DATA OUT
SHIELD ECG RESET MICRO
ECG FILTER CONTROLLER
+ OUT P2 PRESSURE PRESS 2 LEAD FAULT RESET RESET
PRE AMP E TRIGGER
- OUT P2 OFF/ON
HI Z
P TRIGGER
T FLAG +5V
TIP TE MP TA
TEMP. T FLAG TB DGND
RING PRE AMP TA TC
TB TD
SLEEVE TC RESP FLT
TD ES U NOISE
115KHZ
RESP RESET
FIGURE 2-6 Overall Front End Block Diagram
ECG Pre-Amp
5
ESIS ESIS 4
Stage 2 Stage 3 Wilson Lead CR6
RA U1 Select
LA Network
U1 Mux CR5
LL U1
U2,U3 10
C U1
14
RL 16
Lead Buffers
SHIELD 1
Drive
8
Mux
U4
FIGURE 2-7 ECG Pre-Amp Block Diagram

Respiration
In Fig. 2-8, the connection to the patient is made through two leads marked RRA and RLA,
which ultimately become RA and LA on the body. A 114 KHz, 500 microamp RMS sinewave
is applied to the patient through the electrodes (which are positioned more to either side of
the chest than usual while doing a 3 lead ECG). The signal is applied to the electrodes
through a small isolation Transformer (T2) and the respiration signal is reflected back through
this same transformer. The purpose of the isolation is not for patient safety (that barrier is
elsewhere) but to eliminate other stray return paths for the signal and thus an error in the
signal.
RRA
RLA
Respiration
Pre Amp
Transformer T2
Bandpass Filter DC Amplifier AC Amplifier
Squarewave Rectifier
to
Sinewave U11 U13 U14 Resp
Generator
U18,U11
Patient Drive
Amplifier
114 kHz
Capacitor Resp
RESPEN* Reset Reset
U18
Comparator
U13 HI Z
Hi-Impedance
Indicator
FIGURE 2-8 Respiration Preamp Block Diagram
Generation of the patient drive starts at U18, which chops between a 5 volt reference and
ground to produce a 114 kHz square wave of a precision amplitude with respect to the
analog to digital converter (i.e., the same 5 volt reference is used for the A/D reference).
The respiration drive can be disabled by a logic high on the RESPEN* signal, which inhibits
U18. A second order Bandpass Filter, U11 and associated parts, transforms this square
wave into an approximation of a sinewave, approximately 4 volts peak to peak, centered on
0 volts. This sinewave drives the inverting input of U11, the Patient Drive Amplifier, through
R91. Thus, the current in Transformer T2’s primary (being in the feedback loop of U11) is
constrained to be the sinewave voltage divided by the value of R75, resulting in
approximately 500 microamperes. The secondary signal, which is the same as the primary,
because the transformer has a 1:1 winding ratio, is applied to the electrodes via resistors
and capacitors on the Interconnect board. The capacitors behave as a short to the 114 kHz
sinewave carrier, but as a very high (greater than 5 megohms at 10 Hz) shunting impedance
to the ECG electrodes so as not to attenuate the ECG signal.

The patient’s resistance variation due to respiration (.05 ohm to 5 ohms, out of 50 ohms to
2K W unmodulated impedance) reflects back through the transformer and results in a
voltage variation at Patient Drive Amplifier U11 pin 7 of approximately 69 microvolts to 6.9
millivolts. This modulated voltage sits on a carrier of approximately 3 to 8 volts. The above
modulation and carrier values assume zero cable capacitance shunting the patient
impedance. For typical cable capacitances (325 pf for 10’ patient cable) and reasonable
patient impedances of less than 1 kilohm, this attenuation is not appreciable, nor is any noise
created by moving the patient leads. Even for the smallest of modulated signals (about 70
microvolts), the carrier amplitude at the output of U11 is sufficient (about 3 volts p-p, centered
around 0 volts) to forward bias rectifier CR35. After halfwave rectification, the signal
amplitude is roughly 700 microvolts per ohm. The carrier portion of the signal ranges from
approx. +0.9 to +3.4 volts (which is half the voltage less a .6 volt diode drop). Differenced
with +2.5 volts and amplified by DC Amplifier U13, this yields a carrier range of -2.2 to
+4.2 volts at U13 pin 1. Increased cable capacitance would serve to make these values
more negative. With as much as a 500 pf cable capacitance (325pf +/-25% is more
realistic), the largest patient impedance of 2000 ohms will receive the greatest attenuation
resulting in a carrier at U13 pin 1 of -1.5 volts. At the other extreme, a patient impedance of
200 ohms, the same cable yields approximately -2.2 volts.
The signal from U13 pin 1 is AC coupled at approximately 0.1 Hz by C5 and R176, then
amplified with a gain of 580 by AC Amplifier U44 for a net gain of 1 volt per ohm (at zero
cable capacitance). This amplifier rolls off at about 4 Hz. Combined with the high frequency
cutoff of the demodulator and the AC Amplifier, this results in an overall low pass corner
frequency cutoff of about 3Hz.
Comparator U13 compares the voltage at U13 pin 1 with a 2.3 volt reference in order to
generate a “ Hi Impedance ” or “lead off” indicator signal, causing a Capacitor Reset to be
initiated by an analog switch in U18 and R103. This speeds up the signal’s return to within
the active range of the opamps. After being clipped to 5 volt level by CR41, the indicator
signal is delayed by resistor R184 and C11 just long enough for C5 to sample and capture
the proper voltage following restoration of an open lead. The lead off threshold is set just
beyond the maximum patient impedance, or approximately 2200 ohms at the leads
(assuming zero cable capacitance; greater with shunting capacitance).
The impedances of capacitors on the Interconnect Board connected to the RRA and RLA
wires, along with the clamping of CR32, CR38, and shield in T2, protect U11 from
defibrillator discharges.

Pressure
The Pressure Preamplifier (Figure 2-9 on page 2-17) is comprised of two channels of
identical Differential Amplifiers. The P1 channel amp is comprised of U20 and associated
components. The amp has a gain of 195 at DC, a bandwidth of approximately 15 Hz (the -
3 dB point), an output biased of 1.8 volts. This biasing is necessary to allow for transducers
that have positive or negative offsets as large as 120 millimeters of mercury (mmHg). Full
scale output is limited to 300 mmHg positive pressure, relative to atmosphere, and is scaled
at 4.88 millivolts (one A/D lsb) per mmHg, assuming a transducer scale factor of 5
microvolts per volt excitation per mmHg.
Differential Amplifier
+ OUT P1
U20 P1
- OUT P1
+ IN +5 T Bandpass Filter Pulse Detect
- IN
U21 U21 P Trigger
Pressure
Pre Amp
Differential Amplifier
+ OUT P2
U20 P2
- OUT P2
FIGURE 2-9 Pressure Preamp Block Diagram
This amplifier will accept, as an input, a standard invasive pressure transducer which
appears as a resistive bridge, with each leg being approximately 350 ohms, excited using
+5 volts and ground. This excitation voltage is provided via the +IN and -IN wires, while the
transducer output is input to the amplifier via the +OUTP1 and -OUTP1 wires at
approximately a +2.5 volt common mode voltage. Sensor disconnect indication, a
permanent full scale output, is created by the input resistors R13 and R21 when no
transducer is attached.
The operation of the second channel, P2, is identical to the above description of P1 (with
different input and output labels), using U20 and associated components. The P1 and P2
signals are measured by the analog to digital converter, U21.

The P1 channel output is used for generating a systolic trigger, for heart rate measurement
purposes. The P1 pressure signal is fed through a Bandpass Filter, comprised of U21 and
associated components, to remove the mean pressure level and noise, and to set the
appropriate amplitude detection scaling. The signal is then measured by the Pulse Detect
comparator, U21, which has a minimum threshold of 189 mmHg, set by the hysteresis
created by R133 and R148. Its output, P-Trigger, is a variable duty cycle square wave whose
rise and fall is coincident with the systolic and diastolic portions of the pressure waveform.
This systolic trigger “logic” is detected by the microcontroller and communicated to the
Control Module.
Temperature
The temperature channel is designed to measure temperatures from 15°C to 45°C using
Yellow Springs series 400 or series 700 thermistor probes. The probes exhibit temperature/
resistance characteristics described by the relation 1/T = a+b(Ln R) + (Ln R)3 where T is
given in degrees Kelvin. The constants a, b and c are unique for each probe series. The
channel measures the probe resistance by a ratiometric method described below. The CPU
then determines the temperature by evaluating the given equation.
Sleeve
Temperature
R68
Pre Amp
Q3
TC
Q2 R66
TB
TA
Q1
Tip
Current Summing Voltage
Amplifier Amplifier
U8A U8B Temp
Q4,U9A TD
Programmable
Current Source
Comparator
Ring T flag
U9B
FIGURE 2-10 Temperature PreAmp Block Diagram

The voltage output of U48B is proportional to the resistance placed in the feedback loop of
U48A. By turning on one of the switches Q8, Q9, or Q10 the resistance selected will be
either the probe or one of the resistors, R2 or R3. These are precision resistors used as
standards for accurate determination of the probe resistance. Resistor R2 is used with probe
series 400. Its value, 3539 ohms 0.025% is equal to series 400 probe at 15ÉC (bottom of
measuring range). Similarly, R3 is used with probe series 700. The CPU “knows” which
probe is plugged in (explained later) and selects the appropriate standard resistor. Following
is the measuring sequence for probe series 400. The probe is selected, by signal TA and Q8,
resulting voltage Up4 at the output of U48B. The voltage is digitized by the 12 bit A/D
converter (U21) and stored by the CPU. Then the standard resistor R2 is measured by turning
Q8 off and enabling Q9 with TB, resulting in voltage Us4. The CPU then calculates the probe
resistance: Rp4 = R2 ! Up4/Us4. Assuming that the circuit gain and measuring current are
stable through the brief measuring period, accuracy of the probe resistance determination is
limited by the A/D conversion process. Using a 12 bit converter, accurate to ½ LSB, worst
case error in terms of temperature is 0.12°C.
Series 700 probes have two thermistors, Th1 and Th2. The first one is used to measure the
temperature, in the same way as described for series 400. The second thermistor is used to
determine which probe series is plugged in as follows: Op-amp U47B compares the voltage
on the ring terminal of the input jack with a threshold of 0.7 volts, from R193 and R177.
When a series 400 probe is plugged in, the ring is shorted to the sleeve contact, which in
turn is tied to the output of U48A. With the switches Q7, Q8 and Q9 off and Q10 on, the
ring voltage is about 1.2 volts and the output of U47B is high. When a series 700 probe is
connected, thermistor Th2, connected between the ring and the sleeve, forms a voltage
divider with R152 at the positive input of U47B. With the switches in the same state as
before, the ring voltage is 0.5 volt or lower and the output of the comparator is low. The
probe type information is used to select the correct set of constants for the temperature
calculation, correct standard resistor and for the selection of the probe measuring current.
The current is adjusted to approximately 330 microamps for series 400 and to 125
microamps for series 700, by means of switch Q7, activated by signal TD. This is done for
optimal utilization of the A/D dynamic range.
The probe jack, located off board, is arranged to short the tip and sleeve terminals when the
probe is unplugged. This provides a zero A/D converter reading as an indication of sensor
disconnect. Primary ESD protection is in the form of a zener diode located at the jack.
Additional protection is achieved by the R106 and C92, as well as the 100 ohm damping
resistors on the gates of Q7-Q10. Because the probe cable capacitance is present at the
summing node of U48A, C7 is used, in conjunction with resistors R92 and R120, to provide
local AC feedback to isolate U48A from the capacitance and ensure stability.
Calibration of the circuit is performed by measuring the two precision resistors R2 and R3 for
equivalent temperature determination. R2 replaces the probe and R3 serves as the standard.
Resulting ratio is R2/R3 = 3539/9428 = 0.37537. Nominally this ratio corresponds to
37.48ÉC. Assuming worst case errors, this number will be 37.5, ±0.1°C.

VDC
Q9 T1 L1
+7.5I
Pulse
Width
Modulator VDC
U47 L2
Q8 -7.5I
PGND Regulator
+5D
+7.5I
U49 +5V
Non-isolated
Tracking Regulator
U50A +5T
U48
U50B +2.5v
Isolation Power Supply
FIGURE 2-11 Power Supply Block Diagram
Power Supply
The Frontend Module is essentially an electrically isolated data acquisition system. The only
portion of this module that is directly connected to the host system is the non-isolated part of
the optoisolators (U15, U17, and U18) used for communications, and the switch mode,
forward converter, isolated power supply.
The isolated power supply (Fig. 2-11) is built around a switch mode converter integrated
circuit, U11. This device outputs two pulse width modulated signals (at pins 11 and 14) to
drive the power transformer T1 with FETs Q1 and Q2. Each of the pulses occurs during its
own respective half cycle of one full period. The half cycle timing is set by R178 and C83.
The modulation of the FET drive pulses is executed by comparing the bulk power voltage
VDC, with a percentage (set by R138 and 179) of the reference voltage on U11 pin 16. In
short, the modulator outputs wide ( 83% of a half cycle) pulses for low VDC values, and
narrow (35% of each half cycle) pulses for high values of VDC. The range of VDC is
specified at 9 volts minimum to 18 volts maximum. The voltage being switched across the
primary of T1 (pins 1, 2, and 3) is transferred to the secondary windings (pins 4, 5, and 6),
and filtered to a DC voltage by components CR30,31,33,36, L1 and L2, and C169 and
C171. The isolated DC voltage will vary between approximately 7.1 volts and 9.3 volts,
depending on VDC and the secondary load current requirement.

This isolated voltage is used as is to supply the analog portion of the module. The digital
circuitry is provided with +5 volts (+5V) generated from the “+7.5" using a simple regulator,
U14. This voltage is also used to produce a +2.5v voltage, created by U13B, R19, and R34,
which is used as a reference throughout the module. The pressure transducer +5T excitation
voltage is generated by a tracking regulator, comprised of U13A, U12, and associated
parts. This voltage ”tracks" the +5v used as the reference voltage for the analog to digital
converter. As a result of doing this, variations of the reference and excitation voltage do not
impact the gain sensitivity (and therefore the measurement) of the pressure transducers,
because the conversion process of the analog to digital converter is linked ratiometrically to
it.
Isolated Microcontroller
For clarity, the isolated microcontroller block as well as the A/D converter and signal
isolation blocks, have been drawn together in the detailed block diagram of Fig. 10. This has
been done because of the close interaction of these blocks. The isolated microcontroller
block on the detailed block diagram consists of a 68HC05 device designated U22. This
device is entirely self-contained, requiring only power, clock and reset for operation. A
3.686 MHz clock is derived from crystal Y2, bias resistor R46, and loading capacitors C46
and C59, together with the internal oscillator circuit in U22. The internal processor clock is
actually this frequency divided by two. The crystal frequency is made available to other
devices on the board. The processor has an internal power-on reset circuit, although its
action is augmented by an external reset. The external reset signal is passed through the
isolation block. The microcontroller can drive its own reset input pin with an internal open-
drain device. This must be kept in mind when monitoring reset (pin 1 of U22). In this
application, the processor will attempt to drive the pin low when the internal reset circuit is
activated, which will occur for a brief time after power is applied. Internal detection of
certain failures can also cause the pin to be driven. However, the current software has these
detection mechanisms (COP and clock monitor) disabled.
The device has no external bus, but does feature four general purpose I/O ports. Of these,
port A is programmed as all outputs, and generates the temperature and ECG control lines.
Port B is set to all inputs, and samples the signals supplied by the level shift block. Port C is
set to six outputs and two inputs. The four uppermost bits control the respiration function.
The lower 2 bits are dedicated to the ADC interface. Because all of the on-chip peripherals
are enabled, none of the lines in port D are used for general purpose I/O. Four of these
lines, designated MISO, MOSI, SCK and SS comprise the synchronous serial interface
known as the SPI, which is used to communicate with the A/D converter. Two of the lines,
IRXD and ITXD, carry the serial data received from and transmitted to the isolation block.

Isolated
Microcontroller Data Acquisition Subsystem
Level
Shift Respflt
7
6 Resprst
E Trigger 0 5 Respen*
P Trigger U36 1 U38 Input
A/D Converter
Lead Fault 2 Networks
Hi-Z 3
Port C
Port B
T Flag 4 ECGVA
ESU Noise 5 ECGII
6 Select ECGI/II/III
Analog Inputs
1 +5
7 0 I/O Clock +5/-7.5V TEST
2.5v Test
U39 Temp
SCK
Level Mux Press 2
MISO
Address Press 1
Shift MOSI Data
SS
Resp Mon
ARST U37 4 +7.5v Test
Port D
Filter 5
Lead Sel 0 7
Port A
Lead Sel 1 TXDA
6
Opto-Isolators
TDO U42
TD 3 Buffer
TC 2 Buffer
Q10,U36 RXDB
TB 1 RDI
U43
TA 0 Q11,Q13
RESET*
Reset U44
Divider
Buffer
U40 1.84MHz Q12 NON-ISOLATED
3.686 MHz 115 KHZ
FIGURE 2-12 Data Acquistion System Block Diagram
Port A Function
The outputs in port A are controlled by the software. The software supports a command
format in which groups of 4 bits can be changed. The lower four bits of port A contain all of
the temperature mode control lines. When a temperature mode control command is received
by the microcontroller, the four bits of data imbedded in this command are asserted on the
lower 4 bits of port A. These four signals are then used by the temperature block to control
analog switches. The upper 4 bits of port A support the ECG function. Upon receipt of an
ECG mode control command, the microcontroller asserts the 4 data bits contained in the
command on the upper 4 bits of port A. The lead select lines pass directly to the ECG block,
while the reset and filter lines are level-shifted, without inversion, by dual comparator U37
and associated pullup resistors, which provide a nominal rail-to-rail swing between the +7.5
and -7.5 volt supplies. The +2.5 volt supply, which is at the midpoint of the logic swing, is
used as the comparator’s reference. Diode D41 allows ORing of the reset signal originating
at the microcontroller with that generated by the ECG subsystem internally. Resistor R249
provides isolation between the comparator and the 2.5 volt supply.

Port B Function
The inputs in port B are read each time a data pocket is sent by the microcontroller, at a
nominal 286 Hz rate. Not all of the signals to be sampled are at proper CMOS logic levels.
Therefore, a level shift network is employed. This consists of a 47K resistor network RN2 and
CMOS inverting buffer U36. The series resistance of RN2 allows this protection network to
clip the input signals, which may swing between the 7.5 volt rails, to a level acceptable to
the buffer. The input protection network will then carry a current of about 150 A, which is
well below the level needed to induce latching. The output of the buffer is then a clean 0 to 5
volt swing.
The software inverts the data at port B, to compensate for the inversion of the level shifter. The
bits are then transmitted in raw form in a data byte known as STATUS within each packet.
The E-trig signal is additionally subject to special processing. The software detects a rising
edge of this signal and reports it in a separate bit in STATUS.
Port C Function
All bits in port C are configured as outputs. The upper three bits support control of the
respiration function. When the microcontroller receives a respiration mode command, the
upper three of the four data bits associated with the command are asserted on the upper
three lines of port C. These three lines control analog switches in the respiration circuit
providing the off/on, reset and filter control functions. The lower two lines of port C are used
as part of the A/D converter interface, and will be discussed in conjunction with the SPI.
Asynchronous Serial Port (SCI)

The TDO and RDI lines in port D provide the asynchronous serial communication interface
(SCI) between the front end and the rest of the monitor, via the isolation block. The
transmission format has a start bit, nine data bits, no parity, one stop bit, and a baud rate of
115.2K. The nine bit format is somewhat unique to Motorola products. It consists of eight
normal data bits, plus one extra bit sometimes referred to as the “address mark” bit. It was
originally intended to designate addressing information in multidrop configurations. In this
monitor, it is used as a means of marking the end of a packet. Each character thus contains a
total of 11 bits, and is transmitted in nominally 96 s. Packets sent from the microcontroller to
the CPU have a variable number of bytes, and consist of several data items followed by a
checksum and terminator. Each data item is internally identified as to its contents. Packets
received by the microcontroller always consist of two bytes, a single command byte
followed by a confirmation.

Aynchronous Serial Interface (SPI)

The synchronous serial port, known as the SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) is used to interface
the A/D converter. The SPI signals are provided in four of the lines in port D. The interface
consists of a shift register with both serial and parallel I/O. In operation, parallel data is first
written to the register, internally in the microcontroller. The generation of eight clock pulses
shifts this data out of the register and into an external peripheral. If this peripheral generates
data, it can be simultaneously shifted into the register. A parallel read of the register will then
provide the input data to the microcontroller. The A/D converter has a serial interface which
is nominally compatible, with the SPI. Note that the clock inputs of the SPI as well as the A/
D converter are connected to port C bit 0. The converter chip select is connected to port C bit
1. The SS line of the SPI, which enables operation when in the slave mode, is hardwired
active low. In operation, the software loads the data to be sent to the ADC (multiplexer
address) into the SPI register. The chip select line is then brought active low, and software
pulses port C bit 0 eight times, generating eight clocks. This transfers the data from the SPI to
the ADC, and loads the eight ADC msb’s into the SPI. The software then reads these bits
from the SPI, saves them, and generates 2 more clocks. The chip select line is then made
inactive, as the ADC has received its exact 10 clocks. Then, with the ADC disabled, six more
clocks are generated, so that the SPI receives a second complete set of eight. At this point,
the SPI contains the two msb’s from the ADC, as well as six undefined bits, which are
discarded.
A/D Converter
The data interface to the A/D converter has been described above, in conjunction with the
microcontroller SPI. The data output line of the A/D converter (U39) is provided with a pullup
resistor (R88) because it becomes tristated whenever the A/D chip select in inactive. In
addition to the digital signals required by the data interface, a clock signal is required for the
actual conversion process. This is obtained from CMOS counter U40, which divides the
microcontroller oscillator by 2, providing a clock of nominally 1.84 MHz. The counter also
provides the oscillator frequency divided by 32. This signal, at nominally 115 KHz, is used
by the respiration block for developing patient RF drive.
The analog inputs are selected by an internal multiplexer. Only eight of the eleven possible
channels are used, with the remainder being grounded. This configuration allows pin-
compatibility with a 12 bit converter IC. Five of the inputs monitor the patient ECG,
respiration, temperature, and the two pressures. The blocks supplying these signals can
swing beyond the 0 to +5 volt input range of the A/D converter, and must therefore be
limited to prevent malfunction or even destruction of the device. This is provided by a series
of diodes which are connected between each of these signals and both +5 and ground.
These diodes clip the signals to the safe levels. The signal sources have series resistors of
2.2K or greater, which satisfy this requirement.
The A/D converter is of the successive approximation charge redistribution type. It features
an internal capacitor ladder network which is charged from the signal source when the
multiplexer samples a signal.

The three remaining A/D converter inputs are used for self-test functions. Input 0 is connected
to a 2:1 ratio voltage divider (R10 and R11) which monitors the +7.5 volt supply, providing
a nominal 3.75 volt test point. The software monitors this input for a low supply condition (-
10%) only. The -7.5 volt rail is monitored with a divider, consisting of R8 and R9, connected
from the +5 volts to the -7.5 volt rail. This provides a nominal +.83 volt test point, which is
monitored by A/D converter input 7. The software is designed to sense a 10% drop in the -
7.5 volt rail. Both of these A/D converter inputs have diode protection, and are furnished
with small capacitors to filter any transients. The +2.5 volt supply is directly connected to
input 6, and is tested by the software for both high and low conditions. The A/D converter
also generates an internal, half-scale, test voltage, which is similarly monitored. A failure of
any of these supply voltage tests is reported in the STATUS field of the data packets. Because
extreme accuracy is not needed in these measurements, the software checks only the upper 8
data bits. Significant measurement uncertainties can result from the resistor tolerances,
converter input leakage current, input charge, and reference (+5 volt supply) tolerance.
These factors are taken into account in the setting of the limits, to prevent false reporting of
errors. Additionally, a supply fault must be detected by the software on two successive tests
before it is reported.
The A/D converter has a pipelined structure. Each time the SPI communicates with the
converter, it writes the multiplexer address for the next conversion to the converter, and reads
the result of the previous conversion. The next conversion starts as soon as the address is
written. The software then engages in other activities while waiting for the conversion to
finish. Thus, the data read from the A/D converter lags one sample behind the current
multiplexer address. The software takes this delay into account when formatting the data.
The A/D converter has two +5 volt and two ground connections. Although these eventually
connect to common points, they are run on separate traces to minimize noise and errors due
to trace impedance and interaction with other loads. Operating power for the A/D
converter, on pins 10 and 20, is supplied from the digital branch of the +5 volt rail, and
returned via the digital portion of the ground plane. Capacitor C 120 directly bypasses these
points. The reference voltage, at pins 14 and 13, is supplied from the analog branch of the
+5 volt rail and the analog ground plane half. The same reference is used excite the pressure
transducer bridge. The temperature function makes use of the ratio of two A/D converter
readings and is thus independent of the exact reference value.

Signal Data Isolation

The signal data isolation block provides communication across the patient isolation barrier.
Serial data originating at the microcontroller’s TDO pin is inverted by one section of U36. It
is then buffered, and inverted again, by transistor Q10 and R230, which operate as a
saturated switch. The collector circuit of Q10 includes the LED of optocoupler U42 and
current limiting resistor R229. The TDO pin idles at a logic high state, and has bursts of low
level pulses during actual data transmission, which occurs at a low duty cycle. The driver
configuration used results in the LED being “off” most of the time, conserving power. The
optocoupler, U42, provides the actual isolation. The optocoupler features a separate
photodiode and amplifier transistor, providing the good high frequency response required to
support the 115.2 K baud data rate. On the non-isolated side, the open-collector output of
U42, together with pullup resistor R233, produce a CMOS logic compatible signal. This
signal has the same polarity as that on the TDO pin, and is routed to the Control Module
CPU via J42 pin 3.
Serial data originating at the Control Module CPU is connected to J42 pin 4. Transistor Q13,
R235, and R238 are used to invert this data, which is then buffered and inverted again by
Q11. The collector circuit of Q11 contains the LED of optocoupler U43 and current limiting
resistor R234. Note that U43 is driven in the same way as U42, described above. On the
isolated side, the open collector output of U43, together with pullup resistor R231, produce a
CMOS compatible signal, which is connected to the RDI input of the microcontroller, U38.
The Control Module CPU can cause a reset of the front end microcontroller by asserting a
logic high level on J42 pin 5. Via R237, this signal will saturate Q12. The collector circuit of
Q12 contains the LED of optocoupler U14 and current limiting resistor R236. Thus, the
optocoupler is turned “on” when the reset signal is asserted. On the isolated side, the
optocoupler transistor then pulls the RESET pin of the microcontroller low, against pullup
resistor R232. When the Control Module CPU returns J42 pin 5 to a low level, the RESET pin
will go high and microcontroller operation will begin.
2.2.3 SpO2 Board

Overview
SpO2 board consists of analog and digital sections. Analog section provides all the patient
finger probe excitation and analog signal processing. Digital section controls the operation
of analog part of the board and shares its RAM with an external processor via ISA bus.
A pulsatile arterial saturated oxygen monitor detects the oxygenation level of the blood in the
body’s arterial circulation. It is used to continuously monitor the effectiveness of the
pulmonary system (lungs). Specifically the device, within limits, determines the fraction of
hemoglobin molecules carrying oxygen from the lungs to the body cells. Termed % SPO2,
this fraction is normally about 97 percent.

The device measures the relative attenuation of two specific wavelengths of light (red and
infrared) by the arterial blood. A sensor from the instrument contains two sets of LED’s to
illuminate a portion of the body (e.g., a fingertip), and a single photo-detector to sense the
amount of light which exits. The two sets of LED’s are alternately pulsed so that the circuitry
can discriminate the infrared light. Each time the heart pulses arterial blood into the finger,
the photo-detector’s signals return to their original level. The electronic instrumentation
processes only this changing portion of the photo-detector’s outputs.
The determination is based upon the assumption that hemoglobin and oxyhemoglobin are
the only two significant attenuators of light in the arterial blood. The device exploits the
difference in their optical attenuation characteristics. But since the detector’s signal is
sensitive to the combined attenuation of both molecules, the device must use two different
wavelengths to discriminate their individual contributions, and thus their relative
concentration.
ISA BUS
DIGITAL SECTION
J21 SRCE*
SRWR* SRAM
PARALLEL MA0..19 MA0..16
I/F U44
RD0..7
MA15
DA15..19
U31
MA0..2, 15..16
RSTDEV
MEMW
ADDRESS
CONTROL
MEMR
DATA
SYSCLK* ISA TSC

SYSCLK CLR* CLR* 63C09
63C09
IOCHRDY BUS HALT* HALT*

CPU
I/F FIRQ* FI RQ*
SR E
Q
SRAM
SROE*
U37
SRCE* SR U40
SRWR* SWR*
ISA-WR-OF *
ISA-RD-OF*
ISA-RD-CK*
MD0..7
E
RD0
Q
TSC SW R*
ED
SROE* SROE* OE*
CLOCK E 63C09 TO SRWR* DIR
Q
GEN TSC ANALOG
ED
SYSCLK* I/F
SYSCLK
Y1 U41
CLKSEQ
U46 U45
APOUT0 *
APOUT1*
APOUT2*
D0..7
INTERF*
COMP*
SEQUENCER
IR0, IR1, RED0, RED1
CONTROL ANALOG SECTION
IR DRIVE REGISTER
RUN*/CAL
RED DRIVE
U24 RUN/CAL* U17
DIAG
CHNLMUX
GAIN I CONTROL
GAIN II CONTROL
S/H
S1. .6
DAC D0.. 11
LED INTERF. INTERF* COMPARATOR

DAC COMP*
DRIVE DETECTOR
U20 U14
Q1, Q2 U2A
PROBE RUN/CAL* DIAG
J23 18 HZ
FRONT PANEL
4 3
2 5 CURRENT DEMULTIPLEXER REMULTIPLEXER PROGRAMABLE SUBTRACTION PROGRAMABLE SAMPLE
1 7 FILTER U8A GAIN II AND
6
TO GAIN I
HOLD
8
3 13 VOLTAGE
7 14 PREAMP U4 18 HZ
U10A U11A U11B U11B U13
U1A FILTER U8B
FIGURE 2-13 SpO2 Block Diagram

Analog Section
The operation of the analog section is controlled by the digital part of the board by:
• Supplying CLKSEQ clock signal to the sequencer.

• Latching signals D0..7, into control register with strobe signals APOUT0, APOUT1, and
APOUT3.
• Monitoring COMPOUT* and INTERF* signals.
Sequencer controls the front end of analog section. It provides RED DRV and IR DRV
signals for led drive circuit which in turn alternately drive red and infrared LED emitters in the
probe. A single photo-detector on the opposite side of the finger produces current pulses
proportional to the amount of light received. Sequencer also sets the gain of the current to
voltage pre-amp and controls the demultiplexer. Gain values for current to voltage pre-amp
are derived from control register signals IR0, IR1, RED0, and RED1. The fact that the
sequencer has synchronous control of led drive, gain of current to voltage pre-amp, and
demultiplexer makes it possible to set different current to voltage gain values for infrared and
red signals.
Control register provides data for the DAC and sets gain values of dc gain (DCG0, DCG1) ,
ac gain (ACG0, ACG1), and current to voltage pre-amp (IR0, IR1, RED0, RED1) stages.
Wide gain range gives the board enough flexibility to acquire signals from fingers spanning
a wide range of thicknesses or alternatively from other sites of the body such as ears, noses
or toes. It also controls the remultiplexer (CHNLMUX) and provides calibration signal
RUN/CAL, which is used by the sequencer to determine the operation mode, and test signal
DIAG, which supplies a fixed voltage source at demultiplexer input for circuit diagnostics.
Again because control register can synchronously control the remultiplexer and gain values
for ac and dc gain stages, different gain settings can be selected for red and infrared
signals.
Interference detector monitors the output of current to voltage preamp for voltages less than -
7.2 V in amplitude. This information is sent to the digital section through INTERF* signal.
The probe patient signal enters the board as current pulses in the range of .48 - 64 A. After
signal goes through current to voltage preamp stage it is separated by the demultiplexer
circuit, which steers each voltage pulse to one of two signals A and B. In addition, the circuit
sends a negatively amplified version of the signal level between LED pulses to both channels.
This residual signal is caused by ambient light on the photo-detector and offset voltages from
the preceding circuitry. The negative amplification sets-up cancellation of the extraneous
effect of the residual signal by the filter circuits that follow.
Signals A and B are then filtered identically by two parallel and matched filters. Filters also
reduce the effect of any noise source, which might interfere with the measurement, such as an
electro-surgical unit.
After going through filter blocks red and infrared signals and are alternately selected by the
remultiplexer for further processing. Next signal is amplified by the dc gain stage. Having
the ability to apply a different gain to the two components, this block functions as a coarse
equalization of the multiplexed signal.

An offset voltage, determined by the DAC, is then subtracted by the subtraction circuit. The
plethysmographic waveform consists of a small component varying along with the
physiological pulse, sitting on top of a larger pedestal. Subtraction circuit pulls off most of
this pedestal. Subtraction circuit also helps to maintain the resultant signal in the amplifier
linear region.
The residual multiplexed signal is once again processed through a microprocessor controlled
ac gain block. One of a few discrete gains is chosen for each of the two components, such
that the peak to peak size of the physiologically varying components is large enough to be
digitized with sufficient resolution.
After going through the ac gain stage the signal is sampled by sample and hold and held for
amplitude digitization. The digitization is performed under the microprocessor control of the
digital to analog converter. The DAC voltage is successively altered by the microprocessor
until it zones in on the signal being digitized. Comparator then compares signal and DAC
voltages and sends COMPOUT signal to the digital section.
The DAC thus performs a dual function. It is used in both the subtraction and the comparator
blocks. Every 1/240 of a second, the circuit’s control functions are flipped to process the
alternate component of the multiplexed signal. The multiplexer switches signals, the two
microprocessor controlled gains are changed, if necessary, and a new digital code is sent to
the DAC for use in the subtraction circuit. After settling to it’s new value, the signal at the
input of the comparator is frozen by sample and hold circuit. The DAC is now available to be
used in the digitization. At the next 1/240 second interval, all the control signals revert to the
previous values.
Digital Section
Digital section of the board performs two distinct functions: analog section control and ISA
bus interface.
First is based on 63C09 microprocessor. Analog section is accessed by writing data into
control register. Address decoding for generating control register strobes APOUT0,
APOUT1, and APOUT2 is done by 63C09 to analog interface. The same interface is also
responsible for monitoring status lines COMPOUT* and INTERF*. 63C09 can observe the
status of these lines by reading RD0 from the assigned memory location.
ISA bus interface allows an external processor to access SRAM and to halt and clear the
63C09 processor. Shared SRAM control is achieved by allowing 32Kx8 SRAM to be
accessed by 63C09 as well as an external processor through ISA Bus. Address bus is
shared by using 63C09 TSC signal. TSC (Tri-State Control) causes 63C09 address, data,
and R/W* buffers to assume a high-impedance state. When a valid ISA bus access cycle is
detected it is synchronized using ISA IOCHRDY signal. Because ISA access cycle is
synchronized to 63C09 clock, 63C09 always has SRAM access priority over ISA bus cycle.

ISA bus processor can control 63C09 operations by accessing CLR* (63C09 reset), HALT*
(6309 halt), and FIRQ* (63C09 fast interrupt request) signals. These signals are set by
writing to an assigned address location and reset by reading from the same location (See ).
Although hardware assures proper powerup conditions of these signals, they should still be
initialized by external processor software.
Control Register
Control Register consist of three 74C374 octal D flip flops (U17, U18, and U19). When
data is written into corresponding memory address space one of three strobe signals
(APOUT0, APOUT1, or APOUT3) is activated and data is latched to the output control
signals. Only 63C09 processor can access the control register. Table II, and Table III show
how data lines are mapped to the control register outputs.
STROBE NAME APOUT0
INPUT OUTPUT DESTINATION

D0 DIAG Demultiplexer
D1 RUN/CAL* Sequencer, Current to Voltage Preamp
D2 IR0 Sequencer (CV Preamp Intrared Gain)
D3 IR1 Sequencer (CV Preamp Intrared Gain)
D4 RED0 Sequencer (CV Preamp Red Gain)
D5 RED1 Sequencer (CV Preamp Red Gain)
D6 S/H Sample and Hold
D7 CHNLMUX Remultiplexer
STOBE NAME APOUT1

D0 BIT 12 (LSB) DAC Bit 0
D1 BIT 11 DAC Bit 1
D2 BIT 10 DAC Bit 1
D3 BIT 9 DAC Bit 1
D4 BIT 8 DAC Bit 1
D5 BIT 7 DAC Bit 1
D6 BIT 6 DAC Bit 1
D7 BIT 5 DAC Bit 1
STOBE NAME APOUT2

D0 BIT 4 DAC Bit 8
D1 BIT 3 DAC Bit 9
D2 BIT 2 DAC Bit 10
D3 BIT 1 DAC Bit 11
D4 ACG0 AC GAIN
D5 ACG1 AC GAIN

STOBE NAME APOUT2

D6 DCG0 DC GAIN
D7 DCG1 DC GAIN
Sequencer
The primary function of the sequencer is to synchronize the LED drive signals with those that
control the sequential demodulation of the photodetector’s amplified output.
The sequencer also directly controls the switches U3A, U3B, and U3C, which set the current
to voltage preamp gain. Since the gain required for the transmitted red light may differ from
that required for the transmitted infrared light, synchronization of the gain control switches
with the drive signals is also required.
Finally the last function of the sequencer is to cancel the residual signal and any low
frequency signal noise. The sequential demodulation process for each wave-length subtracts
from the detector’s signal when the LED is activated, the residual signal that exists when the
LED is not activated. This cancellation process works only for residual signals at frequencies
significantly lower than the drive frequencies of the LED’s (about 1.3 kHz). The interfering
signals it works against are primarily:
The sequencer is composed of an EPROM U24, a counter U23 and a latch U25. The eight
bits of the counter are fed to the eight least significant address bits of the EPROM. The
microprocessor provides the five most significant address bits trough the control register.
The five control signals are changed infrequently but the counter increments every 16 s at the
falling edge of the CLKSEQ clock. Thus the EPROM may be thought of as containing 32
(25) sequencer programs. The one chosen by the five microprocessor signals is cycled in a
continuous loop.
The program length would be constrained to be 256 steps if not for the counter reset logic
(U26A and U26D). Counter is reset whenever address bit 5 and red drive are both active.
Reset logic allows flexibility in the choice of cycle length.
The outputs of the EPROM are the control signals for the LED drivers (RED DRV and IR
DRV), sequential demodulation process in the preamp (S3, S4, S5, and S6), and the gain
setting for the current to voltage preamp (S1 and S2). They are latched by the rising edge of
the CLKSEQ clock signal for precise timing relationships.
LED Drive
LED Drive circuit interfaces TTL LED drive signals (IR DRV and RED DRV) to red and infrared
LEDs. It consists of two circuits: LED voltage source and LED driver switch.
LED voltage source provides voltage to anodes of both LEDs and acts as intermittent short
circuit protection device. Under normal operation Q1 is “ON” and Q4 is “OFF”. When a
short circuit condition occurs higher current will cause larger voltage drop across the resistor
R24. This will turn Q4 “ON” and Q1 “OFF”, cutting off the voltage supply to the sensor.

LED driver switch consists of two similar circuits one for each red and infrared LEDs. TTL
pulses are limited to 3.35V by combination of CR5/R29 (CR6/R30). This is done to assure
undeviating LED current. Signal is then AC coupled by C18 (C19) and is used to switch Q2
(Q1). Transorbs CR10 and CR11 are used to provide ESD protection.
Current to Voltage Preamp

The function of Current to voltage preamp is to convert current pulses from sensor’s
photodetector elements to voltage pulses. It is based on U1A and U2B. Preamp gain value
is selected by 63C09 processor through the control register and sequencer (). Signals S1
and S2 are used to control the switches U3A, U3B, and U3C, which change the U1A
feedback resistor value.
Demultiplexer
Under sequencer’s control, demultiplexer separates the signal into red and infrared
components and subtracts DC offset and low frequency noise from the signal. Switches U5A
and U5D route the direct and inverted output of current to voltage preamplifier into red
channel (A). Switches U5B and U5C perform the same function for infrared channel (B). U6
and U7 are configured as integrators, which average inverted and noninverted signals.
Matched 18 Hz Filters
Two identical low pass filters, based on U8 and U9, provide noise rejection for LED and
demultiplexer switching noise (f1.366 KHz) and ESU noise (f500 KHz). Each filter consists
of two equivalent dual pole low pass filters, which when cascaded, provide 80 db per
decade roll off with f018.9 Hz.
Remultiplexer
Remultiplexer is controlled by 63C09 processor by toggling the CHNLMUX signal (See ).
This signal regulates switches U10A and U10D, which steer either red or infrared signals
into Programmable Gain I stage.
Programmable Gain I (DC Gain)

Programmable Gain I block is also controlled by the 63C09 processor through the Control
Register. U11A is configured as noninvering amplifier with the gain selected by state of
signals DCG0 and DCG1 (See ). This stage amplifies both AC component of the signal and
it’s DC pedestal.
Subtraction and Programmable Gain II (AC Gain)

In this block U11B is configured as an inverting summing amplifier. Two inputs to the
amplifier are red/infrared signal and output of the Digital to Analog Converter. This
configuration allows the output signal of the DAC to be subtracted from the red/infrared
signal. Subtraction function is used to get rid of most of the signal’s DC pedestal. The circuit
then amplifies the resulting signal according to the gain set with signals ACG0 and ACG1.

Sample and Hold

Sample and Hold consists of U13. The purpose of this circuit is to hold the signal at a
constant level, while the signal digitization is in progress. Sample and Hold is controlled
using the signal S/H according to below. Hold capacitor C35 is selected to provide
acquisition time 20 sec and droop rate 3mV/sec.
Comparator
Comparator is based on U14. It compares the signal held by sample and hold to the output
of the DAC. Output of the Comparator is a signal COMPOUT* (See). 63C09 processor
writes a value into the DAC and then checks the status of this signal. The procedure is
repeated until signal is digitized with the acceptable resolution.
Digital to Analog Converter (DAC)

Digital to Analog Converter consists of U20 and U21. 63C09 processor can access 12
digital inputs by writing into the control register. The analog output signal is connected to
input of sample and hold and subtraction input of Programmable Gain II block.
Interference Detector
Interference Detector monitors the output of Current to Voltage Preamp. U2A configured as a
comparator, which detects voltage levels more negative than -7.2 V. When this level is
detected INTERF* line goes “low”. 63C09 CPU monitors this line to detect when Current to
Voltage Preamp is saturated.
Clock Generator
Clock Generator consists of 11.0592 MHz crystal oscillator Y1 and five D flip-flops U42,
U43, and U47. 11.0592 MHz OSC clock is divided in half by U47A, which outputs two
complementary clock signals: SYSCLK and SYSCLK*. These two clocks are used as a
baseline for digital section timing.
Parallel Interface
Parallel Interface consists of input buffers U31, U32, U33, and U34, output buffer/register
U35, and Q6. It’s function is to buffer the signals to/from ISA bus connector J1. Tri-state
signals of ISA address buffers U31 and U32 are controlled by the signal SROE, data input
buffer U34 is enabled by ISA-WR-OE*, and data output buffer/register is enabled by ISA-RD-
OE* and clocked by ISA-RD-CK*. All of these signals are generated by ISA Bus Interface.
ISA Bus Interface

ISA Bus Interface performs several distinct functions:
• ISA Bus Address Decoder

Address decoder section of ISA Bus Interface generates SRAM control signals (SRCE* and
SRWR*) and 63C09 processor signals HALT*, CLR*, and FIRQ*. SRAM signals are derived
from inputs SA16 through SA19 according to timing relationship described later in the
document. 63C09 signals are asynchronously set (disabled) when a valid write cycle is
detected and reset (enabled) during the read cycle.

• CLKSEQ Counter
CLKSEQ signal is used by the Sequencer. To generate this signal E clock divided by 22,
which produces CLKSEQ frequency of 62.836 KHz. Signals BIT0, BIT1, BIT2, and BIT3 are
used internally for the counter.
• ISA Access Timing Control

This section is based on U37 PLD. It is responsible address and data bus arbitration and
SRAM signal timing. In order to understand system timing, it is necessary to know how
63C09 TSC signal works. TSC (Tri-State Control), when enabled, causes 63C09 address,
data, and R/W buffers to assume high impedance state. When TSC is enabled these signals
are tri-stated after the next falling edge of E clock (See and ). 63C09 signals resume valid
levels after TSC has been disabled.
When a valid ISA access occurs (MEMW* or MEMR* active during a valid address)
IOCHRDY signal is asynchronously disabled. Access is then synchronized to system clock
and, when busses are available, ISA address buffers are enabled (using signal SROE).
SRAM (SRCE* and SROE*) and data bus buffer (ISA-RD-OE*, ISA-RD-CK*, and ISA-WR-
OE*) control signals are generated next. Finally IOCHRDY is enabled, completing ISA
access cycle.
63C09 to Analog Interface

This section is based on U41 PLD. It is responsible for generating APOUT0* through
APOUT2* Control Register strobes and monitoring the status of COMPOUT* and INTERF*
signals according to the 63C09 memory map (see ). It also generates the ISA IRQ5 signal,
which is always disabled. It is pulled up on CPU board and is used to detect whether SPO2
board is present.
Static RAM
32 K x 8 Static RAM is shared by 63C09 and external processors. Software code for 63C09
processor is downloaded into SRAM via ISA bus. Static RAM is then used by 63C09
processor to fetch instructions, store data, and communicate with the external processor.
63C09 CPU
Main function of 63C09 CPU is supervision of analog signal processing and digitization.
This is accomplished by manipulating gains of C/V, AC, and DC amplification blocks and by
controlling Sequencer, DAC, Remultiplexer, and Sample and Hold sections, while monitoring
COMPOUT* and INTERF* outputs. Control of the blocks mentioned above is achieved
through Control Register.

2.2.3.1 Masimo/Nellcor SpO2 Interface Board

Overview
The Passport Masimo/Nellcor SPO2 Interface Module, (0670-00-0665-01= Masimo, -02 =
Nellcor) or PM/NIM, provides the electrical interface between the Passport monitor and a
Masimo or Nellcor OEM Pulse Oximetry Module. The PM/NIM provides both buffered data
communications as well as power supplies for the Masimo or Nellcor Module.
FIGURE 2-14 Masimo/Nellcor SpO2 Interface Module Block Diagram
An overall block diagram of the PM/NIM is shown above. Bus interface logic, consisting of
a programmable logic device, an octal register, and an octal buffer, connects to the
Passport’s pseudo-ISA bus. This bus is shared with the CO2 module. Therefore, bus resources
have been allocated to avoid conflicts. This interface logic implements two read-write
registers, one for data and the other for control or status. A 68HC705 microcontroller
operates as an intelligent, buffered UART. The serial port of the microcontroller provides the
data interface to the SpO2 Module. All microcontroller data and control lines interfaced to
the SpO2 Module are opto isolated. Power to the SpO2 Module is isolated by a DC-DC
converter module with its input coming directly from the Line/Battery Supply Module.
The SpO2 Modules communicate serially at 9600 baud. A microcontroller is used as a

“smart” UART. A microcontroller can be programmed to understand either the Masimo
protocol or the Nellcor protocol, and can thus buffer the data in an intelligent manner.

When serial data is received from the Oximeter Modules, the microcontroller buffers the data
until a complete packet has been received. The packet is then validated by means of a
checksum. If valid, the microcontroller makes the first byte available to the bus interface
logic, and interrupts the Passport CPU. The Passport responds by reading the first byte. A
flag indicating the availability of data (first and subsequent bytes) is provided in the status
register. By polling this flag bit in a tight loop, the CPU is able to read the subsequent bytes.
The CPU is able to identify the packet’s byte count based on the first byte read, and therefore
knows how many additional bytes to read by polling.
A similar procedure is used to transmit serial data. The CPU polls a busy flag in the status
register. When this flag is clear, one byte of data is written to the PM/NIM. The busy flag
becomes immediately set. As soon as the microcontroller accepts and buffers this data, the
busy flag is cleared by the microcontroller, so that the CPU can write the next byte. This
process continues until an entire packet has been written. When an entire packet has been
written, the PM/NIM validates the packet by means of the checksum, and proceeds to
serially transmit it to the SpO2 Module.
It is possible to assert or remove reset to the microcontroller by writing to the control register.
Whenever the ISA bus signal RESETDRV is active, the microcontroller reset will be asserted,
and will remain asserted after RESETDRV is no longer active. Internal power-on-reset logic in
the EPLD asserts reset in a similar way. . As the microcontroller passes from the reset to the
active state, it activates the SpO2 Module reset line and enters a data echo mode. Only
after receiving a command from the host will it exit the echo mode and release the SpO2
Module reset. This insures a coordinated start-up of the PM/NIM and SpO2 Module.
Read-Write Logic
The figure below shows the portion of the EPLD, U4, which provides the read and write logic.
The four most significant ISA address lines, SA16..SA19, are decoded. Two ports are
needed, one for control and one for data. The selected port addresses are at ISA 80000
hex for data and ISA 90000 hex for control/status. These correspond to 900000 hex and
920000 hex, respectively, in the Passport CPU address space. The address assignments are
unique to allow the Passport to easily determine on bootup which modules are connected to
the ISA bus. The Passport software accomplishes this by attempting to address the module.
If it is not present, a bus exception occurs indicating the absence of a working PM/NIM.
When an OEM SpO2 module is used in the Passport a Software command is used to
determine whether a Masimo SpO2 Module or Nellcor SpO2 Module is present.
When a write is made to the status port address, the inverted state of D0 is latched in flip-flop
F/F 3 inside the EPLD, U4 (Figure 2-14 on page 2-35).

FIGURE 2-15 EPLD, U4 Block Diagram
The output of F/F 3 drives the microcontroller’s active-low reset line. Thus, if D0 is high
during this write, the microcontroller will be placed in reset. Conversely, if zero is written,
microcontroller operation will begin. This flip-flop is also cleared by RESETDRV as well as the
EPLD’s internal power-on reset logic. Thus, at power-up, the microcontroller will be held reset
until zero is written to the status port, allowing an orderly start-up. The RESETDRV signal is
filtered by R3 and C11 to minimize the possibility of false triggering due to ESD events.
When a write is made to the data port, a decoded write pulse (CK/IRQ) clocks U2, latching
the data from the bus. This same pulse also interrupts the micro-controller (U1), telling it that
new data has arrived. Also, flip-flop F/F 1 inside U4 becomes set (see figure on previous
page). The Q output of F/F 1 can be read on data bus line D1 when a read is made to the
status port address. When the microcontroller responds to the interrupt, it clears F/F 1 by
pulsing CACK* low. Thus, bit D1 at the status address acts as a “busy” flag, which becomes
set immediately after data is written, and is cleared when the microcontroller has assimilated
the data.
When the microcontroller has data to be transferred to the ISA host, it presents the data via
port A to the tristate buffer U3. It then pulses the line STRB* low, setting F/F 2 in U4. The Q
output of this flip-flop can be read in bit position D0 of the status port. Thus, the ISA host can
poll to determine when data is available. A 1K resistor, R2, limits the current when the CO2
module drives the line high.

When the host polls the D0 bit and finds it active, it then reads the PM/NIM data address.
The EPLD decodes this into a read pulse (OE*) which enables the tristate buffer, U3, driving
the data on the bus. This action also clears F/F 2, so that IRQ 5 (were it enabled), as well as
the data available bit in the status port, are immediately dropped. The data available flag is
also available to the microcontroller as BFULL, which is connected to port C. After the
microcontroller asserts new data, it waits for the BFULL line to become low, indicating that the
host has accepted the data, before asserting the next byte.
IOCHRDY Logic
The pseudo-ISA bus in the Passport differs from a true ISA configuration in the implementation
of IOCHRDY. In the Passport, a rising edge must appear on IOCHRDY while SMEMR* or
SMEMW* is active in order to complete the bus cycle. A steady high level is not sufficient.
The EPLD contains the logic shown in figure below for generation of IOCHRDY.
SA16 DECODER
SA17
SA18 BOARD SELECTED
SA19
SMEMR* F/F 4 F/F 5

SMEMW*
D Q D Q IOCHRDY
68HC05
CLOCK
FIGURE 2-16 IOCHRDY Logic Diagram
The address lines SA16..SA19 are decoded to generate a signal whenever either port (data
or control) on the board is selected. The D input of F/F 4 is high whenever a read or write
occurs and the board is selected. Before a bus cycle begins, the outputs of F/F 4 and F/F 5
are both low. These flip-flops are clocked by an on board crystal oscillator, at 3.6864 MHz.
Microcontroller
The microcontroller manages the flow of data between the host and the SpO2 Module. It
consists of a 68HC705 single chip microcontroller. It operates at an oscillator frequency of
3.6864 MHz, obtained from an on board crystal oscillator. The oscillator also provides
clocking for U4.
When it is brought out of reset, an internal self test is performed, which verifies the PROM
contents and RAM operation. During this self test period, lasting several ms, bit 4 of port C,
SRST*, is configured as an output and driven low. This asserts reset to the SpO2 Module.
The PM/NIM then enters a data echo mode.

Any data written to the PM/NIM data port is accepted by the microcontroller on port B.
Data to be sent to the host is asserted on port A. Communications with the SpO2 Module
take place by a CMOS level asynchronous serial link in J23. The parameters are 8 data
bits, even parity, one start bit, one stop bit, with the data having “true” polarity. The baud
rate is selectable under U1 software control as 9600 baud.
SCTS* on port C bit 5 is used to enable the Flash Programming voltage on the Interface
board. To allow the in-system programming for the MS-1 SpO2 Module this signal should be
set High. SCTS* on port C bit 5 also allows U1 to suspend transmissions from the Nellcor
Module.
Power Supplies
The Power for the OEM SpO2 module and Interface board is derived from a combination of
the system +5V and the Switch_Bulk_OUT supply. The isolated voltages for the OEM SpO2
board is derived from the Switch_Bulk_Out supply, this bypasses one DC/DC convertor and
its associated inefficiencies. The power consumption of the OEM SpO2 board and Interface
board should be similar to that of the Datascope SpO2 module.
The Masimo SpO2 module requires four isolated voltages: +5V, +/-15V, and +12V.
The Nellcor Module requires four isolated voltages; +5 volts, +/-15 volts and -6 to -15 volts.
The latter voltage is tied directly to the -15V supply on the PM/NIM by connecting J23 pin 6
and 7. This prevents the need for jumper JP4 on the Nellcor Module which would otherwise
accomplish the same task. Also, the additional power needed to drive this voltage with -15
volts versus -6 volts (if it were available) is negligible since the maximum current needed for it
is only 5.3mA.
The isolated +5 voltage is generated and isolated by DC-DC converter, VC1. The +/-15V is
derived from the isolated +5V convertor and is generated by a Boost Switching regulator. A
N-Channel Mosfet controls the +5V voltage level seen by the SpO2 board. The Gate of the
Mosfet is connected to the +15V Regulator and the +5V is connected to the Drain. This
allows the +/-15V source to always lead the +5V by at least +0.3V as required by the
Nellcor Module power supply sequencing requirements. An additional 5K ohm load was
added to the +15V to assure that the +/-15V switching regulator will stay in the continuous
mode when lightly loaded by the Nellcor module.
Additionally there is a +12V switched capacitor supply on board to supply the Flash
programming voltage and current required for in-system software updates for the Masimo
SpO2 module. The +12V supply derives its input from the isolated +5V supply. The +12V
supply is controlled by the SCTS* output of the micro-controller. This voltage should normally
be turned off to give added protection against the flash memory being overwritten, and to
eliminate load and noise from this supply. In order to disable this supply voltage, the SCTS*
line must be taken to a logic level Low.

Signal Isolation
The interface signals to and from the Oximeter Modules are isolated by five optocouplers,
U7 through U11. The low duty cycles of the signals holds the power requirements to
reasonable levels.
Schmitt trigger inverters are used at the optocoupler outputs due to the slow rise and fall times
of the couplers. This provides a clean output edge with no bouncing and reduces timing
skew. The U11 output requires no such Schmitt buffer due to debouncing hardware built into
the U1 microcontroller. Other inverters are used in the circuits to provide the necessary
inversions for proper signal polarity and to force the optocouplers normally off.
All of the U1 signals to and from the Nellcor Module to be normally high with the exception
of CTS*. This signal should be normally active low and only become inactive if Nellcor
Module data transmissions must be suspended.
2.2.4 CPU Board

Overview
The Passport CPU board is the central controller for the Passport transport monitor. The
functions that this module must support are: Front end and NIBP serial communications, LCD
control, Trend functions, Alarm functions, SpO2 parallel communications, Recorder interface,
Speaker, Real time clock, Keypad monitoring, RS-232 interface, D/A, and miscellaneous
diagnostics.
DIGITAL PERIPHERALS CPU 16-BIT DATASETTE DISPLAY CONTROLLER

(50) J61
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
MULTIPLEXER 11.0592MHz
BUFFER V6366
PARALLEL U15 OSC.
U8, U9, U10 DISPLAY
SaO2 CONTROLLER U38
MODULE +5V
U5
INTERFACE +15V
(64) -15V 16.5888MHz 32K X 8
J65 GND
Y1 STATIC
FRST VIDEO MEMORY
BIDIRECTIONAL
NRST U6
DATA BUFFERS
U7 68302 RCRST
MICRO- DSYNC
LCD
CONTROLER BLEN DATA BUFFERS LCD
U1 BUFFER U29, U30
RST* U16, U17
INVERTING
SERIAL BUFFERS
FRONTEND U31 SCC1
MODULE
ANALOG PERIPHERALS
FRST +5V +5V
INTERFACE
(10) +5V TIMER2 SERIAL +15V +15V
VSP
J64 GND 11-CHANNEL -15V -15V POWER
VDC 128K X 16 8-BIT VDC GND CONNECTOR
PGND A/D VSP SPEAKER +12V (16)
LOW POWER
CONVERTER +12V DRIVER PGND J67
SRAM US, U3
U32 U37 VDC
AIN
-23V
RS-232 BLEN
BUFFERS
SERIAL SCC2
U31
EXTERNAL WATCHDOG/
INTERFACE BATTERY TONE GENERATOR/
AIN 8-BIT
(16) MANAGER FILTER
ECG D/A CONVERTER
J66 U21 J34, U35
DSYNC U36
GND 3V LITHIUM BATTERY 23-BIT
ADDRESS VOLUME
BT1 TIMER2
BUS
RS-232 SERIAL SERIAL ECG OUTPUT

BUFFERS 64 X 16 RTC DEMULTIPLEXER FILTER/BUFFER
EEPROM ECG
SERIAL U31 U20 U34 U33
NIBP U4 32.768
MODULE PBRST* KHz
INTERFACE NRST* Y2
+12V LCD
(26) +5V
PGND VSP
J62 +15V 8-OUT 4-IN
-15V FRONT PANEL
PARALLEL KEYPAD
+12V INTERFACE
AR-42 RECORDER INTERFACE
GND (40)
INTERFACE U18, U19
+5V J68
U12, U13, U14 +5V
GND
16-BIT +12V
RCRST
DATA BUS -23V
FIGURE 2-17 CPU Board Block Diagram

CPU
Device U1 is an MC68302, which contains a 68000 core CPU and much of the peripherals
used in the Passport PCM board. The CPU contains a 24-bit address bus and a 16-bit data
bus. Along with Y1, and a resistor/capacitor network, U1 shall operate at a clock speed of
16.5888MHz. This clock rate is the highest clock rate that the MC68302 can operate while
being a multiple of the baud rate of 115.2Khz for Front End communications.
There are 4 programmable chip select/wait state control groups. They are listed in below.
CHIP SELECT GROUP DESCRIPTION WAIT STATES

CS0 ROM 1
CS1 NON-VOLATILE RAM 1
CS2 VIDEO RAM EXTERNAL SELECT
CS3 PERIPHERALS 3
Datasette
The Datasette provides program memory and data storage for the main CPU module in the
Passport.
The Datasette contains two 512Kx8 FLASH ROM ICs and two 128Kx8 Static RAM ICs. They
are accessed by the host CPU via two chip select lines; even (CSL*) and odd (CSH*). Both of
these chip select signals should be decoded for the first 4 megabyte of the host’s memory
address space. The host module must decode the A0 address line to generate the even and
odd chip selects. Further decoding is provided by U5. The address space which is allocated
by the host CPU module consists of 2x2 megabyte regions. The first region (000000-
0x1FFFFF) is allocated for ROM use. Only one megabyte of FLASH ROM is used, therefore
the ROM is mirrored in the first and second megabyte of the address space. The upper 2
megabyte region (0x200000-03FFFFF) can be subdivided into 8x256K or 4x512K regions.
The 256K of RAM on the Datasette is decoded to respond in the upper half of each of the
512K regions.
A jumper, J1 has been added to the module to allow for use in a commercial PROM
programmer. Most PROM programmers have the capability of obtaining manufacturer and
device IDs from the device. This is possible by applying a higher than normal voltage at the
input address pin, A9. This voltage may be alright for the FLASH ROMs on the Datasette, but
it will cause damage to the static RAMs on the Datasette. To prevent this possible damage
from occuring the jumper J1 was added. When J1 is installed the address signal A10 is
connected to the A9 input pin of the SRAMs. This is necessary when the Datasette is
operating inside a Passport. This jumper must be removed if the Datasette is to be used in a
PROM programmer.
The CPU module operating at 16.5888Mhz will necessitate the use of 1 wait state to access
SRAM and 0 wait states to access FLASH ROM.

Non-Volatile RAM
This memory made up of two 128Kx8 120 nsec. SRAMs, U2 and U3. The memories are
non-volatile due to the circuitry of Micromanager U21, Battery BT1, R17, and D4. The initial
start address of the RAMs is at 400000H and is mapped to a 2M byte space. Chip select
line 1 is used by the CPU, and will have a wait state of one cycle. Initially only 256K bytes
should be enabled.
Video RAM
The video memory consists of a 32Kx8 120 nsec. SRAM, that is initially mapped to 64K
bytes starting at 600000H. Only the lower byte of the video memory is used (8 bit bus
mode). The LCD is a 640x200 display that will be supported with the current memory size.
The memory can be expanded to a maximum of 128K bytes for larger size displays.
This memory is dual-ported to the CPU and the display controller. A variable number of wait
states will be inserted because of the asynchronous nature of the CPU accesses to video
memory. The SCT bit in Bank Address 23H, data bit D7 of the display controller should be
set to a 1 to minimize wait time.
Display Controller
The display controller, U5, is a Yamaha V6366. The clock is provided by U38, an
11.0592MHz oscillator. The LCD that is being used on the Passport project can
accommodate a 4-bit parallel data bus. Therefore, U5 is set up for 4-bit display operation.
At the clock rate, and parallel data transmission, a transaction will last for 361 nsecs., which
will meet the minimum LCD cycle time of 330 nsecs.
The display controller outputs, CSY, BLA*, BST, AC, LD.0 are used to drive a 640x200 LCD.
The display interface signals can be disabled by the LDEN* signal (port B bit 1, U1-109).
On power-up or reset, this bit is default to an input, which will automatically disable the
display, thus preventing unorganized or old data to be displayed.
Another signal BLEN* (port B bit 2, U1-110) is provided to disable the LCD bias voltage,
VEE. This signal should not be active (low) until the display controller has been initialized,
assuring proper timing signals for the LCD. This signal works similarly to the LDEN* signal,
in that on power-up or reset, the LCD is automatically disabled. Upon a power-up/reset
situation, the display controller should be initialized as soon as possible.
The display controller outputs VSY, HSY, and LD.4 are also connected to the external
interface connector , but are not used at this time.

Interrupt Controller
The interrupt controller is controlled by addresses 812H to 81CH within the 4K peripheral
control block. In addition to the 16 on-chip interrupt sources (on priority level 4), 3 external
interrupts are supported (on levels 7,6, and 1). The external interrupts should be
programmed to be dedicated level-triggered mode interrupts. Currently IRQ1* is used (for
the AR-42 Recorder error line); IRQ6* and IRQ7*, which is non-maskable, is not used. The
interrupt acknowledge and autovector mode feature is not used; the interrupt controller
should be programmed to provide the interrupt vector. The upper 3 vector bits can be
programmed to anything other than 000 and 001, such that the interrupts are mapped into
user interrupt vector space.
The external and internal interrupts can be summarized as follows:
PRIORITY INTERRUPT SOURCE DESCRIPTION

7 (Highest) IRQ7* (not used)
6 IRQ6* (not used)
5 Not available
4 PB11 interrupt (SpO2) (PAR)
PB10 interrupt (not used) (RTC)
SCC1 (Front end) (52/80)
SDMA Channels Bus Error (SERIAL DMA)
IDMA Channel
SCC2 (external RS-232) (53/54)
Timer 1 (system timer) (EECS)
SCC3 (NIBP RS-232)
PB9 interrupt (recorder sync) (RSYNC)
Timer 2 (audio frequency)
SCP (ADC channel)
Timer 3 (auxiliary timer)
SMC1 (not used)
SMC2 (not used)
PB8 interrupt (keypad) (KPS*)
Error
3 Not available
2 Not available
1 IRQ1* (recorder error)
8-bit D/A Converter

The 8-bit D/A converter, U36, is connected to the upper byte of the data bus. The address of
the D/A converter is set to 720000H for byte access. This mapping is such that it falls under
the chip select 3 timing. This device requires a 240 nsec. write pulse. This is the worst case
timing on chip select 3. With 3 wait states inserted, the pulse with respect to UDS* is 241
nsec., which is barely met.

The output of the 8-bit D/A converter is multiplexed to two outputs: the external analog output
and the volume control voltage. The multiplexing is controlled by two sample and hold
control signals: ANEN* and VLEN*, controlled by port A bits 4 and 5 of the CPU
respectively. A zero in those bits will sample the voltage from the D/A converter and a one
will hold that voltage at the sample and hold.
Analog Output
The external analog output is used to output the ECG waveform. It is biased to be a bipolar
signal (+/-5V) by U36, U33, and R16/C78 bias network. A 00H code would output -5V
and an FFH code would correspond to +5V. The update rate should be 286Hz. The 10-bit
ECG sample from the front end should be scaled down to 8-bits (truncating the lower order
two bits) and output directly to the D/A. In order for the voltage at U34-6 to reach the 8 bit
lsb accuracy of the D/A, the switch should be held closed for at least 20 usecs. No other
writes to the D/A should occur within 20 usecs. Since the ECG is updated at a rate of 286
Hz (3.5 ms), there should be no problem from this half of the converter.
An analog simulation of the circuitry shows that it shall meet the specification of .5 to 40 Hz
@ -3db.
Speaker Driver
The volume voltage is unipolar. A 00H code would be lowest volume (silence) and FFH
would be highest volume. The loudness perception is not necessarily linear and some trial
and error may be needed to yield the corresponding sound levels desired for presets.
The digital switch for the speaker driver circuitry shall be held closed for at least 912 usecs.
in order to get the accuracy as discussed earlier.
The operation of the sample and hold should be as follows:
• Turn off both sample and holds (ANEN* and VLEN* high)
• Output volume value to D/A converter
• Turn on volume S/H (VLEN* low)
• Wait at least 912 usec
• Turn off volume S/H (VLEN* high)
• Output ECG value to D/A converter
• Turn on analog output S/H (ANEN* low)
• Wait at least 20 usec until starting again (S/H can be left on)
The EXEN* signal, controlled by port B bit 0, controls whether an exponential decay exists
on the volume signal (0 to enable decay). This mode is used only in beeps where an
exponential decay is desired. In this mode, the volume signal is enabled only at the start of
the beep and the volume will be allowed to decay by not updating the sample and hold.

Keypad Interface
The keypad interface consists of a matrix of 8 output lines and four input lines. A maximum
of 32 keys can be supported with this arrangement. The 8 output lines, KD.0, are connected
to the upper byte of the data bus. Their address can be set to 740000H for byte access.
The four input lines, KI.0, are also connected to the upper byte of the data bus.
During the scanning of the keypad, a marching 0 is shifted through the 8 normally high
output lines. When a key on the active low output line is pressed, a corresponding 1 (note
inversion) on the normally low input lines would be generated. All key presses need to be
debounced in software.
The keypad interface can be programmed to function in an interrupt driven mode. The KPS*
signal (port B bit 8 line) is active when there are any keys pressed. This is generated by the
use of the PAL, U24. This bit can be programmed to generate an interrupt to the
microcontroller. The operation should be as follows:
• Set all keypad output lines to 0.

• Wait for KPS* to interrupt processor. (Respond before key released, dms)
• Debounce KPS*.
• Scan keypad output lines via marching 0 for key identification.
• Start key time-out for key held down mode.
• After time-out, reset all keypad output lines to 0, clear all pending interrupts and re-
enable KPS* interrupt. (If key is still pressed, another interrupt will be generated
immediately.)
Recorder Interface
The recorder is a General Scanning AR-42. Detailed programming information is contained
in the AR-42 user’s manual.
The RERR signal is recorder error. It is pulled up (RP3-5) and inverted by U11 to form RERR*.
This signal is then connected to U1-97, which is interrupt 1. Anytime RERR* is active, the
program should service the interrupt and determine what action to take. This can be an error
or this can determine if a recorder is not available. A read of the recorder status lines at
740000H will determine what case it is. The recorder interface is a 16-bit parallel interface
mapped to 760000H. In writing to the recorder, the lower byte contains the data. The lower
5 bits of the upper byte contains the address for combination commands. The recorder can
operate in either a header command/data mode when the address bits are all one’s, or a
combined command/data mode in which the address bits indicate which command is to be
performed. When possible, the combined commands should be used to minimize data
transfer.
In writing to the recorder, the processor should check the SYNC* and WRRDY* lines from
the recorder to make sure that the recorder is ready to accept data.
In reading from the recorder, the lower byte contains readback information from the
recorder.

There are two operation modes of the recorder: a trace mode and a graphics mode. In the
trace mode, the recorder prints at a fixed rate (e.g. 25mm/sec). And it will request data at its
own rate. If no data is supplied, the previous points will be repeated by the recorder.
Since the recorder needs data at a fairly high rate in trace mode, (up to 800 points per
second), the data rate will be controlled by the CPU. In other words, the CPU will only send
data to the recorder when it so chooses. The recorder will repeat points when it does not
receive data. In trace mode, the CPU should output data to the recorder at the front end
sampling rate: 286Hz.
Due to the relatively slow response time of the recorder (several microseconds), the IDMA
controller can be set up to control the writing of the recorder on a cycle steal basis. The
WRRDY* line is wired to the DREQ* line of the micro-controller. In other words, a DMA cycle
would be requested every time the recorder is ready to accept new data. When the
programmed number of transfers are complete, any further request from DREQ* would be
ignored. Note that the software must keep track of how much actual print data the recorder
can accept in text or graphics mode. This information is contained in the RSYNC* line (buffer
empty). In other words, the recorder interface software can only print on a line by line basis
via DMA.
The RCRST signal is used to reset the recorder. On power-up or reset, the signal would by
default put the recorder in a reset state.
Analog Front End Interface

The analog front end interface is an opto-isolated serial channel with data to and from the
front end processor. It currently runs at 115.2 K baud. This interface is connected to SCC1.
This is done to make the analog front end possess the highest priority interrupt. The CPU can
independently reset the front end processor using the FERST signal (port A bit 11). On power-
up or reset, the signal would by default put the front end processor in a reset state.
The analog front end is programmed to transfer a burst of analog data to the CPU at a
sampling rate of 286Hz. This rate is chosen to be a even multiple of the screen waveform
update rate (71.5 samples per second to give 25mm/sec). This sampling rate should be high
enough to capture the details of the ECG waveform.
External RS-232 Interface (optional)

Since the external RS-232 interface connects to external instruments, the communication
features, such as baud rate, parity, etc. are going to be programmable by the user. No CTS
and RTS signals are provided.
Optionally, an RS-485 interface can be installed. (A cut on the board is only necessary to
disconnect the RS-232 receive line.) The differential RS-485 lines are connected via a
bidirectional transceiver as a party line. The receiver is always enabled; the transmitter is
enabled by SEREN (port B pin 7). This line should normally be low to disable the transmitter.
This interface is connected to SCC2.

NIBP Module Interface

The NIBP module interface is also an RS-232 interface, currently running at 2400 baud,
eight data bits and no parity. Only the RxD and TxD data lines are used. This interface is
connected to SCC3. The CPU can independently reset the NIBP module using the NRST
signal (port A bit 7). On power-up or reset, the I/O port is default to input, causing the NRST
signal to be pulled up to reset the NIBP module. There is also a reset acknowledge signal
from the NIBP module that can be read from the recorder status register.
8-bit A/D Converter SCP Interface

The A/D converter is a 12 channel (one is used for internal diagnostic) 8-bit serial A/D
converter. It is connected to the SCP interface on the microcontroller. To initiate a conversion,
the CPU writes the A/D channel address to the upper bits of the SCP transmit buffer. When 8-
bit that is read back at the same time would contain the result of the previous A/D
conversion. The clock invert bit in the SCP control register needs to be set to 0 to obtain the
proper clock polarity.
The definition of the A/D channels are as follows:
CHANNEL # SIGNAL DESCRIPTION NOMINAL TOLERANCE

0 +5V 7FH
1 +15V 9CH
2 -15V 2FH
3 Speaker Voltage
4 Raw DC Voltage
5 +12V 7DH
6 DAC output voltage
7 External analog input
8 Reserved
9 Reserved
10 Reserved
11 ADC diagnostic voltage 7FH 7DH-83H
Most of the inputs are used for diagnostic purposes. In diagnostic mode, all the power supply
levels will be read and displayed. In run time, some of these voltages would also be checked
for proper operation (especially +/-15V). The run-time check should be very robust in that it
should not generate false alarms due to noise or other transients (e.g. ESD episodes). A wide
tolerance with probably some form of averaging would be performed.
The raw DC voltage can be checked for whether unit is running on battery (if the voltage is
greater than a certain threshold). When the unit is running on battery, the raw DC voltage
would indicate the battery voltage. A low battery condition exists when the voltage is below
a certain threshold. The proper levels and cutoffs are yet to be defined.
The DAC voltage input can be used to check the operation of the DAC. The ADC diagnostic
voltage can be used to check the operation of the ADC.
The external analog input signal is currently not used.

Timers
Timer 1 is designated as the system timer.
Timer 2 is used to generate the variable tone frequency to the audio circuit. The frequency
ranges from 500Hz to 1500Hz. The operation of the audio circuit should be that when no
tone is desired, timer 2 should be turned off (rather than just setting volume to be zero).
Timer 3 is used as an auxiliary timer.
External Watchdog Timer

An external watchdog timer is implemented with a DS1236, U21. The WDOG* signal is
used to strobe the watchdog (port B bit 3; normally high). The minimum watchdog timer
period is 100 ms. Thus the software needs to force a high to low transition on the WDOG*
line at least every 100 ms. The typical timeout is 400 ms and the maximum is 600 ms.
EEPROM Interface
A serial 1K bit EEPROM, U4, organized as 64 x 16 (ICT93C46) is connected to port A bits
14, 15 and port B bits 5 and 4. The interface signals are data in (EEDI), data out (EEDO),
clock (EESK), and chip select (EECS). All data clocking and shifting will be performed in
software. Consult the 93C46 data sheet for interface information.
RTC Interface
The RTC is a Dallas DS1202, U20. The RTC has a bidirectional data line (EEDI), a clock
(EESK), and a reset (RTC) line. The data line and clock line are shared with the EEPROM
interface (port A bit 14 and port B bit 5). An active high signal RTC (port B bit 10) is used to
enable the RTC for interface. Watch crystal, Y2, is a 32.768KHz clock that is connected to
inputs X1 and X2 of U20. This provides the necessary accuracy for time and date.
SpO2 Interface
A parallel interface similar to the ISA bus is implemented. The parallel interface is only 8 bits
wide. It is attached to the lower byte of the data bus. The 8-bit ISA address space is
1Mword addressable. Thus 2M bytes address space are needed to access this space. This
is mapped into address space starting at 800000H. Currently this parallel interface is only
used to access the SpO2 module. The SpO2 module appears as a block of shared memory
to the CPU. Port B, bit 11 is currently connected to the SpO2 module. Consult the SpO2
module documentation for interface information.
Miscellaneous Inputs and Outputs

Two signals are reserved to drive LED’s: LED0* and LED1* (port A bits 2 and 3). They are
active low. Currently only LED0* is used. It drives the alarm LED.
A defib sync output DSYNC (port A bit 11) is used to provide the external defib sync signal.
This signal should be normally high. The E trigger obtained from the analog front end should
be output to this signal as soon as possible.

2.2.5 Line Battery Board

Overview
The Line/Battery module provides four different power functions.
• Selects “raw” DC power from either an external regulated line supply of 17V, or from two
sealed 12V lead acid batteries. The order of selection is A) 17V external power, B) Two
12V batteries, C) One 12V battery.
• Generates +15V @ 250 mA, -15V @ 250 mA, and +5V @ 1.5A.
• Allows the charging of lead acid batteries to occur.
• Monitors “raw” DC battery power and turns off system when battery voltage drops below
10.5V.
• Provides the battery voltages, the charging voltages and the external +17V for the Battery
Charging LED function on the VGA/EL Panel Board. The Battery Charging LED function
compares the battery voltage to the charging voltage. When the batteries are charging,
no matter what position the power-on switch is in, the green LED is lit.
Once the batteries discharge to a level of approximately 11 volts (for more than 20
seconds), the unit is automatically shut OFF with enough hysteresis that the main power
switch must be cycled to re-initiate a turn-ON. The hysteresis is necessary because when the
system load is removed from the battery, the terminal voltage of the battery will float back up
to the voltage of a charged battery. After the cutoff circuit is activated, a load greater than
100K (@ 12 volts) remains on the battery to avoid excessive discharge and therefore
sulfation of the battery. The low battery cutoff comparator controls a small oscillator that
generates an isolated voltage. This voltage is capacitively coupled via a full wave
rectification circuit. This “floating” supply controls the gate of a very low ON resistance
power FET. This FET controls power to the switching supplies to generate system voltages.
0449 / 0626 BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM

J53 J55
SW BULK IN SW BULK IN
FPSW BULK SWITCH DRIVE
OSCILLATOR
SWITCH ON/OFF
SWITCH COMPARATOR OUT
Diode - OR
Q3
CR9
OSC/
+17 CHG J54
PUMP SW BULK OUT
U2B
BAT CHG A
CR11
BAT CHG B
20 SEC DELAY
J52
+17 C7
Power Module
BAT CHG A
BAT CHG B +5V
Battery A LOW
Battery B VOLTAGE +15V
J51 SHUT
DOWN -15V
Battery A
U1
Battery B GND
GND CV1
UNIPOINT
FIGURE 2-18 Line/Battery Block Diagram

Detail
The reader should refer to the Line/Battery block diagram , sub-circuit diagrams, and
complete circuit schematics while reading the following operation descriptions.
CR8
Vline
2.5A
17+-1V
F1
USD945
Vbattery
12V CR9
4A FPSW
F2
BAT CHARGER
R10 USD945
100K
CR10
4A
R13 USD945
100K
Vbattery
12V
FIGURE 2-19 Diode OR Circuit
Diode - “OR”
Immediately upon entering this module, the three voltage sources are fused. The 17V line
input is tied to fuse F1 which is rated for 2.5 A and is a slow-blow type fuse. Fuses F3 & F4
are 4 A fuses and are also slow-blow type fuses. The selected fuses are a common 5 X 20
mm size and are approved for both Domestic and International use.This block provides
power entry selection where the line voltage will always be selected before battery power is
selected. The “OR-ing” function is provided by diodes CR8-CR10. These Schottky diodes
are used because of their low forward drop. If the line voltage is available (+17V), CR8 will
forward conduct and CR9 and CR8 will be reversed biased. When line power is removed,
a smooth transition will be made to battery power through CR9 and CR10. The output from
the diode OR (system power) exits this module and returns through the main power switch.
When the system is off, diodes CR11 and CR12 allow a charging path from the battery
charger to each battery. Resistors R10 and R13 provide a path to ground, to bleed
accumulated charge from CR11 and CR12.

Low Voltage Shut Down Comparator / 20 Second Delay Circuit

When the battery drops to 11 volts (10.5 V after the USD945 diode drop and fuse), the low
current comparator will trip. Hysteresis on the comparator circuit will prevent the unit from
turning back ON until the supply reaches 15 V. The purpose of hysteresis is to prevent the
power from toggling ON and OFF when the battery is low and monitor functions are
enabled and disabled.
This circuit employs a low power OP-AMP U1(LM4250) as a voltage comparator. This OP-
AMP allows the designer to operate the amplifier at a unique operating point established by
R6. In this application, R6 biases the comparator at 1Ua. This equates to approximately
10Ua of supply current drain at 10V. Another low power device, the LT1004-1.2 (CR1) is a
zener diode used to develop a precision voltage reference at the negative terminal of the
comparator. This device is specified to “zener” at 1.2V with only 10Ua of current. The
10Ua zener current is provided by R3. A precision resistor divider consisting of R1, R2, and
R4 apply the appropriate voltage to the positive input terminal of the comparator. If the
supply voltage is greater than 10.5 V, the divider voltage will be greater than the reference,
and the output will jump towards the positive rail. When this occurs, CR2 will forward
conduct causing the combination of U2C and U2A to turn Q1 (2N7000) “ON” In turn, Q2
(2N7000) will be forced OFF to eliminate R4 from altering the divider circuit. This state is
the normal state for proper operation. However, if the supply dips below 10.5 V , the
following events happen.
The positive input to the comparator will be less than the reference. This will cause the
comparator output to jump towards the negative rail. When this occurs, CR2 will reverse
bias and the rail voltage on C7 will discharge through R12. If the supply does not rise above
10.5 V in a period of time greater than approximately 15 seconds (exponential decay of C7
and R12 to the trip point of U2C) Q1 2N7000 will turn OFF. Q2 the 2N7000 transistor will
now turn ON causing R4 to modify the resistor divider and force the divider input voltage to
fall further below the reference. The circuit will remain in this state until the power switch is
toggled or the supply voltage exceeds 15 V.
Turn On:
Capacitor C1 and R8 forces Q1 to turn “ON” and Q2 to turn “OFF” during power-up. This
is to insure that the hysteresis resistor R4 will not be connected during power up, to establish
the proper state for normal operation.

VIN
R8
R3 C1
R5 R1
3 7
6 CR2 8 11
LM4250 10
2 9 U2
U1 12
8 C7 R12 13
4 CD4093BE
R6
CR1
LT1004-1.2 20 Sec Delay
Q2
2N7000
Q1 COMPARATOR CIRCUIT
2N7000
FIGURE 2-20 Comparatory 20 Second Delay Circuit
Oscillator / Charge Pump Circuit

An oscillator is formed from the R11 - C4 combination around U2 (CD4093 Schmitt trigger
nand gate). The second input to the Nand gate from the comparator circuit provides an ON/
OFF switch to the oscillator. This oscillator, at a frequency of 200 KHz, is tied to another
Schmitt trigger to form complementary outputs. The two output signals are coupled to the
system power (FET) switch “ gate” through a pair of .01Uf capacitors (C5 and C6) and a
bridge rectifier (CR3-CR6) that converts ac voltage to dc. This circuit forms an approximate
voltage doubler. Therefore at a cutoff supply voltage of about 9.5V, this circuit will provide
9.5 volts at the gate of this FET. This FET needs a Gate to Source voltage of 5V at a Drain
current of 4A (the system only requires 1A), providing a safety factor of almost two.
CR7 clamps the input to U2 from going higher than the supply rail. This component offers
protection to the IC U2. R9 bleeds charge off of capacitors C5 and C6 to shut off the FET
when the oscillator is disabled. R14 limits current to the FET gate when the FET is initially
turned “ON”.

SWITCH
TP1
IRFZ40
VIN
IN914 CR7 Q3
.01UF
OSCILLATOR C5
.1UF TP2 12 R14

R11 C3
IN914
U2 12 14 CR3 CR6
1 3 4 C6
D 100K R9
C4 B .01UF
2 13 7 CR5
CD4093BE CR4
CHARGE PUMP
FIGURE 2-21 Oscillator/Charge Pump Circuit
Power Module
This module is a “self contained” 15W DC/DC converter that provides three regulated
outputs. This module will accept input voltages ranging from 9V DC to 18V DC and
produces outputs of 5V (@1.5A), 15V (@250ma) and -15V (@250ma).
1 GND +5
15 W -15
+17 POWER
MODULE COM
N/C +15
FIGURE 2-22 Power Module Diagram

2.2.6 +12 / -23.5 Volt Converter Board

J2 -12 VDC
FU S E F 1
J2 -13 B LE N
S W IT C H J3 -1
U3
J3- 2 F E T J4- 1- 4
FE T J2 - 14 -2 3.5V
C 5,6 sw itch Q3 REG
sw itch
is o Q3
g ate C 8 -10
d rive JP 4-
1 -4 RECT CR10
to IN P U T &
F ILT C 3,4
S ID E low
F IL T CR9
PANEL ba t C 1,2
cutoff RECT
U1 FE T F .B . J2 - 7,8 + 12 V
Q1 &
sw itch xfm r F IL T
+ 17V J3 -3
T1
B at B J1 -2 D IO D E
FUS ES PWM I I
F 1-3 OR U 1 & O .C .
B at A J1 -1 U 2 p rotect S EN S E S EN S E
T2 R 11
C R 8 -10 to
CPU BD
C V 1.1
C hg A J3- 5
J3 - 6 d io de s
C hg B
C V 1.3 J2- 14 J2- 9 + 15 V
+ 15 V
cr 11,12
C V 1.6 J2- 9,1 0 J2 - 1,2 -5V
+ 5V
LIN E /B A T T E R Y P C B C V 1.5 J2- 12 J2- 11 -15 V

-1 5V
0 6 70-00-04 49
+1 2/-23 .5V C O N VE R T E R P C B
06 70-00-045 0
FIGURE 2-23 Internal Power Supply Block Diagram
Detail
This flyback converter runs at 100 KHz and generates +12 volts (to power loads with large
step load changes) and -23.5 volts (a low current supply for the display). A 2843 PWM (U1)
drives a power fet (Q1) which switches the primary of the flyback transformer (T1). C9 and
C10 are low esr aluminum electrolytics which provide the instantaneous pulsitile power
required locally by the input of the converter. L1, L2 and C8 filter converter high frequency
(100 KHz) noise from the input power line. CR1,C11 and R10 snub energy stored in the
primary leakage inductance of T1. L5 and L6 are lossy ferites which damp high frequency
(10’s of MHz) oscillations in the primary switching loop. CR6 does not function in normal
coarse of operation of the converter, but clamps voltage spikes which might occur at the
drain of Q1 for short circuit conditions of the converter’s main output. Likewise, CR5 does not
function in the course of normal operation, but clamps any abnormal voltage spikes which
might couple thru Q1’s drain gate capacitance. CR4 decouples Q1’s gate from the
capacitance of CR5 so as not to slow down the switching time of the fet. R9 keeps the fet
turned off for times when U1-6 is not active. C18 and R8 provide a high speed, yet damped,
switching path between U1-6 and the gate of Q1. R3 and R4 form a feedback voltage
divider from the 12 volt output back to the inverting input (U1-2) of the error amp in the pwm.
R5, C14, and C13 provide compensation for the voltage feedback loop. C12 and C16
locally decouple Vcc and Vref of the pwm respectively. R6 and C15 are the timing
components for the internal oscillator of the pwm. T2 provides primary current mode
feedback to the pwm. The positive going current ramps are passed by CR2 and scaled by T2
and R7 to give a corresponding voltage waveform of roughly .12 volts / amp in the primary.
C17 filters leading edge spikes from the reconstructed current waveform due primarily to
discharge of Q1’s drain capacitance. CR3 allows enough voltage backswng to reset T2’s
core and yet clamps the voltage so as not to destroy Q1.

On the secondary side, CR9 and C1 and C2 rectify and filter the 12 volt output. Likewise
CR10 and C3 rectify and filter the -23.5 volt output. L3, L4 and C4 provide additional
filtering. R1 and C5 damp energy in the 12 volt secondary leakage inductance. Likewise R2
and C6 damp energy in the -23.5 volt secondary leakage inductance. U3, R12 and R13
make up a linear regulator for the -23.5 volt output (input to the regulator is typically about 3
volts higher than the output). Q3, R14, Q4, R16 and R15 are used to gate power into the
linear regulator via a 5 volt logic control signal.
R11 senses the current in the 12 volt secondary. R17,C19,R8,R19, and C20 filter this signal
prior to sense by comparitor U2B. The 5 volt reference of U1, R8 and R19 offset the input of
the comparitor such that it will trip at approx. 1.9 amps. CR8 and C21 add hystersis and a
“hiccup” time constant to the comparitor. U2A buffers the output of U2B prior to resetting the
soft start circuit R24 and C23. Q2 functions as a follower which buffers the soft start RC prior
to pulling down the output of the pwm error amp (U1-1).
2.2.7 Planar EL Panel Board

Overview
The panel board locates physically the visible indicators in reference to the front panel of the
monitor. It contains the LED driving circuits and buffers for the EL data lines. Due to its
location in the assembly, it provides convenient means for interconnection between the CPU
board, the EL panel, the DC/DC converter, the front panel keyboard, and the speaker.
Functional Description
The LEDs provide two indicating functions: power on - green, alarm on - red.
When activated, the alarm LED is flashing at a 3 Hz rate and 50% duty cycle. The speaker
produces all the required tones (i.e. heart rate beeps, alarm and alert tones). The alarm LED
control and the speaker signals are generated on the CPU board.
A 40 lead ribbon cable from the CPU brings the required voltages and logic signals for the
EL panel, the indicators and the keyboard. Four lines control and provide data for the EL
panel. Eight output and four input lines interconnect the 8 by 4 keyboard matrix. Detailed
description of the signals and power leads is given in Chapter 3 on page 3. The DC/DC
converter generates the power for the EL panel.

CPU Interface DC/DC Converter

J71-40 Pin J74-16 Pin
4 Control/Data Lines
EL Buffers EL C/D
+5V +5V
+12V +12V
GND P GND P
GND D
PWR ON
DO LED Drivers
ALARM
SPK
Keyboard
KI/KD J7 5 Interface
Speaker J72-12 Pin
12 Keyboard I/O Lines

Kl/KD
FIGURE 2-24 Planar EL Panel Board Block Diagram
EL Panel Circuits
The EL panel board circuit consists of signal through lines, data line buffers, and a LED drive
circuit. The display is a 30fL pixel, electroluminescent flat panel. It has a display matrix of
640 by 200 addressable pixels. The data lines and supply voltages are connected to the
EL’s DC/DC converter through J74. The supply voltages (+12V and +5V) come from the
microprocessor board via J71 on the panel board. The supply voltages are then converted
to the voltages used by the EL panel.
LED Indicator Circuits

The alarm indicator D1 is implemented by a high intensity red LED, HP type HLMP K101 or
equivalent. It is driven by the FET Q1, type 2N7000 which is controlled by the signal LED0
form the CPU board. Power On is indicated by the green LED HP type HLMP 1790 or
equivalent. It is driven directly from Vcc through the current limiting resistor R6.
Keyboard Interconnections
The four input lines K10 through K13 and the eight output lines KD0 through KD7 provide the
interconnection between the CPU board and the 8 by 4 keyboard matrix.
Speaker Interconnections
The speaker signals for alarm and beep tone are interconnected between the CPU board and
the loudspeaker.

2.2.8 CO2 Interface Module

The CO2 Interface Module, or CIM, provides the electrical interface between the Passport
monitor and the Novametrics CO2 Control Modules. Some CO2 Interface Modules support
Mainstream CO2 monitoring only while others support Sidestream and Mainstream CO2
monitoring. The CIM provides both buffered data communications as well as power supplies
for the Capnostat.
FIGURE 2-25 CO2 Interface Module Block Diagram
Overview
An overall block diagram of the CIM is shown in figure. Bus interface logic, consisting of a
programmable logic device, an octal register, and an octal buffer, connects to the Passport’s
pseudo-ISA bus. This bus is shared with the SpO2 module. Therefore, bus resources have
been allocated to avoid conflicts. This interface logic implements two read-write registers,
one for data and the other for control or status. A microcontroller, type 68HC705, operates
as an intelligent, highly buffered UART. The serial port of the microcontroller provides the
data interface to the Mainstream and Sidestream CO2 control modules. The Mainstream
CO2 requires 5 volt and dual 15 volt power for operation. The Sidestream CO2 requires 5
volt and dual 12 volt power supplies for operation. The 5 volt power is supplied directly from
the pseudo-ISA connector. However, the dual 15 volt and 12 volt requirements exceed the
capabilities of the Passport power converter, due to the presence of large pulsations in load
current. Therefore, the CIM contains an additional DC-DC converter to supply these
requirements from the bulk supply. A filter is used to assist in handling the pulsatile load
component. Due to even more stringent power supply requirements, the Sidestream CO2
control module requires an additional cleaner -12 volt supply (-12V capnostat on the block
diagram).

Microcontroller
The microcontroller manages the flow of data between the host and the Novametrics
Capnostat. It consists of a 68HC705 OTP single chip microcontroller. It operates at an
oscillator frequency of 3.6864 MHz, obtained from the network including crystal Y1, bias
resistor R1, and loading capacitors C1 and C2. The oscillator also provides clocking for U4.
When it is brought out of reset, an internal self test is performed, which verifies the PROM
contents and RAM operation. During this self test period, lasting several ms, bit 4 of port C is
configured as an output and driven low. This asserts reset to the Capnostat. At the conclusion
of the self test, this pin is reconfigured as an input, releasing the Capnostat reset, which is
designed for an open-collector interface. The start-up of the Capnostat and CIM are thus
synchronized.
Any data written to the CIM data port is accepted by the microcontroller on port B. Data to
be sent to the host is asserted on port A. Communications with the Capnostat take place by a
CMOS level asynchronous serial link in J92. The parameters are 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no
parity, and one stop bit, with the data having “true” polarity.
Two locations for optional jumper links are provided. They can be read on bits 6 and 7 of
port C. Jumper JP2 is reserved for future options. If JP1 is present a special test code is
invoked immediately after reset.
Power Converter
The CIM also supplies operating power to the Capnostat. Power connections are made via
J92 and J94. The +5 volts and digital ground obtained from the ISA bus are used to supply
logic power. The +5 rail used to power the Capnostat II through a dropping resistor R2, also
powers a heater in the Capnostat. The Capnostat II and III also requires dual 15 volt and 12
volt supplies respectively. However, it draws large transient currents from these rails, making
it undesirable to operate the Capnostat from the host’s 15 volt analog supplies. Therefore, the
CIM includes a commercial DC-DC converter module, VC1, which supplies these
requirements. The converter is powered from the raw bulk supply, obtained from J93.
Capacitor C10 reduces the reflected load transients. A converter capable of supplying the
peak Capnostat load currents would be quite large. For this reason, the converter is sized
closer to the average requirements, with a filter consisting of C9 and L2 providing smoothing
of these peaks. The Capnostat III also requires a -12V linear supply. This is derived from a -
12V regulator, U5.
Interface Connectors
The CIM is capable of interfacing to either a Capnostat II or III. Unfortunately, the 2 modules’
interface connector have different signal definitions. In order to prevent the possibility of the
wrong module being plugged into the CIM, 2 connectors were specified. One is for the
Capnostat II (J92) and one is for the Capnostat III (J94). They differ in that the Capnostat II
uses a 15 V supply and also has a separate 5V heater supply, while the Capnostat III uses a
dual 12V supplies.

2.2.9 NIBP Module: NIBP Pneumatic Board

0670-00-0447-XX, 0670-00-0605-xx (Linear Bleed) and Control
Board 0670-00-0375
FIGURE 2-26 NIBP Module Block Diagram
Overview
The NIBP module consists of two boards interconnected by a 20 pin cable: the control board
that contains most of the electronic circuitry ; and a pneumatic board that contains all the
pneumatic parts.
The CPU
The electronics are built around a 16 bit microcontroller (80C196). Built into the 80C196, in
an 8-channel 10-bit A/D converter, five 8-bit I/O ports, pulse width modulators, high-speed
inputs and outputs, an UART, a watchdog timer, and two 16-bit counter/timer.
An 11.0592MHz crystal is connected to the on-chip oscillator of the 80C196. This

frequency is chosen for accurate generation of standard baud rates (the on-chip UART has an
integral baud rate generator). An RC circuit, R1 and C1, resets the 80C196 on power-up.
The microcontroller can also be reset from an external, open-collector, active low reset signal
from Pin 8 of connecter J28.
The non-maskable interrupt, NMI, of the 80C196 is used to detect the overpressure (OVPR)
condition. A low to high transition on the OVPR signal will cause the microcontroller to sense
the overpressure condition. The OVPR signal is also connected to the high speed input bit 1
of the microcontroller for it to verify the overpressure condition.
The BUSWIDTH input is tied low since the eight bit data bus mode is used for external
memory access. The EA/ pin is tied low since external EPROM and static RAM are used for
program and data memory.

Address Decoder
The 80C196 address decoding is controlled by an EP320 EPLD (U7). Two different decoding
is possible, depending on the state of the signal PIB (OPT2). In the module mode, PIB is high.
In the module mode, (module mode = DSBP module used in any product other than
ACCUTORR 3/4) when the bank bit BANK, (U5 pin 33) is set high, the lower 32K bytes (0-
32K) are mapped to the on-board EPROM; the next 8K bytes (32K-40K) are mapped to non-
volatile RAM; the next 16K bytes (40K-56K) are not used; and the last 8K bytes (56K-64K)
are mapped to I/O, the only I/O available being the quad DAC, U9.
When the bank bit is set low, the lower 8K bytes (0K-8K) are still mapped to the on-board
EPROM; but the next 24K (8K-32K) bytes are mapped to nonvolatile RAM; the remaining
RAM and I/O space remain the same.
The address decoder EPLD, U7 also disables the pump when the overpressure condition
OVPR is set and buffers the reset signal to the 80C196 microcontroller.
The Pressure and Pulse Channel Amplifiers

The normal pressure transducer installed is a Sensym BP01. The output of the pressure
transducer is amplified by an instrumental amplifier implemented by U13A, C, and D. The
gain can be adjusted by trimpot VR1. The output is then buffered, low pass filtered and offset
adjusted by U13B and sent to the 80C196 A/D channel 7 at the pressure signal. The offset
is automatically corrected by adjusting the voltage level of OFFSET from the output channel 1
of the quad DAC U9. The gain of the amplifier is such that the output at U13 pin 7 is about
68.27mmHg/V.
The pulse channel signal is obtained by AC coupling and amplifying the pressure signal
(U13B-7). The pulse channel output can be reset by activating the CLEAR signal. This signal
can be activated when there is disturbance at the pulse output during pneumatic switch-overs
or severe motion artifacts. There are two gain switches controlled by U8A and U8B,
implementing four possible gain settings. The nominal gain settings for the pulse channel are
about 28, 56, 111, or 222. The default gain for adult mode is 28 and the default gain for
neonate mode is 111. The pulse signal is connected to the 80C196 A/D channel 5.
U11, U21B and U21C are not used at this time.
Reference voltages +5VR and -5VR are generating by amplifying a 2.5V reference generator
U12 by a factor of 2 and -2 respectively.
The sampling rate of the 80C196 A/D is about 250 Hz.

Pneumatic and Miscellaneous Control

The five MSB’s of I/O port 1 of the 80C196 are used to control the air valves. All the valves
are of the normally open type. In case of loss of power, the valves will open VALVE0 is the
dump valve, which lets air out of the cuff when the measurement is complete. VALVE1,
VALVE2, VALVE3, and an optional VALVE4 controls valves that have different orifice
openings. They are used to control the bleed rate of the pressure in the cuff during a
measurement. The valve control signals are buffered by U15, an ULN2003. U21D
implements an optional linear valve driver that is driven by channel A of U9, the AD7226
quad DAC. It is currently not used.
The pump is controlled by a pulse width modulated output from bit 1 of the high speed out
put section of the 80C196 (U5 pin 29). In adult mode, the pump runs at full speed; in
neonate mode, the pump is pulse width modulated to moderate the pump speed. The pump
signal is active high and the high speed outputs reset to a zero state. On power-up, the pump
is turned off.
An overpressure switch will close when the pressure in the cuff is 375 mmHg +/-5%. This will
set the latch implemented by U17A and U17B which cause the OVPR signal to go high. This,
in turn, will force VALVE 0 to open and the pump to stop. This condition can only be reset by
resetting the entire module. This is done by power-cycling the unit.
Pneumatic and Miscellaneous Control - Linear Bleed

The pneumatics board consists of two valves, and EMI filter and connector for a chassis
mounted pump, an overpressure transducer and detection scheme, and control logic to
operate the linear bleed system. The pump is used to inflate the cuff at the beginning of each
measurement cycle. Inflation pressure is regulated by software monitoring a pressure
transducer located on the companion control board. In the event of a runaway condition of
the pump, the patient size sensitive overpressure circuitry will completely open the linear
valve and close the dump valve, fully venting the cuff while at the same time blocking the
pump from further inflating the manifold. At the onset of the actual measurement phase, the
bleed valve (V2) opens to provide a gradual reduction of the cuff pressure. This is a so-called
proportional solenoid valve. Rather than providing only “on-off” control, it can be opened to
a variable degree, in proportion to the current flowing in the valve coil. Note that this valve is
a normally closed type; coil current must be supplied to cause the valve to open. A servo
control loop maintains the pressure bleed down rate at a nominal 6 mmHg per second,
regardless of the cuff pressure or system volume. During the measurement phase, the
pressure signal acquired by the transducer on the control board is processed to extract the
oscillometric blood pressure data. At the conclusion of the measurement phase, the dump
valve (V1) is opened, in addition to the bleed valve, to rapidly exhaust the residual cuff
pressure.
The pump control is provided by the MOTOR signal, generated on the companion control
board and routed to the pneumatic board through connector J30. Power to the motor is
supplied by means of a decoupling network L2/C12 from the host’s +12 volt bus. A common
mode coil, L1, provides further attenuation of the motor brush noise.

The dump valve is controlled by the DVEN signal. This signal drives MOSFET Q1, which
switches the valve coil voltage. This is a normally vented valve, meaning that air flow occurs
from the manifold to the atmosphere while blocking the pump when the coil is de-energized.
This corresponds to a logic low on the DVEN signal. Should an overpressure condition occur,
the valve defaults to the vented state. The DVEN signal is gated in U3 to protect against a
single fault failure which would cause the dump valve to remain in the energized (non-vented)
state. In order for the dump valve to be energized, two dump valve enable signals must
agree. One signal is generated by the microprocessor on the companion control board, and
the other from microcontroller U1 on the pneumatics board.
The overpressure circuitry identifies two separate patient types; adult and neonatal. The
neonatal mode is inferred from the existing conditions during pump-up. If the motor is running
and a valve is open, then the neonatal mode is identified and NEO is set low by U1. The
over pressure comparator in U6 compares the output of the overpressure transducer with the
output of a voltage divider. If the pressure transducer voltage is higher than the output of the
voltage divider, OPS is brought low. A single overpressure trip point can be exactly
calibrated by adjusting potentiometer R1, presumably the neonatal point. This reduces any
error caused by resistor tolerances and inexact transducer readings. NEO is compared to a
threshold by a second comparator in U6, and if low, resisterR15 is shunted across resistor
R25. This reduces the effective resistance in the grounded resistor in the voltage divider,
causing a lower overpressure trip point in the neonatal mode.
FIGURE 2-27 Linear Bleed Block Diagram

2.2.10 Panel Board / Display Interface

DHSYNC
KI(3:0) KI(3:0)
KD(7:0) KD(7:0) Video Video Data(3:0)
Line
RRST1*
SPK+ SPK+ Memory
SPK - SPK- Jumper Line WRST1*
WRCLK Buffer
+12V +12V Buffer
+5V Res. Alarm LED+ Interface
Pullup Control Horizontal Syc.
A5V
DGND DGND Alarm LED Alarm LED- Clock
Video Clock
Control BC LED+ Doubler
LED0 Circuitry BC LED-
Display Data(7:3)
Frame Signal Vertical Syc.

Data Latch Signal
Clock
Battery Charging LED Control Circuitry
Display Data (3)
Res.
Pullup
Input Data Latch
+17V Res.
BAT_A+_F WI(8:1)
Network Frame
Buffer A(8:0) VRAM
Res. Interface RAS 256K x 8
BA_CHG_A CAS
Network Control WB
Res. DT
BAT_CHG_B
Network
Data Input Clock
RES. VideoDataU(3:0)
BAT_B+_F
Network
VideoDataL(3:0)
Scan start-up
SW_BULK_OUT Power Supply PS12V
12 Volt output
BULK_GND 15 Watts BULK_GND
PS12v
BULK_GND
+5V A5V
FIGURE 2-28 Panel Board Block Diagram
Overview
The Front Panel Board contains a frame buffer converter that takes a video data stream
formatted as 640x240 at 60Hz and converts it to a 640x480 format at 120Hz. The single
video bit stream is also converted to a dual scan LCD type 8-bit parallel interface required by
the EL panel. Appropriate timing signals are also generated to control the EL panel.
An optional alternate interface circuit is included to drive an alternate color LCD panel. Three
color signals (RGB) at 640x240 format at 60Hz and I signal are double scanned using a
video line buffer memory to drive the color LCD panel with a 640x480 format at 60Hz.
Monochrome EL Interface
The monochrome EL panel interface (0670-00-0617-03) consists of two control EPLD’s
(U1,U2) and a dual-port VRAM. The two EPLD’s in essence perform the functions of a simple
video display controller. The input video data is written into the video memory; the output
video data is simultaneously accessed and sent to the EL panel.
The parallel access port of the VRAM is used to write the input video data into memory. As
such, the parallel data port is used only in the write mode. On the other hand, the serial
access port is used only in the read mode to access the video output data. To simplify the
video output logic and timing, the input video data is formatted appropriately before it is
written into the VRAM, while the output video data is clocked directly from the VRAM to the
EL panel.

Only 640x240 bits of memory storage is required, so very little of the much larger available
VRAM is actually used. Refresh of the memory that is being used is automatically performed
as the video data is constantly being written to.
The VRAM parallel access address is controlled by the input horizontal and vertical video
counters. The horizontal counter counts the 912 columns of the display format (640 of which
are displayed data, the remaining columns are used for horizontal retrace). The horizontal
counter is used to drive the column address of the VRAM. The horizontal counter is clocked
by the video dot clock VCLK/ and cleared by the rising edge of the input horizontal sync
signal.
Since the 8-bit input data is formatted as 4 bits for the upper split screen and 4 bits for the
lower split screen, only 4 bits of input video data is written to the VRAM in each access.
Since the video data is written in 4-bit chunks, the lower two bits of the horizontal counter is
not sent to the VRAM address.
Depending on whether the input video data is from the top 120 lines or the bottom 120 lines,
the input video data is written to the lower 4 bits or the upper 4 bits of the 8-bit VRAM input
data path respectively. Since the input video format is single bit serial, a 4-bit shift register is
used to convert the input video data to a 4-bit parallel format. An 8-bit multiplexer directs the
4-bit shift register (double-buffered to accommodate the VRAM timing) to the appropriate half
of the VRAM parallel data input.
The write-per-bit feature of the VRAM is used to mask the appropriate 4-bits of the VRAM
parallel data input such that only the corresponding 4-bits of video information is being
written. A mask of either 00001111 or 11110000 is used depending on whether the input
video data is from the upper screen or the lower screen. The mask is written to the VRAM on
the following edge of RAS/ during the block write cycle. This mask data is selected by the
same 8-bit multiplexer that controls the VRAM parallel input data.
Since the VRAM may not necessarily power up in the correct mask mode, a CBR (CAS/
before RAS/) refresh cycle needs to be performed periodically to reset the VRAM in the
default masking mode (new mask mode) for the mask data to work properly. This is done at
the beginning of every input horizontal scan line. If a output start line address clock cycle is
not needed, then a CBR cycle is initiated in its place, before the pixel data of the horizontal
scan line is written into the VRAM.
The lower 3 bits of the horizontal counter actually forms a state machine that controls the
VRAM memory cycles. The first 3 states (S0,S1, and S2) are used to strobe in the
appropriate row address of the output video stream when the need arises (the data transfer
signal DT/ and the write control signal WB/ are changed accordingly). The last 5 states are
used to write two 4-bit chunks of input video data into the VRAM.

The vertical video counter is used to count the 262 rows of the display format (240 of which
are displayed, the remaining are used for vertical retrace.) The vertical video counter is
clocked by the rising edge of the input horizontal sync and cleared by the input vertical sync
signal. The vertical video counter wraps at count 120, which demarcates the upper and
lower halves of the screen. This is used to toggle the signal TOP/, which indicates which half
of the screen the video data is in. The vertical counter is used to drive the row address of the
VRAM.
Because of the timing requirements of the EL panel, the vertical line timing of the output video
need to be different than the input line timing. To accommodate this, a separate horizontal
and vertical output counters are used to determine when the appropriate row address should
be strobed into the VRAM to initiate another row of output video data. After this row address
is strobed in the VRAM by the RAS/ signal, the CAS/ signal strobe in the column start tap
point, which, in this case, is always zero. An address multiplexer is used to select the
appropriate input and output row and column counters respectively.
The EL panel timing is such that the input video clock of 14.318MHz is divided by 2.5 to
generate the output video clock. A new vertical sync is generated at 120Hz, as well as a
new horizontal sync.
EL and Color LCD Interface

The EL and Color LCD Panel Boards (670-00-0617-XX) has a built-in frame buffer and the
interface is regular timing at a 60Hz rate. Therefore, the interface requirements are much
simpler. All that is necessary is each input horizontal scan line needs to be doubled to
convert the 640x240 input format to the 640x480 output format.
A 910x8 bit video line memory buffer is used to temporarily store each incoming video line
and clocked out twice as fast to double the video line. The input video clock of 14.318MHz
is doubled by a clock doubler circuit. The input horizontal sync signal is doubled simply by
feeding it to the video line buffer and clocking out twice as fast. The RGBI input color video
signals are also fed directly into the video line buffer and clocked out twice as fast directly to
the EL or LCD panel.
The main function of the PAL is to fit the 912 input columns into the 910 bit video line buffer
by effectively deleting two input clock cycles. It also generates miscellaneous control signals
required by the video line buffer.
Battery Charging LED

The EL or Color LCD Panel Board controls the Battery Charging LED (Color: Green). The LED
is lit when the batteries are charging no matter what position the power switch on the
Passport is in. Two comparators are use to compare the Battery Charging voltage to the
Battery voltage. When the charging voltage is greater than the battery voltage, the output of
the comparators is low which turns on the LED. The function is powered by an external +17 V
which improves the internal power management and allows the system only to work when
the external power supply is plugged in.

Alarm LED
The Alarm LED is a high intensity red LED. It is driven by a FET, a 2N7000 which is controlled
by the signal LED0 from the CPU.
Speaker Interconnections
The EL/LCD Panel Board provides connection from the CPU board to the speakers.
Keyboard Interconnections
The four input lines KI0 through KI3 and the eight output lines KD0 through KD7 provide
interconnection between the CPU board and the 8 by 4 matrix keyboard. A jumper on line
KI3 to KD3 and KD4 is used to indicate which display is being used.
DC/DC Converter
The power supply on the Panel Board is a DC/DC converter. The input voltages to the power
supply is from the Line Battery Board which improves the power management of the system.
The input voltage range for the DC/DC converter is 9 to 18 Volts. The power supply provides
a +12V @ 1.250 Amps Max. for the monochrome EL display.
2.2.11 Termination Board

Overview
The Termination Board’s function is to help reduce emissions from high speed EL/LCD display
signal outputs and 5 VDC power from the CPU board (P/N 0670-00-0651) in the Passport.
The Termination board is inserted between the output connector J68 on the CPU board and
the ribbon cable (P/N 0012-00-0744) that connects to the EL/LCD Panel board (P/N 0670-
00-0617).
Common Mode Choke

The common mode choke is a ferrite device that reduces conducted emissions on signal or
power lines without affecting transmission. The ferrite acts as an attenuator to high frequency
signals by absorbing extraneous and unwanted energy. Low frequency and DC signals see
only the conductor and are unimpeded without any loss. High frequency signals encounter
inductive resistance due to the ferrite providing the insertion loss for dissipating EMI. Since
this choke is common mode it attenuates unwanted common signals on both the power and
digital ground.
P68 J71
31 31
5 VDC
32 32 5 VDC
33 DGND
DGND 33 34
34
40 SHIELD
FIGURE 2-29 Termination Board Choke Assembly

Termination Resistors
Series 75 ohm termination resistors were inserted on the nine highest frequency EL/LCD
data, clock and sync signals. This was necessary because these signals are generated from
high speed CMOS logic devices whose outputs are under damped and ring. This is shown
in Figure 2-30 below:
FIGURE 2-30 Termination Board Terminated Signals


3.0 Specifications
Contents of this Chapter ............................................................. Page

3.1 Performance Specifications ................................................. 3-1
3.2 Power Pack Electrical Ratings ............................................. 3-8
3.3 Environmental Conditions ................................................... 3-8
3.4 Physical Characteristics ....................................................... 3-8
3.5 Agency Compliance ............................................................ 3-8
3.1 Performance Specifications

• ECG
Leads: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V
Display Sensitivity: 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0 cm/mV ±10%
Frequency Response to Screen:

ESU Filter Out: 0.5 to 40 Hz, -3db max @ 1 mVpp input
(notch filter disabled).
ESU filter in: 0.5 to 20 Hz -3db max @ 1 mVpp input
CMRR: 90 dB min. maximum output of 1 mV p-p

(RTI) over 60 second period with a 51 K
ohm lead imbalance and ± 300 mV dc
offset. ANSI/AAMI EC13-1992.
Defibrillator Overload
Protection: Withstand Lown and trapezoidal or Edmark
waveform up to 400 joules applied to 100
ohm load and electrode at 20 second
intervals. As per ANSI/AAMI EC13-1983
par. 3.2.2.2.
Recovery Time: Time for trace to return to screen from

defibrillator mono pulse 3 sec. maximum

Performance Specifications Specifications
• IBP
Range to Digital Display Systolic/Diastolic/Mean -20 to +300 mmHg
Accuracy: 2 mmHg or 2%, whichever is greater to

numerical display position
Scales to Display: 0 to +37.5 mmHg 0 to +150 mmHg
0 to +75.0 mmHg 0 to +300 mmHg
Zero Accuracy: ± 1 mmHg
Zero Range: ± 120 mmHg min at nominal gain.
Input Sensitivity: 5.0 uV/V/mmHg ± 1.5%
Frequency Response: DC to 15 Hz, +/-2 Hz (+0/-3db) for 1 cm

of deflection
• Heart Rate Meter

Range: 30-300 bpm ADULT/CHILD
30-350 bpm NEONATAL
Accuracy: 30-250 bpm, ±3 bpm or ±3%, whichever is greater
Pacer Rejection: Rejects all pulses of amplitude ± 2.0mV to

±700 mV and duration 0.1ms to 2 ms with
no tail.
Rejects all pulses ±2.0mV to ±700mV and

duration 0.1ms to 2 ms with 100ms T.C.
tail <0.8mV or 25 ms T.C. tail <0.4mV
Display Update: 2 seconds ± .1 sec.
Noise Rejection: Rejects noise less than or equal to 0.1mVp.p

at 50/60 Hz RFI as per AAMI draft standard
CMD-3/80.
• Non-invasive BP (fixed orifice)

Technique: Oscillometric
Systolic Range: Adult/Ped mode: 50 to 250 mmHg
Neonatal mode: 15 to 150 mmHg
Diastolic Range: Adult/Ped mode: 30 to 200 mmHg
Systolic Accuracy: Mean error less than 7 mmHg, standard

deviation less than 8 mmHg (adult/pediatric)
Mean error less than 3 mmHg, standard
deviation less than 13 mmHg (neonatal)
Diastolic Accuracy Mean error less than 7 mmHg, standard

deviation less than 8 mmHg (adult/pediatric)
Mean error less than 4 mmHg, standard

deviation less than 7 mmHg (neonatal)
Heart Rate Meter Range: 30--250 bpm

Specifications Performance Specifications
Heart Rate Meter Accuracy ±3 bpm or ±3%, whichever is greater
Pressure Transducer Range: 0-320 mmHg
Pressure Transducer
Measurement System Accuracy: 3 mmHg or 2% whichever is greater
Maximum Cuff Pressure: Two means of limiting cuff pressure are

provided: 1) a hardware over pressure switch
which limits the pressure to a maximum of
375 ±5,-10% for all other versions; and
2) a software monitor which vents if the
pressure exceeds 290 mmHg. The software
monitor is disabled in the CAL mode. If
the over pressure switch is tripped in
normal operation then the power must be
cycled to reset the switch.
• Non-Invasive BP (Linear Bleed)

Technique: Oscillometric
Systolic Range: Adult/Ped mode: 55 to 235 mmHg
Diastolic Range: Adult/Ped mode: 30 to 200 mmHg
Accuracy: Mean error less than 5 mmHg, standard

deviation less than 8 mmHg. (Reference
ANSI/AAMI SP10-1992)
Heart Rate Meter Range: 30-250 bpm
Heart Rate Meter Accuracy: ±3 bpm or ±3%, whichever is greater
Pressure Transducer Range: 0-320 mmHg
Pressure Transducer
Measurement System
Accuracy: ±3 mmHg or ±2% whichever is greater
from 20 to 250 mmHg (ANSI/AAMI
SP10-1992)
Maximum Cuff Pressure: Two means of limiting cuff pressure are

provided: 1) a hardware over pressure switch
which limits the maximum pressure to 330
mmHg for Adult/Ped, and 165 mmHg for Neonates;
and 2) a software overpressure
monitor which vents if the pressure exceeds 290 mmHg
for Adult/Ped, and 150 mmHg
for Neonate. The software monitor is
disabled in the CAL mode. If the hardware over
pressure switch is tripped in normal
operation then the power must be cycled
to reset the switch.

• Pulse Oximetry (with Datascope SpO2)

Pulse Oximeter displays functional saturation.
Accuracy: 70-100%, ±2% SpO2 (1 S.D.)

60-69%, ±4% SpO2 (1 S.D.)
0-59% Unspecified
Response Time: 13 seconds to 95% of final step change of

% SpO2 value from 60-95% (at 72 bpm)
• Pulse Oximetry (with Nellcor® SpO2)*

Saturation Accuracy: Nellcor® determines module accuracy by
comparisons with NELLCOR® N-100 and
N-200 pulse oximeters, using NELLCOR®
OXISENSOR™, OXIBAND®, and
DURASENSOR® oxygen transducers
only. For accuracy specifications when
used with each of the above sensors,
refer to the sensor’s labeling and
instructions. Accuracy, when used with
the OXISENSOR™ D-25 and N-25
sensors, is as follows:
*This feature applicable only if available / installed in your unit.

TABLE 3-1
SENSOR PATIENT RANGE ACCURACY

D-25 Adult 70 to 100% ±2 digits
D-25 Adult 50 to 69% ±3 digits
D-25 Adult 0 to49% unspecified
N-25 Neonate 70 to 95% ±3 digits
Nellcor® SpO2 Response Time
Response Mode 1 5 to 7 seconds averaging
• Plethysmograph Pulse Rate

Display Range: 30-230 bpm Adult/Child
30-250 bpm Neonate
30-239 bpm (Masimo only)
Adult/Child/Neonate
Pulse Rate Accuracy: ±3 bpm or ±3%, whichever is greater
Response Time: 12 seconds to 95% of final step change of

pulse value (rate from 60-120 bpm)
• Temperature
Scale: Selectable ºC or ºF
Range: 15 ºC to 45 ºC
59 ºF to 113 ºF

Accuracy at 25 °C ambient following

90 second warmup: ±0.1°C 15 to 45 °C - (Plus Probe Error)
±0.2 °F 59 to 113 °F - (Plus Probe Error)
• With Masimo SpO2*

SpO2 Accuracy - Saturation
during no motion conditions: Adult:
70 - 100 % ±2 digits SpO2 (1 S.D.)***

0 - 69 % Unspecified
Neonatal:
70 - 100 % ±3 digits
SpO2 Accuracy - Saturation

during motion conditions**: Adult:
70 - 100 % ±3 digits SpO2 (1 S.D.)
0 - 69 % Unspecified
Drift: None
SpO2 Response Time: 18 seconds to 95% of final step change of

% SpO2 value from 60 - 95% (at 72 bpm)
and with Post Average Time set to 8 seconds

** The Masimo option and LNOP-Adt sensors has been validated for motion accuracy in human blood studies
on healthy adult volunteers in induced hypoxia studies while performing rubbing and tapping motions at 2
to 4 Hz at an amplitude of 1 to 2 cm and a non-repetitive motion between 1 to 5 Hz at an amplitude of 2 to
3 cm in induced hypoxia studies in the range of 70 to 100 % SpO2 against a laboratory co-oximter and ECG
monitor. This variation equals plus or minus one standard deviation. Plus or minus one standard deviation
encompasses 68% of the population.
*** The SPO2 accuracy during motion conditions is not specificed for the LNOP Ear Sensors. The LNOP Ear Sen-
sors have an SPO2 accuracy of 70% to 100% ± 3.5% for adults during no motion conditions, however since
the monitor cannot display 1/2 digits, the accuracy shall be rounded to ± 4 digits.
• Respiration (ECG)
Rate Range: 4-200 bpm
Rate Accuracy: ±2 bpm or ±2%, whichever is greater
Minimum Breath Function of Display Scale. Minimum breath height

Detected: detected is 0.1 ohm
• Recorder
Speed: 50, 25, 12.5, 6.25, 3.125 mm/sec ± 5%
NOTE: 6.25 and 3.125 are for Respiration only.
Chart Size: 50 mm ± 2 mm
• Battery Performance (Passport 5-Lead, 5L & LT)

Run Time: 2 hours from full charge of new battery
(5-Lead, 5L, & LT) at 25 °C with SpO2, 1 NIBP every 15
minutes and no recording.

Run Time:
(XG) 2 hours from full charge of new battery
at 25 °C with SpO2, 1 NIBP every 15
minutes, no recorder, with color display only.
Cycle Service Life: 150 cycles, 100% to 20% of capacity

400 cycles, 100% to 40% of capacity
Battery Type: Sealed Lead Acid
Number of Batteries: 2
Battery Voltage: 12 VDC
Battery Capacity: 2.3 AH each
Recharge Time: 16 hours max.
Low Battery Warning: 11.6 ± 3.5% (measured at battery term.)
Low Battery Cutoff: 11.0 ± 2.8% (measured at battery term.)
• Real Time Clock

Accuracy : ± 1 minute/week
Display Format : 24 hours
Battery Life: 4 year minimum
Power Requirements: The RTC keeps time whether the rest of the
system has power or not. A dedicated
battery provides stand by power for the
clock circuit.
** For Sidestream Intubated configurations, the in-line disc filter must be removed for breath
rates above 18 bpm. The increased dead space could compromise the accuracy specification.
• CO2 - Mainstream (all units except for 0998-00-0134-XX and 0998-00-
0137-XX)
Range: 0 - 76 TORR
Accuracy: ±4 TORR (0 - 40 TORR)

10% of actual (41 - 76 TORR)
Respiration Rate Range: 1-150 bpm (mainstream)
Respiration Rate Accuracy: ±1 bpm
CO2 waveform recognition: 1 minute for waveform only
Time to meet full specs: 20 minutes to meet specification
Sensor warmup time: Less than 15 minutes
Barometric Pressure Error: ±2 Torr max additional, 564 to 760 mmHg
Reference Cell Reading: 36 to 40 TORR
Sensor on Zero Cell: 0 ± 1 TORR
Zero Calibration: Less than 30 seconds
Adapter Calibration: Less than 30 seconds

• CO2 - Mainstream and Sidestream (0998-00-0134-XX, 0998-00-0137-XX

units only)
Range: 0-100 TORR, CO2 partial pressure
Mainstream / Sidestream
(Non-Intubated) Accuracy: ±2 TORR (0-40 TORR)
±5% (41-70 TORR)
±8% (71-100 TORR)
Sidestream
(Intubated) Accuracy*: ±5 Torr (0 - 40 Torr)
±13% (41 - 100 Torr)
Respiration Rate Range: 1-150 bpm (mainstream)
1-50 bpm (sidestream**)
Respiration Rate Accuracy: ±1 bpm
CO2 waveform recognition 15 seconds for waveform
Time to meet full specs: 1 minute to meet spec
Sensor warmup time: Less than 5 minutes
Barometric Pressure Error: ±2 Torr max additional, 564 to 760 mmHg
* Test conditions as follows:

8 to 18 bpm with 1000cc tidal volume with max PEEP of 15cm-H2O
Sidestream Flow Rate: 180 ±20 cc/minute:
Reference Cell Reading: 36 to 40 TORR
Sensor on Zero Cell: 0 ±1 TORR
Zero Calibration: Less than 30 seconds
Adapter Calibration: Less than 30 seconds
Pump Calibration: Less than 30 seconds

Power Pack Electrical Ratings Specifications
3.2 Power Pack Electrical Ratings

An AC to DC power pack provides all power requirements for the monitor. The unit must
operate normally from the power pack while charging two discharged batteries.
Voltage Input: 100-240 (± 10%)
Mains Frequency: 50-60 Hz (± 3Hz)
Power Consumption: 2.0 - 0.8A
3.3 Environmental Conditions

Storage:
Temperature -20 °C to +60 °C

Humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Operating Altitude: Sea level to 8,000 feet.
Operating Temperature: 10 °C to 35 °C
Operating Humidity: 5 to 90%, non-condensing
3.4 Physical Characteristics

Size: 9.5" height x 13" width x 8" long max
Weight: 13lbs max without batteries

15.2lbs max without batteries
(Passport XG only) 16lbs max without batteries
(Passport XG-CE only)
3.5 Agency Compliance

The Passport 5L and XG are designed to comply with the following industry standards:
CSA C22-2 No. 125-M 1984 IEC 601-2-30: 1995
UL 544, Third Edition IEC 601-2-34: 1994
IEC 601-1: 1988/EN60601-1:1990 ISO 9919: 1992
IEC 601-2-27: 1994 ISO 9918: 1993

Specifications Agency Compliance
The Passport 5L-CE and XG-CE are designed to comply with the following industry standards:
CSA C22-2 No. 125-M 1984 IEC 601-2-30: 1995
UL 544, Third Edition IEC 601-2-34: 1994
IEC 601-1: 1988/EN60601-1:1990 ISO 9919: 1992
IEC 601-2-27: 1994 ISO 9918: 1993
EN60601-1-2: 1995
The Passport 5L, 5L-CE and XG, XG-CE are registered with the following agencies:
UL-USA
CSA-Canada
The Passport 5L-CE and XG-CE comply with the requirements of the medical device directive
93/42/EEC.

Agency Compliance Specifications

4.0 Repair Information

4.1 Introduction ............................................................. 4-1
4.2 Safety Precautions ................................................... 4-1
4.3 Troubleshooting Guidelines ...................................... 4-2
4.4 Equipment and Special Tools Required ..................... 4-3
4.5 Disassembly Instructions .......................................... 4-3
4.6 Mounting Instructions .............................................. 4-11
4.7 How to Use the Remote Color Display Mounting Kit . 4-15
4.8 Cable Assembly Details ........................................... 4-16
4.1 Introduction
This chapter of the Service Manual provides the necessary technical information to perform
repairs to the instrument. The most important prerequisites for effective troubleshooting are a
thorough understanding of the instrument functions, as well as an understanding of the theory
of operation. Therefore, if necessary, refer to the Operating Instructions (P/N 0070-00-0324
for 5L units or P/N 0070-00-0397 for XG units) which describes the instrument functions and
features, and refer to Chapter 2 of this manual which provides a theory of operation.
4.2 Safety Precautions

In the event that the instrument covers are removed, observe the following warnings and
general guidelines.
A. Do not short component leads together.

B. The troubleshooting charts are not intended as a rapid course on how to repair devices
of this type. Rather, they are intended as a guide for qualified technical personnel only.
The instrument covers must not be removed by other than technically qualified personnel
who have received supplementary instructions regarding maintenance of medical
electronic equipment or have has equivalent experience in this area.

Troubleshooting Guidelines Repair Information
4.3 Troubleshooting Guidelines

In an instrument as complex as this, it is virtually impossible to list each and every potential
problem and appropriate action. Any given problem, however, can be effectively identified
through an understanding of the instrument features and the theory of operation. These are
prerequisites for repair. If necessary, read the Operating Instructions Manual and study the
theory of operation presented in Chapter 2.0 of this manual. The time spent reading and
absorbing this information is generally realized by a reduction in repair time and, ultimately,
in the overall experience of service personnel.
NOTE: The numbers in parentheses () refer to the isometric

drawings.
General Troubleshooting Guidelines

1. Identify The Problem. Due to the wide ranges of potential symptoms, certain
problems may be more subtle than others. One approach to trouble-shooting is to set-up
the instrument for testing as described in Chapter 7 and attempt testing. If successful,
there is a reasonable assurance that there is no problem. By contrast, the fact that a
particular test is not successful is generally indicative of a failure in that specific area.
The cause of the symptom can now be further isolated by referring to Chapter 2. Section
2-5 contains a listing of specific circuits or areas in the instrument, each of which is
dedicated to provide a specific function. Once the operation of that circuit is
understood, trouble-shooting can be completed by making measurements in that circuit
to determine which component(s) is at fault.
2. Avoid Shorting Component Leads. During repair procedures, it can become
tempting to make a series of quick measurements. Always turn off the power before
connecting and disconnecting test leads and probes. The accidental shorting of
component leads can easily over stress components, resulting in a second unnecessary
failure (aside from creating a possible safety risk).
3. Use The Proper Equipment. This equipment listed in “Equipment and Special Tools
Required” on page 4-3 is suggested to fulfill a wide range of troubleshooting
requirements. Use a soldering iron the appropriate wattage for a given job. For
example, use a pencil-type iron (25 watts max.) for repairs to printed wiring boards and
a pistol-grip (75 watts) for repairs requiring this much power. Do not use the high
powered iron to repair the printed wiring boards as the conductors will lift from the
board under the extreme heat, thus ruining it.
4. Clean The Repair Area. After soldering operations, clean off the repaired area with
alcohol and a stiff hair brush. This will remove residual solder flux, making the repaired
area more visible for inspection and returning the instrument to its original, neat
appearance. Removal of the flux will also facilitate making electrical measurements in
the affected area.
Exchange Program
Datascope offers an exchange program for certain assemblies in the instrument. In many
cases, replacement of the complete assembly will result in the most expedient repairs. See
“Exchange Program” on page 6-2 for details concerning the exchange program.

Repair Information Equipment and Special Tools Required
4.4 Equipment and Special Tools Required

Description Specification
DVM
Standard Mercury Column 0-300 mmHg
Test Chamber (Dummy Cuff) 0138-00-0001-01
Safety Analyzer Dempsey Model or equivalent
Finger Sensor Probe ACCUSAT Compatible
Oscilloscope
Metric Ruler
Patient Simulator
Flow meter / Siera Instruments
(Model 822-13-001-001-01) or equivalent 0-300 cc/min.
4.5 Disassembly Instructions

Before disassembling the unit, perform the following:
1. Power down the Passport and remove the DC power cable.

2. Remove all cables from the left and right side panels.
3. Remove any batteries that are installed.
4. Perform work on anti-static mat.
NOTE: The numbers in parentheses () refer to the isometric

drawings.
A. Removal of the Front Housing (3)

1. Place the Passport with the display down, on a protective surface.
NOTE: Special care should be taken to insure that the front panel
and glare screen are not scratched.
2. Remove the eight screws (31) from the back housing (30).
3. Turn the Passport over, and slowly lift the front housing up and forward.
4. Disconnect the 40 pin ribbon cable (10), J71 from the Panel Board (16) mounted in the
front housing.
B. Removal of the 5L and LT Planar E.L. Assembly (121)
NOTE: The E.L. assembly consists of the E.L. display (121) and The
E.L. Power Supply Board (121).
1. Place the front housing, with the E.L. display down on a protective surface.

Disassembly Instructions Repair Information
2. Remove the four screws at the corner of the E.L. display.

3. Remove EMC shield (120) from the Front Panel EL Display.
4. Disconnect the 26 pin ribbon cable J1, from the display.
5. Lift the E.L. assembly up and out of the front housing.
6. Remove the four screws at the corners of the E.L. Power Supply Board (121). (This
board is mounted on the E.L. Planner Board and is not supplied with the Panel Board.)
7. Disconnect the 16 pin ribbon cable, J74, from the Panel Board and remove the power
supply.
C. Removal of the XG Planar E.L. Assembly (131)

1. Place the front housing, with the E.L. display down on a protective surface.
2. Remove the four screws (138) at the corner of the XG screen bracket.
3. Lift the shield (128) and disconnect the 20 pin ribbon cable from the E.L. display, the
keypad connector J72 from the Panel board (16), and remove the keypad ground screw
(139) from the Panel board. Remove the shield from the front panel assembly.
4. Remove the four screws (141) at the corners of the E.L. display (131) and lift the E.L.
display out if of the front panel assembly.
D. Removal of Panel Board (16)

1. Remove the six screws (39) securing the Panel Board.
2. Disconnect the keypad cable, J72, from the Panel Board.
3. Lift the Panel Board up and out of the front housing.
E. Removal of the 5L and LT Planar E.L. Panel Board

1. Remove the four screws (39) securing the Panel Board.
2. Disconnect the keypad cable, J72, from the Panel Board and lift the Panel Board out of
the front housing.
F. Removal of the XG Planar E.L. Panel Board (16)

1. Remove the six remaining screws (139) that are securing the Panel Board.
2. Disconnect the speaker connector, J75, from the Panel Board.
3. Lift the Panel Board up and out of the front housing.
G. Removal of the Passport XG LCD Color Display

1. Place the front housing with the LCD color display down on a protective surface.

Repair Information Disassembly Instructions
2. Unfasten the four captive screws at the corners of the shield (128).
3. Lift the shield (128) from the front housing assembly. Disconnect the cable connectors
J77 and J78 from the Panel board (16). Remove the keypad ground screw (39) from the
panel board. Disconnect the cable assembly J72 connector from the Panel board and
place the Panel board assembly aside.
4. Remove the four screws (138) that secure the left (145) and right (146) brass brackets to
the front panel assembly. Remove the assembly from the casing.
5. Disconnect the cable assembly from the High Voltage Power Supply (153)mounted to the
front housing. remove the four screws (39) from the four corners of the LCD Color
Display assembly (131). Lift the LCD Color Display (131) and remove.
H. Removal of the Keypad (32)
NOTE: The keypad is not reusable. Discard keypad once it is

removed.
1. Remove the Panel Board (16).

2. Using a blunt instrument (comparable to a electricians knife) lift the corners of the
keypad.
3. Carefully peel the keypad back from both sides towards the cable which protrudes
through the front housing.
4. When the keypad is completely loosened, pull cable and ground strap through the front
housing to remove.
I. Installing a New Keypad (41)

The keypad consists of two parts, the membrane switch keypad (41) and the printed graphic
overlay (1).
1. Remove the protective coating from the back of the keypad (do not remove protective
cover from the front side of the keypad).
2. Insert P72 and the ground strap through the cutout in the front housing (3) and stick the
keypad in place.
3. Remove the protective coating from the front of the keypad.
4. Place the correct overlay onto the keypad being careful to align printed graphics to the
membrane switches.
NOTE: The overlay is option dependent.
J. Removal / Installation of the Glare Screen (2)

1. Remove the LCD/EL assembly.
2. Peel back the four corners of the glare screen to remove.
3. Install a new glare screen by removing the protective coating from the adhesive tape
already mounted on the glare screen and press in place inside the front housing.
Removal of the Board Sub-Assembly (A)

NOTE: The sub-assembly includes the following boards:
• Passport Control Module (PCM) (52) • Interconnection Board (7)

• Datasette (51) • CO2 Control Board (98)
• Front End Board • CO2 Interface Board (94)
• SpO2 Board
1. Remove the two screws which secure the sub-assembly to the rear housing (30).
2. Disconnect P62, 63, 64, 65, and 67 from the PCM Board (52) and the ground wire
from the board frame.
NOTE: P63 has side locking tabs. To remove, apply pressure from
the side of the plug while pulling towards the top of the
Passport. J65 has side locking tabs. To remove, push the
locking tabs to the side, then pull plug toward the rear of
the Passport. When reinstalling P65, insure locking tabs are
in the locked position. P63 is self locking.
3. Remove the Datasette door (77) and remove the Datasette (51).
4. Lift the sub-assembly up far enough to disconnect the NIBP hose and P93 from the CO2
Interface Board. Lift the sub-assembly up and out of the rear housing. The right side
panel (69) stays with the rear housing and the left side panel (19) comes out with the
sub-assembly.
a. Removal of the CO2 Control Board (98)
1. Disconnect P201 and P204 from the CO2 Board.
2. Remove the four screws at the corners of the CO2 Board.
3. Remove board.
b. Removal of the CO2 Interface Board (94)

1. Disconnect P91 and P92 from the CO2 Interface Board.
2. Remove the four screws securing the Interface Board.
3. Remove the Interface Board.
c. Removal of the Passport Control Module

1. Remove the four screws on the corners of the PCM Board and lift the board from
the sub-assembly.
d. Removal of the Datascope SpO2 Board
1. Remove the four screws at the corner of the shield (99).
2. Disconnect P21 and P23.
3. Remove the four screws at the corner of the SpO2 Board and lift the board from
the sub-assembly.
NOTE: For removal of the Interconnection Board and Front End

Board, note the position of any mylar shields for proper
placement during reassembly.

e. Removal of the SpO2 Daughter Board

1. Disconnect the cables from P1 and P2 connectors.
2. Remove the four screws at the corner of the SpO2 Daughter Board and lift the
board from the shield.
f. Removal of the Nellcor SpO2 Board
1. Remove the four screws at the corner of the shield (99).
2. Disconnect JP1 (5) and P21 (38).
3. Remove the four screws at the corner of the SpO2 Interface Board and lift the
board from the sub-assembly.
4. Remove the three screws from the Nellcor Board (106) and lift it from the
assembly.
g. Removal of the SpO2 Interface bd. and Masimo MS-1 or Nellcor
module.
1. Disconnect P94 from the CO2 control bd. and P606 from the CO2 input
connector.
2. Remove the four screws that secure the CO2 mounting plate. Remove the
mounting plate with CO2 module and shield.
3. To remove the Interface bd. disconnect P21, P23, and P25,and remove the four
hex standoffs that secure the Interface bd. and lift it from the assembly.
4. To remove the MS1 or Nellcor module disconnect cables form module and
remove four screws that secure module and lift it from the assembly.
h. Removal of the Interconnection Board (7)
1. Disconnect P23 (5) from the SpO2 Board and P1 from the Interconnection Board.
2. Remove the two screws securing ground straps to the board frame (26).
3. Disconnect NIBP hose (61) from the left side panel (19).
4. Remove the left side panel from the board sub-assembly.
WARNING: Extreme caution should be used when handling the flexible

Interconnection Board. Do not try to bend or straighten
components on this board, damage may occur to the
flexible circuit board!
5. Release the two board standoffs.
WARNING: In the next step, do not straighten the Interconnection

Board! Use screw access holes located on the
Interconnection Board.
6. Remove the six screws holding the IBP and ECG connectors and the one nut
securing the temperature connector. Remove board from the left side panel.
i. Removal of the Front End Board
1. Remove the four screws securing the Front End cover (42) to the board frame
(48).
2. Remove the four screws (26) at the corners of the Front End Board.
NOTE: When installing the Front End and Interconnection Boards,

make sure all mylar shields are reinstalled.
j. Removal of the Front End Daughter Board

1. Remove the four screws (39) securing the Front End cover (42) to the board
frame.
2. Remove the cable from the Interconnect Board at P3, lift board upward and
remove.
A. Removal of the Power Supply, Line Battery and +12/-23 Volt Boards
(75&76)
1. Remove the board sub-assembly.
2. Disconnect P51 (35) and P53 (32) from the Line Battery Board (76).
3. Lift both the line battery and the +12/-23 Volt Board out of the rear housing. The two
boards can be pulled apart by disconnecting J54/P58.
4. When reinstalling the Power Supply Boards check the following
• The two boards are placed in the rear housing card guides.
• The foam block, that holds the top of the power supply, located on the board frame, is
in place.
A. Removal of the NIBP Module (B)
1. Remove the board sub-assembly (A).
2. Remove, the four snap rivets (57) holding the NIBP module (25) to the module brackets
(18 & 19).
3. Slide the module towards the top of the Passport and lift to remove.
a. Removal of the Control Board (51) from the NIBP Module
1. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to lift the center pin of the four snap rivets.
2. Lift the Control Board up and remove P31 (61) and the transducer hose from the
transducer.
b. Removal of the Pump Assembly (60) from the NIBP Module
1. Remove the Control Board.
2. Disconnect P29 from the Pneumatic Board.
3. Disconnect the hose from the pumps pressure port.
4. Turn module over and punch out pump assembly by tapping pump mounting
plate. Do not force screwdriver between the black velcro.This will damage the
velcro and reduce holder strength.
c. Removal of the Pneumatic Board (65) from the NIBP Module
1. Remove the Control Board.
2. Remove one screw (39) located near J34.
3. Slide and lift the Pneumatic Board from the chassis.
B. Removal of the Battery Can Assembly (35)

2. Remove the three screws (88) holding the battery assembly to the rear housing.
3. Disconnect P51 from the line battery board (76).
4. Lift the battery can from the rear housing.
C. Removal of the Recorder Assembly (23)

1. Open the recorder paper door and remove paper roll, if installed.

2. Locate the two screws behind the recorder door (towards the back).
3. Loosen the two screws and slide the recorder out of the rear housing.
4. Disconnect the ribbon cable (33) from the recorder and remove recorder.
D. Removal / Installation of the Sidestream CO2 Pump Assembly (162)

2. Disconnect the pump cable connector from J103 of the CO2 Module (98).
3. Disconnect the tubing (155) from the input and output ports of the pump. Unfasten the
two shock mount brass screws (163) from the left NIBP bracket (28). Remove the pump
(162) and bracket assembly (165) from casing. Remove the two pan head screws (139)
from the pump bracket assembly. Attach the new pump to the pump bracket with the two
pan head screws.
4. Place the pump assembly and bracket onto the NIBP bracket. secure the pump assembly
with the two shock mount brass screws. Connect the hose from the filter housing
assembly to the input port of the pump. Connect the hose that attaches the scavenging
system to the output port of the pump.
5. Connect the pump connector to J103 of the CO2 module (98).
E. Removal / Installation of the Passport XG Color LCD Backlight Tube
WARNING: The following precautions should be observed before

replacing the backlight:
1. Replacement of the backlight involves the handling of High Voltage circuits. If

replacement was done incorrectly, the display could present a shock, fire, or other
hazard, both during and after the replacement procedure. Make certain that the
Passport is turned OFF, the external power supply is disconnected, and all
batteries have been removed. Also, since the High Voltage power supply can hold
a charge, be sure to wait some time after switching the power OFF before starting
any work.
2. Since the backlight tube and the High Voltage power supply can be HOT after
use, there is a danger of injury by burning. Therefore, be sure to wait some time
after switching the power OFF before starting any work.
3. The fluorescent lamp of the backlight is glass and may in some cases be
damaged. Take adequate care not to injure yourself while doing this procedure.
Moreover, if the lamp is damaged inside, apart from safety considerations,
quality problems may occur, such as uneven brightness from pieces of broken
glass left inside the display. In this case we recommend that you return the unit to
Datascope for repair.
4. Since the backlight uses a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, dispose of it in
accordance with the regulations in effect in your area.
5. Since the display can be easily damaged, take care not to scratch, mar, chip,
etc., the front surface.
6. Static electricity (ESD) can damage the display. When handling the display take
adequate precautions to eliminate static electricity (grounded wrist strap, ionized
air blower, conductive mat on work surface, etc.).
7. Do NOT touch the reflective surfaces inside the backlight holder, or the fluorescent
lamp, or any connector contacts with your bare hands. Oil and other
contaminants on your hands can damage these surfaces and contacts.

8. To prevent the optical surfaces from attracting dust, dirt, and scratches, we
recommend that the backlight replacement be performed in a dust free
environment.
9. Customers replacing the backlight do so at their own risk. Datascope will not
assume any liability, and will not warrant any displays which have been modified
by the customer, including replacement of the backlight, even when the following
procedure is used and all of the necessary precautions have been taken.
Replacing the backlight can cause a lowering of the quality (performance). Even if
the replacement work is performed in accordance with the following procedure,
Datascope can not guarantee the resulting quality.
1. Perform the steps outlined in “Removal of the Passport XG LCD Color Display” on
page 4-4.
2. Taking care not to scratch the front of the display, place it face down on the flat static
free work surface.
3. Looking at the back of the display, locate the metal backlight holder by following the
high voltage wires to the side of the backlight tube.
4. Using round tipped tweezers, or an equivalent tool, release the backlight holder by
carefully pressing down on the small plastic tab that latches it in place. See Figure 1,
Detail “A” Side View.
5. Slowly, gently, and in a straight line pull the backlight and holder out of the side of the
display. If the fluorescent lamp was broken inside the display, carefully pull out the
backlight. If pieces of the glass remain inside the display, carefully remove them.
6. Once the old backlight and holder have been removed, slowly, gently, and in a straight
line push in the new backlight (P/N 0149-00-0009) until the small plastic tab latches it
in place.
7. Reassembly of the display into the Passport is the reverse of the disassembly.
.
Figure 1.
Bottom
NEC
High Voltage Connector to

Power Supply High Voltage Board
New Backlite Assembly
Backlite
Assembly Detail "A"
Frame Assembly Tab
Detail "A"
Side View

Repair Information Mounting Instructions
4.6 Mounting Instructions

4.6.1 Rolling Stand Assembly Instructions
(See Figure 4-1 )
1. Press the steel column firmly into the base.

2. Lock the column into the base by screwing supplied bolt through the supplied lock
washer, large flat washer, and base into bottom of column.
3. Remove the column screw from the top of the column. Insert the swivel head on top of
the column and replace the column screw.
4. Use clamp to secure basket to rolling stand column.
4.6.2 Bedrail Hook Mount

(See Figure 4-2 )
1. Secure the hook mount (P/N 0436-00-0062) to the rear of the Passport using four #8-
32 x .38 flat head screws (P/N 0212-14-806).
2. Place the Passport over any bedrail with a diameter of less than 1.25".
4.6.3 Bed Mount

(See Figure 4-3 )
1. Secure the mounting plate (P/N 0386-00-0156) to the rear of the Passport using four
#8-32 x .38 flat head screws (P/N 0212-14-0806).
2. Place the two lower clamps (P/N 0343-00-0064) into the slots at the bottom of the bed
mount (P/N 0997-00-0297) and secure using the two knobs (P/N 0366-00-0080).
3. Place bed mount over lower bedrail and secure in place by positioning the lower clamps
against bedrail and tightening the two knobs.
4.6.4 Passport Mounting - Rolling Stand/Wall Mount

(See Figure 4-4 )
1. Secure the mounting plate (P/N 0386-00-0156) to the rear of the Passport using four
#8-32 x .38 flat head screws (P/N 0212-14-0806).
2. While pulling down on the spring lock, slide the holding bracket into the swivel head of
the rolling stand or the wall mount.
3. Place the Passport into the slots in front holding bracket.
4.6.5 Power Supply Mounting

(See Figure 4-5 )
1. Secure the Mounting Plate (P/N 0386-00-0156) to the power supply bracket (P/N
0406-00-0544) using the four #8-32 x .38 flat head screws (P/N 0212-14-0806).

Mounting Instructions Repair Information
2. Insert the line cord into the cable clamp (P/N 0343-00-0101-06). Close the cable
clamp, then position it between the mounting tab on the power supply and the power
supply bracket (P/N 0406-00-0544).
3. Secure the power supply and the cable clamp (P/N 0343-00-0101-06), with the line
cord, to the power supply bracket (P/N 0406-00-0544) using the two #6-32 x .5 pan
head screws (P/N 0212-12-0608). Ensure that when the cable clamp is secured to the
power supply bracket the line cord can be put into a service loop approximately 2
inches (5 cm) in diameter.
4. Place the power supply into the slots in the back of the holding bracket.

Repair Information Mounting Instructions
FIGURE 4-1 Rolling Stand FIGURE 4-2 Bedrail Hook Mount FIGURE 4-3 Bed Mount
0040-00-0121-02 0040-00-0121-04

Mounting Instructions Repair Information
FIGURE 4-4 Passport Mounting FIGURE 4-5 Wall Mount

Repair Information How to Use the Remote Color Display Mounting Kit
4.7 How to Use the Remote Color Display Mounting Kit

(P/N 0020-00-0419)
1. Assemble and mount the Wall Mounting Kit (P/N 0020-00-0420).
2. Remove the swivel base plate on the Remote Color Display (retain these 2 screws).
3. Place the Remote Color Display (RCD) onto the two CRT Mounting Brackets. (These
brackets are attached to the CRT Mounting Plate.
4. Attach the CRT Mounting Plate (P/N 0386-00-0220) using the 2 screws that were
removed in step 2.
5. Attach the Arm Mounting Plate (P/N 0406-00-0631) to the bottom of the CRT Mounting
Plate using the 4 screws (P/N 0212-00-0806).
6. Slide the assemble RCD with Mounting Kit onto the Arm Plate of the Wall Mount. Ensure
that the monitor has clicked into place.
Rem o te C o l o r
D i sp la y
C RT M o u n ti n g
Br a c ke ts
C RT M o u n ti n g
Pl a te W a ll
M o unt
A r m M o u n ti n g A r m Pl a te
Pl a te
FIGURE 4-6 Remote Monitor with Wall Mount

Cable Assembly Details Repair Information
4.8 Cable Assembly Details

SpO2 Instrument Cable - 0012-00-0516-XX (A)
+
10'- 3"
View B-B View A-A
See 'BED CLIP'

P/N 0343-00-0042
1
4 6 5 1
8
2
5 7
3
Case 9 6
View B-B View A-A
DIN D-SUB
YEL YEL
1 1
RED R1 RED
2 6
ORN ORN
4 2
WHT WHT
3 4
BLK BLK
7 5
Inner shield
5 9
R2 BLU - N.C. N.C.
6 7
BRN - N.C. N.C.
8 3
GRN GRN
Case 8
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

0012-00-0516-01 Normal duty outer jacket
0012-00-0516-02 Heavy duty outer jacket
Resistor
R1:; 22.1 W 1 %, type RN55D. Refer to Datascope P/N: 0309-00-22X1.
Resistor shall be located inside DIN plug and connected in series with Pin 2 and the RED
wire. The splice between the red wire and resistor shall be mechanically secure and suitably
insulated.
R2: 47.5 W 1%, type RN55D. Reference Datascope P/N: 0309-00-4752.
Resistor shall be located inside DIN plug and connected between Pin 6 and Pin 8. Resistor
shall be mechanically secure and suitably insulated.
Bed Clip: Each cable assembly shall include a bed clip, Datascope P/N: 0343-00-0042.

Repair Information Cable Assembly Details
Cable, ECG Patient With Internal Resistors - 0012-00-0620-XX (A)
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION AND LENGTH

0012-00-0620-01 5 Wire, 10 Foot, USA (AHA)
0012-00-0620-02 5 Wire, 20 Foot, USA (AHA)
0012-00-0620-03 5 Wire, 10 Foot, International (IEC)

Right Angle Safety ECG Patient With Choke Block-0012-00-0722-XX

0012-00-0722-01 5 Wire, 10 Foot, USA (AHA)
0012-00-0722-02 5 Wire, 20 Foot, USA (AHA)

Cable, ECG Patient with Choke Block - 0012-00-0723-XX (A)

0012-00-0723-01 5 Wire, 10 Foot, USA (AHA)
0012-00-0723-02 5 Wire, 20 Foot, USA (AHA)

Right Angle Safety ECG Patient with Choke Block-0012-00-0724-XX

0012-00-0724-01 5 Wire, 10 Foot, USA (AHA)
0012-00-0724-02 5 Wire, 20 Foot, USA (AHA)

Pin 1
ECG Cable Assembly HP 3 Lead - 0012-00-0846
Pin 1
ECG Cable Assembly HP 5 Lead - 0012-00-1002-01

hp
3 Lead HP ECG Lead Wired - 0012-00-0847

hp
5 Lead HP ECG Lead Wired - 0012-00-1003-01

Cable, Safety Patient Leads - 0012-00-0622-XX (A)

L, +/-1.0
DASH NO. LENGTH COLOR

-01 18" Black, White, Red
-03 18" Black, White, Red, Brown, Green,Yellow

Data Link, Shielded, 16 Pin - 0012-00-0715 (A)

Data Link, Shielded, 16 Pin (XG-CE) - 0012-00-1028 (A)*
Terminal 1
Key
Designation
10', +/- 0.5'
1 YEL YEL
2 BLK BLK
3 ORN ORN
4 BLK BLK
5 RED RED
6 BLK BLK
7 WHT WHT
8 BLK BLK
GRN GRN
9
10 BLK BLK
BRN BRN
11
BLK BLK
12
BLU BLU
13
BLK BLK
14
GRN GRN
15
16 RED RED
* This version cable is exactly the same as the other except it also has a ferrite on it for CE approval.

Passport to VISA/Wall Plate - 0012-00-0718-XX (A)

Passport to VISA/Wall Plate (XG-CE) - 0012-00-1031-XX (A)*
PART NUMBER LENGTH

0012-00-0718-01 7’ ± .5’
0012-00-0718-02 50’ ± .5’
0012-00-1031-01 7’ ± .5’
0012-00-1031-02 50’ ± .5’

AAMI ECG/ECG Interface - 0012-00-0732

AAMI ECG/ECG Interface (XG-CE) - 0012-00-1026*
8',+/- .5'
Terminal 1
P1 P2
F A
E B
.870 Dia D C See CONNECTOR
View A-A
P1
N.C. P2
1-3
AGND A
4
AGND
5
N.C. 10
6-8
ECG B
9
N.C.
10 - 16 10 k C
N.C. D
NOTE E
NOTE: Cable shield must be electrically isolated from F

P1 connector shield and ferrule.

HP ECG/ECG Interface - 0012-00-0753-01 (A)

HP ECG/ECG Interface (XG-CE)- 0012-00-1027 (A)*
8',+/- .5'
Terminal 1
P1 A P2
H B
J
F C
.870 Dia E D See CONNECTOR
View A-A
P1
N.C. P2
1-3
AGND A
4
AGND
5
N.C. 10
6-8
ECG
9 H
N.C.
10 - 16 10 k B
D
SEE NOTE 1
N.C. All other pins

NOTE:
1. CABLE SHIELD SHALL NOT CONTACT CONNECTOR SHIELD OR FERRULE.

Passport To Corometrics Monitor - 0012-00-0844 (A)

Passport To Corometrics Monitor (XG-CE) - 0012-00-1029 (A)*
Terminal 1
5
9
6
1
+
8' - 1"
P1 P2
P1 P2
1 N.C. N.C. 1
2 2
3 3
4 N.C. N.C. 4
5 5
6-16 N.C. N.C. 6-9

Passport Video Interface 0012-00-0983 (A)

Terminal 1
PIN 6
PIN 1 PIN 11
P1
9 J1
4-40 JACKPOST
+
18 .25
-
P1 CABLE SHIELD
C1
.1 uF
Q1
13 2N4401
J1
R1 RED 1
220 2
R2
3
120
4
Q2
12 2N4401 5
6
R3 7
GREEN
8
220 R4
9
120 10
Q3 11
11 2N4401 12
13
R5 14
BLUE
15
220 R6
120
SHELL
R7
16 VSYNC
120
15 R8 HSYNC
120
SHELL SHIELD

Passport Video Interface - 0012-00-0983 (Continued)

Passport Connection, P1:
NOTE: Pins not assigned are reserved for existing Passport

functions and must not be connected.
PIN NO. DESCRIPTION PIN NO. DESCRIPTION

1 VCC,Positive supply voltage Shell Cable and inner shield
4 Ground 15 Input, Horizontal sync,
positive
5 Ground 14 Input, Vertical sync,
negative
8 Display ID, Ground 13 Input, Red video
11 Input, Blue video 12 Input, Green video
Monitor Connection, J1:
PIN NO. DESCRIPTION PIN NO. DESCRIPTION

1 Output, Red video Shell Cable and inner shield
2 Output, Green video 15 N.C. (No connection)
3 Output, Blue video 14 Output, Vertical sync
4 Ground 13 Output, Horizontal sync
5 N.C. (No connection) 12 N.C. (No connection)
6 Ground, Red video return 11 Ground
7 Ground, Green video return 10 Ground
8 Ground, Blue video return 9 N.C. (No connection)

Right Angle Safety ECG Patient with Internal Resistors -

0012-00-0990-XX (A)
L, +/- 3"
C D
B E
A F
.900 Dia
See CONNECTOR
WHT (RED)
A RA
BLK (YEL)
B LA
RED (GRN)
C LL
D N.C.
N.C.
E
AHA CONVENTIONAL STANDARD IEC CONVENTIONAL STANDARD
LEAD COLOR LEAD COLOR

RA White R Red
LA Black L Yellow
LL Red F Green

0012-00-0990-01 3 Lead, 10 Foot, USA (AHA)
0012-00-0990-02 3 Lead, 20 Foot, USA (AHA)
0012-00-0990-03 3 Lead, 10 Foot, International (IEC)

ECG Patient With Internal Resistors - 0012-00-0991-XX (A)

LENGTH+
-
3"
E
D F
C A
B
.870 Dia
See CONNECTOR
A WHT (RED)
RA
B BLK (YEL)
LA
C RED (GRN)
LL
D N.C.
E N.C.
AHA CONVENTIONAL
STANDARD IEC CONVENTIONAL STANDARD

RA White R Red
LA Black L Yellow
LL Red F Green

0012-00-0991-01 3 Lead, 10 Foot, USA (AHA)
0012-00-0991-02 3 Lead, 20 Foot, USA (AHA)

ECG Patient With Internal Resistors And Choke Block - 0012-00-

0992-XX (A)
LENGTH-+ 3"
See 'RESPIRATION LABEL'
E
D F
C A
B
.870 Dia
See CONNECTOR
RESPIRATION
WHT (RED)
A RA
B BLK (YEL)
LA
C RED (GRN)
LL
D N.C.
E N.C.
AHA CONVENTIONAL STANDARD IEC CONVENTIONAL STANDARD

RA White R Red
LA Black L Yellow
LL Red F Green

0012-00-0992-01 3 Lead, 10 Foot, USA (AHA)
0012-00-0992-02 3 Lead, 20 Foot, USA (AHA)

Right Angle ECG Patient With Internal Resistors And Choke Block -
0012-00-00993-XX (A)
LENGTH-+ 3"
See 'RESPIRATION LABEL'
C D
B E
A F
.900 Dia
See CONNECTOR
RESPIRATION
WHT (RED)
A RA
B BLK (YEL)
LA
C RED (GRN)
LL
D N.C.
E N.C.
AHA CONVENTIONAL
STANDARD IEC CONVENTIONAL STANDARD

RA White R Red
LA Black L Yellow
LL Red F Green

0012-00-0993-01 3 Lead, 10 Foot, USA (AHA)
0012-00-0993-02 3 Lead, 20 Foot, USA (AHA)

Male To Male VGA - 0012-00-0994-XX

DB15(HD) See'CONNECTOR' DB15(HD)
MALE CONNECTOR MALE CONNECTOR
0.6"
1.35" +
LENGTH- 6"
P1 Connector Shield P2
4 4
5 5
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
1 1
6 6
2 2
7 7
3 3
8 8
Cable Outer Shield

0012-00-0994-01 Male to Male, 10 foot, Terminated

Male to Male VGA, Unassembled - 0012-00-1010-XX
NOTE: Connector, connector shell, screws, nuts, insertion tool, and

instructions are included.

0012-00-1010-02 Male to Male, 25 foot, Unterminated

Nurse Call Cable Assembly - 0012-00-0981
Parts Listing for circuit board contained within nurse call cable:
REFERENCE PART NUMBER AND

ITEM DESIGNATOR DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER
1 D1 Diode IN914, IN914A, National Semi.,
Phillips, Semiconductor Technology
2 D2, D3 Diode, Zener IN6275, Motorola, General
Semiconductor
3 L1 Relay, DPDT DS2E-S-DC12V, Aromat
4 Q1 MOSFET 2N7000, Siliconix, Intersil
5 R1 Resistor, 100 ohms 5%, carbon film, 1/4 watt

Sidestream CO2 Starter Kit - 0020-00-0112-02
CO2 Capnostat II Sensor and Cable Assembly - 0600-00-0025
CAPNOSTAT R
CAPNOSTAT
Serial Number
XXXXXX
CO2 Capnostat III Sensor and Cable Assembly - 0600-00-0036
ADULT AIRWAY ADAPTERS

- 0103-15-0003 (Reusable)
- 0103-00-0410-02 (Disposable 10 pcs.)
- 0103-00-0410-03 (Disposable 25 pcs.)
NEONATAL AIRWAY ADAPTER - 0103-15-0013 (Reusable)

Sidestream CO2 Starter Kit - 0020-00-0112-02

5 3 2
Non-Intubated Adult
3 6 4
5
Intubated Adult
7
Sidestream CO2 Starter Kit Bill of Materials:
ITEM DESCRIPTION PART NUMBERS

1 Insert, 1/8" Barbed (waste gas scavenging) 0103-00-0454-02
2 Nasal Cannula 0103-00-0443-01
3 Disc Filter, 5 Micron, External 0103-00-0445-01
4 Nafion Tubing Assembly 0008-00-0259
5 Airway Adapter with Tubing (SSCO2) 0103-00-0444-01
6 Capilary Line, 5 ft. 0683-00-0405-11
7 Intubated Adapter, Straight 0683-00-0242-21

CPU to SPO2 Interface Board Cable - 0012-00-1100

1
2
3
4
CO2 1 1
Interface
CPU 12/23.5V
1
2
Masimo/Nellcor
Interface
CABLE PINOUTS COLOR REFERENCE
MASIMO/
CO2 NELLCOR
CPU 12/23.5V INTERFACE INTERFACE
1 1 — — Brown +5
2 2 — — Red +5
3 3 3 — Orange D Ground
4 4 — — Yellow D Ground
5 5 — — Blue P Ground
6 6 — — Violet P Ground
7 7 — — Gray +12
8 8 — — White +12
9 9 — — Black +15
10 10 — — White/Brown A Ground
11 11 4 — White/Red -15
12 12 1 — White/ Sw/Bulk
Orange
13 13 — — White/Yellow BLEN
14 14 — — White/Blue -23.5
15 15 — — —- KEY
16 16 — — White/Violet —-
—- —- 2 — —- Spare
—- 12 — 1 White/ SW/Bulk
Orange
—- 3 — 2 Orange D Ground


5.0 Assembly and Schematic Diagrams
Schematic drawings and accompanying assembly drawings of printed circuit boards are provided in the
remainder of this chapter.
The following is a list of the drawings and the corresponding drawing number (if available) and the page where
it can be found.
NOTE: EMC/CE = Electromagnetic Compatible/European Conformity
DRAWING NAME DRAWING PART NUMBER PAGE

NIBP Board 0670-00-0375 5-5
NIBP Control Board 0387-00-0375 5-6 through 5-8
0387-00-0657
Pneumatics Board 0670-00-0447-01/English 5-9
Pneumatics Board 0387-00-0447-01/English 5-10
Pneumatic Board 0670-00-0605 CE 5-11
Pneumatic Board 0387-00-0605 CE 5-12
Line Battery Board 0670-00-0449 5-13
0670-00-0621 (5L-CE)
0387-00-0621 (5L-CE)
+12/23 Volt Board 0670-00-0450 5-15
+12/23 Volt Board 0387-00-0450 5-16
Sp02 Board 0670-00-0482 5-17
SpO2 Board 0387-00-0482 5-18 through 5-21
CO2 Interface Module 0670-00-0497 5-23
CO2 Interface Module Board 0387-00-0497 5-24
CO2 Interface Module 0670-00-0632 5-25
CO2 Interface Module Board 0387-00-0632 5-26

Planar E.L. Panel Board 0670-00-0500 5-27
0670-00-0622 (CE)
Planar E.L. Panel Board 0387-00-0500 5-28
0387-00-0622 (CE)
Panel Board 0670-00-0546 5-29
Panel Board 0387-00-0546 5-30
SpO2 Interface Board Nellcor 0670-00-0557 5-31
SpO2 Interface Board Nellcor 0387-00-0557 5-32 through 5-34
Front End Board 0670-00-0560-03/04 (5L-CE) 5-35
0670-00-0624-01/02 (5L-CE)
Front End Board 0387-00-0560-XX 5-36 through 5-44
0387-00-0624-XX (5L-CE)
Datasette Board 0670-00-0561 5-51
Datasette Board 0387-00-0561 5-52
Datasette Board 0670-00-0574-01 5-53
0670-00-0574-03
0670-00-0574-04
0670-00-0574-05
Datasette Board 0387-00-0574-01 5-54
0387-00-0574-03
0387-00-0574-04
0387-00-0574-05
Interconnect Board 0670-00-0615 5-55
0670-00-0629 (CE)
0670-00-0628 (CE)
0387-00-0628 (CE)
Interconnect Board HP 0387-00-0615 5-57
0387-00-0629 (CE)
CPU Board 0670-00-0591 5-59
0670-00-0623 (5L-CE)
0670-00-0631
CPU Board 0387-00-0591 5-60 through 5-63
0387-00-0623 (5L-CE)
0387-00-0631
0387-00-0688
CPU Board 0670-00-0651 (XG-CE) 5-65
CPU Board 0387-00-0651 (XG-CE) 5-66 through 5-69
0387-00-0689
Front End Daughter Board 0670-00-0611 5-71
0670-00-0627 (5L-CE)
Front End Daughter Board 0387-00-0611 5-72
0387-00-0627 (5L-CE)
SpO2 Daughter Board 0670-00-0619 5-73
SpO2 Daughter Board 0387-00-0619 5-74
VGA/EL Panel Board/VGA/LCD Panel 0670-00-0617-02 5-75
Board Display Interface Assembly (XG) 0670-00-0617-03
VGA/EL Panel Board/VGA/LCD Panel 0387-00-0617-02 5-76 through 5-77
Board Display Interface Assembly (XG) 0387-00-0617-03

Line Battery Board (Top and Bottom) 0670-00-0626 5-79
0387-00-0656
Termination Board (Top and Bottom) 0670-00-0648 5-81
Termination Board 0387-00-0648 5-82
SpO2 Interface Board Masimo/ 0670-00-0665-01 (Masimo) 5-83
NellcorSpO2 Interface Board Masimo/ 0670-00-0665-02 (Nellcor)(
Nellcor
SpO2 Interface Board Masimo/Nellcor 0387-00-0665-01 (Masimo) 5-84 through 5-85
0387-00-0665-02 (Nellcor)


Assembly and Schematic Diagrams
FIGURE 5-1 NIBP Board

0670-00-0375

FIGURE 5-2 NIBP Control Board

0387-00-0375
0387-00-0675
Sheet 1 of 3


0387-00-0375
0387-00-0657
Sheet 2 of 3


0387-00-0375
0387-00-0657
Sheet 3 of 3

FIGURE 5-5 Pneumatics Board

0670-00-0447-01/English

FIGURE 5-6 Pneumatics Board

0387-00-0447-01/English

FIGURE 5-7 Pneumatic Board

0670-00-0605 CE

FIGURE 5-8 Pneumatic Board

0387-00-0605 CE

FIGURE 5-9 Line Battery Board

0670-00-0449
0670-00-0621 (5L-CE)


0387-00-0449
0387-00-0621 (5L-CE)

FIGURE 5-11 +12/23 Volt Board

0670-00-0450

FIGURE 5-12 +12/23 Volt Board

0387-00-0450

FIGURE 5-13 Sp02 Board

0670-00-0482

FIGURE 5-14 SpO2 Board

0387-00-0482
Sheet 1 of 4


0387-00-0482
Sheet 2 of 4


0387-00-0482
Sheet 3 of 4


0387-00-0482
Sheet 4 of 4


FIGURE 5-18 CO2 Interface Module

0670-00-0497

FIGURE 5-19 CO2 Interface Module Board

0387-00-0497

FIGURE 5-20 CO2 Interface Module

0670-00-0632

FIGURE 5-21 CO2 Interface Module Board

0387-00-0632

FIGURE 5-22 Planar E.L. Panel Board

0670-00-0500
0670-00-0622 (CE)

FIGURE 5-23 Planar E.L. Panel Board

0387-00-0500
0387-00-0622 (CE)

FIGURE 5-24 Panel Board

0670-00-0546

FIGURE 5-25 Panel Board

0387-00-0546

FIGURE 5-26 SpO2 Interface Board Nellcor

0670-00-0557


0387-00-0557
Sheet 1 of 3


0387-00-0557
Sheet 2 of 3


0387-00-0557
Sheet 3 of 3

FIGURE 5-30 Front End Board FIGURE 5-31 Front End Board
0670-00-0560-03/04 (5L-CE) 0670-00-0624-01/02 (5L-CE)

FIGURE 5-32 Front End Board

0387-00-0560-XX
0387-00-0624-XX (5L-CE)
Sheet 1 of 7


0387-00-0560-XX
0387-00-0624-XX (5L-CE)
Sheet 2 of 7


0387-00-0560-XX
0387-00-0624-XX (5L-CE)
Sheet 3 of 7


0387-00-0560-XX
0387-00-0624-XX (5L-CE)
Sheet 4 of 7


0387-00-0560-XX
0387-00-0624-XX (5L-CE)
Sheet 5 of 7


0387-00-0560-XX
0387-00-0624-XX (5L-CE)
Sheet 6 of 7


0387-00-0560-XX
0387-00-0624-XX (5L-CE)
Sheet 7 of 7


0670-00-0620-01/02 (XG-CE)


0387-00-0620-XX (XE-CE)
Sheet 1 of 7


0387-00-0620-XX (XE-CE)
Sheet 2 of 7


0387-00-0620-XX (XE-CE)
Sheet 3 of 7


0387-00-0620-XX (XE-CE)
Sheet 4 of 7


0387-00-0620-XX (XE-CE)
Sheet 5 of 7


0387-00-0620-XX (XE-CE)
Sheet 6 of 7


0387-00-0620-XX (XE-CE)
Sheet 7 of 7

FIGURE 5-47 Datasette Board

0670-00-0561


0387-00-0561


0670-00-0574-01
0670-00-0574-03
0670-00-0574-04
0670-00-0574-05


0387-00-0574-01
0387-00-0574-03
0387-00-0574-04
0387-00-0574-05

FIGURE 5-51 Interconnect Board FIGURE 5-52 Interconnect Board

0670-00-0615 0670-00-0576
0670-00-0629 (CE) 0670-00-0628 (CE)

FIGURE 5-53 Interconnect Board

0387-00-0576
0387-00-0628 (CE)

FIGURE 5-54 Interconnect Board HP

0387-00-0615
0387-00-0629 (CE)


FIGURE 5-55 CPU Board

0670-00-0591
0670-00-0623 (5L-CE)
0670-00-0631


0387-00-0591
0387-00-0623 (5L-CE)
0387-00-0631
0387-00-0688
Sheet 1 of 4


0387-00-0591
0387-00-0623 (5L-CE)
0387-00-0631, 0387-00-0688
Sheet 2 of 4


0387-00-0591
0387-00-0623 (5L-CE)
0387-00-0631
0387-00-0688
Sheet 3 of 4


0387-00-0591
0387-00-0623 (5L-CE)
0387-00-0631
0387-00-0688
Sheet 4 of 4



0670-00-0651 (XG-CE)


0387-00-0651 (XG-CE)
0387-00-0689
Sheet 1 of 4


0387-00-0651 (XG-CE)
0387-00-0689
Sheet 2 of 4


0387-00-0651 (XG-CE)
0387-00-0689
Sheet 3 of 4


0387-00-0651 (XG-CE)
0387-00-0689
Sheet 4 of 4


FIGURE 5-65 Front End Daughter Board

0670-00-0611
0670-00-0627 (5L-CE)

FIGURE 5-66 Front End Daughter Board

0387-00-0611
0387-00-0627 (5L-CE)

FIGURE 5-67 SpO2 Daughter Board

0670-00-0619

FIGURE 5-68 SpO2 Daughter Board

0387-00-0619

FIGURE 5-69 VGA/EL Panel Board/VGA/LCD Panel Board Display Interface Assembly (XG)
0670-00-0617-02
0670-00-0617-03

0387-00-0617-02
0387-00-0617-03
Sheet 1 of 2

0387-00-0617-02
0387-00-0617-03
Sheet 2 of 2


Lin
FIGURE 5-72 Line Battery Board (Top and Bottom)

0670-00-0626
0670-00-0656


0387-00-0626
0387-00-0656

FIGURE 5-74 Termination Board (Top and Bottom)

0670-00-0648

FIGURE 5-75 Termination Board

0387-00-0648

6.0 Replacement Parts

6.1 Introduction ............................................................. 6-1
6.2 Available Replacement Parts and Sub-Assemblies .... 6-1
6.3 Product Variations and Options ............................... 6-1
6.4 Exchange Program .................................................. 6-2
6.5 Replacement Parts Pricing Information .................... 6-2
6.6 Ordering Information .............................................. 6-2
6.7 Abbreviations .......................................................... 6-4
6.1 Introduction
This chapter of the Service Manual provides information necessary to identify the
replacement parts and assemblies of the instrument.
6.2 Available Replacement Parts and Sub-Assemblies

The parts listings which follow are divided into two sections. The Isometric Drawings and the
accompanying parts lists identify the available chassis mounted components. A listing for the
components on each circuit board then follows.
6.3 Product Variations and Options

Product variations, due to differences for various line voltages, may require different
components. These variations are reflected, where necessary, on the parts lists.

Exchange Program Replacement Parts
6.4 Exchange Program

Datascope offers an exchange policy for most of the printed circuit board assemblies. This
program may provide the most expedient method of servicing the equipment. A standard
charge for this service is made. Contact the Datascope Service Department for details
concerning this exchange program.
Many circuit boards make extensive use of multilayer technology and high density
packaging. Individual component replacement is not recommended on these boards unless
the technician is properly equipped to repair multilayer circuit boards.
Circuit boards, returned as parts of the exchange program, that show evidence of improper
repair techniques and are damaged in the process are not considered for exchange.
Damaged boards will be invoiced at full value and no exchange credit will be applied.
6.5 Replacement Parts Pricing Information

Current parts prices and exchange charges can be determined by contacting Datascope,
Order Entry Department.
6.6 Ordering Information

Replacement parts and assemblies are available from Datascope Corp., and in Europe from
Datascope B.V. Please follow these guidelines when ordering replacement items for the
instrument.
1. Include the Model and Serial Number of the instrument.

2. Include the Datascope Part Number exactly as it appears in the Parts List under the
column, “Datascope Part Number.”
3. Include a description of the item.
Example Orders: 1. ea. P/N 0331-00-0064-01

Label, Keypad Overlay (w/IBP1 & 2),
Serial No. XXXX
2. ea. P/N 0212-12-0404

Screw, #4-40 x .25 lg. Pan Head,
Serial No. XXXX
NOTES:
Datascope Corp. maintains a policy of continuous development for product improvement

and reserves the right to change materials, specifications, and prices without notice.

Replacement Parts Ordering Information
Many components are described with sufficient detail to permit procurement through local
commercial channels. This applies to hardware, such as screws and fasteners, as well as to
certain electronic components, such as resistors, capacitors, certain integrated circuits and
transistors. However, in some cases, components are selected by Datascope to meet special
performance criteria above and beyond the component manufactures specifications. This
may apply to solid state components, relays and batteries. The use of other than Datascope
components in these applications may result in degradation of reliability or instrument
performance characteristics.

Abbreviations Replacement Parts
6.7 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations may appear in the parts listings which follow and/or through the
manual.
ABBREVIATION TERM
A/D Analog to Digital
AMP Amplifier
BUF Buffer
CAP Capacitor
CC Carbon Composition
CER Ceramic
CERM Ceramic
CNTR Counter
CONN Connector
CONT Controller
CONV Converter
CPU Central Processing Unit
DCDR Decoder
DIFF Differential
DIA Diastolic
DIO Diode
D/A Digital to Analog
ELEC Electrolytic
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
FXD Fixed
I.C. Intergrated Circuit
INT. CKT. Intergrated Circuit
KYBD Keyboard
LED Light Emitting Diode
MF Metal Film
MONO Monostable
MYLR Mylar
NTWK Network
OP Operational
PB Push Button
PIA Peripheral Interface Adaptor
POT Potentiometer
PRESS Pressure
PWR Power
RAM Random Access Memory
REC Receiver
STG Stage
STK Stacked
SUP Supply

Replacement Parts Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION TERM
SW Switch
SYST Systolic
TANT Tantalum
TRANS Transistor
TRANSIS Transistor
VAR Variable
VIA Versatile Interface Adapter
XDCR Transducer
XFMR Transformer
XSTL Crystal
XSTR Transistor

Abbreviations Replacement Parts

Replacement Parts Available Replacement Parts and Sub-Assemblies
FIGURE 6-1 Main Assembly

Available Replacement Parts and Sub-Assemblies Replacement Parts
FIGURE 6-2 Planar Display Assembly

FIGURE 6-3 XE El Display Assembly

FIGURE 6-4 Detail A

Electronic Frame - Top View

FIGURE 6-5 Detail A

Electronic Frame - Bottom View
With Datascope or Nellcor SpO2

FIGURE 6-6 Detail A

Electronic Frame - Bottom View
With Datascope or Masimo SpO2

FIGURE 6-7 Detail B/C

NIBP Subassembly

FIGURE 6-8 Detail C

Power Supply Subassembly

FIGURE 6-9 XG Color LCD Assembly

FIGURE 6-10 XG Rear Housing

with Sidestream Parts

TABLE 6-1 Replacement Parts
FIGURE
NO. DESCRIPTION PART NO.
1 Label, Keypad Overlay, 5L & LT 0331-00-0064-XX*
1 Label, Keypad Overlay, XG 0330-00-0017-XX*
N/S Label, Amber Mute Overlay Key 0334-00-1347
N/S Label, Blank, (Used w / no Recorder option) 0334-00-0973
2 LCD Filter Glare Screen 0378-00-0033
2 E.L. Filter Glare Screen 0378-00-0035
2 Color LCD Filter Glare Screen 0378-00-0038
3 LCD Front Housing (LT,5L) 0380-00-0187-02
3 E.L. Front Housing (LT,5L) 0380-00-0205-02
3 XG, Front Housing 0380-00-0298
3 XG, Front Housing (0998-00-0134-83-84-95-96)
0380-00-0298-02
3 XG, Front Housing (CE) 0380-00-0332-01
4 Label, Front Housing Logo (5 Lead) 0334-00-1341
4 Label, Front Housing Logo (LT) 0334-00-1354
5 Cable Assy., SpO2 patient Connector 0012-00-0431-06
5 Cable Assy; SpO2 patient connector (CE) 0012-00-1009
5 Cable Assy; SpO2 patient connector (Nellcor) 0012-00-1052
6 Cap, CO2 plug (CE) 0200-00-0311
7 PCB, Interconnect Bd. 0670-00-0576-01
7 PCB, Interconnect Bd. H/P Style 0670-00-0615
7 PCB, Interconnect Bd, (CE) 0670-00-0628
7 PCB, Interconnect Bd, HP (CE) 0670-00-0629
N/S Standoff, Pcb, 3/16"lg. 0361-41-0001
N/S Standoff, Pcb, 3/8" lg. 0361-41-0002
8 LCD Display 0160-00-0007
9 Cable, LCD to Panel bd. 0012-00-0676
10 Cable, CPU to Panel Bd. 0012-00-0744
11 Plastic Mesh 0349-00-0173
12 Cable, Speaker 0012-00-0257-01
13 Tape, Self Adhesive 0348-00-0152
14 Screw, #4-40 x .312 Lg. Pan Hd. 0121-04-0405
15 Bracket, Speaker 0406-00-0561
16 Panel Bd. (LCD Version, 5L & LT) 0670-00-0546
16 Panel Bd. (E.L. Version, 5L & LT) 0670-00-0500
16 VGA/EL Panel Bd. (XG) 0670-00-0617-01
16 VGA/LCD Panel Bd. (XG-Color LCD) 0670-00-0617-02
16 VGA/EL Panel Bd. (XG-CE) 0670-00-0617-03
17 Knob, Panel Board 0366-00-0079
N/S = Not Shown
* See tables on page 6-26 for the part numbers of various versions of the keypad overlays.
** This cable is part of the Daughter Bd. for all other versions other than XG-CE.

FIGURE
19 Panel, Left Side 0380-00-0207-02
19 Panel, Left Side (Nellcor input) 0380-00-0254-02
20 Battery (single battery) (2 req.) 0146-00-0043
21 Door, Battery 0370-00-0016-02
22 Latch, Battery Door 0105-00-0075
22A Strap, Battery Door 0346-00-0033
23 Recorder 0683-00-0441
23B Label, Loading Recorder's Paper 0334-00-1431
23C Door, Filler Plate (No recorder Version) 0370-00-0017-02
24 Cable, Assy., NIBP Module to CPU Bd. 0012-00-0593-04
25 NIBP Module Assy. 0997-00-0469
25 NIBP Module Assy. (5L-CE) 0997-00-0915-01
25 NIBP Module Assy. (XG-CE) 0997-00-0468
26 SCR, #6-32 x .312 lg. PN HD 0212-12-0605
27 Handle (1 piece) 0367-00-0052
28 Bracket, NIBP, Left 0406-00-0543
28 Bracket, NIBP, Left (SSCO2) 0406-00-0721
28 Bracket, NIBP, Left (CE) 0406-00-0703
29 Bracket, NIBP, Right(CE) 0406-00-0704
29 Bracket, NIBP, Right 0406-00-0541
30 Back Housing English / French 0380-00-0186-02
30 Back Housing English (Sidestream) 0380-00-0186-03
30 Back Housing German (5L) 0380-00-0236-02
30 Back Housing (XG-CE with Sidestream) 0380-00-331-01
30 Back Housing (XG-CE without Sidestream) 0380-00-331-02
31 SCR, #6-32 x .50 lg PN HD 0212-12-0608
N/S Label, Caution (top under handle) 0334-00-1428
N/S Clamp, cable, Adhesive Backed 0343-05-0002
N/S Label, Inside Datasette Door 0334-00-1429
N/S Label, Serial Number (blank number) 0334-00-1358
32 Cable Assy, Line Battery 0012-00-0662-02
to Power Connector And Switch
32 Cable Assy, Line Battery 0012-00-1008
to Power Connector and Switch (5L-CE)
32 Cable Assy, Line Battery 0012-00-1070
to Power Connector and Switch (XG-CE)
33 Cable Assy, Recorder to CPU 0012-00-0659
33 Cable Assy, Recorder to CPU (XG-CE) 0012-00-1067
34 Plate, Luer 0386-00-0162
35 Battery Holder Assy. 0997-00-0292
N/S = Not Shown

FIGURE
36 Cable Assy., CPU to +12/-23.5 V Supply Bd. 0012-00-0673
37 Cable Assy., SpO2 to CPU Bd. 0012-00-0658
38 Cable Assy., Frontend to CPU Bd. 0012-00-0674
39 SCR #4-40 x 1/4 lg. PN HD Mach. 0212-12-0404
40 Insulator Front End Board 0349-00-0140
41 Keypad, Switch Membrane (5L & LT) 0331-00-0068
41 Keypad, Switch Membrane (XG) 0331-00-0092
41 Keypad, Switch Membrane (XG-Color LCD) 0331-00-0098
42 Cover, Frontend 0200-00-0284
43 Label, w/Datascope SpO2 0334-00-1044-XX*
43 Label, w/Nellcor SpO2 0334-00-1161-XX*
43 Label, w/Masimo SpO2 0334-00-1457-XX*
44 SCR, #8-32 x 3/16 lg, Set Hex 0212-05-0806-21
45 Pin, Handle 1/8" Dia. (2 required) 0226-00-0015
45A Washer, .03 Thick White Rubber (2 required) 0221-00-0116
46 Washer , Lock Internal Tooth 0210-09-0006
47 Nut, Hex 6-32 (used to secure cable to Interconnect Bd.) 0223-00-0006
47A Cable Interconnect GND 0012-00-0701
48 Frame, Board Mount 0426-00-0061
49 Screw, #4, 5/16 lg. PH Self Tapping 0213-09-0405
49 Screw, #4-40 x 7/16 Lg. PH Self Tapping 0213-08-0407
49A Spacer, Nylon 0361-09-0004
50 Washer, Internal Tooth #4 0210-09-0004
51 Datasette, (Table 6-1 on page 6-17) 0670-00-0561-XX
51 Datasette, (Table 6-1 on page 6-17) 0670-00-0574-XX
52 CPU Bd. Assy. (0998-00-0126-XX, 0998-00-0133-XX, 0670-00-0591
w/o battery)
52 CPU Bd Assy. (0998-00-0131-XX, 5L-CE 0670-00-0623
w/o battery)
52 CPU Bd Assy. (0998-00-0134-XX, 5L, XG 0670-00-0631
w/o battery)
52 CPU Bd Assy. (0998-00-0137-XX, XG-CE 0670-00-0651
w/o battery)
52 CPU Bd. Assy. (0998-00-0134-XX, 5L, XG 0670-00-0688
w/o battery) 5L-S/N 10000 and above, XG-S/N 15000
and above
52 CPU Bd. Assy. (0998-00-0137-XX, XG-CE 0670-00-0689
w/o battery) S/N 15000 and above
52A Termination Bd. (loc. J68 on CPU Bd), XG-CE 0670-00-0648
53 Cable , Clamp (White) 0343-00-0066
54 PCB, Front End Bd. 0670-00-0560-03
N/S = Not Shown

FIGURE
54 PCB, Front End Bd. H/P option 0670-00-0560-04
54 PCB, Front End Bd (5L-CE) 0670-00-0624-01
54 PCB, Front End Bd HP (5L-CE) 0670-00-0624-02
54 PCB, Front End Bd (XG-CE, 54A not used) 0670-00-0620-01
54 PCB, Front End Bd HP (XG-CE, 54A not used) 0670-00-0620-02
54A Daughter Bd. 0670-00-0611
54A Daughter Bd (5L-CE) 0670-00-0627
56 Tape, Closed Cell Vinyl 1.8" thick 0215-00-0093-01
57 Rivet, Snap 0225-00-0001
58 PCB, Control Board 0670-00-0375
58 PCB, Control Board 0670-00-0657
59 Standoff, Hex MF Nylon #4-40 0361-32-0250
60 NIBP Pump, w/o Cable Assembly 0119-00-0116
60 NIBP Pump, w/o Cable Assembly (used with 0104-00-0019
0997-00-0468 & 0469 NIBP Modules)
61 Tubing, Silicone 1/8" ID x 1/4" OD 0008-10-0408
62 Filter, 43uF 0378-02-0002
63 Tape , Interconnecting 0215-08-0001
64 Chassis, NIBP Module 0441-00-0067
65 PCB, Pneumatic Assy. 0670-00-0447
65 PCB, Pneumatic Assy. CE (Linear Bleed) 0670-00-0605-01
66 Tubing, Silicone 1/16" ID x 1/8" OD 0008-10-0204
67 Standoff, Hex Metal #4-40 (CE) 0361-30-0437
67 Standoff, Hex Nylon #4-40 0361-32-0500
68 Cable Pneumatic Bd. to Control Bd. 0012-00-0656
69 Panel, Right Side (Power Input) 0380-00-0184-02
70 Label, Power Input 0334-00-0968
70 Label, Power Input w/o J1 conn. 0334-00-0968-04
(0998-00-0134-83,-84,-95,-96)
71 Insulator, Frame (for interconnect Bd.) 0349-00-0132
72 Switch, Curved Rocker 0261-00-0139-02
75 PCB, +12/-23.5 V Supply Bd. 0670-00-0450
76 PCB, Line Battery Supply Bd. 0670-00-0449
76 PCB, Line Battery Bd (5L-CE) 0670-00-0621
76 PCB, Line Battery Bd (XG) 0670-00-0626
76 PCB, Line Battery Bd (XG-CE) 0670-00-0656
77 Door, Datasette 0370-00-0015-02
78 Screw, #4-40 x .437 lg. Captive 0217-00-0005
N/S Washer, Captive Split, #4 0221-00-0114
79 Battery, CPU Bd. 0146-02-0001
N/S = Not Shown

FIGURE
80 Shield, Mylar 0349-00-0122
81 Plate, Pump (used with 0997-00-0468 and 0997-00- 0386-00-0225
0469 NIBP Modules)
81 Plate, Pump 0386-00-0154
82 Muffler 0103-00-0329
83 Filter, 5um 0378-02-0001
84 Check Valve 0103-00-0457
85 Screw, Mach, Metric Flat Hd. Cross Recessed 0211-27-0001
M4 - 0,7 x 8 Lg
86 PCB, SpO2 Bd. (Datascope) 0670-00-0482
86 PCB, SpO2 Interface Bd. Nellcor 0670-00-0557
86 PCB, SpO2 Interface Bd. (MS-1) 0670-00-0665-01
86 PCB, SpO2 Interface Bd. (Nellcor) 0670-00-0665-02
N/S Bumper (3 req. on back of bd.) 0348-00-0154
87 Wire, 18 ga. 0006-02-1854
N/S Ring Terminal 0210-19-0006
88 PCB SpO2 Daughter Bd. (CE) 0670-00-0619
89 Pneumatic fitting, Luer Male(w/ washer & nut) 0103-00-0223
90 Insulator Cover 0349-00-0131
90 Insulator Cover (XG-CE) 0349-00-0289
91 Spacer, P/S Bd 0361-00-0153
92 Clamp, Cable, 3/16, Self Adhesive 0343-00-0007
93 Ault Power Supply (External Power Supply) 120V, 5L-CE 0014-00-0027-22
Units only
93 Ault Power Supply (External Power Supply) 220V, 0014-00-0027-23
3L, 5L, LT
93 Ault. Power Supply, 3L, 5L, LT 0014-00-0173-01
93 Ault. Power Supply, XG 0014-00-0173-04
N/S Line Cord (Domestic) 0012-25-0001
N/S Line Cord (Europe) 0012-25-0002
94 CO2 Interface Bd. (0998-00-0126-XX, 0998-00-0131- 0670-00-0497
XX,0998-00-0133-XX)
94 CO2 Interface Bd. (0998-00-0134-XX, 0670-00-0632-02
0998-00-0137-XX)
95 Cable, CPU to +12/-23v Bd. to CO2 Interface Bd.(5L-CE) 0012-00-0738
95 Cable, CPU to +12/-23v Bd. to CO2 Interface Bd. (XG) 0012-00-1053
95 Cable, CPU to +12/-23v Bd. to CO2 Interface Bd. (XG- 0012-00-1071
CE)
95 Cable, CPU to + 1/2v/-23v Bd. To CO2 Interface Bd. 0012-00-1100
And SpO2 Interface Bd.
96 Cable with CO2 Left side Connector 0012-00-0733
96 Cable with CO2 Left side Connector (5L-CE) 0012-00-1006
N/S = Not Shown

FIGURE
96A CO2 Left side Panel Connector 0131-00-0243
96B CO2 Left side Panel Connector (XG-CE w/GND) 0131-00-0244
97 Cable, CO2 Control Bd. to CO2 Interface Bd. 0012-00-0743
97 Cable, CO2 Contr. Bd. to CO2 Interface Bd. (XG) 0012-00-1046
98 CO2 Control Module (0998-00-0126-XX, 0671-00-0001
0998-00-0131-XX,0998-00-0133-XX)
98 CO2 Control Module (0998-00-0134-XX) 0671-00-0118
98 CO2 Control Module (0998-00-0137-XX) 0671-00-0120
99 Plate, CO2 Mounting (Nellcor SpO2, 5L-CE) 0426-00-0052
99 Plate, CO2 Mounting (5L-CE) 0386-00-0221
99 Plate, CO2 Mounting (Nellcor SpO2, SSCO2) 0386-00-0230
99 Plate, CO2 Mounting (XG-CE) 0386-00-0230
99 Plate, CO2 Mounting (XG w/Nellcor, Masimo) 0386-00-0234
100 Standoff, #4-40 x .43 Lg Hex 0361-30-0180
101 Insulator, Spo2 Bd. 0349-00-0141
101 Insulator, SpO2 Interface Bd. 0349-00-0300
102 Cable, CPU to CO2 Interface to SpO2 Bd. 0012-00-0737
103 Clamp, CO2 Connector 0343-00-0070
104 Screw, #2-56 x .375 Mach FH 82 Degree 0212-16-0206
105 Bumper 0348-00-0161
106 PCB, Nellcor, Pulse Oximetry Module 0671-00-0007
107 Bracket, Connector Nellcor 0406-00-0635
108 Door, Connector, Nellcor 0307-00-0021
109 Nut Fastener Nellcor 0220-07-0002
110 Screws 0212-04-0403
111 Cable Assy, SpO2 Interface/Nellcor 0012-00-0885
112 Terminal, Equipotential 0124-00-0104-01
113 Washer, German Green-Yellow 0124-00-0104-02
114 Washer, 1/4 Lock 0124-00-0104-03
115 Nut, M6 x 1.00 Thread 0124-00-0104-04
116 Cable Assy., German Ground 0012-00-0829
117 Screw, #6-32 x 1 1/2" LG (German ver, Only) 0212-14-0624
118 Spacer, Round Nylon (German Ver. Only) 0361-08-0014
119 Thumb Screw 0211-00-0138
120 Shield, E.L. Display (CE) 0337-00-0098
121 E.L. Display w/ Power Supply Bd. (Planar) 0160-00-0009
122 Cable, Power Supply to E.L. Display 0012-00-0735
123 Cable, Power Supply to E.L. Panel Bd. 0012-00-0734
123 Cable, Power Supply to E.L. Panel bd. (CE) 0012-00-1007
124 Mylar Insulator, E.L. Power Supply 0349-00-0172
N/S = Not Shown

FIGURE
125 SCR # 4-40 x 1/4 Lg. PN HD Mach. 0212-12-0404
126 Mylar Insulator, CO2 Frame (Masimo) 0349-00-0268
126 Mylar Insulator, CO2 Frame (Nellcor, CE) 0349-00-0284
127 Washer, Nylon 0210-07-0004
128 Bracket, XG Screen 0406-00-0694
128 Bracket, XG-CE Screen 0406-00-0726
129 Feet 0348-00-0182
130 Insulator, XG Front Panel Bd. 0349-00-0266
131 XG E.L. Display 0160-00-0044
131 XG Color LCD Display 0160-00-0028
N/S Backlight, Color Display 0149-00-0009
132 Bracket, XG Speaker 0870-00-0038
133 Gasket, Display 0348-00-0181
134 Clamp, Cable 0343-05-0001
135 Cable, Monochrome 20 Pin 0012-00-1005
136 Cable, Speaker 0012-00-0257-01
137 Insulator, Plastic Mesh 0349-00-0173
138 Scr #6-32 x 1/4 Lg. Pan Hd 0212-12-0604
139 Scr #4-40 x 3/16 Lg. Pan Hd 0212-12-0403
140 Scr #2-56 x 3/16 Lg. Pan Hd 0212-12-0203
141 Shield, EMC, EL Display (XG-CE) 0337-00-0109
142 Tubing, Heat Shrink (CE) 0008-01-0009
143 Connector 0012-00-1012
144 Label, Passport XG, Central Silence 0334-00-1381-01
144 Label, Passport XG, Central Silence (Spanish) 0334-00-1381-02
144 Label, Passport XG, Central Silence (German) 0334-00-1381-03
144 Label, Passport XG, Central Silence (French) 0334-00-1381-04
144 Label, Passport XG, Central Silence (Italian) 0334-00-1381-05
144 Label, Passport XG, Admit/Discharge/Silence 0334-00-1382-01
144 Label, Passport XG, Admit/Discharge/Silence (Spanish) 0334-00-1382-02
144 Label, Passport XG, Admit/Discharge/Silence (German) 0334-00-1382-03
144 Label, Passport XG, Admit/Discharge/Silence (French) 0334-00-1382-04
144 Label, Passport XG, Admit/Discharge/Silence (Italian) 0334-00-1382-05
144 Label, Passport 3L and 5L, Central Silence 0334-00-1197
145 Mounting Rail, Left 0436-00-0179
146 Mounting Rail, Right 0436-00-0180
147 Bracket, Cable 0406-00-0795
149 Bracket, Board Mtg 0406-00-0700
150 Scr #6-32 x 3/16 Lg. Pan Hd 0212-12-0603
N/S = Not Shown

FIGURE
151 Cable, Assy DC/AC Inverter 0012-00-1040
152 Cable, Assy Signal Driver 0012-00-1039
153 High Voltage Power Supply Bd. (XG- Color LCD) 0014-00-0177
155 Tubing, Input Fitting to Filter 7.25” 0103-00-0450
155 Tubing, Filter to Pump Inlet 2.25” 0103-00-0450
155 Tubing, Pump Output to Exhaust Fitting 0103-00-0450
156 Luer, Female Input (bent) 0103-00-0447
156 Luer, Female Input (straight, XG-CE) 0103-00-0448
157 Nut, 1/4 - 32 NEF-2B 0220-00-0089
158 Filter Housing Assembly 0103-00-0446-02
(includes items 159,160 and 161)
159 Filter 0103-00-0452
160 O-Ring 0354-00-0050
161 Cap 0200-00-0318
162 Pump, Assembly 0104-00-0017
163 Screw, Shock Mount 0217-00-0010
164 Shock Mount, Grommet 0348-00-0184
165 Bracket, Pump Assembly 0406-00-0719
166 Coupling Panel Mount 0103-00-0453
167 Label, Service Diagram For Internal Tubing 0334-00-1413
168 Nut, Exhaust Coupling 0220-00-0090
169 Nut Plate, Exhaust Coupling 0386-00-0229
170 Label, Filter 0334-00-1407
171 Label, Pump Exhaust 0334-00-1408
172 Insulator, Front end Bd. 0349-00-0287
173 Cable, Interconnect to Front End Bd. (XG-CE) 0012-00-1064**
174 Insulator, SpO2 ESD Bd. 0349-00-0273
175 Screw, 4-40 X .375 PN HD 0212-12-0406
176 Cable, SpO2 Daughter Bd. to SpO2 Bd., 16 pin 0012-00-1007
177 Inductor, Split Core (XG-CE) 0108-00-0088
178 Tie wrap 0125-02-0001
179 Bracket, CO2 Input Cable 0406-00-0725
180 Insulator, CPU Board 0349-00-0296
181 Tie Wrap 0125-01-0004
182 Screw, Pan Hd, 4-40 x 7/16 0212-12-0407
183 Washer, #4 0221-00-0004
184 Insulator 0432-02-0001
185 Clamp, Hose 0343-00-0067
186 Masimo Set Label 0334-00-1466
187 Cover, CO2 Connector 0200-00-0311
N/S = Not Shown

FIGURE
188 Cable, Masimo SpO2 0012-00-1204
188a Ferrite (for Masimo SpO2 cable) 0108-00-0076
189 Cable, Masimo (J2) 0012-00-1102
190 PCB, Masimo MS-1 Board 0671-00-0126
191 Screw, #4-40 x .375 Lg. NYL 0212-01-0406
192 Spacer, Retainer 0361-00-0440
193 Tie wrap 0125-01-0003
194 Screw, Metric (M 2.5 x 5) 0211-00-0140
195 Panel, Left side Masimo 0380-00-0336
196 Screw, 4-40 x . 563 Long PNHD 0212-12-0409
N/S Cable, Tie with Screw Hole 0125-00-0018
197 Bracket, cable Mount (Panel Bd) 0406-00-0752
198 Screw #4-40 x 1/4 Lg 82 Flat Head 0212-14-0404
199 Cable, CPU to +12 V/-23 V Bd. To 0012-00-1380
SpO2 Interface Bd. (Non-CO2 units)
N/S = Not Shown

Passport LT Keypad Overlays
LT - LCD LT - E.L.
English 0331-00-0064-17 0331-00-0064-18
Spanish 0331-00-0064-21 0331-00-0064-22
Passport 5L & LT with Optional Paks Keypad Overlays

LCD LCD WITHOUT E.L. WITH E.L. WITHOUT
WITH IBP 1 & 2 IBP 1 & 2 IBP 1 & 2 IBP 1 & 2
English 0331-00-0064-01 0331-00-0064-02 0331-00-0064-03 0331-00-0064-04
German 0331-00-0064-05 0331-00-0064-06 0331-00-0064-07 0331-00-0064-08
Spanish 0331-00-0064-09 0331-00-0064-10 0331-00-0064-11 0331-00-0064-12
French 0331-00-0064-13 0331-00-0064-14 0331-00-0064-15 0331-00-0064-16
Passport XG Keypad Overlays

XG WITH & IBP XG WITHOUT XG WITH IBP & XG WITHOUT
WITHOUT CO2 IBP & WITHOUT WITH CO2 IBP & WITH
PUMP CO2 PUMP PUMP CO2 PUMP
English 0330-00-0017-01 0330-00-0017-04 0330-00-0017-17 0330-00-0017-18
German 0330-00-0017-13 0330-00-0017-16 0330-00-0017-23 0330-00-0017-24
Spanish 0330-00-0017-05 0330-00-0017-08 0330-00-0017-19 0330-00-0017-20
French 0330-00-0017-09 0330-00-0017-12 0330-00-0017-21 0330-00-0017-22
Italian 0330-00-0017-25 0330-00-0017-26 0330-00-0017-27 0330-00-0017-28
Passport 5 Lead, 5L, LT, XG Datasettes

5 LEAD, XG-
5L, LT 5-CE XG XG CE
DATASETTE (0126- (0131- (0134 (0134 (0137
PART NUMBER XX) XX) -XX) -XX) -XX)
0670-00-0561-08 X X
0670-00-0561-09 X
0670-00-0561-10 Spanish Only
0670-00-0561-11 X French Only
0670-00-0574-03 X* X Allows Admit from
Bedside
0670-00-0574-08 X 5 Languges, CO2
kPa units w/ VISA
& Gas Module II/
Masimo SpO2 x/
XG2 Units only
0670-00-0574-09 X X X Nellcor “Sensor
Off” Audio, CO2
kPa units w/ VISA
& Gas Module II/
Masimo SpO2 w/
XG2 units only
* This datasette provides an upgrade for 5 Lead, 5L, LT units to allow Admit from Bedside feature.

Left Side Panel with Datascope SpO2 or Units without SpO2
CO2 IBP SPO2 NIBP SSCO2
0334-00-1044-01 X X X X
0334-00-1044-02 X X X
0334-00-1044-03 X X
0334-00-1044-04 X X X
0334-00-1044-05 X
0334-00-1044-06 X
0334-00-1044-07
0334-00-1044-08 X X
0334-00-1044-11 X X X X X
0334-00-1044-12 X X X X
Left Side Panel Label with Nellcor Sp02

0334-00-1161-03 X X
0334-00-1161-04 X X X
0334-00-1161-05 X X X X
0334-00-1161-06 X X X X
0334-00-1161-07 X X X X X
0334-00-1161-08 X X X
Left Side Panel Label with Masimo Sp02

0334-00-1457-01 X X X X X
0334-00-1457-02 X X X
0334-00-1457-03 X X
0334-00-1457-04 X X X X

0670-00-0375
NIBP BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0657
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION REFERENCE

1 0388-00-0375 PCB, NIBP
2
3
4
5 0315-00-0333 RES, 33K 5%, 1/4W R1
6 0315-00-0222 RES, 2.2K 5%, 1/4W R3, R4

7 0315-00-0102 RES, 1K 5%, 1/4W R5, R11, R12, R16,
R115
8 0315-00-0202 RES, 2K 5%, 1/4W R6
9 0315-00-0303 RES, 30K 5%, 1/4W R7
10 0309-00-1001 RES, 1K 1%, 1/8W R8, R41
11 0309-00-1214 RES, 1.21M 1%, 1/8W R9
12 0309-00-5903 RES, 590K 1%, 1/8W R10, R122
13 0309-00-0103 RES, 10K 5%, 1/4W R13-15, R27, R28,
R103, R114, R119
14 0309-00-0101 RES, 100W 5%, 1/4W R120, R121
15 0309-00-1103 RES, 110K 1%, 1/8W R19
16 0309-00-3572 RES, 35.7K 1%, 1/8W R20
17 0309-00-2212 RES, 22.1K 1%, 1/8W R21
18 0309-00-1213 RES, 121K 1%, 1/8W R22
19 0309-00-2431 RES, 2.43K 1%, 1/8W R23
20 0309-00-2803 RES, 280K 1%, 1/8W R24
21 0309-00-4992 RES, 49.9K 1%, 1/8W R26
22 0315-00-0472 RES, 4.7K 5%, 1/4W R17, R34, R43, R116
23 0315-00-0104 RES, 100K 5%, 1/4/W R37, R117
24 0315-00-0473 RES, 47K 5%, 1/4W R44, R100, R102
25 0315-00-0223 RES, 22K 5%, 1/4W R101
26 0309-00-2492 RES, 24.9K 1%, 1/8W R104
27 0315-00-0151 RES, 150W 5%,1/4W R105
28 0309-00-2942 RES, 29.4K 1%, 1/8W R110
29 0309-00-1503 RES, 150K 1%, 1/8W R111
30 0309-00-7682 RES, 76.8K 1%, 1/8W R112
31 0309-00-2743 RES, 274K 1%, 1/8W R113
32 0309-00-1002 RES, 10K 1%, 1/8W R118
33
34
35 0307-06-2103 RES NET, 10K, 10 PIN SIP RP1, RP2
36 0307-00-0029 RES NET, 10K, 14 PIN DIP RP3, RP4
* This component is used on the 0670-00-0657 board only.

(CONTINUED) 0670-00-0657

37 0307-00-0020 RES NET, 5.6K, 10 PIN SIP RP5
38 0311-05-0502 RES ADJ, 5K 10%, S.T. VR1
39
40
41 0290-02-3226 CAP, TANT, 22uF, 20%, C91, C92, C93
35V
42 0283-05-0220 CAP, 22Pf 10%, 200V C125
43 0290-02-1226 CAP, TANT, 22uF, 20%, C1, C90, C114
20V
44 0283-05-0330 CAP, 33pF 10%, 200V C2, C3
45 0283-05-0103 CAP, .01uF 10%, 00V C4, C8, C14, C15,
C17, C18, C20, C21,
C27-30, C102, C104,
C105, C122, C123
46 0283-04-0104 CAP, .1uF 10%, 100V C10, C11, C12, C16,
C101, C103, C108,
C109, C110, C119,
C120, C124
47 0283-04-0224 CAP, .22uF 10%, 50V C13
48 0283-05-0472 CAP, .0047uF 10%, 100V C22
49 0285-00-0055 CAP POLY, .47uF C24, C25, C26
50 0283-05-0332 CAP, .0033uF 10%, 100V C95
51 0283-04-0473 CAP, .47uF 10%, 100V C100
52 0290-00-0110 CAP, TANT. 4.7uF 20%, C106, C107, C111,
50V C112
53 0283-05-0101 CAP, 100pF 10%, 200V C121
54 0283-04-0474 CAP, 0.47uF 10%, 50V C19
55 0290-02-3105 CAP, TANT. 1.0uF C113, C5-C7, C9
56 0153-00-0085 DIODE, IN6263 CR1-8, CR20-22
57 0153-00-0014 DIODE, IN914 CR9, CR18, CR19,
CR23, CR24, CR27*
58 0153-00-0098 DIODE, IN4004 CR10
59 0153-00-0069 DIODE, IN5817 CR25
60
61
62
63 0151-00-0195 XSTR, IRLD014 PWR Q1
MOSFET
64 0151-00-0052 XSTR, 2N4401 Q4
65
66
67 0155-00-0205 IC, 74LS244 OCTAL U3
BUFFER
68 0155-00-0440 IC,DS1244Y, 32K x 8 U1

(CONTINUED) 0670-00-0657

69 0155-00-0439 IC, 74HCT573, OCTAL D U2
LATCH
70 0155-00-0426 IC, 74HCT244, OCTAL U18
BUFFER
71 0155-00-0400 IC, MAX 232, DUAL CHNL U4
RS232
72 0155-00-0442 IC, 80C196KB, uCNTLR U5
73 0155-90-0111 IC, NIBP U6, EPROM U6
74 0155-90-0112 IC, NIBP U7, EPLD U7
75 0155-00-0404 IC, DG201, ANALOG SW U8
76 0155-00-0424 IC, AD7226, QUAD 8-BIT U9
DAC
77 0151-00-0068 IC, 79L05, -5V REG U10
78 0155-00-0053 IC, LM324, LO PWR OP- U11, U21
AMP
79 0153-00-0093 IC, SG3503, VOLTAGE U12
REF
80 0155-00-0443 IC, LT1014, QUAD OP- U13, U14
AMP
81 0151-00-0100 IC, ULN2003, XSTR ARRAY U15
82 0155-00-0213 IC, 74HCOD, QUAD 2 IN U17
NAND
83 0155-00-0438 IC, 74HCT245, OCTAL U19
BUS XCVR
84
85
86
87 0158-01-0024 CRYSTAL Y1
88 0682-00-0059 SENSOR BLOOD PT1
PRESSURE
89
90
91 0136-24-1026 HEADER, DUAL 13, 26 J28
PIN
92 0136-24-1020 HEADER, DUAL 10, 20 J31, J33
PIN
93 0136-24-1050 HEADER, DUAL 25, 50 J32
PIN
94 0136-57-0068 SOCKET, IC PLCC 68 PIN XU5
95 0136-01-1028 SOCKET, IC, 28 PIN XU6
96 0136-01-1020 SOCKET, IC, 20 PIN XU7, XU9
97 0432-01-0002 MOUNTING PAD
98 0214-00-0074 INSULATOR BEAD
99

(CONTINUED) 0670-00-0657

100 0125-01-0001 CABLE TIE WRAP
101 0285-10-0474 CAP, 0.47uF, 2%, 50V *C126
102 0307-00-1213 RES, 121K, 1%, 1/8W *R124

PNEUMATICS BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0447

1 0670-00-0447-01 Pneumatics Board English
2 0670-00-0447-02 Pneumatics Board
German
3 0670-00-0447-03 Pneumatics Board French
4 0670-00-0447E Exchange Board
5 0290-11-0001 Cap., 3300uF, 25V C1
6 0108-00-0065 Cap., 0.1uF, 100V, 10% C2
7 0136-50-0003 Header, 3P J29
8 0136-24-1020 Header, 20P J30
9 0136-24-1014 Header, 14P J34
10 0108-06-1000 Choke L1
11 0108-00-0065 Inductor, Dual Winding L2
12 0262-00-0005 Switch, Pressure SW1
13 0119-00-0130 Valve V1
14 0119-00-0130 Valve V2
15 0119-00-0130 Valve V3
16 0119-00-0130 Valve V4
17 0119-00-0131 Valve V5
18 0212-12-0418 Screw, PH,#4-40 x 1.12
Lg
19 0223-00-0004 Nut, Hex, #4
20 0215-00-0093-01 Tape, Close Cell, .25 x
1.6 (2 PCS)
21 0103-00-0333 Manifold
22 0103-00-0331 Transition Barb
23 0103-00-0475 Restrictor / Filter
26
27 0008-10-0204 Tubing, Silicone, 1/16 x
1/8
28 0008-10-0408 Tubing, Silicone 1/8 x
1/4
29 0378-00-0002 Filtler, (43mm) 1/8 Barb
30
31 0103-00-0200 Adapter, 1/16 - 1/8
32 0103-00-0457 Check Valve
33 0103-00-0298 T - Adapter

LINE BATTERY BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0449
0670-00-0621
(5L-CE)

1 0124-00-0064 Test Point, Loop TP1
2 0131-07-0004 CONN., 4 pin single row rt J51
angle 0.156
3 0131-07-0006 CONN., 6 pin single row rt J53
angle 0.156
4 0136-17-0007 CONN., 7 pin single row header J55
0.125
5 0151-00-0115 TRANS., 2N7000 Q1, Q2
6 0151-00-0181 TRANS., IRFZ40 Q3
7 0153-00-0014 DIO., 1N4148 CR2-7
8 0153-00-0069 DIO., 1N5817 CR11, CR12
9 0153-08-0004 DIO., USD945 CR8-10
10 0155-00-0030 IC, LM4250 U1
11 0155-00-0578 VOLT REF., LT1004-1.2 CR1
12 0155-00-0587 IC, CD4093BE U2
13 0159-12-0021 FUSE, 2.5A, 5x20mm, TIME LAG F1
14 0159-12-0023 FUSE, 4A, 5x20mm, TIME LAG F2, F3
15 0283-05-0101 CAP., 100pf, 10%, 200V CER C4
16 0283-05-0104 CAP., 0.1uF, 10%, 100V, CER. C1, C3
17 0283-10-1103 CAP., 0.01uF, 5%, 100V,CER. C5, C6
18 0290-02-2106 CAP., 10uF, 20%, 25v, TANT C7
19 0309-00-1543 RES., 154K, 1%, 1/8W R2
20 0309-00-3573 RES., 357K,1%, 1/8W R4
21 0315-00-0104 RES., 100K, 5%, 1/4W R9, R10, R13
22 0315-00-0105 RES., 1M, 5%, 1/4W R8
23 0315-00-0106 RES., 10M, 5%, 1/4W R5, R6
24 0315-00-0120 RES., 12 OHM, 5%, 1/4W R14
25 0315-00-0205 RES., 2M, 5%, 1/4W R12
26 0315-00-0473 RES., 47K, 5%, 1/4W R11
27 0315-00-0824 RES., 820K, 5%, 1/4W R3
28 0348-00-0154 BOARD PAD
29 0352-00-0026 FUSE CLIP
30 0373-00-0047 HEAT SINK
31 0309-00-1184 RES., 1.18M, 1%, 1/8W R1
32 0136-28-0007 CONN., 14 pin double row .10 J54
34 0388-00-0449-B PCB
35 0014-00-0028 Power Supply, DC/DC Converter
36 0210-20-0002 Terminal, Crimp Ring, 22-16
AWG, #6
37 0006-05-1854 Wire, Stranded GRN/YEL

LINE BATTERY BOARD ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0449
0670-00-0621
(5L-CE)

38 0214-00-0074 Insulator Bead used on C1, C3
and C4, two each
39 0210-20-0004 Terminal Crimp Ring, 22-16 Use on 0670-00-
AWG, #4 0621 only

+12/-23 VOLT BOAD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0450

1 0315-00-0334 RES. 330K 5% 1/4W R18
2 0315-00-0101 RES. 100 ohm 5% 1/4W R25, 26
3 0315-00-0822 RES. 8.2K 5% 1/4W R10
4 0315-00-0202 RES 2K 5% 1/4W R20
5 0315-00-0103 RES. 10K 5% 1/4W R17, 19, 24
6 0315-00-0203 RES. 20K 5% 1/4W R9
7 0315-00-0473 RES 47K 5% 1/4W R15, 16
8 0315-00-0474 RES. 470K 5% 1/4W R14
9 0315-00-0514 RES. 510K 5% 1/4W R22, R23
10 0309-00-2320 RES. 232 ohm 1% 1/8W R13
11 0309-00-9530 RES. 953 ohm 1% 1/8W R4
12 0309-00-3651 RES. 3.65K 1% 1/8W R3
13 0309-00-4121 RES. 4.12K 1% 1/8W R12
14 0309-00-1692 RES. 16.9K 1% 1/8W R6
15 0309-00-2003 RES. 200K 1% 1/8W R5
16 0301-00-0101 RES. 100 ohm 5% 1/2W R1, 2
17 0322-01-X050 RES. .05 ohm 1% 3W R11
18 0283-05-0470 CAP. 47PF 10% 200V C5, 6
19 0283-05-0271 CAP. 270PF 10% 200V C13
20 0283-05-0102 CAP. .001mF 10% 200V C11
21 0285-00-0052 CAP. Poly .001mF 2% C15
22 0283-03-0472 CAP. .0047mF 10% 100V C14
23 0283-05-0103 CAP. .01mF 10% 100V C20
24 0283-04-0153 CAP. .015mF 10% 100V C17
25 0283-04-0104 CAP. .1mF 10% 100V C21
26 0283-04-0154 CAP. .15mF 10% 50V C18
27 0283-04-0474 CAP. .47mF 10% 50V C3, 4, 8, 16, 19, 22
28 0285-12-5225 CAP. 2.2mF CER C12
29 0290-09-4R76 CAP. AL El 4.7mF 50 VDC C7
30 0290-02-2106 CAP TANT 10mF 25V C23
31 0290-17-3221 CAP. 220mF 35V C9, 10
32 0290-00-0119 CAP. 1200mF +/- 20% 16V C1, 2
33 0153-00-0130 Diode MUR170E CR10
34 0153-00-0014 Diode 1N914 CR3, 7, 8
35 0153-00-0086 Diode UES1103 CR1, 2, 4
36 0153-00-0096 Diode VHE 1403 CR9
37 0153-00-0091 Diode 1N6275 CR5
38 0153-07-0091 Diode 1N6294A CR6
39 0151-00-0101 XSTR IRF 540 Q1
40 0151-00-0073 XSTR 2N2907A Q2, 4

+12/-23 VOLT BOAD ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0450

41 0151-00-0115 XSTR 2N7000 Q3
42 0155-00-0577 IC LM337L U3
43 0155-00-0098 IC LM393 U2
44 0155-00-0395 IC UC2843 U1
45 0108-00-0014 Ferrite Bead Smal L1 thr L6
46 0214-00-0074 Insulator Bead L1 & L2, L3 & L4, L5 & L6
47 0007-02-0022 Buswire AWG 22 Install through T2, L1,
L2, L3, L4, L5, L6
48 0120-00-0130 XFMR Flyback T1
49 0108-00-0031 XFMR Current Sense T2
50 0373-00-0032 Heat Sink XQ1, CR9
51 0136-17-0010 10 Pin Header J56
52 0124-00-0064 Test Pin TP1, TP2, TP3, TP4, TP5
53 0136-24-1016 16 Pin Header J57
54 0136-00-0152 14 Pin Header P58
55 0349-00-0056 Insulator, transistor Q1, CR9
56 0388-00-0450-A PCB
57 0159-27-0011 Fuse, Super Time Lag, 5 x F1
20mm, .630A
58 0352-00-0026 Fuse Clip
59 0214-00-0155 Washer, sholder, nylon Q1, CR9
60 0212-12-0404 Screw, 4-40 x .25 lg Q1, CR9
61 0223-00-0004 Nut, 4-40 Q1, CR9
62 0315-00-0120 RES. 12 ohm 5% 1/4 W R7, 8
63 0006-04-2800 20 AWG, Wire Blk

SPO2 BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0482
ITEM
NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION REFERENCE
1 0108-00-0058 CHOKE L1, L2, L3, L4, L5
2 0124-00-0064 TERMINAL TURRET TP1, TP2
3 0134-07-0004 CONN HDR 4P PC J22
100CX120H
4
5 0136-01-1018 IC SOCKET 18 PIN XU20
6 0136-01-1020 IC SOCKET 20 PIN XU41
7 0136-01-1028 IC SOCKET 28 PIN XU24, XU44
8 0136-01-1040 IC SOCKET 40 PIN XU40
9 0136-24-1014 CONNECTOR 14 PIN J24
10 0136-24-1016 CONNECTOR J23
HEADER, 16 PIN
11 0136-57-0044 SOCKET, 44 PIN XU37
12 0136-64-0050 CONNECTOR PC, J21
HEADER, STRAIGHT
13 0151-00-0037 XSTR 2N3645A Q5
14 0151-00-0061 XSTR 2N2222A Q4
15 0151-00-0086 XSTR 2N5308 Q1, Q2, Q3
16 0151-00-0115 MOSFET, 2N7000, N Q6
CHANNEL
17 0153-00-0010 DIODE ZENER 9.1V CR8
1N5239B
18 0153-00-0014 DIODE IN 914/4148 CR1, CR5, CR6, CR9,
CR12
19 0153-00-0085 DIODE IN6263 CR7
20 0153-00-0091 DIODE ZENER IN-6275 CR10, CR11
21 0153-00-0093 DIODE AD580/ U29
SG3503T
22 0155-00-0059 IC CD4011AE U26
23 0155-00-0107 IC, VOLTAGE U14
COMPARTOR LM 311N
24 0155-00-0129 IC TRI-STATE OCTAL U17, U18, U19, U25
74C374
25 0155-00-0151 IC TL082 U1
26 0155-00-0159 IC, PRECISION OP-AMP U6, U7
27 0155-00-0166 IC LM 337T U28
28 0155-00-0194 IC LM317T U27
29 0155-00-0210 IC CMOS DUAL 8I U23
CMTR 74HC393
30 0155-00-0392 IC LOW NOICE PRCN U4, U21
OP-AMP OP-27
31 0155-00-0393 IC 12 BIT MULTI. DAC U20
AD7541

SPO2 BOARD ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0482
ITEM
32 0155-00-0394 IC BI-FET SMP-HLD U13
LF398N
33 0155-00-0591-02 IC CMOS U40
MICROPROCESSOR
63X09E
34 0155-00-0404 IC DG201 QUAD SPST U3, U5, U10, U12
ANALOG SW
35 0155-00-0498 IC HEX INVERTER U30
74HCT04
36 0155-00-0590-02 IC 32KX8 STATIC RAM U44
37 0155-00-0438 IC 74HCT245 DIG, U45
OCT. BUS XCVER
38 0155-00-0473 IC., 74ACT74 U42, U43, U47
39 0155-00-0515 OCTAL BUFFER & LINE U46
DRIVERS
40 0155-00-0526 74HCT393 IC., U39
41 0155-00-0625 IC FLIP-FLOP 74HCT374 U35
42 0155-00-0426 IC OCTAL BUFFER U31, U32, U33, U34
74HCT244
43 0155-90-0061 EPROM ASSY, U24
SEQUENCER,
ACCUSAT
44 0155-90-0161 U41 PLD ASSY U41
45 0155-90-0162 U37 PLD ASSY U37
46 0158-05-0002 CRYSTAL, CLOCK Y1
OSCILLATOR
47 0215-03-0002 FOAM TAPE 3/4 XU27, XU28
48 0283-04-0104 CAP.,CERM.,.1UF C1, C8, C9, C11, C12,
C14, C15, C18, C19,
C27, C29, C30, C36,
C37, C48, C51, C52,
C53, C54, C55, C56,
C57, C58, C60, C62,
C63, C64, C65, C66,
C67, C68, C69, C82
49 0283-04-0474 CAP .47 UF 50V 10% C7, C10, C38, C43, C46
CER
50 0283-05-0101 CAP 100PF 200V 10% C33
CER
51 0283-05-0102 CAP., CER., .001UF, C70, C71, C72, C73,
10% 200V C74, C75, C79, C80,
C83, C84
52 0283-05-0103 CAP .01 UF 100V 10% C13, C16
CER
53 0283-05-0220 CAP 22P 200V 10% C5, C6, C31, C34
CER
54 0283-05-0221 CAP 220-PF 200V 10% C3
CER

ITEM
55 0283-05-0470 CAP 47 PF 200V 10% C4
CERM
56 0283-05-0471 CAP 470 PF 100V 10% C32
CER
57 0285-08-8201 CAP .0082MF C35
58 0285-15-0104 AP., .1UF 50V 2% C20, C21, C24, C25
59 0285-15-0223 CAPACITOR .022 UF C22, C23, C26, C28
60 0290-01-2220 CAP 22 UF 25V 50% C47
ALUM
61 0290-02-1226 CAP 22 UF 20V 20% C17
TANT
62 0290-02-2106 CAP 10 UF 25V 20% C41, C42, C44, C45,
TANT C49, C50, C76, C81,
C85
63 0307-06-2102 RES. NET 1K ,10 PIN RN4
64 0307-06-2103 RESISTOR NETWORK, RN3, RN5
10K OHM
65 0307-06-2562 RES. NETWK 5.6K RN1, RN2
66 0309-00-1002 RES 10K 1/W 1% MF R70, R71, R72, R73
67 0309-00-1003 RES. 100K 1/8W 1% R17, R21, R45, R47
FXD
68 0309-00-1243 RESISTOR 124K 1/8W R40, R42
1%
69 0309-00-1333 RESISTOR 133K 1/8W R4
1% FX
70 0309-00-1472 RES. 14.7 1/8W 1% R57
MF
71 0309-00-1502 RESISTOR 15K 1/8W R67
1% FX
72 0309-00-1503 RESISTOR 150K 1/8W R37, R38, R39, R41, R43
1% FX
73 0309-00-1621 RESISTOR 1.62K 1/8W R61, R62
1%
74 0309-00-1652 REX 16.5K 1/8W 1% R20
MF
75 0309-00-2004 RES. 2M 1%, 1/8W R6
76 0309-00-2320 RESISTOR 232 OHM R59, R60
1/8W 1%
77 0309-00-3013 RESISTOR 301K 1/8W R44
1% FX
78 0309-00-3241 REX 3.24K 1/8W 1% R48
MF
79 0309-00-3923 RESISTOR 392K 1/8W R18, R63
1% FX
80 0309-00-4752 RESISTOR 47.5K 1/8W R58
1% FX
81 0309-00-4753 RES. 475 K 1%, 1/8W R19

ITEM
82 0309-00-5111 RES. 5.11K 1/8W 1% R66
FX
83 0309-00-6653 RES 665K 1% 1/8W R5
84 0310-00-0100 RES. 10 OHM 1% R24
85 0315-00-0100 10 OHM 1/4W 5% R65, R68, R69
86 0315-00-0102 RES. CF 1K 1/4W 5% R1, R2, R29, R30, R53,
R55, R77, R78, R84
87 0315-00-0103 RES. CF 10K 1/4W 5% R11, R14, R22, R23, R56,
R76
88 0315-00-0104 RES. CF 100K 1/4W R12, R27, R28
5%
89 0315-00-0106 RES. CF 10M 1/4W R64
5%
90 0315-00-0204 RES. CF 200K 1/4W R8
5%
91 0315-00-0205 RES. CF 2M 1/4W 5% R7
92 0315-00-0220 RES. CF 22 1/4W 5% R26
93 0315-00-0270 RES. CF 27 1/4W 5% R25
94 0315-00-0393 RES. CF 39K 1/4W 5% R13, R75
95 0315-00-0472 RES. CF 4.7K 1/4W R74, R79
5%
96 0315-00-0473 RES CF 47K 1/4W 5% R3
97 0315-00-0820 RES., CF 82 1/4W 5% R80, R81, R82, R83
98 0320-00-1002 RES. METAL FILM, 10K., R15, R16, R46, R49, R54
.1%, 50PPM
99 0320-00-1004 RES., 1 MEG., .1% 1/ R52
8W. MF
100 0320-00-2913 RES. 291K. .1%, 1/8W R51
MF
101 0320-00-5302 RES. 53.OK, .1%, 1/ R50
8W, MF
102 0388-00-0482-A PCB
103 0432-01-0002 BASE TRANS MTG PAD XU29
TO-5
104 0155-00-0572 IC, DUAL JFET OPAMP, U2, U8, U9, U11, U22
TL032C
106 0320-00-1243 RES. MF 124K 0.1% R34, R36
50PPM
107 0320-00-1503 RES. MF 150K 0.1% R31, R32, R33, R35
50PPM
108 0290-02-3106 CAP,10 MF 35V 20% C77, C78
TANT

CO2 INTERFACE 0670-00-0497

1 0014-00-0035 POWER MODULE, DUAL VC1
OUTPUT,±15V
2 0060-00-0304-01 PASSPORT CO2 INTERFACE
MODULE, MODULE
SPECIFICATION
MODULE, DESIGN
DOCUMENTATION
MODULE, WORST CASE
ANALYSIS
MODULE, RELIABILITY
ANALYSIS
MODULE, VALIDATION TEST
PLAN
MODULE, TEST
SPECIFICATION
8 0108-00-0038 INDUCTOR, 120UH, 2A L2
9 0108-00-0058 CHOKE, FERRITE BEAD L1
10 0131-07-0004 CONN,FRICTION J93
LOCK,RA,4PIN
11 0136-82-0010 HEADER, .100 CTR STR J92
LOCKING/POLARIZING-10
PIN
12 0136-24-1004 HEADER,DOUBLE ROW,ST,4 JP1/JP2
PIN
13 0136-56-1324 SOCKET,DIP,24PIN, 0.3 U4
WIDE
14 0136-57-0044 SOCKET, PLCC 44 U1
15 0136-24-1050 HEADER,DOUBLE J91
ROW,ST,50 PIN
16
17 0155-00-0426 IC, 74HCT244, OCTAL U3
BUFFER
18 0155-00-0516 IC, 74HCT377, OCTAL D- U2
TYPE FLIP-FLOP
19 0155-90-0211 IC, MICROCONTROLLER, U1
PGM'D
20 0155-90-0212 IC,EP600,EPLD,PGM'D U4
21 0158-01-0023 CRYSTAL, 3.6864MHz Y1
22
23 0215-03-0001 TAPE, DOUBLE COATED Used under C9,C10
FOAM
24 0283-01-5180 CAP, MICA,18PF,500v,5% C1
25 0283-04-0104 CAP, CER,0.1UF,100v,10% C3,C4,C5,C11,C12

CO2 INTERFACE (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0497

26 0283-05-0102 CAP,CER, C6,C7
0.001UF,200v,10%
27 0283-05-0220 CAP, CER,22PF,200v,10% C2
28 0290-00-0070 CAP, ALUM C10
ELEC,1000UF,25V,
20%,LOW ESR
29 0290-01-2220 CAP,ALUM ELEC,22UF,25v, - C8
10 / +50%
30 0290-17-3221 CAP,ALUM ELEC, 220UF, C9
35V, 20%,LOW ESR
31
32 0307-00-0082 RES, 3.74 OHM, 2W, 1% R2
33 0307-06-2103 RES NTWK,10K, SIP,9 RP1
ELEMENT
34 0315-00-0102 RES,CF, 1K, 1/4W, 5% R3
35 0315-00-0106 RES, CF,10M, 1/4W, 5% R1
36 0387-00-0497 SCHEMATIC, CO2
INTERFACE MODULE
37 0388-00-0497 DRILL & FAB, , CO2 PC BOARD
INTERFACE MODULE
38
39 0530-00-0021 HOT MELT GLUE USE UNDER L2

0670-00-0500
0670-00-0622
E.L. PANEL BOARD ASSEMBLY (5L-CE)

1 0290-00-1015 CAP, 100uF, Alum. 35V C1
20%
2 0283-04-0104 CAP, 0.1uF 100V 10% C2
3 0153-00-0162 LED Red, Tinted, D1
Diffused
4 0153-05-0033 LED Green, Tinted, D2
Diffused
5 0315-00-0151 RES, 150, 1/4W 5% R1, R5, R6
6 0315-00-0101 RES, 100, 1/4W 5% R2, R3, R7, R8
7 0315-00-0103 RES, 10K, 1/4W 5% R4
8 0155-00-0239 IC, 74ACT240, Octal U1
Inverting Buffer
9 0151-00-0115 FET, N-Channel Q1
2N7000
10 0136-24-1040 Header, 40 Pin St. J71, Key Pin 13
Double Row
Single Row
Double Row
13
14 0136-22-0002 Header, 2 Pin St. J75
Single Row
15 0124-00-0064 Terminal, Turret PC TP1, TP2, TP3
16 0388-00-0500 Printed Circuit Board
17 0361-09-0402 Standoff, Broaching #4-40 x .125 LG.
Type,, PCB
18 0155-00-0515 IC, 74HCT240, Octal U1 - use on 0670-00-
Inverting Buffer 0622 only

PANEL BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0546

1 0388-00-0546-A Printed Wiring Board
2 0290-09-1015 CAP, 100UF, Alum. C1
35V, 20%
3 0283-06-0104 CAP, 0.1UF,Cer., 100 C2
V, 1%
4 0153-00-0162 LED Red, Tinted, D1
Diffused
5 0153-05-0033 LED Green, Tinted, D2
Diffused
6 0136-24-1040 Header, 40 pin J71
7 0136-22-0018 Header18 J74
8 0136-22-0012 Header 12 J72
9 0136-00-0151 Header 6 J73
10 0136-22-0002 Header, 2 pin ST Single J75
Row
11 0151-00-0115 FET,N-Channel 2N7000 Q1
12 0315-00-0153 RES, 15K, 1/4W 5% R1
13 0311-00-0126 5K Pot. 10% Lin. R2
14 0315-00-0152 RES, 1.5K, 1/4W 5% R3
15 0315-00-0103 RES, 10K, 1/4W 5% R4
16 0315-00-0151 RES, 150, 1/4W 5% R5,R6
17 0014-00-0029 DC/AC Inverter M1
18 0366-00-0079 Knob
19 0124-00-0064 Test point terminal TP1,TP2,TP3,TP4

SPO2 NELLCOR INTERFACE BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0557

1 0014-00-0047 DC-DC Converter, +5V to VC1, Burr Brown
+5V, Isolated PWR1300A
2 0014-00-0048 DC-DC Converter, +5V to VC2, Burr Brown
æ15V, Isolated PWR1305A
3 0108-00-0070 Inductor, 60uH, 3A L2
4 0108-00-0058 Choke, Ferrite Bead L1
5 0136-24-1006 Header,Double Row, ST, 6 JP1/JP2/JP3
PIN
6 0136-24-1010 Header,Double Row, ST, 10 J22
PIN
7 0136-64-0050 Header, Double Row, J21
Latching, ST,50 PIN
8 0136-56-1324 Socket, DIP, 24 PIN, 0.3 U4
Wide
9 0136-57-0044 Socket, PLCC 44 U1
10 0136-70-0014 Header, 14 Pin, Double Row, J23, AMP 103310-2
Right-Angle, 0.100 Center,
Shrouded
11 0151-00-0035 Transistor, 2N3904 Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5,
Q6
12 0151-00-0061 Transistor, 2N2222A Q9, Q10
13 0151-00-0073 Transistor, 2N2907A Q7, Q8
14 0153-00-0014 Diode, 1N914 D1, D2, D3
15 0153-00-0093 SG3503T, 2.5V Reference U13
16 0155-00-0049 LM358, Dual Op Amp U12, U14
17 0155-90-0272 IC,EP600,EPLD, Programmed U4 (0155-00-0396)
18 0155-00-0426 IC, 74HCT244, Octal Buffer U3
19 0155-00-0516 IC, 74HCT377, Octald-Type U2
Flip-Flop
20 0155-00-0570 CNW136, Opto Isolator U7, U8, U9, U10, U11
21 0155-90-0271 IC, Microcontroller U1 (0155-00-0573)
22 0155-00-0835-01 74ACT14, Hex Inverter, U5, U6
Schmitt Trigger
23 0158-05-0011 Oscillator, 3.6864 MHz U15
24 0283-04-0104 CAP, MICA,0.1pF,100v,5% C1
25 0283-04-0104 CAP, CER,0.1UF,100v,10% C3, C4, C5, C9, C10,
C11, C12, C13, C14,
C15, C16, C17, C18,
C19, C20, C21, C22,
C23, C24, C25, C26,
C27, C28, C29, C35
26 0283-05-0102 CAP,CER, C6,C7,C30
0.001UF,200v,10%
27
28 0290-00-0106 22uF, 25V, Tantalum C32

SPO2 NELLCOR INTERFACE BOARD ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0557

29 0290-01-2220 CAP,ALUM ELEC,22UF,25v, - C8
10 / +50%
30 0290-02-3225 2.2uF, 35V, Tantalum C33, C34
31 0290-08-4733 Capacitor, 470uF, 16V, Al C31
Electrolytic
32 0307-00-0029 Resistor Network, 10K, RN1, 785-3-R10K
0.5%, T.F.
33 0307-06-2103 RES NTWK,10K, SIP,9 RN2
Element
34 0309-00-1502 RES, MF, 15.0K, 1/8W, 1% R31
35 0315-00-0102 RES,CF, 1K, 1/4W, 5% R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7,
R8, R30, R33
36 0315-00-0103 RES,CF, 10K, 1/4W, 5% R20, R21, R22, R23,
R24, R25, R26
37 0315-00-0104 RES,CF, 100K, 1/4W, 5% R27, R28
38 0315-00-0103 RES, CF,10K, 1/4W, 5% R1
39 0315-00-0151 RES,CF, 150 ohm, 1/4W, R9, R10, R11, R12,
5% R13
40 0315-00-0182 RES,CF, 1.8K, 1/4W, 5% R14, R15, R16, R17,
R18
41 0315-00-0222 RES,CF, 2.2K, 1/4W, 5% R32
42 0315-00-0512 RES,CF, 5.1K, 1/4W, 5% R19
43 0388-00-0557 PCB, Passport Nellcor SPO2
Interface Module
44 0215-03-0001 Tape, Double Coated Foam Use under Y1
45 0220-02-0002 Nut, Broaching-Type PEM KFS2-440
46 0315-00-0101 RES,CF,10 ohm, 1/4W,5% R34
47 0315-00-0474 RES, CF, 470K, 1/4W, 5% R29

FRONT END BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0560

1 0285-10-0102 CAP,POLYCARB .001UF C132,C133
2% 250V
2 0283-05-0103 CAP,.01UF 100V 10% C8,C9,C23,C101,C106,
C112,C122,C123
3 0283-04-0333 CAP,.033UF 100V 10% C66, C102, C505, C506
4
5 0283-04-0104 CAP,.1UF 100V 10% C6,C7,C20,C22,C58,
C121, C508,
C509,C64,C65,C71,C7
2,C82, C510, C511,
C512,C83,C87,C88,C9
0,C91,C93,C502, C504,
C94,
C95,C104,C107,C515,
C113, C114, C115,
C31,C32,C34,C35,C42,
C43,C48,C49,C96,C51
3, C125 (add capacitor
to R165 designation for -
03, -04)
6 0285-10-0104 CAP, .1UF 2% 30V C73, C75, C76, C99,
C100, C103,C44, C70,
C97, C63
7 0283-04-0224 CAP,.22UF 50V 10% C109, C126
8 0283-04-0334 CAP,.33UF 50V 10% C124,C45,C136,C137
9 0283-04-0474 CAP, .47UF 50V 10% C39, C47, C61, C110,
C128, C134, C503,
C60, C514, C135
10 0283-01-5180 CAP, 18PF 500V 5% C118
11 0285-09-0039 CAP,POLYCARBONATE C117
2UF 50V 10%
12 0283-05-0220 CAP,22PF 200V 10% C119
13 0290-02-1226 CAP,22UF TANT. 20V C129,C130
20%
14 0283-05-0331 CAP,330PF 1000V,10% C84,C86,C105
15 0290-02-0336 CAP,33UF TANT 10V C116,C516
20%
16
17 0290-02-3475 CAP,4.7UF TANT 35V C120,C111, C507
20%
18 0283-05-0471 CAP,470PF 100V 10% C25
19 0153-00-0085 1N6263 SCHOTTKY D20,D42,D43,D46,D49,
DIODE D50,D52,D53

FRONT END BOARD ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0560

20 0153-00-0014 DIODE, 1N914
D5,D12,D13,D14,D15,
D16,D17,D18,D19,D2
4,D25,D26,D27,D28,
D29,D30,D31,D32,D3
3,D34,D37,D39,D40,D
41,D56,D57,D58,D59
(D30, D37 for -01, -02)
21 0155-00-0089 Dual 4 Channel Analog U3, U4
MUX
22 0155-00-0086 2 Channel Analog U18
Multiplexer
23 0155-00-0075 Quad Bilateral Switch U26
24 0155-00-0112 Dual Monostable U28
Multivibrator
25 0155-00-0210 Dual 4 Bit Binary U40
Counter
26 0155-00-0098 Dual Comparator U37
27 0155-00-0407 MC34082 AP, JFET OP U11
AMP
28 0151-01-0010 XSISTOR, HEXFET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q8,
IRFD110 Q9
29 0315-00-0182 RES,1.8K 1/4W 5% R231, R233
30 0315-00-0101 RES,100 OHM 1/4W R39, R45, R51, R65, R67,
5% R90, R150
31 0307-00-0070 RES,MF NTWRK 100K RN3, RN4
1/8W .1%
32 0309-00-1003 RES,100K 1/8W 1% R76, R81 ,R207, R208
33 0315-00-0103 RES,10K 1/4W 5% R1, R2, R5, R15, R42,
R43, R88, R210, R256,
R16, R17
34 0320-00-1002 RES,10K 1/8W .1% R192, R193, R194,
R212, R255, R257
35 0309-00-1002 RES,10K 1/8W 1% R6,R7, R127, R163,
R164, R196, R200 (add
R160 for -01, -02), (add
R168 for -03, -04)
36 0315-00-0106 RES,10M 1/4W 5% R142, R144, R146,
R148, R228
37 0309-00-1153 RES,115K 1/8W 1% R156, R206
38 0309-00-1212 RES,12.1K 1/8W 1% R74, R520
39 0309-00-3742 RES, 37.4K 1/8W 1% R511
40 0309-00-1102 RES, 11K 1/8W 1% R53
41 0309-00-1540 RES, 154 OHM 1/8W R268
1%
42 0309-00-2002 RES, 20K 1/8W 1% R48, R49
43 0309-00-1622 RES,16.2K 1/8W 1% R46
44 0309-00-1652 RES,16.5K 1/8W 1% R185


45 0309-00-1823 RES,182K 1/8W 1% R189, R153
46 0315-00-0102 RES,1K 1/4W 5% R40, R50, R55, R170,
R191, R249 (add R12 for
-01, -02)
47 0309-00-1001 RES,1K 1/8W 1% R80 ( -01,03 ONLY),
R154, R519
48 0315-00-0222 RES,2.2K 1/4W 5% R232, R52, R514, R120,
R134
49 0309-00-1181 RES, 1.18K 1/8W 1% R264
50 0309-00-2003 RES,200K 1/8W 1% R157, R159, R177, R215
51
52 0309-00-2212 RES,22.1K 1/8W 1% R211 (add D37 for -03, -
04)
53 0315-00-0240 RES, 24 OHM 1/4W R259, R260
5%
54 0309-00-2492 RES,24.9K 1/8W 1% R8
55 0309-00-3013 RES,301K, 1/8W, 1% R128
56 0315-00-0243 RES,24K 1/4W 5% R176, R178
57 0315-00-0202 RES,2K 1/4W 5% R82, R230
58
59 0309-00-9531 RES,9.53K 1/8W 1% R86
60 0315-00-0304 RES, 300K 1/4W 5% R205
61 0315-00-0104 RES, 100K 1/4W 5% R27, R28, R29
62 0309-00-3573 RES,357K 1/8W 1% R190
63 0309-00-3923 RES,392K 1/8W 1% R158, R183, R203
64 0309-00-0768 RES, 768 OHM 1/8W, R80
1%
65 0309-00-4751 RES,4.75K 1/8W 1% R186
66 0315-00-0472 RES,4.7K 1/4W 5% R173, R187
67 0315-00-0475 RES,4.7M 1/4W 5% R188
68 0315-00-0470 RES,47 OHM 1/4W R213
5%
69 0309-00-4752 RES,47.5K 1/8W 1% R54, R24, R25, R26 (for -
01, -02) : R54, R162,
R214 (for -03, -04)
70 0315-00-0474 RES,470K 1/4W 5% R83, R124, R505, R506
71 0315-00-0473 RES,47K 1/4W 5% R58, R84, R162, R166,
R169, R171, R172,
R174, R175, R179,
R214, R245, R246,
R507, R508, R515,
R165, R168 (R162,
R165, R166, R168, R214
for -01, -02)
72 0309-00-3012 RES,30.1K 1/8W 1% R160
73 0309-00-4992 RES,49.9K 1/8W 1% R9, R10, R11, R79, R155,
R184, R209


74 0309-00-6813 RES,681K, 1/8W, 1% R126
75 0315-00-0824 RES,820K 1/4W 5% R167, R180
76 0120-00-0125 TRANSFORMER,PWR T1
ISOLATION
77 0155-00-0568 OP-AMP, LT1012 U14, U27
78 0155-00-0571 OP-AMP, LT1013C U20, U29, U30, U34,
U50, U8, U9
79 0155-00-0572 IC,OP-AMP TL032C U21, U24, U32, U33,
U13, U25, U31
80 0283-01-5121 CAP, 120 PF, 500V C1, C2, C3, C517,
C518, C519
84 0285-09-0010 CAP,1UF,50V,5% C46
85 0283-05-1394 CAP,.39UF,100V,5% C50
86 0283-05-2331 CAP,330PF,100V,2% C55, C57
87 0283-05-0470 CAP,47PF,200V,10% C56
88 0283-04-1474 CAP,.47UF,50V,5% C89
90
91 0290-02-3225 CAP,2.2UF,35V,20% C127
92 0136-24-1016 16 PIN HEADER J41
93 0136-24-1010 10 PIN HEADER J42
94 0136-24-1012 12 PIN HEADER J43
95 0108-00-0063 DUAL L1,L2
INDUCTOR,2MH,25%
96 0151-00-0035 TRANSISTOR,2N3904 Q10,Q11,Q12,Q13
97 0315-00-0392 RES,3.9K,1/4W,5% R44
98 0309-00-2672 RES,26.7K,1/8W,1% R47
99 0315-00-0912 RES, 9.10K, 1/4W,5% R56
100 0307-00-0072 RES,SPECIAL 3.539K, R66
0.01%, 2PPM
101 0307-00-0073 RES,SPECIAL 9.428K, R68
0.01%, 2PPM
102 0309-00-2871 RES,2.87K,1/8W,1% R75
103 0309-00-1584 RES,1.58M,1/8W,1% R85,R510
104 0309-00-1741 RES,1.74K,1/8W,1% R87
105 0320-00-2580 RES,258 OHM,1/ R116,R138,R122,R131
8W,.1%
106 0320-00-1383 RES,138 K,1/8W,.1% R118,R130
108 0309-00-3572 RES,35.7K, 1/8W, 1% R125, R263
110 0307-01-0473 RES NTWRK,47K,2% RN2
111 0309-00-1872 RES,18.7K,1/8W,1% R181
112 0309-00-9762 RES,97.6K,1/8W,1% R182
113 0309-00-1374 RES,1.37M,1/8W,1% R129
114


115 0315-00-0181 RES,180 OHM,1/ R234, R261, R262
4W,5%
116 0315-00-0271 RES,270 OHM,1/ R236
4W,5%
117 0315-00-0302 RES,3K,1/4W,5% R237
118
119 0120-00-0129 TRANSFORMER,RESPIR T2
ATION
120 0124-00-0064 TERMINAL TP1,TP2,TP3,TP4,TP5,TP6,
TP7,TP8,TP9,TP10,TP11
121 0315-00-0272 RES. 2.7K, 1/4W,5% R238
122 0315-00-0153 RES. 15K, 1/4W, 5% R235
123 0155-00-0239 OCTAL BUFFER
124 0155-90-0166 MICROCONTROLLER U38
125 0155-00-0574 A/D CONVERTER,10 U39
BIT
126 0155-00-0570 OPTO ISOLATOR U42,U43
127 0155-00-0576 OPTO ISOLATOR U44
128 0155-00-0575 REGULATING PWM U47
129 0151-00-0072 VOLTAGE REGULATOR U48,U49
130 0158-01-0023 CRYSTAL,3.6864 MHZ Y1
131 0315-00-0226 RES, 22M, 1/4W, 5% R500,R501,R502
132
133 0283-05-0271 CAP, 270PF, 200V, C85,C500,C501
10%
134 0309-00-8661 RES, 8.66K, 1/8W, 1% R195
135
136 0315-00-0512 RES, 5.1K, 1/4W, 5% R201 (add R12 for -
03, -04)
137 0136-57-0044 SOCKET,44pin PLCC SOCKET for U38
138 0309-00-1372 RES, 13.7K, 1/8W, 1% R78
139 0309-00-5492 RES, 54.9K, 1/8W, 1% R512
140 0309-00-4642 RES, 46.4K, 1/8W, 1% R513
141 0309-00-1621 RES, 1.62K, 1/8W, 1% R265
142 0315-00-0361 RES, 360 OHM, 1/4W, R229
5%
143 0388-00-0560-B PCB
144 0309-00-2433 RES, 243K, 1/8 W, 1%
145 0215-03-0003 Tape, Double Coated, R199 Use on Y1
Foam
146 0309-00-7681 RES, 7.68K, 1/8W, 1% R267 (add R161 for -01,
-02)
147 0309-00-1333 RES, 133K, 1/8W, 1% R204
148 0153-00-0069 DIODE, IN5817 D44, D45, D47, D48,
D51


149 0309-00-4022 RES, 40.2K 1/8W, 1% R513
150 0309-00-2942 RES, 29.4K 1/8W, 1% R513
151 0309-00-1213 RES, 121K,1/8W, 1% R266
152 0309-00-3921 RES, 3.92K,1/8W,1% R269
153 0290-02-3226 CAP, 22UF,TANT, 35V, C131
20%
154
155 0309-00-5231 RES, 5.23K, 1/8W, 1% R161
156
157 0136-97-1008 CONN, 16 PIN Low J41
Profile-Top entry
158 0136-97-3008 CONN, 16 PIN Low U3
Profile-Pass through
entry
159 0215-00-0029 INSULATOR for U3
160 0006-04-2800 Wire, 28 gauge, BLK
161 0283-05-0150 CAP, 15PF, 200V, 10% C56
162 0309-00-6192 RES, 61.9K, 1/8W, 1% R512
163 0309-00-3011 RES, 3.01K 1/8W, 1% R516

0670-00-0576
INTERCONNECT BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0628 (CE)

1 0388-00-0576 PCB
2 0301-00-0472 RES, CC, 4.7K, 5%,1/2 R1, R2, R3, R9, R10
W
3 0307-00-0089 RESISTOR SPECIAL,1/ R4
2W, 5%, 100 MEG
OHM
4 0283-00-0055 CAP, .0047 UF, 3KV, C1, C2
10%
5 0153-00-0091 DIODE, ZENER CR4-9, CR12
1N6275
6 0153-00-0160 DIODE, SA170C CR1, CR2, CR3, CR10,
CR11
7 0167-00-0007 SPARK GAP DG1
8 0136-00-0149 CONN, PATIENT 6 PIN P3
9 0136-00-0150 CONN, PRESS 6 PIN P1, P2
10 0131-00-0227 CONN, Phone, 1/4" P4
Plastic Bushing
11 0136-24-1018 HEADER, DBL ROW 18 J1
PIN
12
13 0283-05-0102 CAP,.001uF,200v,10% C3,C4,C5
14 0108-00-0028 TORROID L1
15 0006-04-2299 Wire Solid, 22 AWG L1
17 0309-00-4991 RES, 4.99K, 1%, 1/8 R5, R6, R7, R8, R11
W RN55
18 0283-01-5121 CAP, 120pF, 5% C6, C7, C8, C9, C10
19 0349-00-0174-02 Insulator, Connector For P4
20 0349-00-0174-01 Insulator, Connector For J1
21 0008-01-0005 Tubing, Heatshrink For R1, R3, R9
22 0149-00-0001 Neon Bulb DS1, DS2
23 0315-00-0103 RES, 10k, 5%, 1/4 W R13
24 0006-04-2800 Wire, 28 gauge, Blk R12, (R13 on 0670-00-
0628 only)
25 0348-00-0054-03 Bumper, Molded
Polyurethane (Black)

CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0591

1 0108-00-0058 CHOKE L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7,
L8, L9, L10, L12
2 0315-00-051X RESISTOR, FIXED, R48
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT 5.1 OHM
3 0136-00-0142 CONN PC, 16 PIN, J66
SIDE ENTRY
4 0136-00-0144 50 PIN RIGHT ANGLE J63
5 0136-00-0228 Conn, PC, 50 Position J61
w/ guide, w/o key
6 0136-22-0003 HEADER TP15, TP16, TP17, TP18,
CONNECTOR, 3 PIN TP19, TP20, JP1
7 0136-24-1006 HEADER DOUBLE TP9, TP10, TP11, TP12,
ROW, 6 PIN TP13, TP14
8 0136-24-1008 HEADER DOUBLE TP1, TP2, TP3, TP4, TP5,
ROW, 8 PIN TP6, TP7, TP8
9 0136-24-1010 HEADER DOUBLE J64
ROW, 10 PIN
10 0136-24-1016 HEADER DOUBLE J67
ROW, 16 PIN
11 0136-24-1026 HEADER DOUBLE J62
ROW, 26 PIN
12 0136-24-1040 HEADER DOUBLE J68
ROW, 40 PIN
13 0136-87-0050 CONN PC,SHROUDED J65
STR HDR W/ EJECTO
14 0151-00-0061 TRANSISTOR Q1
2N2222A
15 0153-00-0085 DIODE, SCHOTTKY, D1, D2, D3
1N626
16 0153-00-0093 VOLTAGE REF, SG3503 U39
17 0388-00-0438-B CPU PCB
18 0155-00-0078 IC, LOW VOLT AUDIO U37
POWER AMPLIFIER,
LM386
19 0155-00-0201 IC 8-BIT MULT D/A, U36
AD7524
20 0155-00-0400 IC, DUAL RS-232 U31
TRANSMITTER/
RECEIVER MAX 232
21 0155-00-0404 IC QUAD SPST U34
ANALOG SWITCH,
DG201
22 0155-00-0590-01 IC, 32K X 8 STATIC U6
RAM
23 0155-00-0426 IC, OCTAL BUFFER/ U8, U9, U10, U13, U14,
LINE DRIVER, U16, U17, U18, U29,
74HCT244 U30

CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0591

24 0155-00-0438 IC, DIGITAL, OCTAL U7, U12, U15
BUS TRANSCEIVER,
74HCT245
25 0155-00-0470 IC, 93C46, SERIAL U4
EEPROM
26 0155-00-0515 IC, OCTAL INVERTING U11
BUFFER/ LINE DRIVER,
74HCT240
27 0155-00-0516 IC, OCTAL D-TYPE FF, U19
74HCT377
28 0155-00-0518 IC, INTEGRATED U1
MULTIPROTOCOL
PROCESSOR,
MC68302
29 0155-00-0519 IC, 8 BIT A/D U32
CONVERTER W/11
CHANNEL MULTIPLEX
30 155-00-0520 IC, DISPLAY U5
CONTROLLER, V6366F
31 0155-00-1184 IC, DIGITAL, SERIAL U20
TIMEKEEPER, DS1202
32 0155-00-0522 IC, DIGITAL U21
MICROMANAGER,
DS1236
33 0155-00-0523 IC, OP AMP, LOW U33, U35
POWER JFET, TL034
34 0155-00-0524 IC, DUAL 1-OF-4 U23
DECODER/
DEMULTIPLEXER,
74ACT139
35 0155-00-0525 IC, QUAD 2 INPUT U28
NOR GATE, 74ACT02
36 155-00-0529 IC, HEX INVERTER, U27
74ALS04
37 0155-00-0530-04 IC, STATIC RAM, U2, U3
CMOS, 1 MEG
38 0155-00-0579 IC, 1-OF-8 DECODER/ U22
DEMULTIPLEXER,
74ACT138
39 0155-90-0165 CPU PAL, PASSPORT U24
40 0158-00-0010 CRYSTAL,TUNING Y2
FORK, 32.768 KHZ
41 0158-01-0025 MICROPROCESSOR Y1
QUARTZ CRYSTAL,
16.5888 MHZ
42 0158-05-0001 CRYSTAL, CLOCK U38
OSCILLATOR,
14.31818 MHZ


43 0283-04-0104 CAP, CERAMIC, .1UF C5, C6, C13, C29,
100V 10% C30, C31, C32, C33,
C35, C42, C44, C45,
C46, C47, C48, C49,
C50, C51, C52, C53,
C54, C55, C56, C57,
C58, C59, C60, C61,
C62, C63, C64, C68,
C75, C77, C78, C103,
C113, C121, C122,
C123, C124
44 0283-04-0473 CAP, CERAMIC, C37
.047UF 100V 10%
45 0283-05-0100 CAP, CERAMIC, 10PF C70, C72
200V 10%
46 0283-05-0101 CAP, CERAMIC, 100PF C112, C114
200V 10%
47 0283-05-0102 CAP, CERAMIC, C104, C105, C106,
.001UF 200V 10% C107, C108, C109,
C110, C111
100V 10% C43, C65, C69, C73,
C74, C76, C115, C116
49 0283-05-0220 CAP, CERAMIC, 22PF C1, C2, C41
200V 10%
50 0283-05-0222 CAP, CERAMIC, C118, C38
.0022UF 200V 10%
51 0283-05-0471 CAP, CERAMIC, 470PF C119
100V 10%
52 0290-02-3105 CAP, FIXED, 1UF TANT. C9, C10, C11, C12
35V 20%
53 0290-02-3475 CAP, FIXED, 4.7UF C7, C8, C18
TANT 35V 20
54 0290-07-1053 CAP, FIXED ELECT., C120
10000 UF
55 0307-00-0029 RESISTOR NETWORK, RP2
DIP 14 PIN, 10K .5% 7
Resistors
SIP 10 PIN, 100K
SIP 10 PIN, 390K
58 0307-01-0470 RESISTOR NETWORK, RP8, RP14
SIP 10 PIN, 47 OHM
59 0307-06-2103 RESISTOR NETWORK, RP1, RP3, RP4, RP5, RP9,
SIP 10 PIN, 10K 2% RP10, RP11, RP12, RP13
60 0309-00-2052 RESISTOR, FIXED, R46
METAL FILM, 1% 1/8W,
20.5K


61 0309-00-1003 RESISTOR, FIXED, R11
100K
62 0309-00-4421 RESISTOR, FIXED, R44
4.42K
63 0309-00-4640 RESISTOR, FIXED, R17
464 OHM
64 0309-00-6042 RESISTOR, FIXED, R45
60.4K
65 0315-00-0100 RESISTOR, FIXED, R10
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 10 OHM
66 0315-00-0101 RESISTOR, FIXED, R13, R16
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 100 OHM
67 0315-00-0103 RESISTOR, FIXED, R7, R41, R49
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 10K
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 100K
69 0309-00-3923 RESISTOR, FIXED, R42
392K
70 0315-00-0202 RESISTOR, FIXED, R12
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 2K
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 200K
72 0309-00-1824 RESISTOR, FIXED, R43
1.82M
73 0315-00-0223 RESISTOR, FIXED, R25
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 22K
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 4.7K
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 47K
76 0315-00-0684 RESISTOR, FIXED, R1
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 680K
77 0352-00-0029 HOLDER BATTERY XBT1
(COIN TYPE)


78 0388-00-0438-B DRILL & FAB, CPU
BOARD
79 0136-56-1324 SOCKET, LOW XU24
PROFILE, 24 PIN SLIM
DIP
80 0432-01-0002 PAD, MOUNTING XU39
81 0315-00-0685 RESISTOR, FIXED, R40
CARBON FILM, 1/4W,
6.8M
82 0290-02-0227 CAP, FIXED, 220UF C67
TANT. 10V 20%
83 0315-00-0134 RESISTOR, FIXED, R34
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 130K
84 0315-00-0102 RESISTOR, FIXED, R47
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 1K
85 0290-02-0336 CAP, FIXED, 33UF C66
TANT. 35V 20%
86 0290-02-3226 CAP, FIXED, 22UF C14-C17
TANT. 10V 20%
87 006-04-2800 Wire, 28 AWG, Blk
88 0212-10-0406 Screw, 4-40, Nylon
89 0220-00-0037 Nut, Hex, 4-40, Nylon
90 0136-00-0391-01 Adapter, SMT-to-DIP XU20

PNEUMATICS BOARD (CE) 0670-00-0605

1 0008-10-0204 Tubing, 1/16 "N/A
2 0008-10-0408 Tubing, 1/8 "N/A
3 0103-00-0200 Adapter 1/16" to 1/8 "N/A
4 0103-00-0457 CHECK VALVE N/A
5 0103-00-0331 Transition Barb, Rt N/A
Angle
6 0103-00-0419 MANIFOLD, N/A
PNEUMATIC
7 0104-00-0005 MAGNETIC
COMPONENT, VALVE,
12 VDC, 3 WAY, N.C.,
2W (dump)V1
8 0104-00-0006 PNEUMATIC V2
COMPONENT ACTIVE,
Proportional Valve
9 0108-00-0065 Inductor, Dual winding L1
10 0108-08-1000 IND, 100 uH L2
11 0136-01-1020 SOCKET, 20 pin DIP Socket for U1
12 0136-24-1020 CONNECTOR, 20 pin, J30
dual row header
13 0136-24-1024 CONNECTOR, 24 pin, J35
dual row header
14 0136-92-0003 CONNECTOR PC, J29
Header, straight locking
and polarized, 3 pin
15 0136-92-0006 CONNECTOR PC, J34
Header, straight locking
and polarized, 6 pin
16 0151-01-0010 TRANSISTOR, IRFD110 Q1 Q2
FET
17 0153-00-0001 DIODE, IN4003 D1 D2 D3
18 0153-00-0193 DIODE, 1N4749A D4
19 0155-00-0073 IC, LM339A U6
COMPARATOR
20 0155-00-0089 IC, MC14052B MUX U2
21 0155-00-0404 IC, DG201A ANALOG U5
SWITCH
22 0155-00-0805-02 IC, Dual picoamp input U4
current OpAmp, AD706
23 0155-90-0335 IC, MC68HC705J1A U1
microcontroller
24 0155-00-0909-01 IC, 74HCT27 Triple 3- U3
input NOR gate
25 0158-01-0023 3.6864MHz crystal Y1
26 0210-07-0003 Washer, Nylon mounting for L2
27 0212-12-0418 Screw, #4-40 1.123 Lg. mounting for L2
PH

PNEUMATICS BOARD (CE) (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0605

28 0223-00-0004 Nut, Hex, #4-40 mounting for L2
29 0215-03-0001 Tape, Double Coated Use under Y1
Foam
30 0283-04-0104 CAP, 0.1 uF, 10% 100V C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
ceramic C8 C10 C11 C16
C17
31 0283-05-0330 CAP, 33 pF, 10% 50V C13 C14
ceramic
32 0285-00-0055 CAP, 0.47 uF, 5% metal C1 C9
polycarb
33 0285-15-0473 CAP, 0.047 uF, 5% C15
metal polycarb
34 0290-11-0001 AP, 3300 uF 20% 25V C12
elect
35 0307-04-0103 RES NET,10K, 5%, 8 RN1
Pin Sip
36 0307-04-0223 RES NET, 22K, 5%, 8 RN2
Pin Sip
37 0307-04-0472 RES NET, 4.7K, 5%, 8 RN3
Pin Sip
38 0309-00-1021 RESISTOR, 1.02K, 1/8 R23
W, 1%
39 0309-00-1213 RESISTOR, 121K, 1/8 R8 R19
W, 1%
40 0309-00-1214 RESISTOR, 1.21MEG, R4 R14
1/8 W, 1%
41 0309-00-1823 RESISTOR, 182K, 1/8 R11
W, 1%
42 0309-00-2263 RESISTOR, 226K, 1/8 R29
W, 1%
43 0309-00-3241 RESISTOR, 3.24K, 1/8 R26
W, 1%
44 0309-00-3832 RESISTOR, 38.3K, 1/8 R25
W, 1%
45 0309-00-4121 RESISTOR, 4.12K, 1/8 R12
W, 1%
46 0309-00-5112 RESISTOR, 51.1K, 1/8 R10
W, 1%
47 0309-00-5113 RESISTOR, 511K, 1/8 R18
W, 1%
48 0309-00-7501 RESISTOR, 7.5K, 1/8 R22, R27
W, 1%
49 0309-00-8251 RESISTOR, 8.25K, 1/8 R20
W, 1%
50 0309-00-8661 RESISTOR, 8.66K, 1/8 R15
W, 1%
51 0309-00-9092 RESISTOR, 90.9K, 1/8 R16
W, 1%

PNEUMATICS BOARD (CE) (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0605

52 0309-00-9762 RESISTOR, 97.6K, 1/8 R32
W, 1%
53 0310-00-0100 RESISTOR, 10 ohm, 1/ R2
4 W, 1%
54 0311-01-2502 RES ADJ, 5K R1
55 0315-00-0103 RESISTOR, 10K, 1/4 R3 R7 R13 R21
W, 5%
56 0315-00-0104 RESISTOR, 100K, 1/4 R6
W, 5%
57 0315-00-0134 RESISTOR, 130K, 1/4 R30
W, 5%
58 0315-00-0153 RESISTOR, 15K, 1/4 R24
W, 5%
59 0315-00-0205 RESISTOR, 2MEG, 1/4 R31
W, 5%
60 0315-00-0223 RESISTOR, 22K, 1/4 R5
W, 5%
61 0315-00-0303 RESISTOR, 30K, 1/4 R9
W, 5%
62 0315-00-0332 RESISTOR, 3.3K, 1/4 R28
W, 5%
63 0315-00-0682 RESISTOR, 6.8K, 1/4 R17
W, 5%
64 0343-00-0067 CLAMPS, TUBING N/A
65 0212-10-0608 SCREW NYLON for PT1
66 0378-02-0004 AIR FILTER, 25 um, 1/8 N/A
barb
67 0388-00-0605 Pneumatics PCB N/A
68 0406-00-0781 TRANSDUCER for PT1
BRACKET
69 0682-00-0086 TRANSDUCER, 7 PSIG PT1
with signal conditioning
70 0220-22-0632 NUT, NYLON for PT1

0670-00-0611
0670-00-0627
PANEL BOARD (5L-CE)

1 0012-00-0985 Cable Assembly J2
2 0136-98-0208 Header, 8x2, low J1, J3
profile
3 0012-00-1024 Cable Assembly J2 w/Ferrite Bead (0627
Bd only)
4 0388-00-0611 PCB
5
6 0153-00-0171 Diode, Dual, BD7000 CR1, CR2, CR3, CR4,
CR5, CR6
7
8
9
10 0155-00-0785 IC, CMOS mux, 4051 U2, U3, U4
11 0155-00-0789-01 IC, quad op-amp, U1
MC34184
12
13
14 0283-00-0056 CAP., 0.1uF, 20% C9, C10
15 0286-03-3121 CAP., 120 pF, 2% C1, C2, C3, C4, C5,
C6, C7, C8
16 0287-00-1103 CAP., 0.01uF, 10% C11
17
18
19 0324-00-0105 RES, 1.0M 5% .25W R33, R34
20 0324-00-0226 RES, 22M 5% .25W R1, R5, R6, R7
21 0326-01-4752 RES, 47.5K 1% .1W R2, R3, R4, R8, R9, R10,
R18, R19, R22
22 0326-01-1003 RES, 100K 1% .1W R12, R15, R20, R26
23 0326-01-1002 RES, 10.0K 1% .1W R11, R13, R14, R16,
R17, R21, R23, R24,
R27, R29
24 0326-01-3321 RES, 3.32K 1% .1W R31
25 0326-01-4991 RES, 4.99K 1% .1W R25, R28, R30, R32
26
27
28 0361-04-0010 Standoff, nylon, female/
female
29 0361-32-0250 Standoff, nylon, male/
female
30 0337-00-0095 Shield, EMI
31 0007-02-0022 Wire, Bus, Solid 22 AW
32 0215-00-0087 Kapton tape, 1/2 inch
wide

INTERCONNECT BOARD ASSEMBLY HP 0670-00-0615

1 0388-00-0615 PCB Revision A
2 0301-00-0472 RES, CC, 4.7K, 5%,1/2 R1, R2, R3, R9, R10
W
3 0307-00-0089 RESISTOR SPECIAL,1/ R4
2 W, 5%, 100 MEG
OHM
4 0283-00-0055 CAP, .0047 UF, 3KV, C1, C2
10%
5 0153-00-0091 DIODE, ZENER CR4-9, CR12
1N6275
CR11
7 0167-00-0007 SPARK GAP DG1
8 0131-00-0232 CONN, 12 Pin P3
Receptacle HP ECG
9 0131-00-0231 CONN, 12 Pin P1, P2
Receptacle HP Press
10 0131-00-0227 CONN, Phone, 1/4" P4
Plastic Bushing
11 0136-24-1018 HEADER, DBL ROW 18 J1
PIN
12
13 0283-05-0102 CAP,.001uF,200v,10% C3,C4,C5
14 0108-00-0028 TORROID L1
15 0006-04-2299 Wire Solid, 22 AWG L1
16
17 0309-00-4991 RES, 4.99K, 1%, 1/8 R5, R6, R7, R8, R11
W RN55
18 0283-01-5121 CAP, 120pF, 5% C6, C7, C8, C9, C10
22 0149-00-0001 Neon Bulb DS1, DS2
23 0315-00-0103 RES, 10k, 5%, 1/4 W R13
24 0006-04-2800 Wire, 28 gauge, Blk R12
25 0348-00-0054-03 Bumper, Molded
26 0007-02-0022 Solid Buss Wire, 22 For P1, P2
AWG

PANEL BOARD 0670-00-0617

1 0290-08-1033 CAP, 100uF, Alum, 16V C11
20%
2 0283-04-0104 CAP, 0.1uF 100V 10% -01
(C2,C3,C7,C8,C10,C1
2-C18,C19) -03 & -05
(C2,C3,C7,C8,C10,C1
2-C18,C19,C23) -02
(C2,C3,C4,C5,C6,C10
,C21) -04 & 06
(C2,C3,C4,C5,C6,C10
,C21,C22)
3
4 0108-00-0058 lead, Leaded Ferrite FB1
5 0315-00-0151 RES, 150, 1/4W 5% R1, R2, R5
6 0290-08-1026 CAP, 10uF, 50V 20% C9
7 0315-00-0103 RES, 10K, 1/4W 5% R4
8 0315-00-0470 RES, 47, 1/4W 5%
R19
9 0151-00-0115 FET, N-Channel Q1
2N7000
Double Row
Single Row
12 0136-00-0234 Header, 20 Pin St. J74
Double Row, Right
Angle
13
14 0136-22-0002 Header, 2 Pin St. LS1 (J75)
Single Row
15 0124-00-0064 Terminal, Turret PC TP1, TP2, TP3
16 0388-00-0617-D Printed Circuit Board
17
18 0136-87-0010 Header / ejector, 10 J76
Pin St. Double Row
19 0315-00-0152 RES, 1.5K, 1/4W,5% R17
20 0315-00-0223 RES,22K,1/4W,5% R7,R9,R13
21 0315-00-0225 RES,22MEG,1/4W,5% R10,R11,R12,R14,R15,
R16
22 0155-00-0893-01 Dual Comparator U4
23 0153-00-0040 5.1V, Zener Diode CR1
24 0155-90-0342-A IC, Programmed U1
FBCON, EPM7064
25 0155-90-0343-A IC, Programmed U2
FBDATA, EPM7032

PANEL BOARD (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0617

26 0155-00-0910-12 IC, 528257, Multiple U3
Video Ram, 256K x 8-
bits
27 0014-00-0055 Power Supplies,DC/DC
Converter, 15 Watts
28 0136-76-0005 Header, 5 Pin St. single
Right angle
29 0136-00-0237 Header, 31 Pin St. J77
Double SMT
30 0155-00-0906-01 IC, AV9170,Clock U6
Synchronizer
31 0155-00-0907-01 IC, 42101,Line Buffer U7
32 0155-90-0351 IC, Programmed U5
PALE16V8-15
33
34 0136-01-1020 Socket, low Profile, 20 XU5
Pin Slim Dip
35
36 0151-00-0195 FET, IRLD014 Q2
37 0155-00-0839-02 IC, 74BCT374 Octal U8
D-Register
38 0151-00-0035 Transistor, NPN, Q3, Q4
2N3904
39 0315-00-0513 RES, 51K, 1/4W, 5% R6
40 0315-00-0472 RES, 4.7K, 1/4W, 5% R3
41 0670-00-0617
41 0290-18-2205 CAP,FIXED,22uF TANT. C1
35V 20%
42 0290-00-0112 Cap, 470uF, 25V C20
43 0307-07-0001 RES, zero ohms -01 (R21,R49) -02
(R22,R49) -03
(R21,R49,R50) -04
(R22,R49,R50) -05
(R21, W1) -06 (R22,
W1)
44 0136-00-0166 44 Pin SMD PLCC XU1, XU2
Socket
45 0315-00-0510 Res, 51, 1/4W, 5% R20
46 0315-00-0101 RES, 100, 1/4W, 5% -03
(R23,R25,R26,R28) -04
(R24,R27,R29-
R32,R38,R43)
47 0155-00-0937-01 IC, Buffer AHCT244 -03 (U10) -04 (U9)
48 0283-10-1103 CAP, 0.01UF, 100V, C24,C25
10%
49 0215-03-0001 TAPE, DOUBLE Used under C20
COATED FOAM

FRONT END BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0620-XX

1 0388-00-0620 PCB Revision B
2 0108-00-0063 INDUCTOR, FIXED, L1/L2 L1,L2
ASSEMBLY, 2MH, 25%
3 0120-00-0125 TRANSFORMER, POWER T1
ISOLATION
4 0120-00-0129 TRANSFORMER, T2
RESPIRATORY PATIENT
DRIVE
5 0124-00-0064 TERMINAL TP1-TP11
6 0136-24-1010 10 PIN HEADER J42
7 0136-24-1012 12 PIN HEADER J43
8 0136-24-1018 18 PIN HEADER J41
9 0151-00-0035 TRANSISTOR, 2N3904, Q10-Q13
NPN, general purpose
10 0151-00-0072 VOLTAGE REGULATOR, U48,U49
78L05
11 0151-01-0010 XSISTOR, HEXFET IRFD110 Q1-Q4,Q8,Q9
12 0153-00-0014 DIODE, 1N914, General D1-D3,D5-D8,D10-
purpose highspeed D19,D21,D22,D24-
switching D29,D31-D34,D39-
D41,D56,D59
13 0153-00-0069 DIODE, 1N5817 D44,D45,D47,D48,D51

14 0153-00-0085 1N6263 SCHOTTKY DIODE D20,D42,D43,D46,D49,D5
0,D52,D53
15 0155-00-0075 CD4066, Quad Bilateral U26
Switch
16 0155-00-0086 CD4053, 2 Channel Analog U18
Multiplexer
17 0155-00-0112 CD4538B, Dual Monstable U28
Multivibrator
18 0155-00-0122 CD4051, CMOS MUX U1,U3,U4
19 0155-00-0173 LM393A, Dual Comparator U37
20 0155-00-0210 HC393, Dual 4 Bit Binary U40
Counter
21 0155-00-0239 ACT240, OCTAL BUFFER U36
22 0155-00-0407 MC34082 AP, JFET OP AMP U11
23 0155-00-0568 IC, ANALOG, PRECISION U14,U27
OPAMP, LT1012
24 0155-00-0570 IC, OPTOISOLATOR, U42,U43
CNW136
25 0155-00-0571 IC, Dual Precision OpAmp, U8,U9,U29,U30,U34,U50
LT1013C
26 0155-00-0572 IC, DUAL JFET OPAMP, U13,U21,U24,U25,U31-
TL032C U33

FRONT END BOARD ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0620-XX

27 0155-00-0574 IC, 10 Bit Analog to Digital U39
Converter w/Serial Control
and 11 Inputs, TLC1540
28 0155-00-0575 IC, REGULATING PULSE U47
WIDTH MODULATOR,
SG3525A
29 0155-00-0576 IC, OPTOISOLATOR, U44
CNY173
30 0155-00-0789-02 IC, OpAmp, Quad low U2
powerJFET, MC34184
31 0155-90-0339 MICROCONTROLLER, Rev U38
C.3.1
32 0158-01-0023 CRYSTAL, QUARTZ, Y1
MICROPROCESSOR
33 0283-01-5180 CAP, 18PF, 500V, 5% C118
34 0283-04-0104 CAP, 0.1UF, 100V 10% C1, C4, C6, C7, C16, C20,
C22, C31, C32, C34, C35,
C42, C43, C48, C49, C58,
C64, C65, C71, C72, C82,
C83, C87, C88, C90, C91,
C93-C96, C104, C107,
C113-C115, C121, C125,
C502, C504, C508-C513,
C515
35 0283-04-0224 CAP, 0.22UF 50V, 10% C109, C126
36 0283-04-0333 CAP, 0.033UF 100V 10% C66, C102, C505, C506
37 0283-04-0334 CAP, 0.33UF 50V 10% C45, C124, C136, C137
38 0283-04-0474 CAP, 0.47UF 50V 10% C39, C47, C60, C61,
C110, C128, C134, C135,
C503, C514
39 0283-04-1474 CAP, 0.47UF 50V 5% C89
40 0283-05-0103 CAP 0.01UF 100V 10% C8, C9, C15, C23, C101,
C106, C112, C122, C123
41 0283-05-0150 CAP 15PF 200V 10% C56
42 0283-05-0220 CAP 22PF 200V 10% C119
43 0283-05-0271 CAP 270PF 200V 10% C85, C500, C501
44 0283-05-0331 CAP 330PF 1000V 10% C84, C86, C105
45 0283-05-0471 CAP 470PF 100V 10% C25
46 0283-05-1394 CAP 0.39UF 100V 5% C50
47 0283-05-2331 CAP 330PF 100V 2% C55, C57
48 0283-12-3121 CAPACITOR CERAMIC, C2, C3, C5, C10-C14
NPO, 200 V 120PF 2%
49 0285-09-0010 CAP 1UF 50V 5% C46
50 0285-09-0039 CAP POLYCARBONATE 2UF C117
50V 10%
51 0285-10-0102 CAP POLYCARBONATE C132, C133
0.001UF 2% 250V


52 0285-10-0104 CAP 0.1UF 2% 30V C44, C63, C70, C73, C75,
C76, C97, C99, C100,
C103
53 0286-00-2102 CAPACITOR, SMD,0805, C30,C40,C52
Ceramic, 100 V, 1000PF
54 0286-00-2152 CAPACITOR, SMD,0805, C38,C51,C53
Ceramic, 100 V 1500PF
55 0286-00-2221 CAPACITOR, SMD,0805, C17-C19, C21, C24, C26-
Ceramic, 100 V 220PF C29
56 0287-00-0222 CAPACITOR, SMD,0805, C33, C36, C37, C4
Ceramic, X7R 2200PF
57 0290-02-0336 CAPACITOR, FIXED, Dipped C116, C516
Tantalum 33UF 10V 20%
58 0290-02-3225 CAPACITOR, FIXED, Dipped C127
Tantalum 2.2UF 35V 20%
59 0290-02-3226 CAPACITOR, FIXED, Dipped C129-C131
Tantalum 22UF 35V 20%
60 0290-02-3475 CAPACITOR, FIXED, Dipped C111,C120,C507
Tantalum 4.7UF 35V 20%
61 0307-00-0070 RESISTOR NETWORK, 14 RN3,RN4
PIN, 100K
62 0307-00-0072 RESISTOR, SPECIAL, 3.539 R66
k ± .025%, 10 ppm
63 0307-00-0073 RESISTOR, SPECIAL, 9.428 R68
k ± .025%, 10 ppm
64 0307-01-0473 RESISTOR NETWORK, 10 RN2
PIN SIP 47K 2%
65 0309-00-1001 RESISTOR, Metal film, 1/8 R154,R519
W, 1% 1K R80(-01 ONLY)
66 0309-00-1002 RESISTOR, Metal film, 1/8 R6,R7,R31,R32,R34-
W, 1% 10K R38,R41,R69,R127,R163,R
164,R196,R200
67 0309-00-1003 RESISTOR, Metal film, 1/8 R24,R27,R28,R33,R76,R81,
W, 1% 100K R207,R208
68 0309-00-1102 RESISTOR, Metal film, 1/8 KR53
W, 1% 11
W, 1% 115K
70 0309-00-1181 RESISTOR, Metal film, 1/8 R264
W, 1% 1.18K
W, 1% 12.1K
W, 1% 121K
W, 1% 133K
W, 1% 13.7K


W, 1% 1.37M
W, 1% 154 OHM
W, 1% 1.58M
W, 1% 1.62K
W, 1% 16.2K
W, 1% 16.5K
W, 1% 1.74K
W, 1% 182K
W, 1% 18.7K
W, 1% 20K
85 0309-00-2003 RESISTOR, Metal film, 1/8 R157,R159,R177,R215
W, 1% 200K
W, 1% 22.1K
W, 1% 243K
W, 1% 24.9K
W, 1% 26.7K
W, 1% 2.87K
W, 1% 3.01K
W, 1% 30.1K
W, 1% 301K
W, 1% 3.32K
W, 1% 35.7K
W, 1% 357K
W, 1% 37.4K
W, 1% 3.92K


99 0309-00-3923 RESISTOR, Metal film, 1/8 R158,R183,R203
W, 1% 392K
W, 1% 46.4K
W, 1% 4.75K
102 0309-00-4752 RESISTOR, Metal film, 1/8 R14,R18,R20,R22,R23,R25,
W, 1% 47.5K R26,R30,R54,R162,R214
103 0309-00-4991 RESISTOR, Metal film, 1/8 R29,R57,R61,R63
W, 1% 4.99K
104 0309-00-4992 RESISTOR, Metal film, 1/8 R9-
W, 1% 49.9K R11,R79,R155,R184,R209
W, 1% 5.23K
W, 1% 61.9K
W, 1% 681K
W, 1% 7.68K
W, 1% 8.66K
W, 1% 9.53K
W, 1% 97.6K
112 0315-00-0101 RESISTOR, FIXED, Carbon R39,R45,R51,R65,R67,R90,
film, 1/4 W, 5% 100 OHM R150
113 0315-00-0102 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, R40,R50,R55,R170,R191,R
1/4 W, 5% 1K 249
114 0315-00-0103 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, R1, R2, R5, R15-17, R42,
1/4 W, 5% 10K R43, R64, R88, R168,
R210, R256
115 0315-00-0105 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, R60, R62
1/4 W, 5% 1.0M
116 0315-00-0106 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, R228
1/4 W, 5% 10M
117 0315-00-0153 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, R235
1/4 W, 5% 15K
118 0315-00-0181 RESISTOR, FIXED, Carbon R234, R261, R262
film, 1/4 W, 5% 180 OHM
119 0315-00-0182 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, R231,R233
1/4 W, 5% 1.8K
1/4 W, 5% 2K
121 0315-00-0222 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, R52, R120, R134, R232,
1/4 W, 5% 2.2K R514
122 0315-00-0226 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, R3, R13, R19, R21
1/4 W, 5% 22M


1/4 W, 5% 24K
125 0315-00-0271 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, 270 OHM
1/4 W, 5%
126 0315-00-0272 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, 2.7K
1/4 W, 5%
127 0315-00-0302 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, 3K
1/4 W, 5%
1/4 W, 5%
1/4 W, 5%
1/4 W, 5%
1/4 W, 5%
1/4 W, 5%
1/4 W, 5%
1/4 W, 5%
135 0315-00-0475 RES, FIXED, Carbon film, 4.7 M
1/4 W, 5%
1/4 W, 5%
1/4 W, 5%
1/4 W, 5%
139 0320-00-1002 RESISTOR, Metal Film, 10K
0.1%, 1/8 W
140 0320-00-1383 RES, Metal Film, 0.1%, 1/8 R118, R130
W 138K
141 0320-00-2580 RES, Metal Film, 0.1%, 1/8 OHM
W 258
142 0309-00-5111 RESISTOR, Metal Film, 1%, 5.11K
1/8 W
143 0214-00-0074 Insulator Bead
144 0136-57-0044 Socket, 44pin PLCC Socket for U38
145 0309-00-4022 RES, 40.2K, 1/8W, 1% R513
146 0309-00-7680 RES, 768 OHM, 1/8W, 1% R80
147 0215-03-0003 Tape, Double Coated Foam Use on Y1
148
149 0309-00-2674 RESISTOR, Metal film, 1/8 R142, R144, R146, R148
W, 1% 2.67M
150 0155-00-0938-01 IC, Dual Precision OpAmp, U20
AD706JN


151 0337-00-0108 SHIELD, EMI (FRONT-END
PCB)
152 0361-00-0438 Spacer, Round, Nylon
153 0210-00-0125 PIN,.025 Square, Electrical
154 0283-05-0121 CAP 120PF 200V 10% C54

CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0623 (5L-CE)

1 0108-00-0058 CHOKE L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6,
L7, L8, L9, L10, L12
CARBON FILM, 1/
4 WATT 5.1 OHM
3 0136-00-0142 CONN PC, 16 PIN, J66
SIDE ENTRY
4 0136-00-0144 50 PIN RIGHT J63
ANGLE
5 0136-00-0228 Conn, PC, 50 J61
Position w/ guide,
w/o key
6 0136-22-0003 HEADER TP15, TP16, TP17,
CONNECTOR, 3 PIN TP18, TP19, TP20, JP1
ROW, 8 PIN TP5, TP6, TP7, TP8
ROW, 10 PIN
10 0136-24-1016 HEADER DOUBLE J67
ROW, 16 PIN
11 0136-24-1026 HEADER DOUBLE J62
ROW, 26 PIN
12 0136-24-1040 HEADER DOUBLE J68
ROW, 40 PIN
13 0136-87-0050 CONN J65
PC,SHROUDED STR
HDR W/ EJECTO
14 0151-00-0061 TRANSISTOR Q1
2N2222A
1N626
16 0153-00-0093 VOLTAGE REF, U39
SG3503
17 0388-00-0438-B CPU PCB
18 0155-00-0078 IC, LOW VOLT U37
AUDIO POWER
AMPLIFIER, LM386
19 0155-00-0201 IC 8-BIT MULT D/A, U36
AD7524
20 0155-00-0400 IC, DUAL RS-232 U31
TRANSMITTER/
RECEIVER MAX 232
21 0155-00-0404 IC QUAD SPST U34
ANALOG SWITCH,
DG201

CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED) 0670-00-0623 (5L-CE)

22 0155-00-0590-01 IC, 32K X 8 STATIC U6
RAM
23 0155-00-0426 IC, OCTAL BUFFER/ U8, U9, U10, U13,
LINE DRIVER, U14, U16, U17, U18,
74HCT244 U29, U30
BUS TRANSCEIVER,
74HCT245
25 0155-00-0470 IC, 93C46, SERIAL U4
EEPROM
26 0155-00-0515 IC, OCTAL U11
INVERTING BUFFER/
LINE DRIVER,
74HCT240
74HCT377
28 0155-00-0518 IC, INTEGRATED U1
MULTIPROTOCOL
PROCESSOR,
MC68302
29 0155-00-0519 IC, 8 BIT A/D U32
CONVERTER W/11
CHANNEL
MULTIPLEX
30 155-00-0520 IC, DISPLAY U5
CONTROLLER,
V6366F
TIMEKEEPER,
DS1202
32 0155-00-0522 IC, DIGITAL U21
MICROMANAGER,
DS1236
33 0155-00-0523 IC, OP AMP, LOW U33, U35
POWER JFET, TL034
34 0155-00-0524 IC, DUAL 1-OF-4 U23
DECODER/
DEMULTIPLEXER,
74ACT139
35 0155-00-0525 IC, QUAD 2 INPUT U28
NOR GATE,
74ACT02
36 155-00-0529 IC, HEX INVERTER, U27
74ALS04
37 0155-00-0530-04 IC, STATIC RAM, U2, U3
CMOS, 1 MEG
38 0155-00-0579 IC, 1-OF-8 U22
DECODER/
DEMULTIPLEXER,
74ACT138


FORK, 32.768 KHZ
QUARTZ CRYSTAL,
16.5888 MHZ
42 0158-05-0001 CRYSTAL, CLOCK U38
OSCILLATOR,
14.31818 MHZ
100V 10% C30, C31, C32, C33,
C35, C42, C44, C45,
C46, C47, C48, C49,
C50, C51, C52, C53,
C54, C55, C56, C57,
C58, C59, C60, C61,
C62, C63, C64, C68,
C75, C77, C78, C103,
C113, C121, C122,
C123, C124
44 0283-04-0473 CAP, CERAMIC, C37
.047UF 100V 10%
45 0283-05-0100 CAP, CERAMIC, 10PF C70, C72
200V 10%
46 0283-05-0101 CAP, CERAMIC, C112, C114
100PF 200V 10%
47 0283-05-0102 CAP, CERAMIC, C104, C105, C106,
.001UF 200V 10% C107, C108, C109,
C110, C111
48 0283-05-0103 CAP, CERAMIC, C4, C27, C28, C36,
.01UF 100V 10% C43, C65, C69, C73,
C74, C76, C115,
C116
200V 10%
50 0283-05-0222 CAP, CERAMIC, C118, C38
.0022UF 200V 10%
51 0283-05-0471 CAP, CERAMIC, C119
470PF 100V 10%
52 0290-02-3105 CAP, FIXED, 1UF C9, C10, C11, C12
TANT. 35V 20%
53 0290-02-3475 CAP, FIXED, 4.7UF C7, C8, C18
TANT 35V 20
54 0290-07-1053 CAP, FIXED ELECT., C120
10000 UF
55 0307-00-0029 RESISTOR RP2
NETWORK, DIP 14
PIN, 10K .5% 7
Resistors
56 0307-01-0104 RESISTOR RP7
NETWORK, SIP 10
PIN, 100K


57 0307-01-0394 RESISTOR RP6
NETWORK, SIP 10
PIN, 390K
58 0307-01-0470 RESISTOR RP8, RP14
NETWORK, SIP 10
PIN, 47 OHM
59 0307-06-2103 RESISTOR RP1, RP3, RP4, RP5,
NETWORK, SIP 10 RP9, RP10, RP11, RP12,
PIN, 10K 2% RP13
60 0309-00-2052 RESISTOR, FIXED, R46
METAL FILM, 1% 1/
8W, 20.5K
61 0309-00-1003 RESISTOR, FIXED, R11
METAL FILM, 1% 1/
8W, 100K
62 0309-00-4421 RESISTOR, FIXED, R44
METAL FILM, 1% 1/
8W, 4.42K
63 0309-00-4640 RESISTOR, FIXED, R17
METAL FILM, 1% 1/
8W, 464 OHM
64 0309-00-6042 RESISTOR, FIXED, R45
METAL FILM, 1% 1/
8W, 60.4K
65 0315-00-0100 RESISTOR, FIXED, R10
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 10 OHM
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 100 OHM
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 10K
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 100K
69 0309-00-3923 RESISTOR, FIXED, R42
METAL FILM, 1% 1/
8W, 392K
70 0315-00-0202 RESISTOR, FIXED, R12
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 2K
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 200K
72 0309-00-1824 RESISTOR, FIXED, R43
METAL FILM, 1% 1/
8W, 1.82M
73 0315-00-0223 RESISTOR, FIXED, R25
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 22K


CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 4.7K
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 47K
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 680K
(COIN TYPE)
78 0388-00-0438-B DRILL & FAB, CPU
BOARD
79 0136-56-1324 SOCKET, LOW XU24
PROFILE, 24 PIN
SLIM DIP
80 0432-01-0002 PAD, MOUNTING XU39
81 0315-00-0685 RESISTOR, FIXED, R40
CARBON FILM, 1/
4W, 6.8M
82 0290-02-0227 CAP, FIXED, 220UF C67
TANT. 10V 20%
83 0315-00-0134 RESISTOR, FIXED, R34
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 130K
84 0315-00-0102 RESISTOR, FIXED, R47
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 1K
85 0290-02-0336 CAP, FIXED, 33UF C66
TANT. 10V 20%
86 0290-02-3226 CAP, FIXED, 22UF C14-C17
TANT. 35V 20%
87 006-04-2800 Wire, 28 AWG, Blk
88 0212-10-0406 Screw, 4-40, Nylon
89 0220-00-0037 Nut, Hex, 4-40,
Nylon
90 N/A CAP, 10uF, 10% C125
91 0210-00-0124 Ground Lug
92 0006-02-2000 20 Gauge Stranded
Wire, Blk

FRONT END BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0624(5L-CE)

1 0285-10-0102 CAP,POLYCARB .001UF C132,C133
2% 250V
2 0283-05-0103 CAP,.01UF 100V 10% C8,C9,C23,C101,C106
,C112,C122,C123
3 0283-04-0333 CAP,.033UF 100V 10% C66, C102, C505,
C506
4
5 0283-04-0104 CAP,.1UF 100V 10% C6,C7,C20,C22,C58,
C121, C508,
C509,C64,C65,C71,C7
2,C82, C510, C511,
C512,C83,C87,C88,C9
0,C91,C93,C502,
C504, C94,
C95,C104,C107,C515,
C113, C114, C115,
C31,C32,C34,C35,C42
,C43,C48,C49,C96,C5
13, C125, R165
6 0285-10-0104 CAP, .1UF 2% 30V C73, C75, C76, C99,
C100, C103,C44, C70,
C97, C63
7 0283-04-0224 CAP,.22UF 50V 10% C109, C126
8 0283-04-0334 CAP,.33UF 50V 10% C124,C45,C136,C137
9 0283-04-0474 CAP, .47UF 50V 10% C39, C47, C61, C110,
C128, C134, C503,
C60, C514, C135
10 0283-01-5180 CAP, 18PF 500V 5% C118
11 0285-09-0039 CAP,POLYCARBONATE C117
2UF 50V 10%
12 0283-05-0220 CAP,22PF 200V 10% C119
13 0290-02-1226 CAP,22UF TANT. 20V C129,C130
20%
14 0283-05-0331 CAP,330PF 1000V,10% C84,C86,C105
15 0290-02-0336 CAP,33UF TANT 10V C116,C516
20%
16
17 0290-02-3475 CAP,4.7UF TANT 35V C120,C111, C507
20%
18 0283-05-0471 CAP,470PF 100V 10% C25
19 0153-00-0085 1N6263 SCHOTTKY D20,D42,D43,D46,D49
DIODE ,D50,D52,D53
20 0153-00-0014 DIODE, 1N914 D5,D12,D13,D14,D15,
D16,D17,D18,D19,D24
,D25,D26,D27,D28,
D29,
D31,D32,D33,D34,
D39,D40,D41,D56,D57
,D58,D59


21
22 0155-00-0086 2 Channel Analog U18
Multiplexer
23 0155-00-0075 Quad Bilateral Switch U26
24 0155-00-0112 Dual Monostable U28
Multivibrator
25 0155-00-0210 Dual 4 Bit Binary U40
Counter
26 0155-00-0098 Dual Comparator U37
27 0155-00-0407 MC34082 AP, JFET OP U11
AMP
28 0151-01-0010 XSISTOR, HEXFET Q1,Q2,Q3,Q4,Q8,Q9
IRFD110
29 0315-00-0182 RES,1.8K 1/4W 5% R231,R233
30 0315-00-0101 RES,100 OHM 1/4W R39,R45,R51,R65,R67,
5% R90,R150
31 0307-00-0070 RES,MF NTWRK 100K RN3,RN4
1/8W .1%
32 0309-00-1003 RES,100K 1/8W 1% R76,R81,R207,R208
33 0315-00-0103 RES,10K 1/4W 5% R1,R2,R5,R15,R42,R43,
R88,R210,R256,R16,
R17
34 0320-00-1002 RES,10K 1/8W .1% R192,R193,R194,R212,
R255,R257
35 0309-00-1002 RES,10K 1/8W 1% R6,R7,R127,R163,R164,
R196,R200, R168
36 0315-00-0106 RES,10M 1/4W 5% R142,R144,R146,R148,
R228
37 0309-00-1153 RES,115K 1/8W 1% R156,R206
38 0309-00-1212 RES,12.1K 1/8W 1% R74,R520
39 0309-00-3742 RES, 37.4K 1/8W 1% R511
40 0309-00-1102 RES, 11K 1/8W 1% R53
41 0309-00-1540 RES, 154 OHM 1/8W R268
1%
42 0309-00-2002 RES, 20K 1/8W 1% R48,R49
43 0309-00-1622 RES,16.2K 1/8W 1% R46
44 0309-00-1652 RES,16.5K 1/8W 1% R185
45 0309-00-1823 RES,182K 1/8W 1% R189,R153
46 0315-00-0102 RES,1K 1/4W 5% R40,R50,R55,R170,R19
1,R249
47 0309-00-1001 RES,1K 1/8W 1% R80 ( -01, ONLY), R154,
R519
48 0315-00-0222 RES,2.2K 1/4W 5% R232,R52,R514,R120,R
134
49 0309-00-1181 RES, 1.18K 1/8W 1% R264
50 0309-00-2003 RES,200K 1/8W 1% R157,R159,R177,R215


51 0309-00-4022 RES, 40.2K, 1/8W, 1% R513
52 0309-00-2212 RES,22.1K 1/8W 1% R211, D37
53 0315-00-0240 RES, 24 OHM 1/4W R259,R260
5%
54 0309-00-2492 RES,24.9K 1/8W 1% R8
55 0309-00-3013 RES,301K, 1/8W, 1% R128
56 0315-00-0243 RES,24K 1/4W 5% R176,R178
57 0315-00-0202 RES,2K 1/4W 5% R82,R230
58
59 0309-00-9531 RES,9.53K 1/8W 1% R86
60 0315-00-0304 RES, 300K 1/4W 5% R205
61 0309-00-3011 RES, 3.01K, 1/8W, 1% R516
62 0309-00-3573 RES,357K 1/8W 1% R190
63 0309-00-3923 RES,392K 1/8W 1% R158,R183, R203
64 0309-00-7680 RES, 768 OHM 1/8W, R80
1%
65 0309-00-4751 RES,4.75K 1/8W 1% R186
66 0315-00-0472 RES,4.7K 1/4W 5% R173,R187
67 0315-00-0475 RES,4.7M 1/4W 5% R188
68 0315-00-0470 RES,47 OHM 1/4W R213
5%
69 0309-00-4752 RES,47.5K 1/8W 1% R54, R162, R214
70 0315-00-0474 RES,470K 1/4W 5% R83,R124,R505,R506
71 0315-00-0473 RES,47K 1/4W 5% R58,R84,
R169,R171,R172,R174,
R175,R179,
R245,R246,R507,R508,
R515
72 0309-00-3012 RES,30.1K 1/8W 1% R160
73 0309-00-4992 RES,49.9K 1/8W 1% R9,R10,R11,R79,R155,R
184,R209
74 0309-00-6813 RES,681K, 1/8W, 1% R126
75 0315-00-0824 RES,820K 1/4W 5% R167,R180
76 0120-00-0125 TRANSFORMER,PWR T1
ISOLATION
77 0155-00-0568 OP-AMP, LT1012 U14,U27
78 0155-00-0571 OP-AMP, LT1013C U20,U29,U30,U34,U50
,U8,U9
79 0155-00-0572 IC,OP-AMP TL032C U21,U24,U32,U33,U13
,U25, U31
80
84 0285-09-0010 CAP,1UF,50V,5% C46
85 0283-05-1394 CAP,.39UF,100V,5% C50
86 0283-05-2331 CAP,330PF,100V,2% C55,C57
87


88 0283-04-1474 CAP,.47UF,50V,5% C89
90
91 0290-02-3225 CAP,2.2UF,35V,20% C127
92
93 0136-24-1010 10 PIN HEADER J42
94 0136-24-1012 12 PIN HEADER J43
95 0108-00-0063 DUAL L1,L2
INDUCTOR,2MH,25%
96 0151-00-0035 TRANSISTOR,2N3904 Q10,Q11,Q12,Q13
97 0315-00-0392 RES,3.9K,1/4W,5% R44
98 0309-00-2672 RES,26.7K,1/8W,1% R47
99 0315-00-0912 RES, 9.10K, 1/4W,5% R56
100 0307-00-0072 RES,SPECIAL 3.539K, R66
0.01%, 2PPM
101 0307-00-0073 RES,SPECIAL 9.428K, R68
0.01%, 2PPM
102 0309-00-2871 RES,2.87K,1/8W,1% R75
103 0309-00-1584 RES,1.58M,1/8W,1% R85,R510
104 0309-00-1741 RES,1.74K,1/8W,1% R87
105 0320-00-2580 RES,258 OHM,1/ R116,R138,R122,R131
8W,.1%
106 0320-00-1383 RES,138 K,1/8W,.1% R118,R130
108 0309-00-3572 RES,35.7K, 1/8W, 1% R125, R263
110 0307-01-0473 RES NTWRK,47K,2% RN2
111 0309-00-1872 RES,18.7K,1/8W,1% R181
112 0309-00-9762 RES,97.6K,1/8W,1% R182
113 0309-00-1374 RES,1.37M,1/8W,1% R129
114
115 0315-00-0181 RES,180 OHM,1/ R234, R261, R262
4W,5%
116 0315-00-0271 RES,270 OHM,1/ R236
4W,5%
117 0315-00-0302 RES,3K,1/4W,5% R237
118
119 0120-00-0129 TRANSFORMER,RESPIR T2
ATION
120 0124-00-0064 TERMINAL TP1,TP2,TP3,TP4,TP5,TP
6,TP7,TP8,TP9,TP10,TP1
1
121 0315-00-0272 RES. 2.7K, 1/4W,5% R238
122 0315-00-0153 RES. 15K, 1/4W, 5% R235
123 0155-00-0239 OCTAL BUFFER U36
124 0155-90-0339 MICROCONTROLLER, U38
Rev C.3.1


125 0155-00-0574 A/D CONVERTER,10 U39
BIT
126 0155-00-0570 OPTO ISOLATOR U42,U43
127 0155-00-0576 OPTO ISOLATOR U44
128 0155-00-0575 REGULATING PWM U47
129 0151-00-0072 VOLTAGE REGULATOR U48,U49
130 0158-01-0023 CRYSTAL,3.6864 MHZ Y1
131
133 0283-05-0271 CAP, 270PF, 200V, C85,C500,C501
10%
134 0309-00-8661 RES, 8.66K, 1/8W, 1% R195
135
136 0315-00-0512 RES, 5.1K, 1/4W, 5% R201, R12
137 0136-57-0044 SOCKET,44pin PLCC SOCKET for U38
138 0309-00-1372 RES, 13.7K, 1/8W, 1% R78
139
140 0309-00-4642 RES, 46.4K, 1/8W, 1% R513
141 0309-00-1621 RES, 1.62K, 1/8W, 1% R265
142 0315-00-0361 RES, 360 OHM, 1/4W, R229
5%
143 0388-00-0560-B PCB
144 0309-00-2433 RES, 243K, 1/8 W, 1% R199
145 0215-03-0003 Tape, Double Coated, Use on Y1
Foam
146 0309-00-7681 RES, 7.68K, 1/8W, 1% R267
147 0309-00-1333 RES, 133K, 1/8W, 1% R204
148 0153-00-0069 DIODE, IN5817 D44, D45, D47, D48,
D51
149
150
151 0309-00-1213 RES, 121K,1/8W, 1% R266
152 0309-00-3921 RES, 3.92K,1/8W,1% R269
153 0290-02-3226 CAP, 22UF,TANT, 35V, C131
20%
154
155 0309-00-5231 RES, 5.23K, 1/8W, 1% R161
156 0530-00-0023 ADHESIVE, HOT MELT XU3
157 0136-97-1008 CONN, 16 PIN Low J41
Profile-Top entry
158 0136-97-3008 CONN, 16 PIN Low U3
Profile-Pass through
entry
159 0215-00-0029 INSULATOR for U3
160 0006-04-2800 Wire, 28 gauge, BLK


161 0283-05-0150 CAP, 15PF, 200V, 10% C56
162 0309-00-6192 RES, 61.9K, 1/8W, 1% R512
163 0283-05-0102 CAP, 1000PF, 200V, C11, C13
10%
164 0283-05-0152 CAP, 1500PF, 100V, C10, C12, C14
10%
165 0283-05-0222 CAP, 2200PF, 100V, C4, C5, C15, C16
10%
166 0283-05-0021 CAP, 220PF, 200V, C17, C18, C19, C21,
10% C24, C26, C27, C28,
C29
167 0283-05-0121 CAP, 120PF, 200V, C51
10%

0670-00-0626
LINE BATTERY BOARD 0670-00-0656 (XG-CE)

1 0124-00-0064 Test Point, Loop TP1
2 0131-07-0004 CONN., 4 pin single J51
row rt angle 0.156
3 0131-07-0006 CONN., 6 pin single J53
row rt angle 0.156
4 0136-17-0007 CONN., 7 pin single J55
row header 0.125
5 0151-00-0115 TRANS., 2N7000 Q1, Q2
6 0151-00-0181 TRANS., IRFZ40 Q3
7 0153-00-0014 DIO., 1N4148 CR2-7
8 0153-00-0069 DIO., 1N5817 CR11, CR12
9 0153-08-0004 DIO., USD945 CR8-10
10 0155-00-0030 IC, LM4250 U1
11 0155-00-0578 VOLT REF., LT1004-1.2 CR1
12 0155-00-0587 IC, CD4093BE U2
13 0159-12-0021 FUSE, 2.5A, 5x20mm, F1
TIME LAG
14 0159-12-0023 FUSE, 4A, 5x20mm, F2,F3
TIME LAG
15 0283-05-0101 CAP., 100pf, 10%, C4
200V cer
16 0283-05-0104 CAP., 0.1uF, 10%, C1, C3
100V, CER.
17 0283-10-1103 CAP., 0.01uF, 5%, C5, C6
100V,CER.
18 0290-02-2106 CAP., 10uF, 20%, 25v, C7
TANT
19 0320-00-1543 RES., 154K, 0.1% R2
20 0309-00-3573 RES., 357K,1%, 1/8W R4
21 0315-00-0104 RES., 100K, 5%, 1/4W R9, R10, R13
22 0315-00-0105 RES., 1M, 5%, 1/4W R8
23 0315-00-0106 RES., 10M, 5%, 1/4W R5, R6
24 0315-00-0120 RES., 12 OHM, %5, 1/ R14
4W
25 0315-00-0205 RES., 2M, 5%, 1/4W R12
26 0315-00-0473 RES., 47K, 5%, 1/4W R11
27 0315-00-0824 RES., 820K, 5%, 1/4W R3
28 0348-00-0154 BOARD PAD
29 0352-00-0026 FUSE CLIP
30 0373-00-0047 HEAT SINK
31 0309-00-1184 RES., 1.18M, 1%, 1/ R1
8W
32 0136-28-0007 CONN., 14 pin double J54
row .10

0670-00-0626
LINE BATTERY BOARD 0670-00-0656 (XG-CE)

33 0388-00-0626 PCB REV A
34 0014-00-0028 Power Supply, DC/DC
Converter
35 0210-20-0002 Terminal, Crimp Ring, #6
22-16 AWG,
36 0006-05-1854 Wire, Stranded GRN/
YEL
37 0136-87-0010 Conn., 10 pin double J52
row .10

INTERCONNECT BOARD
ASSEMBLY HP 0670-00-0629 (CE)

1 0388-00-0615 PCB Revision A
2 0301-00-0472 RES, CC, 4.7K, 5%,1/2 R1, R2, R3, R9, R10
W
3 0307-00-0089 RESISTOR SPECIAL, 1/ R4
2W, 5%, 100 MEG
OHM
4 0283-00-0055 CAP, .0047 UF, 3KV, C1, C2
10%
5 0153-00-0091 DIODE, ZENER CR4-9, CR12
1N6275
CR11
7 0167-00-0007 SPARK GAP DG1
8 0131-00-0232 CONN, 12 Pin P3
Receptacle HP ECG
9 0131-00-0231 CONN, 12 Pin P1,P2
Receptacle HP Press
10 0131-00-0227 CONN, Phone, 1/4" P4
Plastic Bushing
11 0136-24-1018 HEADER, DBL ROW 18 J1
PIN
12 0136-24-1016 HEADER, DBL ROW 16 J1
PIN
13 0283-05-0102 CAP,.001uF,200v,10% C3,C4,C5
14 0108-00-0028 TORROID L1
15 0006-04-2299 Wire Solid, 22 AWG L1
17 0309-00-4991 RES, 4.99K, 1%, 1/8 R5, R6, R7, R8, R11
W RN55
18 0283-01-5121 CAP, 120pF, 5% C6, C7, C8, C9, C10
22 0149-00-0001 Neon Bulb DS1, DS2
23
24 0006-04-2800 Wire, 28 gauge, Blk R12, R13
25 0348-00-0054-03 Bumper, Molded
26 0007-02-0022 Solid Buss Wire, 22 for P1, P2
AWG

CO2 INTERFACE MODULE BOARD 0670-00-0632-02

1 0014-00-0035 POWER MODULE, VC1
DUAL OUTPUT, +/- 15V
2 0014-00-0176 POWER MODULE, VC1
DUAL OUTPUT,+/- 12V
3 0108-00-0038 INDUCTOR, 120UH, L2
2A
4 0108-00-0058 CHOKE, FERRITE BEAD L1
5 0131-07-0004 CONN,FRICTION J93
LOCK,RA,4PIN
6
7 0136-24-1004 HEADER,DOUBLE JP1/JP2
ROW,ST,4 PIN
8 0136-56-1324 SOCKET,DIP,24PIN, 0.3 U4
WIDE
9 0136-57-0044 SOCKET, PLCC 44 U1
10 0136-24-1050 HEADER,DOUBLE J91
ROW,ST,50 PIN
11
12 0155-00-0426 IC, 74HCT244, OCTAL U3
BUFFER
13 0155-00-0516 IC, 74HCT377, OCTAL U2
D-TYPE FLIP-FLOP
14 0155-90-0211 IC, U1
MICROCONTROLLER,
PGM'D
15 0155-90-0212 IC,EP600,EPLD,PGM'D U4
16 0158-05-0011 OSCILLTOR, 3.6864 Y1
MHz
17
18 0215-03-0001 TAPE, DOUBLE Used under
COATED FOAM C9,C10,C13,U5
19
20 0283-04-0104 CAP, C1, C3, C4, C5, C11,
CER,0.1UF,100v,10% C12 (-02 only) C16
21 0283-05-0102 CAP,CER, C6,C7
0.001UF,200v,10%
22
23 0290-00-0070 CAP, ALUM C10
ELEC,1000UF,25V,
20%,LOW ESR
24 0290-01-2220 CAP,ALUM C8
ELEC,22UF,25v, -10 /
+50%
25 0290-17-3221 CAP,ALUM ELEC, C9 (-02 only) C13
220UF, 35V, 20%,LOW
ESR

CO2 INTERFACE MODULE BOARD 0670-00-0632-02

26 0315-00-0103 RES, CF, 10K, 1/4W, R4
5%
27
28 0307-06-2103 RES NTWK,10K, SIP,9 RP1
ELEMENT
29 0315-00-0102 RES,CF, 1K, 1/4W, 5% R3
30
31 0155-00-0922-01 -12V REGULATOR, (-02 only) U5
79M12
32 0315-00-0101 RES, CF, 100, 1/4W, R1
5%
33 0388-00-0632 DRILL & FAB, , CO2 PC BOARD
INTERFACE MODULE
34
35 0530-00-0021 HOT MELT GLUE USE UNDER L2
36 0290-02-3225 CAP, TANT, 2.2UF, 35V, (-02 only) C14
20%
37 0290-02-3105 CAP, TANT, 1UF, 35V, (-02 only) C15
20%
38 0136-82-0010 HEADER, .100 CTR STR (-01 only) J92
LOCKING/
POLARIZING-10 PIN
39 0136-00-0238 EADER, .100 CTR STR (-02 only) J94
LOCKING/
POLARIZING-10 PIN

TERMINATION BOARD 0670-00-0648

1 0388-00-0648 PWB, Termination
Board
2 0136-00-0241 Connector PC, P68 Samtec, ESW-120-
Receptacle Elelevated, 23-G-D
40 Pin Dual Row, .100
Pitch
3 0136-20-1040 Header, Dual Row, Rt. J71 Samtec, TSW-120-
Angle 08-G-D-RA
4 0108-00-0086 Inductor Fixed, Choke L1
Common Mode
5 0326-00-0750 Resistor, 75 Ohm, SMD, R1-R9 KOA, RM73-B-
Thick Film, 1/10W, 5% 2A-750-J
6 0125-00-0021 Beaded Tie Tie around L1

CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0651

1 0108-00-0058 CHOKE L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7,
L8, L9, L10, L12
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT 5.1 OHM
3 0136-00-0142 CONN PC, 16 PIN, J66
SIDE ENTRY
4 0136-00-0144 50 PIN RIGHT ANGLE J63
5 0136-00-0228 Conn, PC, 50 Position J61
w/ guide,w/o key
6 0136-22-0003 HEADER TP15, TP16, TP17, TP18,
CONNECTOR, 3 PIN TP19, TP20, JP1
8 0136-24-1008 HEADER DOUBLE TP1, TP2, TP3, TP4, TP5,
ROW, 8 PIN TP6, TP7, TP8
ROW, 10 PIN
10 0136-24-1016 HEADER DOUBLE J67
ROW, 16 PIN
11 0136-24-1026 HEADER DOUBLE J62
ROW, 26 PIN
12 0136-24-1040 HEADER DOUBLE J68
ROW, 40 PIN
STR HDR W/ EJECTOR
14 0151-00-0061 TRANSISTOR Q1
2N2222A
1N6263
16 0153-00-0093 VOLTAGE REF, SG3503 U39
17 0388-00-0438-B CPU PCB
POWER AMPLIFIER,
LM386
19 0155-00-0201 IC 8-BIT MULT D/A, U36
AD7524
20 0155-00-0400 IC, DUAL RS-232 U31
TRANSMITTER/
RECEIVER MAX 232
21 0155-00-0404 IC QUAD SPST U34
ANALOG SWITCH,
DG201
22 0155-00-0590-01 IC, 32K X 8 STATIC U6
RAM
23 0155-00-0426 IC, OCTAL BUFFER/ U8, U9, U10, U13, U14,
LINE DRIVER, U16, U17, U18, U29
74HCT244


BUS TRANSCEIVER,
74HCT245
25 0155-00-0470 IC, 93C46, SERIAL U4
EEPROM
74HCT240
74HCT377
28 0155-00-0518 IC, INTEGRATED U1
MULTIPROTOCOL
PROCESSOR,
MC68302
29 0155-00-0519 IC, 8 BIT A/D U32
CONVERTER W/11
CHANNEL MULTIPLEX
30 0155-00-0520 IC, DISPLAY U5
CONTROLLER, V6366F
TIMEKEEPER, DS1202
32 0155-00-0522 IC, DIGITAL U21
MICROMANAGER,
DS1236
33 0155-00-0523 IC, OP AMP, LOW U33, U35
POWER JFET, TL034
34 0155-00-0524 IC, DUAL 1-OF-4 U23
DECODER/
DEMULTIPLEXER,
74ACT139
35 0155-00-0525 IC, QUAD 2 INPUT U28
NOR GATE, 74ACT02
36 0155-00-0529 IC, HEX INVERTER, U27
74ALS04
37 0155-00-0530-02 IC, STATIC RAM, U2, U3
CMOS, 1 MEG
38 0155-00-0579 IC, 1-OF-8 DECODER/ U22
DEMULTIPLEXER,
74ACT138
FORK, 32.768 KHZ
41 0158-01-0025 MICROPROCESSOR CRYSTAL, 16.5888 MHZ
QUARTZ
42 0158-05-0001 CRYSTAL, CLOCK U38
OSCILLATOR,
14.31818 MHZ


43 0283-04-0104 CAP, CERAMIC, .1UF C5, C6, C13, C29, C30,
100V 10% C31, C32, C33, C35,
C42, C44, C45, C46,
C47, C48, C49, C50,
C51, C52, C53, C54,
C55, C56, C57, C58,
C59, C60, C61, C62,
C63, C64, C68, C75,
C77, C78, C103, C113,
C121, C122, C123,
C124, C125
44 0283-04-0473 CAP, CERAMIC, C37
.047UF 100V 10%
45 0283-05-0100 CAP, CERAMIC, 10PF C70, C72
200V 10%
46 0283-05-0101 CAP, CERAMIC, 100PF C112, C114
200V 10%
47 0283-05-0102 CAP, CERAMIC, C104, C105, C106,
.001UF 200V 10% C107, C108, C109,
C110, C111
100V 10% C43, C65, C69, C73,
C74, C76, C115, C116
200V 10%
50 0283-05-0222 CAP, CERAMIC, C118, C38
.0022UF 200V 10%
51 0283-05-0471 CAP, CERAMIC, 470PF C119
100V 10%
35V 20%
53 0290-02-3475 CAP, FIXED, 4.7UF C7, C8, C18
TANT 35V 20%
54 0290-07-1053 CAP, FIXED ELECT., C120
10000 UF
DIP 14 PIN, 10K .5% 7
Resistors
SIP 10 PIN, 100K
SIP 10 PIN, 390K
SIP 10 PIN, 47 OHM
60 0309-00-2052 RESISTOR, FIXED, 1% 1/8W, 20.5K
METAL FILM,
61 0309-00-1003 RESISTOR, FIXED, 1% 1/8W, 100K
METAL FILM,


METAL FILM,
63 0309-00-4640 RESISTOR, FIXED, 1% 1/8W, 464 OHM
METAL FILM,
METAL FILM,
65 0315-00-0100 RESISTOR, FIXED, 1/4 WATT, 10 OHM
CARBON FILM,
66 0315-00-0101 RESISTOR, FIXED, 1/4 WATT, 100 OHM
CARBON FILM,
67 0315-00-0103 RESISTOR, FIXED, 1/4 WATT, 10K
CARBON FILM,
CARBON FILM,
69 0309-00-3923 RESISTOR, FIXED, 1% 1/8W, 392K
METAL FILM,
CARBON FILM,
CARBON FILM,
72 0309-00-1824 RESISTOR, FIXED, 1% 1/8W, 1.82M
METAL FILM,
CARBON FILM,
74 0315-00-0472 RESISTOR, FIXED, 1/4 WATT, 4.7K
CARBON FILM,
CARBON FILM,
CARBON FILM,
(COIN TYPE)
78 0388-00-0438-B DRILL & FAB, CPU
BOARD
79 0136-56-1324 SOCKET, LOW XU24
PROFILE, 24 PIN SLIM
DIP
80 0432-01-0002 PAD, MOUNTING XU39
81 0315-00-0685 RESISTOR, FIXED, R40
CARBON FILM, 1/4W,
6.8M
82 0290-02-0227 CAP, FIXED, 220UF C67
TANT. 10V 20%
83 0315-00-0134 RESISTOR, FIXED, R34
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 130K
84 0315-00-0102 RESISTOR, FIXED, R47
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 1K


85 0290-02-0336 CAP, FIXED, 33UF C66
TANT. 10V 20%
86 0290-02-3226 CAP, FIXED, 22UF C14-C17
TANT. 35V 20%
87 0006-04-2800 Wire, 28 AWG, Blk.
88 0210-00-0124 Ground Lug
89 0006-02-2000 20 Gauge Stranded
Wire, BLK
90 0212-10-0406 SCREW, 4-40, NYLON
91 0220-00-0037 NUT, HEX, 4-40,
NYLON
92 0155-00-0954-01 IC, OCTAL BUFFER/ U30
LINE DRIVER, 74LS244

CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY 0670-00-0688/0689

1 0108-00-0058 CHOKE L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7,
L8, L9, L10, L12
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT 5.1 OHM
3 0136-00-0142 CONN PC, 16 PIN, SIDE J66
ENTRY
4 0136-00-0144 50 PIN RIGHT ANGLE J63
5 0136-00-0228 Conn, PC, 50 Position w/ J61
guide, w/o key
6 0136-22-0003 HEADER CONNECTOR, TP15, TP16, TP17, TP18,
3 PIN TP19, TP20, JP1
7 0136-24-1006 HEADER DOUBLE ROW, TP9, TP10, TP11, TP12,
6 PIN TP13, TP14
8 0136-24-1008 HEADER DOUBLE ROW, TP1, TP2, TP3, TP4, TP5,
8 PIN TP6, TP7, TP8
9 0136-24-1010 HEADER DOUBLE ROW, J64
10 PIN
16 PIN
26 PIN
40 PIN
STR HDR W/ EJECTOR
14 0151-00-0061 TRANSISTOR 2N2222A Q1
1N6263
16 0153-00-0093 VOLTAGE REF, SG3503 U39
17 0388-00-0438-B CPU PCB
POWER AMPLIFIER,
LM386
19 0155-00-0201 IC 8-BIT MULT D/A, U36
AD7524
20 0155-00-0400 IC, DUAL RS-232 U31
TRANSMITTER/
RECEIVER MAX 232
21 0155-00-0404 IC QUAD SPST ANALOG U34
SWITCH, DG201
22 0155-00-0590-01 IC, 32K X 8 STATIC RAM U6
23 0155-00-0426 IC, OCTAL BUFFER/LINE U8, U9, U10, U13, U14,
DRIVER, 74HCT244 U16, U17, U18
24 0155-00-0438 IC, DIGITAL, OCTAL BUS U7, U12, U15
TRANSCEIVER,
74HCT245


25 0155-00-0470 IC, 93C46, SERIAL U4
EEPROM
74HCT240
74HCT377
28 0155-00-0518 IC, INTEGRATED U1
MULTIPROTOCOL
PROCESSOR
29 0155-00-0519 IC, 8 BIT A/D U32
CONVERTER W/11
CHANNEL MULTIPLEX
30 0155-00-0520 IC, DISPLAY U5
CONTROLLER, V6366F
TIMEKEEPER, DS1202
32 0155-00-0522 IC, DIGITAL U21
MICROMANAGER,
DS1236
33 0155-00-0523 IC, OP AMP, LOW U33, U35
POWER JFET, TL034
34 0155-00-0524 IC, DUAL 1-OF-4 U23
DECODER/
DEMULTIPLEXER,
74ACT139
35 0155-00-0525 IC, QUAD 2 INPUT NOR U28
GATE, 74ACT02
36 0155-00-0529 IC, HEX INVERTER, U27
74ALS04
37 0155-00-0530-04 IC, STATIC RAM, CMOS, U2, U3
1 MEG
38 0155-00-0579 IC, 1-OF-8 DECODER/ U22
DEMULTIPLEXER,
74ACT138
40 0158-00-0010 CRYSTAL,TUNING FORK, Y2
32.768 KHZ
QUARTZ CRYSTAL,
16.5888 MHZ
42 0158-05-0001 CRYSTAL, CLOCK U38
OSCILLATOR, 14.31818
MHZ


43 0283-04-0104 CAP, CERAMIC, .1UF C5, C6, C13, C29, C30,
100V 10% C31, C32, C33, C35,
C42, C44, C45, C46,
C47, C48, C49, C50,
C51, C52, C53, C54,
C55, C56, C57, C58,
C59, C60, C61, C62,
C63, C64, C68, C75,
C77, C78, C103, C113,
C121, C122, C123,
C124, C125
44 0283-04-0473 CAP, CERAMIC, .047UF C37
100V 10%
45 0283-05-0100 CAP, CERAMIC, 10PF C70, C72
200V 10%
46 0283-05-0101 CAP, CERAMIC, 100PF C112, C114
200V 10%
47 0283-05-0102 CAP, CERAMIC, .001UF C104, C105, C106,
200V 10% C107, C108, C109,
C110, C111
100V 10% C43, C65, C69, C73,
C74, C76, C115, C116
200V 10%
50 0283-05-0222 CAP, CERAMIC, .0022UF C118, C38
200V 10%
51 0283-05-0471 CAP, CERAMIC, 470PF C119
100V 10%
35V 20%
53 0290-02-3475 CAP, FIXED, 4.7UF TANT C7, C8, C18
35V 20 %
54 0290-07-1053 CAP, FIXED ELECT., C120
10000 UF
DIP 14 PIN, 10K .5% 7
Resistors
SIP 10 PIN, 100K
SIP 10 PIN, 390K
SIP 10 PIN, 47 OHM
60 0309-00-2052 RESISTOR, FIXED, METAL R46
FILM, 1% 1/8W, 20.5K
FILM, 1% 1/8W, 100K


FILM, 1% 1/8W, 4.42K
FILM, 1% 1/8W, 464
OHM
FILM, 1% 1/8W, 60.4K
65 0315-00-0100 RESISTOR, FIXED, R10
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 10 OHM
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 100 OHM
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 10K
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 100K
FILM, 1% 1/8W, 392K
70 0315-00-0202 RESISTOR, FIXED, R12
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 2K
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 200K
FILM, 1% 1/8W, 1.82M
73 0315-00-0223 RESISTOR, FIXED, R25
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 22K
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 4.7K
CARBON FILM
CARBON FILM
77 0352-00-0029 HOLDER BATTERY (COIN XBT1
TYPE)
78 0388-00-0438-B DRILL & FAB, CPU BOARD
79 0136-56-1324 SOCKET, LOW PROFILE, XU24
24 PIN SLIM DIP
80 0432-01-0002 PAD, MOUNTING XU39
81 0315-00-0685 RESISTOR, FIXED, R40
CARBON FILM, 1/4W,
6.8M
82 0290-02-0227 CAP, FIXED, 220UF C67
TANT. 10V 20%


83 0315-00-0134 RESISTOR, FIXED, R34
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 130K
84 0315-00-0102 RESISTOR, FIXED, R47
CARBON FILM, 1/4
WATT, 1K
85 0290-02-0336 CAP, FIXED, 33UF TANT. C66
10V 20%
86 0290-02-3226 CAP, FIXED, 22UF TANT. C14-C17
35V 20%
87 0006-04-2800 Wire, 28 AWG, Blk
88 0210-00-0124 Ground Lug
89 0006-02-2000 20 Guage Stranded
wIRE, bLK
90 0212-10-0406 Screw, 4-40, Nylon
91 0220-00-0037 Nut, Hex, 4-40, Nylon
92 0155-00-0954-01 IC,OCTAL BUFFER/LINE U30 (for 0670-00-0689
DRIVER, 74LS244 only)
93 0006-04-2800 20 AWG, Wire Blk
94 0155-00-0426 IC, OCTAL BUFFER/LINE U30 (for 0670-00-0688
DRIVER only)
DRIVER only)
DRIVER only)
97 0136-00-0391-01 Adapter, SMT-to-DIP XU20


7.0 Calibration

Diagnostic Menu Tree ..................................................... 7-3
7.1 Introduction ............................................................. 7-4
7.2 Warnings and Guidelines ........................................ 7-4
7.3 Test Equipment and Special Tools Required .............. 7-4
7.4 Inputs ...................................................................... 7-4
7.5 Diagnostics and Calibration Procedure ..................... 7-5
7.5.1 NIBP Diagnostics .................................................. 7-5
7.5.2 Error Journal ........................................................ 7-11
7.5.3 Exception Stack Frame ......................................... 7-11
7.5.4 Communication Test .............................................. 7-11
7.5.4.1 Front End Communication Test ........................... 7-11
7.5.4.2 External Communication Test ............................. 7-12
7.5.4.3 NIBP Communication Test .................................. 7-13
7.5.5 Recorder .............................................................. 7-14
7.5.6 Voltage Test .......................................................... 7-14
7.5.6.1 External Voltage ................................................ 7-14
7.5.6.2 Battery Voltage ................................................. 7-14
7.5.7 Display Test .......................................................... 7-14
7.5.7.1 Pixel Test (5L, LT, XG - EL) ................................... 7-15
7.5.7.2 Pixel Test (XG - Color LCD) ................................. 7-16
7.5.7.3 Video Controller Test ......................................... 7-16
7.5.8 Keyboard Test ...................................................... 7-17
7.5.9 SpO2 Diagnostics (Datascope SpO2 Installed) ........ 7-18
7.5.9.1 Accuracy Test ..................................................... 7-18
7.5.9.2 DAC Test ............................................................ 7-19

Calibration
7.5.9.3 Shared RAM Test ............................................... 7-19

7.5.10 SpO2 Diagnostics (Nellcor SpO2 Installed) ........... 7-20
7.5.11 SpO2 Diagnostics (Masimo SpO2 Installed) ......... 7-20

Calibration
Diagnostic Menu Tree

Main Menu 1st Sub Menu 2nd Sub Menu Test Results & Specifications
NIBP Diagnostics Pneumatic Test Motor Pump Test Pump to 250mmhg < 16.0 sec
Bleed Rate Test Fixed Orifice NIBP
Orifice #1: 5.6 - 11 mmHg/sec
Orifice #2: 1.0 - 1.9 mmHg/sec
Orifice #4: 50 mmHg or greater
Linear Bleed NIBP

Orifice #4: 50 mmHg or greater
Leak Test Leak should not exceed 10.0 mmHg/min
Overpressure Test Linear Bleed NIBP Overpressure Test

Adult Sensor was tripped at 315 mmHg, +/- 5%
Neonate Sensor was tripped at 157.5 mmHg, +/- 5%
Fixed Orifice NIBP Overpressure Test

Adult Sensor was tripped at 375 mmHg, +5%, -10%
Neonate Sensor was pumped to 190 mmHg without
tripping sensor
Offset Noise
Pulse Channel Test Gain 1: 1.5 -1.83 <30mv
Gain 2: 1.5 - 1.83 <60mv
Gain 3: 1.5 - 1.83 <90mv
Pressure Cal. Low Range +/- 3mmhg

Mid Range +/- 3mmhg
High Range +/- 3mmhg
Error Journal Prints to Recorder/Displays on Screen
Exception Stack Frame Prints to Recorder/Displays on Screen
Communication Front End Comm. Test Internal: Pass - Intermittent - Failed

Echo: Pass - Intermittent - Failed
External Comm. Test Internal: Pass - Failed

External: Pass - Failed
NIBP Comm. Test Internal: Pass - Failed
Recorder See Printer Strip
Voltage Test External Voltage Test 15.6 - 17.6

Battery Voltage Test 12v DC Nominal
Low Battery Warning <11.29 +/- .4V
System Shutdown <10.69 +/- .3V
Display Test Pixel Test Pattern 1 (XG Color LCD Only)

Pattern 2
Pattern 3 Pattern 1
Pattern 4 Pattern 2 Green
Pattern 5 Pattern 3 Red
Video Controller Test Vertical Bars
Keyboard Test Key Pressed is Displayed on Screen
Spo2 Diagnostics Accuracy Test 85% +/-1
DAC Test J24-5

-5s
Shared Ram Test Memory Test 1 Pass/Fail
Memory Test 2 Pass/Fail
Memory Test 3 Pass/Fail

Introduction Calibration
7.1 Introduction
The following procedures are provided to verify the proper operation of the Passport 5 Lead/
5L/LT Monitor. Service diagnostics provide the capabilities of diagnosing problems in the
Passport hardware in the field. A menu driven interface, with the same “look and feel” as
that of the online Passport user interface, is used to execute all tests. The Diagnostic Menu
Tree (located on page 7-3) is provided for reference once familiar with these procedures.
7.2 Warnings and Guidelines

In the event that the instrument covers are removed, observe these following warnings and
general guidelines:
• Do not short component leads together.

• Perform all steps in the exact order given.
• Use extreme care when reaching inside the opened instrument. Do not contact exposed
metal parts which may become live.
• Read through each step in the procedure so it is understood prior to beginning the step.
7.3 Test Equipment and Special Tools Required

DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
Standard Mercury Column 0 - 300 mmHg
Dummy Cuff/Test Chamber Datascope P/N 0138-00-0001-01
Safety Analyzer Dempsey Model or equivalent
Finger Sensor Probe Accusat Comparable
DVM
Oscilloscope
Metric Ruler
Patient Simulator
Flow meter / Siera Instruments
(Model 822-13-001-001-01) or equivalent 0-300 cc/min.
7.4 Inputs
User input is provided through the following keys:
• UP ARROW
• DOWN ARROW
• SELECT
• END
• RECORD (only when printable test results are displayed)
• DEFLATE (for NIBP diagnostics only)

Calibration Diagnostics and Calibration Procedure
7.5 Diagnostics and Calibration Procedure

To enter the Service Diagnostic mode:
1. Turn the power off.

2. Turn the power on. After approximately six seconds the message “Diagnostics in
Progress” followed by “Selftest Complete” will appear on the display. When "Selftest
Complete" appears press and hold the HIDDEN KEY located between the FREEZE and
DEFLATE keys. (For the Passport XG the HIDDEN KEY is located between the EXIT and
SIZE keys.) When the Diagnostics Menu appears, (see Figure 7-1) release the HIDDEN
KEY.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Monitor Version:x.x.x:xxxx Thu May 14 13:07 1992
PCM Version:x.x.x:xxx SpO2 Version:x.x.x:xxxx NIBP Version: x.x.:xxxx
NIBP
Error Journal
Exception Stack Frame
Communications
Recorder
Voltlage
Display
Keyboard
SpO2
Use arrow keys to move cursor, SELECT to choose a menu item

Press & hold the END key for 3 sec. to leave Service Diagnostics
NIBP: Idle SpO2 Diagnostics
FIGURE 7-1 Main Diagnostics Menu
3. One of the items will be displayed in reverse graphics. When the ARROW KEYS are
pressed the cursor moves up and down in the Service Menu, and when the SELECT key
is pressed the selected diagnostic test is performed. If the END key is pressed and held
for three seconds when the Main Diagnostics Menu is displayed, the diagnostic mode is
ended, and the unit goes into a normal monitoring mode.
NOTE: The x.x.x:xxxx represents the software revision for the

Datasette, SpO2, and NIBP code. The tests available may
vary with Datasette revision level. hen entering the Service
Diagnostics Mode, note the Datasette revision (PCM Version)
and reference the correct specifications and test results.
7.5.1 NIBP Diagnostics

When this menu option is selected the Main Menu is covered by the NIBP Diagnostics Menu.
The NIBP Diagnostics consists of three separate sub menus as shown in Figure 7-2. These
tests are performed to check the pneumatics components of the unit.

Diagnostics and Calibration Procedure Calibration
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
NIBP NIBP DIAGNOSTICS

Error Journal
Pneumatic
Pulse Channel
Communications
Pressure Calibration
Recorder
Voltlage
Display
Keyboard
SpO2

FIGURE 7-2 NIBP Diagnostics Menu
Move the cursor to the desired menu option and press SELECT to perform that function. Press
END to return to the Main Menu.
7.5.1.1 Pneumatics Test

When this diagnostics is selected the NIBP diagnostics menu is covered by the pneumatics
test menu. This menu contains four items as shown in Figure 7-3.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
NIBP PNEUMATIC TESTS

ErrorMotor Pump Test
Journal
Pneumatic
Exception
BleedStack
Rate Frame
Test
Pulse Channel
Communications
Leak Test
Recorder
Overpressure Test
Voltlage
Display
Keyboard
SpO2

FIGURE 7-3 NIBP Pneumatics Test Menu
NOTE: The pneumatics test is performed with the 700 cc dummy

cuff/test chamber connected. If the DEFLATE key is pressed
during any pneumatic test, the test will be aborted and the
valves in the NIBP module will open to release the pressure
in the test chamber.
NOTE: The NIBP hose with a safety leak fitting cannot be used,
otherwise the test results are invalid.

1. Motor Pump Test

The purpose of this test is to determine if the output of the pump is adequate.
a. Connect the dummy cuff/test chamber to the side panel luer fitting.
NOTE: The dummy cuff/test chamber must be used for this test,
b. Highlight the Motor Pump Test option and press the SELECT key to start the test. The
pump will start and inflate the chamber to 250 mmHg, then pressure is released.
During the inflation/deflation cycle the current pressure is displayed in the pressure
window. The time required to reach the target pressure will be displayed in units of
xx.x seconds as shown in Figure 7-4.
Specification
Pump to 250 mmHg < 16.0 seconds
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
NIBP PNEUMATIC TESTS CUFF:

ErrorMotor Pump Test
Journal
Pneumatic O
Exception
BleedStack Frame
Rate Test
Pulse Channel
Communications
Leak Test
Recorder
Overpressure Test Time required to pump to 250 mmHg - 10.7 sec.
Voltlage
Display
Keyboard
Press Deflate to end test.
SpO2

FIGURE 7-4 Motor Pump Test Display
2. Bleed Rate Test

The purpose of this test is to determine if the solenoids and orifices are performing properly.
b. Highlight the Bleed Rate Test option and press the SELECT key to start the test.
Selecting this option causes the pump motor to inflate the test chamber to 170
mmHg. The largest orifice is then opened. The time required for the pressure to drop
from 150 mmHg to 130 mmHg is counted. The test is repeated for the middle and
smallest orifice. The chamber is then inflated to 250 mmHg. This time the dump valve
is opened and the time required for the pressure to drop from 250 mmHg to 20
mmHg is counted. The pressure is then released and the bleed rate for each orifice is
displayed in units of xx.x mmHg/sec. The current pressure is displayed in the
pressure window during the entire test. The format for displaying the test results is
shown in Figure 7-5.

Fixed Orifice NIBP Bleed Rate

Orifice #1 xxx.x mm/sec Specification
Orifice #2 xxx.x mm/sec 5.6 - 11.0 mmHg/sec
0.5 - 0.9 mmHg/sec
Orifice #4 xxx.x mm/sec
50 mmHg/sec or greater
Linear Bleed NIBP Bleed Rate

Orifice #1 xxx.x mm/sec Specification
4.8 - 7.2 mmHg/sec
Orifice #4 xxx.x mm/sec
50 mmHg/sec or greater
c. Press the RECORD key to obtain a printout of the test results.

d. Press the DEFLATE key and then the SELECT key to repeat the Bleed Rate Test, or
press the DEFLATE key to quit the test and return to the NIBP Pneumatic Test Menu.
3. Leak Test
The purpose of the leak test is to check the leak rate of all the pneumatic components.
b. Highlight the Leak Test option and press the SELECT key to start the test.
The chamber is inflated to about 200 mmHg. After waiting five seconds for the
pressure to settle, the pressure is noted and then held for one minute. The ending
pressure is noted and then the pressure is released. The current pressure is displayed
in the PRESSURE window during the entire test. The total pressure drop during the
one minute holding period is displayed as the leak rate as shown in Figure 7-6.
Leak Test Specification

Leak Rate = xx.mmHg/min. The lead should not exceed 10.0 mmHg/
min.
FIGURE 7-5 Leak Test Results

d. Press the DEFLATE key and then the START key to repeat the LEAK TEST, or press the
DEFLATE key to quit the test and return to the NIBP Pneumatic Test Menu.
4. Overpressure Test
The purpose of this test is to determine whether the overpressure sensor is operating
properly. This sensor prevents an overpressure condition in the event that the normal
sensing circuit fails.

WARNING: If there is an external mercury column connected, the test

may exceed the pressure rating of the mercury column.
b. Highlight the Overpressure Test Option and press the SELECT key to start the test.
When this option is selected the pump is started in an attempt to pump up to a

pressure of 395 mmHg. The test indicates the maximum pressure reached and
indicates whether the overpressure sensor was activated as shown in Figure 7-7.
Fixed Orifice NIBP Overpressure

Specification
Sensor was tripped at xxx.mmHg
Adult Sensor: 337 to 395 mmHg
Or
Linear Bleed NIBP Overpressure
Pumped to xxx.mmHg without Specification
tripping sensor..
Adult Sensor: 300 to 330 mmHg
Neonate Sensor: 150 to 165 mmHg

d. Press the DEFLATE key and then the SELECT key to repeat the OVERPRESSURE TEST,
or press the DEFLATE key to quit the test and return to the NIBP Pneumatic Test Menu.
NOTE: Neonate overpressure test will occur in units with Rev TA

software only.
7.5.1.2 Pulse Channel Test

The purpose of this test is to measure the DC offset and average noise in the pulse channel of
the NIBP module for each of the three possible gain settings. During the test the cuff
connector should be open.
a. Highlight the Pulse Channel Test option from the NIBP DIAGNOSTICS menu and
press the SELECT key to start the test. The test results will be displayed as shown in
Figure 7-8.
b. Press the RECORD key to obtain a printout of the test results
c. Press the DEFLATE key and then the SELECT key to repeat the PULSE CHANNEL TEST,
or press the DEFLATE key to quit the test and return to the NIBP Pneumatic Test Menu.
7.5.1.3 Pressure Calibration

The purpose of this test is to adjust the sensitivity of the transducer circuit for optimal accuracy
and for checking the linearity at three separate pressure points.

FIGURE 7-6 Setup for Pressure Calibration
a. Connect the dummy cuff/test chamber and manometer as shown in Figure 7-9. (If a
test chamber is not available, an adult cuff wrapped around a towel may be
substituted to perform the pressure calibration.)
b. Highlight the Pressure Calibration Test Option for the NIBP Diagnostics Menu and
press the SELECT key. The NIBP Diagnostics Menu is covered by the Pressure
Calibration Menu. This menu contains three items: Low Range Calibration, Mid
Range Calibration, and High Range Calibration.
c. Highlight one of the options and press the SELECT key to start the test.
The dummy cuff/test chamber (cuff) will inflate approximately to the target pressure
(50 mmHg for low, 150 mmHg for mid, and 250 mmHg for high). During the test
the pressure will be displayed in the pressure window and the message “Press
DEFLATE to End Test” will be displayed. After the target pressure is reached, the
pump will turn off and the pressure will be held until the user presses the DEFLATE
key.
d. Compare the pressure window display on the unit under test with the reading on the
manometer for each of the pressure ranges. If the readings do not match, adjust VR1
on the NIBP Control Board. Adjust the calibration tolerance as listed below.
Calibration Specification
+/-3 mmHg - Low Range
+/-3 mmHg - Mid Range
+/4 mmHg - High Range
NOTE: The next two items (Error Journal and Exception Stack
Frame) are not intended for interpretation in the field. There
are hundreds of different messages which could be
recorded, and the messages vary with software revision.
Also, not all recorded messages indicate an error. If you
suspect a problem with the unit, the error journal and
exception stack frame should be printed out to the recorder
(if installed) and forwarded to a Datascope Service
Representative or Datascope Technical Support department.

7.5.2 Error Journal

When this diagnostic is selected, the service menu will be replaced by a textual display of all
errors recorded by the monitor. All errors will be automatically printed out on the recorder as
they are displayed on the screen, provided the unit is equipped with a recorder. The DOWN
ARROW key causes the display to clear, and the next page of messages to be displayed.
Continue to press the DOWN ARROW key until the message “Journal Empty” is displayed.
NOTE: There is no buffering of the error journal messages,

therefore, once an error message is displayed, it will be lost
if the DOWN ARROW or END key is depressed.
7.5.3 Exception Stack Frame

When this diagnostic is selected, the Service Menu will be replaced by a textual display of
information pertaining to the main processor’s exception stack frame. This information is
useful in determining where a bus or address error occurred, and includes information such
as program counter value at the time of the exception and the offending address.
7.5.4 Communication Test

When this test is selected, the Main Service Menu is covered by the Communication Test
Menu, which offers three different diagnostic tests as shown in Figure 7-10.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Error Journal
Front End Communication Test
External Communication Test
Communications
NIBP Communication Test
Recorder
Voltlage
Display
Keyboard
SpO2

FIGURE 7-7 Communication Test Menu
7.5.4.1 Front End Communication Test

When this test item is selected, the following tests and test results are executed and displayed
as follows:

1. Internal Loop Test

a. Highlight the Front End Communication Test and press the SELECT key to start the
test.
The results of the power up internal loop test for the front end communication
channel on the CPU Board are displayed. This test consists of putting the front end
communication channel into a loop mode and transmitting data, and verifying that
the correct data is read back.
Internal Loop Test Specification
Pass When data is read back correctly on first attempt.
Intermittent When first attempt fails, test is repeated and data is

read back correctly on second attempt.
Failed When data is not received correctly on the second

attempt.
The communication channel on the Front End Board is placed in the echo mode and a test is
run which sends an ASCII character to the Front End, and verifies that the character echoed
back is the same character which was sent. The test is repeated for the entire ascii character
set.
Echo Test Specification
Pass When every character is echoes back correctly

Intermittent When some character, but not all, are echoed
back correctly.
Failed When every character is echoed back incorrectly
b. Press the RECORD key to obtain a printout of the test results.

c. Press the END key to return to the Communications Menu.
7.5.4.2 External Communication Test

1. Jumper pins 2 and 3 together on optional J1 interface connector.
2. Highlight the External Communication Test and press the SELECT key to start the test. The
following tests are executed.
Internal Loop Test
The results of the power up Internal Loop Test for the external communication channel on the
CPU Board are displayed. This test consists of putting the external communication channel
into the loop mode and transmitting data, and verifying that the correct data is read back.

External Loop Test
Data is transmitted to the external communication channel while in the normal operation
mode. Since pins 2 to 3 are shorted, the data is transferred back for reading and
verification.
External Communication Test Specification
Pass When every character is echoed back correctly
Failed When any character is echoed back incorrectly
3. Press the RECORD key to obtain a printout of the test results.

4. Press the END key to return to the Communications Menu.
7.5.4.3 NIBP Communication Test

Highlight the NIBP Communication Test and press the SELECT key to start the test. The
following test is executed.
Internal Loop Test
The results of the power up internal loop test for the NIBP communication channel on the CPU
Board are displayed. The test consists of putting the NIBP communication channel into loop
mode and transmitting data, and verifying that the correct data is read back.

NIBP Communication Test Specification
Pass When every character is echoed back correctly
Failed When any character is echoes back incorrectly
a. Press the RECORD key to obtain a printout of the test results.

b. Press the END key to return to the Communication Menu.
7.5.5 Recorder
1. Highlight the Recorder Test from the Main Service Menu and press the SELECT key to
start the test.
When this test is selected a recorder request is sent to the recorder, causing it to print out
a test pattern as shown in Figure 7-11.
7.5.6 Voltage Test

When this test is selected the external DC power input voltage or the battery voltage is
continuously displayed.
7.5.6.1 External Voltage

a. Connect the external DC Power Supply.
b. Highlight the Voltage Test from the Main Service Menu and press the SELECT key to
start the test.
c. The display will continuously update the external power supply’s output voltage.
External Voltage Specification

15.6 - 17.6 Volts
7.5.6.2 Battery Voltage

a. Confirm that batteries are installed.
b. Disconnect the external DC Power Supply.
c. Highlight the Voltage Test from the Main Service Menu and press the SELECT key to
start the test.
d. The display will continuously update the battery voltage.
Battery Voltage Specification

12 V DC nominal
Low Battery Warning Voltage < 11.29V +/- .4V (Warning Beep Tone Starts)
System Shutdown < 10.69 +/- .3V
e. Press the END key to return to the Main Diagnostics Menu.
7.5.7 Display Test

When this test is selected the Main Service Menu is covered by the Display Tests Menu,
which offers a choice of two different diagnostic tests.

7.5.7.1 Pixel Test (5L, LT, XG - EL)

This test will display various patterns dependant upon the version of unit and software
installed.
Pattern Description Display Unit
5L, LT XG
All pixls are "ON" in the left side of the

1 display area.
All Pixels are "OFF" on the right side of X
the display area.
All pixels are "OFF" in the left side of the

2
display area. X
All Pixels are "ON" on the right side of
the display area.
3
All pixels are "ON" for the entire display
X
All pixels are "ON" in 1/4 of the display

4
area. Pressing the Select key will move the X X
active pixels to the next quadrant.
a. Highlight the Pixel Test from the Display Tests Menu and press the SELECT key to start
the test.
b. Pressing the SELECT key advances to the next available pattern.
c. Press the END key (5L, LT), EXIT key (XG) to return to the Display Tests Menu.
NOTE: Pattern #4 will appear when version “Y” software or higher

is installed.

7.5.7.2 Pixel Test (XG - Color LCD)

This test will display three different patterns as described below:
PATTERN DESCRIPTION
1 All pixels in color white.
2 All pixels in color green.
Green
3 All pixels in color red.
Red
7.5.7.3 Video Controller Test

If no display is present in the operating mode or during the pixel test, but the unit appears to
be functioning, (beep tone functions for the “R” wave, NIBP pump starts, etc.) there could be
a problem with either the CPU Board or the Display Assembly. A pixel pattern consisting of
vertical bars shown on the display will appear when the test is active. This will produce a
square wave output on the four bits (LCD0-3) driving the video controller which can help
identify a faulty CPU Board.

Datascope Passport Datascope Passport
OR
CH1 CH1
U30-16 U30-16
CH2 CH2
U30-9,7,5,3 U30-9,7,5,3
2V/DIV 10u SEC/DIV Expanded View .5u SEC/DIV
FIGURE 7-8 Video Controller Test
a. Highlight the Video Controller Test from the Display Tests Menu and press the SELECT
key to start the test. The vertical bars will either fill the entire screen or half the screen
dependant upon the version of software installed.
b. Connect an oscilloscope, channel 1 to U30 pin 16 and channel 2 to U30 pin 9 of
the CPU board. Set the scope for 10usec/div, sync on channel 1. The waveforms
are shown in Figure 7-12.
c. Confirm that the correct signals are present on the four bits LCD0-3 as shown in
Figure 7-12.
d. If the above signals are not present, disconnect the display cable J68. If the signals
are now present the display is possibly loading the signals, otherwise the CPU Board
is possibly defective.
e. Press the END key (5L, LT), EXIT key (XG) to return to the Display Tests Menu.
7.5.8 Keyboard Test

a. When this menu option is selected the unit performs a test on the front panel touch
switches by displaying the name of the key which was pressed.
b. Highlight the Keyboard Test from the Main Diagnostic Test Menu and press the
SELECT key to start the test.
c. A blank key name window will appear on the display.
d. Whenever a key is pressed the name of the key will be displayed in the key name
window.
e. Exercise each key to verify correct operation.
f. Press the END key for three seconds to exit test and return to the Main Diagnostic
Menu.

7.5.9 SpO2 Diagnostics (Datascope SpO2 Installed)

When this diagnostic is selected the Main Menu will be covered by the SpO2 Diagnostic
Menu which offers four different choices as shown in Figure 7-13. These tests verify the sub-
system of the SpO2 module as well as the accuracy of the selected SpO2 sensor.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Error JournalTest
Accuracy
Sensor Test
Communications
DAC Test
Recorder
Shared RAM Test
Voltlage
Display
Keyboard
SpO2

FIGURE 7-9 Main Diagnostics Menu
7.5.9.1 Accuracy Test

The purpose of this test is to verify that the SpO2 Board performs accurately with any
selected SpO2 sensor. The test sends the infrared light output signal through both the red and
infrared channels. This produces a 1:1 ratio which corresponds to an SpO2 value of 85%.
The successful completion of this test signifies that the SpO2 Board can transmit and receive
light through the monitored sight, processing unit can successfully display the parameters. A
display of 85% means that the SpO2 Board can accurately display SpO2 over the entire
monitoring range.
a. Highlight the Accuracy Test from the SpO2 Diagnostic Menu and press the SELECT
key to start the test.
b. Shortly after the sensor is placed on a finger the SpO2 value is displayed along with
the operator’s pulse rate.
Accuracy Test Specification

% SpO2 = 85%
Press the RECORD key to obtain a printout of the test results.

c. Press the END key to return to the SpO2 Test.

7.5.9.2 DAC Test

The purpose of this test is to verify the performance of the AC on the SpO2 Board.
a. Connect an oscilloscope to J24 pin 5 of the SpO2 Board. The signal should appear
as shown in Figure 7-14. Make sure the saw signal is smooth and does not jump or
drop suddenly which would indicate a fault DAC bit.
b. Press the END key to return to the SpO2 Test Menu.
CH1
J24 pin 5
2V/DIV 5 sec/DIV
FIGURE 7-10 DAC Waveform
7.5.9.3 Shared RAM Test

When this diagnostic is selected the SpO2 menu will be covered by the Shared RAM Test
Menu which offers a choice of three different SpO2 RAM Test;Memory Test 1 (00H,FFH),
Memory Test 2 (Walking Ones), and Memory Test 3 (Address Test).
NOTE: This test erases the normal operating code that was
downloaded to the shared RAM that enables the other SpO2
tests. After performing any of the memory tests the unit
must re-power the Run, the Accuracy, Sensor, or DAC tests.
Memory Test 1 (Basic RAM Test): The main processor will perform the basic write/read test
to each memory location with data pattern 0 and 0xFF to verify the integrity of the RAM.
Memory Test 2 (Databus Test): The main processor will write a bit pattern of walking one’s
(8-bit) to each memory location and read it back to verify that the data bus is not cross
talking.

Power-Up Verification Calibration
Memory Test 3 (Address Test): The main processor will write the entire memory address to
their corresponding memory location, then read them back to verify that the address bus is
not cross taking.
a. Highlight one of the memory test from the SpO2 shared RAM test menu and press
the SELECT key to start the test.
b. Each test is continuously performed until the END key is pressed. The completion
pass number is constantly updated on the display. The test is halted when a failure
occurs and address and write/read data patterns are displayed.
d. Press the END key to return to halt the test.
7.5.10 SpO2 Diagnostics (Nellcor SpO2 Installed)

The purpose of this test is for factory testing only. This test is not intended for field use.
7.5.11 SpO2 Diagnostics (Masimo SpO2 Installed)

When this diagnostic is selected, the service menu will be replaced by a textual display of all
SpO2 errors recorded by the monitor. All errors will be automatically printed out on the
recorder as they are displayed on the screen, provided the unit is equipped with a recorder.
The DOWN ARROW key causes the display to clear, and the next page of messages to be
displayed. Continue to press the DOWN ARROW key unitl the message “Journal Empty” is
displayed.
NOTE: There is no buffering of the error journal messages,

therefore once an error message is displayed, it will be lost
if the DOWN ARROW or END key is depressed.
The Masimo Diagnostic Journal is not intended for interpretation in the field. There are
hundreds of different messages which could be recorded, and the messages vary with
software revision. Also, not all recorded messages indicate an error. If you suspect a problem
with the unit, the Masimo Diagnostic Journal should be printed out to the recorder (if
installed) and forwarded to a Datascope Service Representative or Datascope Technical
Support department.
7.6 Power-Up Verification

1. Plug the Power Supply Module into an appropriate power source and connect the D.C.
plug into the right side panel of the Passport.
2. Turn on the Passport. Check for the following to occur:
• The LCD display is bright blue for approximately 5-8 seconds, followed by the
message:
Diagnostic in Progress
Selftest Complete
• At the end of the download, verify unit sets up display screens for signal inputs.
NOTE: If no display is observed when unit is powered up, adjust

front panel “contrast ” control.

Calibration Initial Set-Up
3. Verify proper range of the front panel contrast control:

• When the contrast is positioned full up, the LCD display should be completely white.
• When the contrast is positioned full down, the LCD display should be completely blue.
• Set contrast for optimum visibility.
4. Check the upper Left side of the LCD display for the correct time and date. If incorrect,
follow the steps below top enter the user configuration menu.
• Turn PASSPORT off, and then back on.
• At the moment the LCD displays the message “Selftest Complete”, depress and hold
the “FREEZE” KEY. The LCD displays the USER CONFIGURATION menu.
• Use the SETUP UP ARROW/DOWN ARROW keys to select options, then press select.
Follow the on screen directions to change the date, time and trend setup as required.
Exit the configuration menu by pressing and holding the END key for three seconds.
7.7 Initial Set-Up

1. Using a patient simulator, connect the ECG, IBP1, IBP2 and temperature cables to the
left side panel. Set the ECG simulator for 60 bpm, 1mv, QRS signal.
2. Setup the Passport as follows:
• Adult mode (Patient option)
• Lead 1
• ECG size to 1.0cm/mv.
• Speed to 50mm/sec (Setup option)
• Waveform 2 to Cascade. (Setup Option)
7.8 ECG Tests

1. Observe that the trace display sweeps across the Waveform 1 screen in two seconds.
There should be two complete ECG cycles. The same display and timing should be seen
in the Waveform 2 screen.

ECG Tests Calibration
2. Check the following sweep speeds for appropriate displays:
12.5mm/sec - 8 second sweep/window

5.0mm/sec - 4 second sweep/window
3. Disconnect one ECG lead at a time (RA, RL, LL, LA, and C) from the simulator and
observe that the ECG signal changes to a flat line and the message “LEAD OFF: (RA, RL,
LL, LA, and C)” appears on the EL display.
4. Set ECG simulator to SHORT LEADS. Verify noise does not exceed one pixel resolution.
5. Set ECG simulator to Ventricular Pacer (waveform = VP). Verify a pacer pulse is
displayed before the R wave of the QRS signal.
6. Set ECG simulator to 5 HZ , 1mv sine wave.
The Passport should be set to lead 1 and size to 1cm/mv.
7. Press the FREEZE key and verify that the signal displayed on the LCD is 10 mm (p-p) +/
- 1 mm, with an overall trace length of 10 cm +/- 2mm.
8. Adjust the output amplitude of the ECG simulator and the Passport’s size as shown
below and verify the display for each setting.
INPUT AMPLITUDE SIZE SETTING DISPLAY (P-P)

2mv .025 cm/mv 5 mm (+/- 1 mm)
2mv 0.5 cm.mv 10 mm (+/- 1 mm)
1mv 1.0 cm/mv 10 mm (+/- 1 mm)
1mv 2.0 cm/mv 20 mm (+/- 2 mm)
1mv 3.0 cm/mv 30 mm (+/- 3 mm)
0.25mv 4.0 cm/mv 10 mm (+/- 1 mm)
9. Set the ECG simulator to ECG QRS waveform. Set rate to 252 bpm.
Verify RATE display is 252 +/- 8 bpm.

Decease the RATE to 30 bpm and allow signal to stabilize (May take 30 seconds to
display rate). Verify RATE display is 30 bpm +/- 3 bpm.
10. Set simulator to 1mv ECG QRS signal , rate to 60 bpm.
Set the Passport to PRINT ON ALARM, install paper in recorder and set LO HR ALARM
to 50 bpm and HI HR ALARM to 120 bpm.
Increase ECG HR to 125 bpm and verify the following:

• The HI ALARM violates with audio tone and RED LED active.
• The recorder (if installed) prints a strip showing the ECG information
• Measure the GRID width and verify overall width of 40 mm +/-2 mm.
• Measure the GRID length and verify overall length of 40 cm +/- 2 cm. (There should be
16 one second tic marks present)
Mute the alarm by pressing the MUTE key.
• Verify that the “ALARM MUTE” symbol is displayed next to HR display on the LCD display
and the alarm is silent.
Decrease the ECG HR to 45 bpm. The ALARM should sound. Then set the ECG HR to 60
bpm and verify the alarm condition is canceled.

Calibration IBP1 and IBP2 Verification
Press the TREND/RETURN key and examine the trend data. The high heart rate value should
be in reverse video indicating the high HR alarm was violated.
7.9 IBP1 and IBP2 Verification

1. Set the simulator to 0 mmHg for both IBP1 and IBP2.
Set the Passport to display IBP 1 in WINDOW 2 and IBP 2 in WINDOW 3 using the
SETUP menu. Set the pressure scale to 300 mmHg for both IBP 1 and 2.
2. Zero IBP 1 by pressing the ZERO 1 key. Verify that the systolic, diastolic, and mean
display changes from “dashed lines” to zero +/- 1 mmHg within 2 seconds and the
“TRANSDUCER NOT ZEROED” message is removed. Zero IBP 2 and verify proper
operation.
3. Apply 50, 150 and 300 mmHg and verify that the following parameters SYS/MEAN/
DIA agree.
Applied Pressure Readout

50 mmHg 48 - 52
150 mmHg 147 - 153
300 mmHg 294 - 306
4. Apply a 120/80 mmHg signal to IBP 1 and 60/20 mmHg to IBP 2.
Verify that the reading in the IBP 1 window is 120/80 mmHg +/- 3 mmHg and 60/20
mmHg +/- 2 mmHg in the IBP 2 window. Verify the correct waveforms are displayed on
the LCD display.
7.10 Temperature Verification

1. Set the simulator to 37º C, 700 series probe.
2. Verify that the temperature displays is 37.0º +/-0.3.
3. Set the simulator to 37º C, 400 series probe.
4. Verify that the temperature displays is 37.0º +/-0.3.
NOTE: If temperature exceeds 45ºC or is below 0ºC, the

temperature display goes to “dashed lines”.

SpO2 Verification Calibration
7.11 SpO2 Verification

1. Set the Passport to display the PLETH waveform in window 3 and HR source to AUTO.
2. Verify the Passport is displaying the message “NO SpO2 SENSOR”.
3. Connect the SpO2 sensor to the left side panel connector.
4. Verify the message changes to “SpO2 SENSOR OFF” and the red LED in the probe is
illuminated.
5. Apply sensor to finger.
6. Verify window 3 displays the pleth waveform, the SpO2 % window displays a valid
reading ,the ECG HR is replaced by the SpO2 HR and a beep tone is present for the
SpO2 HR.
7.12 NIBP Verification

1. Connect the cuff to the left side panel luer connector and set PATIENT SIZE to ADULT.
2. Apply cuff and press the START key.
• Verify the pump motor starts and the cuff begins to inflate.
• Verify that the MEASURING CUFF window begins to indicate a pressure increase as
the cuff begins to inflate.
• Verify the pump stops when the MEASURING CUFF window reads180 mmHg +/-10
mmHg. (When initial cuff pressure is set to 180 mmHg).
• The cuff should begin to deflate and in about 20 seconds should display SYS/DIA/
MEAN reading in the NIBP window.
7.13 Mainstream CO2 Adapter Calibration

airway adapters for mainstream CO2 operation.
For example: if switching from using a re-usable adult to a neonatal or neonatal to a re-
usable adult adapter, a calibration is needed (not if switching from a re-usable adult adapter
to another re-usable adult adapter). Adapter calibration should also be performed if the
message “Check Adapter” displays.
NOTE: In order to perform an accurate adapter calibration, the

1. Place the sensor and airway adapter away from all sources of CO2 (including the
patient’s and your own exhaled breath, and ventilator exhaust valves).
2. Choose Start Adapter Cal - Yes from the CO2 menu. (See “Use of Menus” on
page 109.)

message displays and then an “Adapter Cal Failure”
message displays. Remove the source of CO2 and repeat the
calibration.

Calibration Mainstream CO2 Adapter Calibration
7.13.1 Mainstream CO2 Sensor Calibration Verification

2. Place the Capnostat® sensor onto the reference cell labeled REF.
o
R
E
F
3. The “Sensor on Reference Cell” message is displayed and the reference value is
7.13.2 Mainstream CO2 Sensor Calibration


NOTE: In order to perform an accurate Sensor calibration, the

1. Verify the Passport XG is turned on and the Capnostat® is plugged in and warmed-up.

Sidestream Pump Calibration Calibration

value is displayed.
o
R
E
F
7.14 Sidestream Pump Calibration

Pump calibration is necessary when the tubing configuration or sampling cell airway adapter
is changed. This calibration enables the unit to determine when an occlusion is present in the
tubing.
To perform a pump calibration:
Sensor Warming Up” message is displayed. The pump calibration cannot be performed
until the “CO2: Sensor Warming Up” message disappears.
2. Press the CO2 PUMP key (12). A “Warning” message displays. Ensure that the sampling
tubing is correctly connected and that the nasal cannula is clear of all sources of CO2
(including the patient’s and your own exhaled breath, and ventilator exhaust valves).
Press SELECT to turn the sampling pump on and to initiate the calibration.
3. The “CO2: Pump Cal in Progress” and “CO2: Pump On” messages alternately display.
When the pump calibration is complete, the message “CO2: Pump Cal Complete”
displays and then the “CO2: Pump On” message displays. The “CO2: Pump On”
message will continue to display as long as the pump is on. See “CO2 Messages (only
units equipped with Capnostat CO2)” on page 60 for additional CO2 messages.

time, unless the message “Check Adapter” displays.
NOTE: If the monitor detects changing CO2 levels (breaths) during a

pump calibration, a “Breaths Detected ... Retry” message
displays, and then a “Pump Cal Failure” message will
display. Remove the source of CO2 and repeat the
calibration.

Calibration Sidestream Pump Calibration
7.14.1 Sidestream CO2 Pump Verification / Calibration Procedure

This test is to verify the proper flow rate of the Sidestream CO2 Pump.
1. Turn power switch to the on position and wait for the unit to power up in the normal
operating mode.
2. Assemble the CO2 Sidestream pump calibration parts as shown in Figure 7-13 and
attach to the Passport monitor.
3. Verify zero cc/min, ±1 cc/min on flow meter before turning the CO2 pump on. Press the
CO2 pump key and measure the flow rate of the pump. Allow at least two minutes for
the flow meter to settle before any adjustment is made.
4. Adjust VR2 on the CO2 Control Module P/N 0670-00-0118 to achieve a flow rate of
180 cc/min, ±20 cc/min. Refer to Figure 7-14.
Occlusion Test:
1. To simulate an occlusion, take a pair of Hemostats and crimp the tubing at the intake
port. An OCCLUSION message should appear in the lower left window.
REQUIRED PARTS FOR SIDESTREAM CO2 PUMP CALIBRATION
ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

1 0103-00-0443-01 Airway Adapter with Tubing
2 0008-00-0259 Nafion Tubing Assembly
3 0683-00-0405-11 Capillary Line 5 Feet
4 0103-00-0445-01 Filter
1 3
TOPASSPORT PUMPINPUT
FLOW
FIGURE 7-13 Sidestream CO2 Pump Calibration Kit

Sidestream Pump Calibration Calibration
Sidestream CO2 Control Module

IC6
VR1
J103
J202
J201
VR2
IC3
IC10
IC12
IC1
Y1
IC2
IC13 IC11
IC5
IC7 IC9
IC4
Y2
Adjust VR2 to 180 cc/min +/- 20 cc/min
FIGURE 7-14 Sidestream CO2 Control Module
7.14.2 Sidestream Adapter Calibration

Performing a Pump Calibration automatically calibrates the adapter. An Adapter Calibration
is necessary whenever the sampling cell airway adapter is replaced or when the “Check
Adapter” message displays.
Sensor Warming Up” message is displayed. The adapter calibration cannot be
2. Ensure the nasal cannula is away from all sources of CO2 (including the patient’s and
your own exhaled breath, and ventilator exhaust valves).
3. Choose Start Adapter Cal - Yes from the CO2 menu. (See “Use of Menus” on
page 109.)

a adapter calibration, a “Breaths Detected ... Retry”
the calibration.

Calibration Sidestream Pump Calibration
7.14.3 Sidestream CO2 Sensor Calibration Verification
o
R
E
F
2. Place the Capnostat® sensor onto the reference cell. The reference cell is labeled REF.
The sensor cable should face away from the Passport.
7.14.4 Sidestream CO2 Sensor Calibration


Sensor Warming Up” message is displayed. The sensor calibration cannot be

Battery Operation Verification Calibration

value is displayed.
o
R
E
F
7.15 Battery Operation Verification

1. Insure that the Power Supply Module is connected to an appropriate power source and
that the D.C. plug is connected to the D.C Power Input of the Passport.
2. If batteries are installed, remove the batteries.
3. Turn on the Passport and verify unit powers up correctly.
4. Install two batteries on the left side of the unit
5. Remove the D.C. power cable from the right side panel.
- Verify that unit operation is not interrupted.
6. Remove one of the batteries and verify unit continues to operate.
7. Install the battery that was removed in the previous step and remove the other battery.
Unit should continue to operate without interruption.
7.16 Leakage Current Test

NOTE: The Passport Monitor is not considered double insulated
because it has provisions for grounding via the three
conductor line cord to U-blade ground through the external
supply. The external supply is considered a recognized/
certified component by the UL/CSA and is part of the
monitor. However, the monitor does not have any accessible
exposed conductive metal. The U-blade connection is not
carried through the external supply into the monitor itself,
the DC voltage is only provided. NFPA 99 section 7-5.1.3.2
does not apply because no metal on the monitor can
become line energized. The Passport was evaluated with
the external supply by UL and CSA with no grounding
impedance verification. If you check U-blade resistance, the
safety analyzer will read “open”.

Calibration Leakage Current Test
A. Source Current, Chassis Case to Ground Leakage (Test 1 on Model 431 Dempsey).
1. Connect the ground wire from the safety analyzer to the SpO2 ground ring.
2. Connect the power module to the Passport’s DC input.
3. Perform the test under the following conditions, with the Passport ON:
a. Case Grounded:
1. Polarity Normal
2. Polarity Normal with open neutral
b. Case Ungrounded
1. Polarity Normal
2. Polarity Normal with open neutral
3. Reverse Polarity
4. Verify the current reading for any test is less then 100uA.
C. Lead to Ground - Sink Current patient circuit (Test V on Model 431 Dempsey; patient
leakage with line voltage on leads)
1. Connect the ground wire from the safety analyzer to the SpO2 ground ring.
2. Connect the ECG cable from the safety analyzer to the Passport.
3. Connect the power module to the Passport’s DC input.
4. On the Safety Analyzer depress the “APPLY 115VAC” button and note the reading.
5. Repeat the test for normal and open ground and reverse polarity combinations. Verify
the current reading for any test is less then 20uA.

Cosmetic Checks Calibration
7.17 Cosmetic Checks

1. Clean the instrument enclosure with a mild soap and water solution or ammoniated
window cleaner. Do not apply large amounts of liquid; do not use abrasive cleaning
agents or organic solvents.
Check unit for any obvious signs of physical damage, (e.g., bent/cracked frames or
scratches) and replace as required.
2. The front panel should be cleaned carefully in order to prevent scratches. Dust, dirt
particles, finger-prints and stains may be removed by using a soft cloth. Do not wipe a
dry screen. Do not use alcohol or chlorinated hydrocarbon solvents. Inspect the front
panel for scratches and other physical damage, replace if required.
3. Check all panel hardware for looseness and panel clearance.
4. Check line cord for wear, damage and proper strain relief.
5. Check all graphics and labeling for wear and scratches.
7.18 Special Options Menu

To enter the Special Options Menu:
1. Power the unit on and wait for the normal power up procedure to be completed.
2. Once in the operating mode press and hold the HIDDEN KEY located as follows:
a. Between the FREEZE and DEFLATE keys on all 3L/5L/LT units
b. Between the EXIT and SIZE keys on XG units with Rev Y.04 software
c. The exit key on XG units with Rev TB or higher software
Release the HIDDEN KEY when the Special Options Menu appears on screen.
SPECIAL OPTIONS
Screen Blank: OFF
Notch Filter: Enabled
ESU Filter: AUTO
Pump Status: 0x2 0000000
Pump Current: 0.0 mA
Bar. Press: 770 mmHg
Choices: ON, OFF
= Adjust value EXIT = quit
SELECT = Enter/move
FIGURE 7-17 Special Options Menu
Screen Blank:
1. The first menu that appears in reverse graphics is the Blank Screen Menu. Press the UP
or DOWN arrow key to turn the Blank Screen Menu on or off. Press the Select key to
choose the selection. when the Blank Screen Menu is turned on, the display will be blank
until a key is pressed or power is cycled.

Calibration Special Options Menu
Notch Filter:
1. Press the Select key to get to the Notch Filter menu. Press the UP or DOWN key to
enable or disable the Notch Filter. when the Notch Filter is disabled the 50 hz or 60 hz
frequency filter is not active.
ESU Filter:
1. Press the Select key to get to the ESU Filter Menu. Press the UP or DOWN key to disable
the ESU Filter or place the filter in the Auto mode. When the ESU Filter is disabled the
Electrosurgical Unit filter is not active.
Pump Status (XG Sidestream units only):
1. This menu is non-selectable. Pump Status displays the status of the Sidestream CO2 in
Bytecode.
NOTE: Pump status is not intended for interpretation in the field. If

a problem is suspected with CO2 pump operation, copy the
pump status bytecode and forward to Datascope Technical
Support Department.
Pump Current (XG Sidestream units only):
1. This menu is non-selectable. Pump Current displays the amount of current drawn by the
Sidestream CO2 pump assembly when activated.
Barometric Pressure (XG Sidestream units only):
1. This menu is non-selectable. Barometric Pressure is displayed in mmHg’s and is updated

as per real time pressure.

Special Options Menu Calibration

8.0 Preventive Maintenance
Contents of this Chapter ................................................................... Page

8.1 Preventive Maintenance Schedule ............................................. 8-1
8.2 Mechanical / Physical / Visual Inspection ................................. 8-1
8.3 Preventive Maintenance Kit - Install Kit Annually ...................... 8-1
8.4 Perform Verification and NIBP Calibration - Annually ................ 8-2
8.5 Perform Verification and CO2 Pump Calibration - Annually ....... 8-2
8.6 User Preventive Maintenance Introduction ................................ 8-2
8.1 Preventive Maintenance Schedule

The following is a list of activities required for periodic maintenance of the Passport monitor.
The physical inspections, replacements of consumable items and performance checks are
suggested to be performed at the recommended intervals stated below. Datascope is not
responsible for component failure or loss resulting from the use of stated consumable items
beyond their recommended replacement interval.
8.2 Mechanical / Physical / Visual Inspection

Perform At Six Month Intervals
Suggested Inspections for Wear and Abuse:
1. Outercase, AC and DC Line Cords, External Power Supply, Rolling Stands, Wall
Mounts.
2. Interface Cables (Visa, Defib. Sync, Interpreter, External Power Supply, Remote Color
Display).
3. Patient Interface Connections (ECG, IBP, Temp, SpO2, CO2, NIBP).
8.3 Preventive Maintenance Kit - Install Kit Annually

Passport P/M Kit - P/N 0040-00-0130 (Installation Instructions Included).

Perform Verification and NIBP Calibration - Annually Preventive Maintenance
8.4 Perform Verification and NIBP Calibration - Annually

1. Perform test as outlined in “Power-Up Verification” on page 7-20 through “Cosmetic
Checks” on page 7-32.
2. Perform NIBP calibration as described in “Diagnostics and Calibration Procedure” on
page 7-5.
8.5 Perform Verification and CO2 Pump Calibration -

Annually
Perform test as outlined in “Sidestream CO2 Pump Verification / Calibration Procedure” on
page 7-27.
8.6 User Preventive Maintenance Introduction

This section of the manual outlines routine maintenance that should be performed by the user.
The Passport XG Monitor is designed for stable operation over long periods of time and
under normal circumstances should not require technical maintenance beyond that described
in this section. However, it is recommended that routine maintenance calibration and safety
checks be performed at least once a year, or more often as required by local statutory or
hospital administration practice.
8.6.1 Care and Cleaning of Monitor

The monitor enclosure may be cleaned with a mild soap and water solution or ammoniated
window cleaner. Apply cleaning solution to the cloth, not directly onto the monitor. DO NOT
apply large amounts of liquid. DO NOT use abrasive cleaning agents or organic solvents.
WARNING: Do not clean the monitor while it is on and/or plugged in.
To prevent scratches on the front panel display screens, blow or carefully brush dust and dirt
particles with a soft sponge moistened with cleaner solution; or a fine, soft-hair brush. DO
NOT use abrasive cleaning materials. Fingerprints and stains may be removed by using a
liquid lens cleaner and a soft cloth. DO NOT wipe a dry screen or use alcohol or chlorinated
hydrocarbon solvents.
8.6.2 Care and Cleaning of Datascope Flexisensors and Datasensors

NOTE: If your unit is equipped with Nellcor* SpO2 or Masimo*
SpO2, refer to sections 1.3.9 (Nellcor) or 1.3.10 (Masimo)
and/or the individual instruction sheets that are packaged
with each sensor.

Preventive Maintenance User Preventive Maintenance Introduction
• Daily, check the sensors and cables for signs of damage. Replace as required.
• Check for proper operation of the spring mechanism on the DATASENSOR.
• The sensors should be cleaned before and after each patient’s use.
• Clean and disinfect the sensors. Wipe the patient contact area using a soft cloth with mild
soap and water solution or isopropyl alcohol. Hydrogen peroxide can be used to remove
dried blood on all accessible surfaces.
• Let the sensor completely dry before using.
CAUTION: When cleaning sensors do not use excessive amounts of

liquid. Wipe the sensor surface with a soft cloth, dampened
with the cleaning solution.
8.6.3 Cleaning CO2 Sensors and Adapters

CO2 Sensor:
The Sensor, Calibrator and Cable Assembly can be damp wiped with soapy water, Cidex,
Sproiciden, 70% isopropyl alcohol or a 10% bleach solution. It should then be wiped dry
with a soft cloth. Immersion into any liquid bath is not recommended. ETO and steam
autoclaving is not recommended.
Adult and Neonate Reusable Adapters:

These adapters can be disinfected by soaking in any of the above mentioned solutions. In
addition, they can be ETO and steam autoclave sterilized following the sterilizer
manufactures’ recommended procedures.
8.6.4 Cleaning External CO2 Sampling Components

• The Nasal Sampling Cannulas are single patient use only.
• The Sampling Airway Adapter with tubing may be cleaned by rinsing in a warm soapy
solution, followed by soaking in a liquid disinfectant. It should then be rinsed off with
sterile water and dried.
8.6.5 Cleaning Internal CO2 Sampling Components

The CO2 Sampling Components should be cleaned on a yearly basis or if the filter is
clogged.
Equipment Needed:
60 cc Syringe 0103-00-0026
Tubing (2) 4" BY 1/8" ID 0103-00-0450
Slip type Luer Fitting 0103-00-0451
1/8" Barb Connector 0103-00-0454-02
Distilled Water
Sodium Hypochlorite (5.25% by weight)
WARNING: Sidestream waste material and CO2 filter should be treated

as biohazard material. It is recommended that gloves be
worn while performing this procedure.
1. Shut off the monitor and disconnect the external power supply.

User Preventive Maintenance Introduction Preventive Maintenance
2. Remove all tubing from the inlet and exhaust ports.

3. While taking precaution not to touch any liquid that may leak out, keep the unit in an
upright position and remove the CO2 filter cap from the CO2 housing (located on the
rear panel of the Passport).
4. Clean the CO2 housing with Sodium Hypochlorite and remove any sediments.After
cleaning, pull the old filter off the CO2 cap and screw the cap back onto the CO2
housing. Do not use a filter at this time.
5. Attach one 4" by 1/8" ID tubing using the 1/8" Barb Connector to the exhaust port and
place the other end of the tubing in an empty container located below the exhaust port.
6. Attach the other 4" by 1/8" ID tubing to a 60 cc syringe. On the opposite end of the
tubing use a slip type luer fitting and attach it to the inlet port on the side of the monitor.
7. Use light to moderate pressure on the syringe to flush 120 cc (two 60 cc intervals) of
sterilizing solution (Sodium Hypochlorite, 5.25% by weight) into the inlet of the monitor.
8. Apply light to moderate pressure on the syringe to flush another 60 cc of sterilizing
solution and leave the solution in the monitor for approximately 30 minutes.
9. Repeat step 7 with distilled water.
10. Repeat step 7 using air.
11. While taking precaution not to touch any liquid that may leak out remove the CO2 filter
cap from the CO2 housing, and repeat step 7 using air until all liquid within the monitor
is removed.
12. Place a new CO2 filter (P/N 0103-00-0452) into the CO2 filter housing (beveled end
first) and place the CO2 filter cap back on.
13. Remove the syringe and tubing from both the inlet and exhaust. Connect the external
power supply and turn on the monitor. Without any accessories attached to the inlet or
exhaust ports, turn on the CO2 pump. Let the pump run until no precipitation is felt out of
the exhaust.
8.6.6 Sterilization and Cleaning of Reusable Cuffs

Remove the latex bag from the cuff. The cuff and latex inflation bags may be cleaned with an
alcohol wipe, a disinfectant wipe, or by sponging with a damp cloth. Both may be sterilized
with commercially available disinfectant soaks.
CAUTION: Using dark colored soaks may stain the cuffs. Test a single
cuff to ensure that no damage will occur. ETO sterilization
may also be used.
Hand washing will enhance the service life of the cuff. Remove the latex bag and hand wash
the cuff in warm, soapy water; then rinse thoroughly. Allow the cuff to air dry, then insert the
latex inflation bag.
CAUTION: When ironing or pressing the cuffs, be aware that the

Velcro® fasteners can melt at temperatures above 325°F,
162°C.

Preventive Maintenance User Preventive Maintenance Introduction
8.6.7 Battery Replacement and Maintenance

Battery Replacement
1. Open battery compartment door, on left side of unit, by sliding the tab down.
2. Press the release button, located above the battery, to eject the battery. Slide out old
battery.
3. Slide in replacement battery until it clicks into place.
4. Close battery compartment door.
Battery Maintenance
Due to the self-discharge characteristics of this type of battery, it is imperative that it is
charged after 6 to 9 months of storage (or unit not in use). If not, permanent loss of capacity
may occur as a result of sulfation. Charge retention at 20oC is 6 months to 83%.
The batteries used in the Passport XG Monitor are of sealed lead acid construction. This
battery type may be subject to local regulations regarding disposal. At the end of the battery
life, dispose of the batteries in accordance with any local regulations.
8.6.8 Recorder Paper Replacement

The instructions below describe the replacement of recorder paper. Use only recommended
recorder paper, P/N 0083-00-0422. This ensures that the print quality is acceptable and
reduces print head wear.
1. Open recorder door by pressing the paper eject button (upper right corner with paper
roll icon on it).
NOTE: If the recorder’s door does not open completely, carefully

pull it until it is completely open.
2. Remove empty paper spool by pulling it out gently.

3. Insert new paper roll between the two rounded tabs of the paper holder with the
sensitive (shiny) side of the paper facing the print head at the top of the recorder (paper
feeding off of the spool from the bottom).
4. Unroll approximately 4 inches of paper.
5. Align the paper across the top of the metal bar.
6. Holding the paper in place, close recorder door.
7. To ensure that the paper is aligned properly and has not been pinched in the door, pull
the loose edge out a couple of inches. If the paper jams, open the door and return to
step 5.
8.6.9 Care and Storage of Thermal Chart Paper

Thermal Chart Paper is chemically treated and the permanency of a recording is affected by
storage and handling conditions. These conditions are:
• Ultraviolet Light
We recommend storing the recordings in a filing cabinet within a few days of printing. Long
term exposure to natural or artificial U.V. sources may be detrimental.

User Preventive Maintenance Introduction Preventive Maintenance
• Storage Temperature and Humidity

Keep the recordings in a cool and dry area for a longer lasting image. Extreme temperature
and humidity (above 80° F and 80% Humidity) should be avoided.
• Solvent Reactions
Do not store the recordings in plastic bags, acetate sheet protectors, and similar items made
from petroleum products. These products emit a small amount of vapor which will, over a
period of time, deteriorate the image on the chart paper.
• Adhesive Tape
Never place adhesive tape over recordings. The reaction between the adhesive compound
and the Chemical/Thermal paper can destroy the image within hours.
• Archives
We recommend that if long term archives are required, make a photocopy of the recordings
as back-up. Under normal office filing conditions the recordings should retain acceptable
image quality for about 5 years.

Mindray DS USA, Inc. • 800 MacArthur Boulevard • Mahwah, NJ 07430 • USA •
Dom. Customer Service: 1.800.288.2121 • Intl. Customer Service: +1.201.995.8000 •
Dom. Fax: 1.800.926.4275 • Intl. Fax: +1.201.995.8680 • www.mindray.com
Mindray Medical Netherlands B.V.• P.O. Box 26 • 3870 CA Hoevelaken • The Netherlands •
Tel: +31 33 25 44 911 • Fax: +31 33 25 37 621
Mindray (UK) Limited • 3 Percy Road • St. John’s Park • Huntingdon • Cambridgeshire PE29 6SZ •
United Kingdom • Tel: 01480 416840 • Fax: 01480 436588
Mindray Medical France SARL • Europarc Créteil •123, Chemin des Bassins •
94035 Créteil Cedex • France • Tel: (0)1.45.13.91.50 • Fax: (0)1.45.13.91.51
Mindray Medical Germany GmbH • Zwischen den Bächen 4 • 64625 Bensheim • Deutschland •
Tel: +49.6251.17524-0 • Fax: +49.6251.17524-20
Mindray Medical International Ltd. • 2813 Office Tower, Convention Plaza • No 1 Harbour Road •
Wanchai • Hong Kong • Tel: +852 2793 5596 • Fax: +852 2344 8824
Medstar Importação e Exportação Ltda • Av. Vereador José Diniz, 3300 • São Paulo, SP • CEP
04804-000 • Brazil • Tel: 55 11 2872-3385 • Fax: 55 11 2872-3385
0070-00-0420 Rev T April 13, 2011

Passport XG Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Passport XG Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Passport XG Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

0070-01-0420.indd 1 4/11/11 4:45 PM

0070-02-0420.indd 1 4/11/11 4:45 PM

Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 i

Recorder (optional) ............................................................................................................... 1 - 155

ii 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

Error Journal ........................................................................................................................ 7 - 11

Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 iii

This page intentionally left blank.

Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 iv

NOTE: In order to ensure the proper performance of your

Warnings, Precautions and Notes

A NOTE is provided when additional general information is applicable.

NOTE: Unauthorized servicing may void the remainder of the

WARNING: Ensure that the conductive parts of ECG electrodes do not

WARNING: Thoracic respiration measurement may interfere with some

Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 v

WARNING: When equipped with Nellcor® SpO2, use only Nellcor®

WARNING: Tissue damage or inaccurate measurements may be caused

WARNING: Excessive ambient light may cause inaccurate

WARNING: Inaccurate measurements may be caused by incorrect

WARNING: In certain situations in which perfusion and signal strength

WARNING: Insure that the conductive parts of ECG electrodes do not

WARNING: Many patients suffer from poor peripheral perfusion due to

vi 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

WARNING: If the sensor or patient cable is damaged in any way,

WARNING: Connection of the Passport’s exhaust port to the hospital’s

WARNING: In an intubated configuration, ensure all tubing connections

WARNING: Connection of the Gas Module exhaust port (50) to the

vii 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

CAUTION: Always attach all desired peripheral equipment prior to

CAUTION: Observe extreme caution on all patients (neonates,

Reports have been made of nerve injury occurring during

CAUTION: It is the users responsibility to confirm correct operation of

CAUTION: Vacuum (negative pressure) should not exceed 1 mmHg at

CAUTION: It is the users responsibility to confirm correct operation of

Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 viii

CAUTION: When cleaning sensors do not use excessive amounts of

CAUTION: When ironing or pressing the cuffs, be aware that the

ix 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

This page intentionally left blank.

x 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

Contents of this Chapter ..................................................Page

1.1 Introduction (5-Lead, 5L, LT)

Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 1-1

FUNCTIONS* STANDARD OPTIONAL STANDARD OPTIONAL

NOTE: Sections 1.2 and 1.3 are included as a review of instrument

1-2 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

1.2 Controls, Indicators and Connectors (5-Lead, 5L, LT)

1. p and q (Set-up) 8. ZERO 1 (IBP) (Optional 15. MUTE (Alarms)

PARAGRAPH CONTROL/DISPLAY PAGE

Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual 0070-00-0420 1-3

1.2.1 Front Panel

SET- UP ECG IBP NIBP ALARM S TRENDS

FIGURE 1-1 Front Panel Controls

1. p and q (UP and DOWN) (Set-Up)

1-4 0070-00-0420 Passport 5-Lead, 5L, LT, XG Service Manual

4. CENTRAL SILENCE (Optional)

8. ZERO 1 (IBP) (Optional)

9. ZERO 2 (IBP) (Optional)